OM50F42U

User Manual: 2018 Lexus LS 500H Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 528

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Pictorial index

Search by illustration

For safety
and security

Make sure to read through them
(Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)

Vehicle status
information and
indicators

Reading driving-related information
(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)

Before driving

Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving
(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)

Driving

Operations and advice which are necessary for driving
(Main topics: Starting hybrid system, refueling)

Interior features

Usage of the interior features
(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)

Maintenance
and care

Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)

When trouble
arises

What to do in case of malfunction and emergency
(Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)

Vehicle
specifications

Vehicle specifications, customizable features
(Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)

For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, seat belt and
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

Index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Search by symptom
Search alphabetically

TABLE OF CONTENTS

For your information ......................................6
Reading this manual.................................... 10
How to search .................................................11
Pictorial index .................................................12
1

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use
Before driving....................................22
For safe driving..................................23
Seat belts .............................................24
SRS airbags ........................................29
Pop Up Hood ................................... 38
Front passenger occupant classification system ................................. 40
Exhaust gas precautions .............. 44
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children........................ 45
Child restraint systems ................. 45
1-3. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features................. 58
Hybrid system precautions ...........61
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system ........................ 66
Alarm.................................................... 68
2

Vehicle status information and
indicators

2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators.....72
Gauges and meters (except F
SPORT models) ............................77
Gauges and meters (F SPORT
models).............................................. 81
Multi-information display............. 86
Head-up display ...............................92

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Energy monitor/consumption
screen ................................................96
3

Before driving

3-1. Key information
Keys .................................................... 104
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the
doors and trunk
Doors .................................................108
Trunk ....................................................112
Smart access system with push-button start ............................................119
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats........................................ 128
Power rear seat ............................. 135
Driving position memory........... 139
Rear seat position memory........143
Head restraints ...............................144
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and
mirrors
Steering wheel ................................147
Inside rear view mirror ............... 148
Outside rear view mirrors......... 149
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and
moon roof
Power windows ...............................151
Moon roof........................................ 153
4

Driving

4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle........................ 158
Cargo and luggage...................... 164
Vehicle load limits......................... 166
Trailer towing.................................. 166

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Dinghy towing ................................ 167

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
function.......................................... 273
RCD (Rear Camera Detection)
function...........................................277
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
..........................................................280
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects)............................ 286
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) ...........291
Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) ..................... 295
Driving mode select switch ..... 298
Electronically modulated air suspension.......................................... 299
Driving assist systems ................ 302

4-2. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch ...............168
EV drive mode ............................... 172
Hybrid transmission ..................... 174
Turn signal lever.............................180
Parking brake .................................. 181
Brake Hold.......................................183
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch............................185
AHB (Automatic High Beam)
............................................................188
Windshield wipers and washer
............................................................190
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap......... 194
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lexus Safety System+A.............. 196
Lexus Safety System+ ................203
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A)
...........................................................209
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+)
...........................................................220
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)
........................................................... 227
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)........230
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) ....240
RSA (Road Sign Assist)............. 247
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range.........................250
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .......260
PKSA (Parking Support Alert)
........................................................... 265
Intuitive parking assist ................ 266

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle driving tips ....... 307
Winter driving tips....................... 309
5

Interior features

5-1. Remote Touch/Display
Remote Touch.................................314
Center Display............................... 316
Rear Multi Operation Panel .... 318
5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge
Lexus Climate Concierge..........321
5-3. Using the air conditioning system
and defogger
Front automatic air conditioning
system............................................ 323
Rear air conditioning system... 333
Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators................... 336
5-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ........................... 340

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features............... 343
Trunk features................................348
5-6. Using the other interior features
Other interior features ............... 351
Garage door opener..................358
Lexus Enform Safety Connect
........................................................... 364
6

Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior...................................370
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior .................................... 373
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements .....378
General maintenance ................ 379
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs ............382
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
...........................................................383
Hood..................................................385
Positioning a floor jack...............385
Engine compartment..................387
12-volt battery................................ 393
Tires ................................................... 395
Replacing the tire.........................405
Tire inflation pressure.................408
Wheels...............................................410
Air conditioning filter.................... 411
Electronic key battery ................. 413
Checking and replacing fuses
............................................................ 414

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Light bulbs.........................................417
7

When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .................... 420
If your vehicle has to be stopped in
an emergency ............................ 420
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
...........................................................422
If you think something is wrong
.......................................................... 426
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds......................427
If a warning message is displayed
.......................................................... 437
If you have a flat tire .....................442
If the hybrid system will not start
.......................................................... 443
If you lose your keys.................... 444
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened .......................................... 445
If the electronic key does not operate properly................................. 445
If the 12-volt battery is discharged
.......................................................... 447
If your vehicle overheats........... 453
If the vehicle becomes stuck ... 457
8

Vehicle specifications

8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level,
etc.) ................................................. 460
Fuel information............................ 470
Tire information .............................472

TABLE OF CONTENTS

8-2. Customization
Customizable features................481
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ........................... 495
9

For owners
1

9-1. For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S.
owners ...........................................498
Seat belt instructions for Canadian
owners (in French)....................498
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)..........500

Index
What to do if... (Troubleshooting) ...
...........................................................508
Alphabetical Index......................... 511

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

6
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual

Please note that this manual applies to
all models and explains all equipment,
including options. Therefore, you may
find some explanations for equipment
not installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Lexus policy
of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at
any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of color and
equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system

Approximately five hours after the
hybrid system is turned off, you may
hear sound coming from under the
vehicle for several minutes. This is the
sound of a fuel evaporation leakage
check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus

A wide variety of non-genuine spare
parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does
not warrant these products and is not
responsible for their performance,

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Lexus
vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified
with non-genuine Lexus products.
Modification with non-genuine Lexus
products could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio
system

The installation of a mobile two-way
radio system in your vehicle could
affect electronic systems such as:
 Hybrid system
 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
 Lexus Safety System+A
 Lexus Safety System+
 Anti-lock brake system
 Vehicle dynamics integrated management
 SRS airbag system
 Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Lexus
dealer for precautionary measures or
special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
High voltage parts and cables on the

7
hybrid vehicles emit approximately the
same amount of electromagnetic
waves as the conventional gasoline
powered vehicles or home electronic
appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding.
Unwanted noise may occur in the
reception of the mobile two-way radio.
Vehicle data recordings

Your Lexus is equipped with several
sophisticated computers that will
record certain data, such as:
 Engine speed
 Electric motor speed (traction
motor speed)
 Accelerator status
 Brake status
 Vehicle speed
 Shift position
 Hybrid battery (traction battery)
status
 Images from the camera sensor
(available only in situations when
sudden inputs occur while driving
[sudden acceleration, etc.], the
pre-collision braking function or the
pre-collision brake assist function
was operating, the Parking Support
Brake function [static objects] was
operating, or your vehicle was
involved in a collision)
The recorded data varies according to
the vehicle grade level and options
with which it is equipped. These computers do not record conversations or

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.
 Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these
computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and
improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to
a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or
with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the
police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is
not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner

 Usage of data collected through
Safety Connect / Lexus Enform
(U.S. mainland only)
If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus
Enform and if you have subscribed to those
services, please refer to the Safety Connect / Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on
data collected and its usage.

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynam-

8
ics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.

• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner
(or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is
obtained

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

• In response to an official request by the
police, a court of law or a government
agency

These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your
vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
 Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in
an EDR to a third party except when:

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Lexus may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle
safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for
research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or
vehicle owner

Scrapping of your Lexus

The SRS airbag, seat belt pretensioner
devices and Pop Up Hood system in
your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the
airbags, seat belt pretensioners and
Pop Up Hood micro gas generators
left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the
systems of the SRS airbag, seat belt
pretensioner and Pop Up Hood micro
gas generators removed and disposed
of by a qualified service shop or by
your Lexus dealer before you scrap
your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may
contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pre-

9
tensioners, Pop Up Hood system, and
wireless remote control batteries.
WARNING
■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive
your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your
ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time,
impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that
could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and
be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full
attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with
resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding chil-

dren’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle, and never allow children to have
or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle
or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure
themselves by playing with the windows,
the moon roof, or other features of the
vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or
extremely cold temperatures inside the
vehicle can be fatal to children.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

10
Reading this manual

Symbols

Indicates the action
(pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches
and other devices.

Explains symbols used in this manual.

Indicates the outcome of
an operation (e.g. a lid
opens).

Symbols in this manual
Symbols

Meanings

Meanings
WARNING:
Explains something that,
if not obeyed, could
cause death or serious
injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that,
if not obeyed, could
cause damage to or a
malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or
working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order.

Symbols in illustrations

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Symbols

Meanings
Indicates the component
or position being
explained.
Means Do not, Do not do
this, or Do not let this
happen.

11
How to search
■ Searching by name

 Alphabetical index: →P.511

■ Searching by installation position

 Pictorial index: →P.12

■ Searching by symptom or sound

 What to do if... (Troubleshooting):
→P.508

■ Searching by title

 Table of contents: →P.2

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Pictorial index

Pictorial index
■Exterior

A Doors ......................................................................................................................... P.108

Locking/unlocking ............................................................................................................P.108
Opening/closing the side windows .............................................................................P.151
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key ................................................P.445
Warning lights/warning messages ................................................................ P.427, 437
B Trunk............................................................................................................................ P.112

Opening from inside the cabin ......................................................................................P.114
Opening from outside .......................................................................................................P.115
Opening by using the mechanical key .................................................................... P.446
Warning lights/warning messages ................................................................ P.427, 437
C Outside rear view mirrors....................................................................................P.149

Adjusting the mirror angle............................................................................................. P.149
Folding the mirrors............................................................................................................ P.150
Driving position memory................................................................................................ P.139
Defogging the mirrors ....................................................................................................P.323
D Windshield wipers ..................................................................................................P.190

Pictorial index

Precautions for winter season.....................................................................................P.309
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)*................................................. P.327
Precautions for car wash .................................................................................................P.371
E Fuel filler door..........................................................................................................P.194

Refueling method .............................................................................................................. P.194
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity ...........................................................................................P.461
F Tires............................................................................................................................P.395

Tire size/inflation pressure ............................................................................... P.395, 466
Winter tires/tire chains ..................................................................................................P.309
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system..............................................P.395
Coping with flat tires........................................................................................................ P.442
G Hood ......................................................................................................................... P.385

Opening ...............................................................................................................................P.385
Engine compartment cover ........................................................................................ P.388
Engine oil.............................................................................................................................. P.462
Coping with overheating...............................................................................................P.453
Warning messages .......................................................................................................... P.437
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P.417)
H Headlights/cornering lights ................................................................................P.185
I Parking lights/daytime running lights...............................................................P.185
J Turn signal lights..................................................................................................... P.180
K Tail lights ....................................................................................................................P.185
Stop lights

Hill-start assist control ....................................................................................................P.303
L License plate lights .................................................................................................P.185
M Back-up lights

Changing the shift position to R....................................................................................P.174
N Side marker lights ...................................................................................................P.185
*:

If equipped

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Pictorial index

■Instrument panel

A Power switch ............................................................................................................P.168

Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes.................................................. P.168
Emergency stop of the hybrid system......................................................................P.420
When the hybrid system will not start ......................................................................P.443
Warning messages .......................................................................................................... P.437
B Shift lever................................................................................................................... P.174

Changing the shift position.............................................................................................P.176
Precautions for towing ................................................................................................... P.422
C Meters................................................................................................................... P.77, 81

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light............P.77, 79, 81, 85
Warning lights/indicator lights ...................................................................................... P.72
When a warning light turns on .................................................................................... P.427
D Multi-information display .......................................................................................P.86

Display......................................................................................................................................P.86
Energy monitor..................................................................................................................... P.97
When a warning messages is displayed.................................................................. P.437

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Pictorial index

E Parking brake switch ..............................................................................................P.181

Applying/releasing the parking brake........................................................................P.181
Precautions for winter season...................................................................................... P.310
Warning buzzer/messages.......................................................................................... P.437
F Turn signal lever ..................................................................................................... P.180
Headlight switch......................................................................................................P.185

Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights........................... P.185
AHB (Automatic High Beam)......................................................................................P.188
G Windshield wiper and washer switch................................................................P.190

Usage...................................................................................................................................... P.190
Adding washer fluid.........................................................................................................P.392
Warning messages .......................................................................................................... P.437
H Emergency flasher switch .................................................................................. P.420
I Hood lock release lever...................................................................................... P.385
J Tilt and telescopic steering control switch...................................................... P.147

Adjustment ............................................................................................................................P.147
Driving position memory................................................................................................ P.139
K Air conditioning system ...................................................................................... P.323

Usage.....................................................................................................................................P.323
Rear window defogger...................................................................................................P.323
L Audio system*
M Brake hold switch....................................................................................................P.183
N Trunk opener main switch .....................................................................................P.118
*

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Pictorial index

■Switches

A HUD (Head-up display) switch*1 ..........................................................................P.92
B Camera switch*1, 2
C Instrument panel light control switches .....................................................P.79, 85
D “ODO TRIP” switch .........................................................................................P.79, 85
E VSC OFF switch.................................................................................................... P.304
Snow mode switch .................................................................................................. P.177
F Driving mode select switch................................................................................ P.298
G Trunk opener switch................................................................................................ P.114
H Fuel filler door opener switch..............................................................................P.195
*1

: If equipped

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Pictorial index

A Position memory buttons......................................................................................P.139
B Mode change button .............................................................................................P.130
C Window lock switch ...............................................................................................P.153
D Outside rear view mirror switches....................................................................P.149
E Door lock switches ..................................................................................................P.110
F Power window switches......................................................................................... P.151
Rear door sunshade switches* .......................................................................... P.355
*

: If equipped

A Meter control switches ...........................................................................................P.87
B Paddle shift switches..............................................................................................P.178

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Pictorial index

C Phone switch*1
D LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch*2 ................................................................. P.230
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) switch*2.............................................................. P.240
E Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch ..................................................................P.254
F Cruise control switches ...................................................................................... P.250
G Audio remote control switches*1
H Talk switch*1
*1

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

*2: If equipped

A Remote Touch*1.......................................................................................................P.314
B Seat switch ................................................................................................................P.129
C Rear sunshade switch*2 .......................................................................................P.356
D EV drive mode switch ............................................................................................ P.172
E Vehicle height adjustment switch*2 .................................................................P.299
F P position switch...................................................................................................... P.176
*1:
*2

Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
: If equipped

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Pictorial index

■Interior

A SRS airbags.................................................................................................................P.29
B Floor mats....................................................................................................................P.22
C Front seats.................................................................................................................P.128
D Head restraints........................................................................................................P.144
E Seat belts .....................................................................................................................P.24
F Inside lock buttons...................................................................................................P.110
G Console box.............................................................................................................P.346
H Cup holders .............................................................................................................P.345
I Assist grips .............................................................................................................. P.352
J Coat hooks.............................................................................................................. P.352
K Rear Multi Operation Panel*1 ............................................................................P.318
L Rear seat entertainment system*1, 2
*1:
*2

If equipped
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Pictorial index

■Ceiling

A Moon roof switches................................................................................................P.153
B Personal lights..........................................................................................................P.341
C “SOS” button* .........................................................................................................P.364
D Auxiliary box............................................................................................................P.347
E Vanity mirrors .........................................................................................................P.354
F Sun visors..................................................................................................................P.354
G Door-linked interior light switch ........................................................................P.341
H Inside rear view mirror ..........................................................................................P.148
I Garage door opener buttons............................................................................ P.358
J Interior light ..............................................................................................................P.341
*:

If equipped

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use
.

Before driving.................................22
For safe driving.............................. 23
SRS airbags .................................... 29
Pop Up Hood ................................ 38
Front passenger occupant classification system .............................. 40
Exhaust gas precautions ........... 44
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children..................... 45
Child restraint systems .............. 45
1-3. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features.............. 58
Hybrid system precautions ....... 61
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system ..................... 66
Alarm................................................. 68

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

Seat belts ..........................................24

1-1. For safe use

1-1.For safe use

Before driving

Observe the following before starting off in the vehicle to ensure
safety of driving.

Installing floor mats
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix
them securely in place onto the carpet.
1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.

WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s
floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with
the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle. This
could lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for

other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.

● Only use floor mats designed for the

driver’s seat.

● Always install the floor mat securely

using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.

● Do not use two or more floor mats on

top of each other.

● Do not place the floor mat bot-

tom-side up or upside-down.

2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor
mats in place.

■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely

fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this
check after cleaning the floor.

● With the hybrid system stopped and

Always align the

marks A .

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips)
may differ from that shown in the illustration.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

the shift position in P, fully depress
each pedal to the floor to make sure it
does not interfere with the floor mat.

1-1. For safe use

For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the seat and
mirror to an appropriate position
before driving.

Correct driving posture

● Do not adjust the position of the

driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between the

driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and
head restraint.
seats.
Objects placed under the front seats
may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in
place. This may lead to an accident
and the adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.

● Always observe the legal speed limit

when driving on public roads.

A Adjust the angle of the seatback so

that you are sitting straight up and
so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (→P.128)

B Adjust the seat so that you can

depress the pedals fully and so that
your arms bend slightly at the
elbow when gripping the steering
wheel. (→P.128)

C Lock the head restraint in place

with the center of the head restraint
closest to the top of your ears.
(→P.144)

D Wear the seat belt correctly.

(→P.24)

WARNING
■ For safe driving

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● When driving over long distances, take

regular breaks before you start to feel
tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while
driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

Correct use of the seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle. (→P.24)
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belt. (→P.45)

Adjusting the mirrors
Make sure that you can see backward
clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly.
(→P.148, 149)

For safety and security

● Do not place anything under the front

1-1. For safe use

Seat belts

■ Pregnant women

Make sure that all occupants are
wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat

belt.

● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one

person only. Do not use a seat belt for
more than one person at once, including children.

● Lexus recommends that children be

seated in the rear seat and always use
a seat belt and/or an appropriate child
restraint system.

● To achieve a proper seating position,

do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective
when the occupants are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under

your arm.

● Always wear your seat belt low and

snug across your hips.

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (→P.25)
Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over
the hips in the same manner as other
occupants, extending the shoulder belt
completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (→P.25)
■ When children are in the vehicle

→P.53
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allow-

ing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodi-

cally. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt
until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts
cannot protect an occupant from
death or serious injury.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-1. For safe use
WARNING
● Ensure that the belt and plate are

locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly, including

● Do not attempt to install, remove,

modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs
carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.

● Use a child restraint system appropriate

for the child, until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s
seat belt. (→P.45)
● When the child becomes large enough to
properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt
usage. (→P.24)
■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long enough,
a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.

Correct use of the seat belts
 Extend the shoulder belt so that it
comes fully over the shoulder, but
does not come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoulder.

WARNING
■ Using a seat belt extender

Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if

you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender

 Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
 Adjust the position of the seatback.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat.
 Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, increasing
the risk of death or serious injury in the
event of an accident.

● The personalized extender may not be

safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

For safety and security

the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if
there is no obvious damage.

1-1. For safe use

Easy Access Buckle (front
seats)*

NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle
interior and the extender itself.

Fastening and releasing the seat
belt

The front seat belt buckles move outward automatically for easier access.


When a front door is opened, the seat
belt buckle for the corresponding seat
will move outward automatically. The
buckle will retract automatically after
the plate is inserted and locked to the
buckle.


1 To fasten the seat belt, push the
plate into the buckle until a click
sound is heard.
2 To release the seat belt, press the
release button A .
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it.
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you
lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy
motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and
cannot be extended. This feature is used to
hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt
and then pull the belt out once more.
(→P.45)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When entering the vehicle

When exiting the vehicle (driver’s
seat only)

If the power switch is turned off when
the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the
driver’s seat belt buckle will move outward. The buckle will retract automatically when the driver’s seat belt is
released.
*

: If equipped

■ Easy Access Buckle
● If the seat belt buckle is not latched when

it is in the outward position, it will return to
its original position after a certain amount
of time.
● If an occupant exits the vehicle and leaves
the front door open and then enters the
vehicle again, the seat belt buckle will not
operate until the door is closed and then
opened again.
■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

1-1. For safe use

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder
anchor height (front seats)

Seat belt pretensioners (front
and outboard rear seats)

Move the height adjuster up and down as
needed until you hear a click.
WARNING
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from your neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce
the amount of protection in an accident
and cause death or serious injuries in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident.

The pretensioners help the seat belts to
quickly restrain the occupants by
retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe frontal or side collision or a
vehicle rollover.
The pretensioners do not activate in the
event of a minor frontal impact, a minor
side impact or a rear impact.
■ Replacing the belt after the preten-

sioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the
second or subsequent collisions.
WARNING
■ Seat belt pretensioners

Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

1 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
down while pressing the release
button A .
2 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
up.

1-1. For safe use
WARNING

● Do not place anything, such as a cush-

ion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s
weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight
properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat
may not activate in the event of a collision.

● If the pretensioner has activated, the

SRS warning light will come on. In that
case, the seat belt cannot be used
again and must be replaced at your
Lexus dealer.

Pre-collision seat belts with comfort function (front seats of vehicles with Lexus Safety
System+A)
When the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or
higher, the seat belts will retract slightly
to remove any slack.
If the system determines that a collision
is unavoidable, the front seat belts will
retract before the collision. (→P.210)
■ Pre-collision seat belts with comfort

function
A motor sound may be heard when a front
seat belt is released or a front door is
opened. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe
impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together
with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

SRS airbag system



SRS front airbags

A SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from
impact with interior components

B SRS knee airbags

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection



SRS side and curtain shield airbags

C SRS front side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

D SRS rear side airbags

Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats

E SRS curtain shield airbags

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

■ Location of the SRS airbags

1-1. For safe use

• Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
• Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover
F SRS seat cushion airbags (if equipped)

Can help restrain the power rear seat occupants

■ SRS airbag system components

A Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)
B Side impact sensors (front door)
C Knee airbags
D Front passenger airbag
E Curtain shield airbags
F “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
G Front side airbags
H Side impact sensors (front)
I SRS warning light
J Rear side airbags
K Seat belt pretensioners
L Driver airbag
M Seat cushion airbags (if equipped)
N Rear seat belt buckle switches (if equipped)
O Side impact sensors (rear)
P Driver’s seat position sensor

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-1. For safe use

Q Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
R Airbag sensor assembly
S Front impact sensors
T Pop Up Hood computer assembly

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may

be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the
extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
● A loud noise and white powder will be
emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering
wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the seats, parts of the front and
rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot
for several minutes. The airbag itself may
also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● The emergency flashers will be turned on
automatically. (→P.420)
● For Lexus Enform Safety Connect subscribers, if any of the following situations
occur, the system is designed to send an
emergency call to the response center,
notifying them of the vehicle’s location
(without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak
with the occupants to ascertain the level
of emergency and assistance required. If
the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the
call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services.
(→P.364)
• An SRS airbag is deployed.
• A seat belt pretensioner is activated.
• The vehicle is involved in a severe
rear-end collision.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS

front airbags/SRS seat cushion airbags)

● The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cush-

ion airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold
level (the level of force corresponding to
an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30
km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall
that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher in the following situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a
parked vehicle or sign pole, which can
move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride
collision, such as a collision in which the
front of the vehicle underrides, or goes
under, the bed of a truck
● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the SRS front airbags for the
front passenger may deploy if luggage is
put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
● The SRS seat cushion airbags on the rear
seat will not operate if the occupant is not
wearing a seat belt.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS

side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
will deploy in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level (the level

For safety and security

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US
motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU)
controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc.
shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash
severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in
the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of
the occupants.

1-1. For safe use

of force corresponding to the impact
force produced by an approximately
3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with
the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an
approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 30 km/h]).
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags may
deploy in the event of a severe side collision.
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags will
deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags may also
deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.
■ Conditions under which the SRS air-

bags may deploy (inflate), other than a
collision
The SRS front airbags, SRS curtain shield
airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may
also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy

the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags/SRS
seat cushion airbags)
The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion
airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle
is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal
collision. But, whenever a collision of any
type causes sufficient forward deceleration
of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front
airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may
occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also
deploy under the situations shown in the
illustration.
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain
shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
may not activate if the vehicle is subjected
to a collision from the side at certain angles,
or a collision to the side of the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle

1-1. For safe use

that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS front airbags and SRS cushion airbags to inflate.

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if
it is involved in a low-speed side or
low-speed frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end

● A portion of a door or its surrounding

area is damaged, deformed or has had a
hole made in it, or the vehicle was
involved in an accident that was not
severe enough to cause the SRS side and
curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel,

dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument
panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.

● Vehicles with power rear seat: The seat
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will
require inspection and/or repair. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been
inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.

For safety and security

The SRS side airbags do not generally
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or
rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved
in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions
regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The surface of the seats with the side air-

bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.

● The driver and all passengers in the

vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental
devices to be used with the seat belts.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars

or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the
driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) advises: Since
the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the
first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from
your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is
measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less
than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as
you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many
drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250
mm) distance, even with the driver seat
all the way forward, simply by reclining
the back of the seat somewhat. If
reclining the back of your seat makes it
hard to see the road, raise yourself by
using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or
raise the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-1. For safe use
WARNING
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt
it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head
and neck.

● If the seat belt extender has been con-

nected to the front seat belt buckles
but the seat belt extender has not also
been fastened to the latch plate of the
seat belt, the SRS front airbags will
judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even
though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a
collision, resulting in death or serious
injury in the event of a collision. Be
sure to wear the seat belt with the seat
belt extender.

● Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag.
An infant or child who is too small to
use a seat belt should be properly
secured using a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly recommends that all
infants and children be placed in the
rear seats of the vehicle and properly
restrained. The rear seats are safer for
infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P.45)

● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or

lean against the dashboard.

● Do not allow a child to stand in front of

the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also

deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury
especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Do not allow the front seat occupants

to hold items on their knees.

For safety and security

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still
maintaining control of the foot pedals,
steering wheel, and your view of the
instrument panel controls.

1-1. For safe use
WARNING

● Do not lean against the door, the roof

side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the

passenger seats toward the door or
put their head or hands outside the
vehicle.

● Do not attach anything to areas such

as a door, windshield, side windows,
front or rear pillar, roof side rail and
assist grip.

● Do not hang coat hangers or hard

objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and
may cause death or serious injury,
should the SRS curtain shield airbags
deploy.

● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where

the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be
sure to remove it.

● Do not use seat accessories which

● Do not attach anything to or lean any-

thing against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and knee airbags deploy.

cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with
inflation of the SRS airbags. Such
accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable
the system or cause the side airbags to
inflate accidentally, resulting in death
or serious injury.

● Do not strike or apply significant levels

of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components or the front doors. Doing
so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

● Do not touch any of the component

parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they
may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the

SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or
leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so.
Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-1. For safe use
WARNING
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are

● Modifications to your vehicle for a per-

son with a physical disability

stored, such as the steering wheel pad
and front and rear pillar garnishes are
damaged or cracked, have them
replaced by your Lexus dealer.

● Do not place anything, such as a cush-

■ Modification and disposal of SRS air-

bag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and

repair of the SRS airbags

● Repairs, modifications, removal or

replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or
seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars, roof side rails, front door panels,
front door trims or front door speakers

● Modifications to the front door panel

(such as making a hole in it)

● Repairs or modifications of the front

fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment

● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars,

kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows,
winches or roof luggage carrier

● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspen-

sion system

● Installation of electronic devices such

as mobile two-way radios and CD
players

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

ion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s
weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight
properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may not
deploy in the event of a collision.

1-1. For safe use

Pop Up Hood
In the event of a frontal collision
with a body, such as a pedestrian,
the Pop Up Hood system raises the
hood to reduce the possibility of a
serious impact to the pedestrian’s
head area by adding clearance to
the engine compartment.
When the sensors located at the
back of the front bumper detect a
frontal impact with a body, such as a
pedestrian, which meets or
exceeds the threshold level while
the vehicle is being driven within
the operational speed range, the
system operates.

System components

■ Pop Up Hood operational conditions

The Pop Up Hood will operate when the
vehicle detects an impact such as the following:
● The front bumper detects a frontal impact
equivalent to or greater than that of a
pedestrian while the vehicle being driven
within the operational speed range of
approximately 16 to 34 mph (25 to 55
km/h). (The system is operated by an
impact of threshold level or greater, even
in the case of a minor collision that may
not leave a trace on the front bumper.
Also, depending on the impact conditions or vehicle speed, the system may
operate by a collision with a light or small
object or a small animal.)
● In other situations, such as the following
the system may operate when an impact
is applied to the lower part of the vehicle
or front bumper:
• Colliding with a curb
• Falling into a deep hole
• Landing hard
• Hitting the slope of a parking lot, an
undulating road, a protruding object or
falling object
■ Conditions under which the Pop Up

Hood may not operate properly

● If a pedestrian collides with the right or

A Sensors
B Hood
C Lifters
■ Pop Up Hood precautions
● Before scrapping your vehicle, make sure

to contact your Lexus dealer.

● The Pop Up Hood system cannot be

reused once it has operated. Have it
replaced by your Lexus dealer.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

left corner of the front bumper or the side
of the vehicle. As such impacts may be
difficult to detect, the system may not
operate.
● If the vehicle speed is not detected correctly, such as if the vehicle is sliding sideways, the system may not operate
properly.
■ Conditions under which the Pop Up

Hood will not operate
The Pop Up Hood will not operate in the
following situations:
● Colliding with a lying person
● A frontal impact applied to the front
bumper while driving at speeds outside
of the operational speed range
● A side impact or rear impact
● A vehicle rollover (In some accident situations, the Pop Up Hood may operate.)

1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■ When the Pop Up Hood is operated
● Do not pull the hood lock release lever.

Doing so after the Pop Up Hood has
operated will further raise the hood
and may cause an injury. Do not drive
with the hood raised, as doing so may
block the driver’s vision, possibly causing an accident.
As the popped up hood cannot be
lowered by hand, doing so may deform
the hood or cause an injury.

● If the Pop Up Hood has operated, have

it replaced by your Lexus dealer. If the
Pop Up Hood has operated, stop the
vehicle in a safe place and contact
your Lexus dealer.

● Do not touch the lifters immediately

after the Pop Up Hood has operated,
as the lifters may be hot and burn you.
NOTICE

■ Pop Up Hood precautions
● Make sure to close the hood before

driving, as the system may not operate
properly if the hood is not fully closed.

● Make sure that all 4 tires are of the

specified size and inflated to the specified tire pressure. If tires of a different
size are used, the system may not
operate properly.

● If something has hit the area around

the front bumper, the sensors may be
damaged even if the Pop Up Hood has
not operated. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.

● Do not remove or repair the parts or

wiring of the Pop Up Hood, as doing
so may cause accidental operation or
prevent the system from operating
properly. If repair or replacement is
necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Do not remove such components as

the front bumper, hood or suspension,
or replace them with non-genuine
parts, as doing so may prevent the system from operating properly.

● Do not install anything to the front

bumper or hood, as doing so may prevent the sensors from detecting an
impact correctly and prevent the system from operating properly.

● Do not close the hood with force or

apply load to the lifters, as doing so
may damage the lifters and prevent the
system from operating properly.

● Do not modify the suspension, as

changes made to the vehicle height
may prevent the system from operating properly.

For safety and security

● Do not forcibly push down the hood.

1-1. For safe use

Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system.
This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or
deactivates the front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag.

System components

A Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
B SRS warning light


For the U.S.A.

C “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
D “AIR BAG ON” indicator light


For Canada

E “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
F “AIR BAG ON” indicator light

WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat

belt plate has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in
the front passenger seat.

1-1. For safe use
WARNING
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indica-

● Do not apply a heavy load to the front

passenger seat or equipment (e.g.
seatback pocket).

● Do not put weight on the front passen-

ger seat by putting your hands or feet
on the front passenger seat seatback
from the rear passenger seat.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift the

front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the front pas-

senger seat.

● Do not recline the front passenger

seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the SRS airbags
for the front passenger will not activate
in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return
the seatback to a position where it
does not touch the rear seat. Keep the
front passenger seatback as upright as
possible when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback excessively
may lessen the effectiveness of the
seat belt system.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● If an adult sits in the front passenger

seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light
is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the
seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat
belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat, or if that is not
possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install a for-

ward-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, install the
child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order.
(→P.46)

● Do not modify or remove the front

seats.

● Do not kick the front passenger seat or

subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to
indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant classification system.
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer
immediately.

● Child restraint systems installed on the

rear seat should not contact the front
seatbacks.

● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a

cushion and seat cover, that covers the
seat cushion surface.

● Do not modify or replace the uphol-

stery of the front seat.

For safety and security

tor light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat
belt buckle, and reconnect the seat
belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIR BAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If you use
the seat belt extender while the “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front
passenger will not activate, which
could cause death or serious injury in
the event of a collision.

1-1. For safe use

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification
system
■ Adult*1

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

“AIR BAG ON”

SRS warning light

Off

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light

Off*2 or flashing*3

Indicator/warning light

Front passenger airbag

Devices

Front passenger knee airbag

Activated

■ Child*4

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indi- “AIR BAG OFF” or
cator lights
“AIR BAG ON”*4
Indicator/warning light

SRS warning light

Off

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light

Off*2 or flashing*3

Front passenger airbag

Devices

Front passenger knee airbag

Deactivated or activated*4

■ Child restraint system with infant*5

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

“AIR BAG OFF”*6

SRS warning light

Off

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light

Off*2 or flashing*3

Indicator/warning light

Devices

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag

Deactivated

1-1. For safe use

■ Unoccupied

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
Indicator/warning light

“AIR BAG OFF”

SRS warning light
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag

1
Deactivated

■ There is a malfunction in the system

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

“AIR BAG OFF”

SRS warning light

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light

Off

Indicator/warning light

Devices

Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag

Deactivated

: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the
front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on
his/her physique and posture.

*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt
*3
*4

: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt

: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture.

*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A for-

ward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat
when it is unavoidable. (→P.45)
*6

: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child
restraint system properly. (→P.46)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

Devices

Off

1-1. For safe use

Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human
body is included in exhaust gases if
inhaled.
WARNING
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases
enter the vehicle and may lead to an
accident caused by light-headedness, or
may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the trunk lid closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehi-

cle even when the trunk lid is closed,
open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.

■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated

area or a closed area, such as a
garage, stop the hybrid system.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the

hybrid system on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided,
park the vehicle in an open space and
ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter
the vehicle interior.

● Do not leave the hybrid system operat-

ing in an area with snow build-up, or
where it is snowing. If snowbanks build
up around the vehicle while the hybrid
system is operating, exhaust gases
may collect and enter the vehicle.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked
periodically. If there is a hole or crack
caused by corrosion, damage to a joint
or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to
have the vehicle inspected and repaired
by your Lexus dealer.

1-2. Child safety
1-2.Child safety

Child restraint systems

Observe the following precautions
when children are in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly
wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

Before installing a child restraint
system in the vehicle, there are precautions that need to be observed,
different types of child restraint systems, as well as installation methods, etc., written in this manual.

 It is recommended that children
sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever,
wiper switch etc.

Use a child restraint system when
riding with a small child that cannot
properly use a seat belt. For the
child’s safety, install the child restraint
system to a rear seat. Be sure to follow the installation method that is in
the operation manual enclosed with
the restraint system.

 Use the rear door child-protector
lock or the window lock switch to
avoid children opening the door
while driving or operating the
power window accidentally.
(→P.111, 153)
 Do not let small children operate
equipment which may catch or
pinch body parts, such as the
power window, hood, trunk, seats
etc.
WARNING
■ When children are in the vehicle

Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle, and never allow children to have
or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle
or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure
themselves by playing with the windows,
the moon roof, or other features of the
vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or
extremely cold temperatures inside the
vehicle can be fatal to children.

Table of contents
Points to remember: P.45
Child restraint system: P.46
When using a child restraint system:
P.47
Child restraint system installation
method
• Fixed with a seat belt: P.49
• Fixed with a child restraint LATCH
anchor: P.53
• Using an anchor bracket (for top
tether strap): P.55

Points to remember
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A.
as well as Canada now require the use
of child restraint systems.
 Prioritize and observe the warnings, as well as the laws and regula-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

Riding with children

1-2. Child safety

tions for child restraint systems.
 Use a child restraint system until the
child becomes large enough to
properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
 Choose a child restraint system that
suits your vehicle and is appropriate
to the age and size of the child.
WARNING
■ When a child is riding

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● For effective protection in automobile

accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a
seat belt or child restraint system
which is correctly installed. For installation details, refer to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint
system. General installation instruction
is provided in this manual.

● Lexus strongly urges the use of a

proper child restraint system that conforms to the weight and size of the
child, installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front seat.

● Holding a child in your or someone

else’s arms is not a substitute for a child
restraint system. In an accident, the
child can be crushed against the windshield or between the holder and the
interior of the vehicle.

■ Handling the child restraint system

If the child restraint system is not properly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even
killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving, or an accident.
● If the vehicle were to receive a strong

impact from an accident, etc., it is possible that the child restraint system has
damage that is not readily visible. In
such cases, do not reuse the restraint
system.

● Make sure you have complied with all

installation instructions provided with
the child restraint system manufacturer and that the system is properly
secured.

● Keep the child restraint system prop-

erly secured on the seat even if it is not
in use. Do not store the child restraint
system unsecured in the passenger
compartment.

● If it is necessary to detach the child

restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the trunk.

Child restraint system
■ Types of child restraint system installation methods

Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about
the installation of the child restraint system.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-2. Child safety
Installation method

Seat belt attachment

Page

P.49
1

P.53

Anchor brackets (for top
tether strap) attachment

P.55

When using a child restraint system
■ When installing a child restraint

system to a front passenger seat

For the safety of a child, install child
restraint systems to a rear seats. When
installing child restraint system to a
front passenger seat is unavoidable,
adjust the seat as follows and install the
child restraint system.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

 Move the front seat fully rearward.
 Adjust the seatback angle to the
most upright position.
 Adjust the front of the seat cushion
to the lowest position.
 Adjust the seat height to the uppermost position.
 Adjust the lumbar support to the
lowest position.
 Adjust the shoulder bolster to the

For safety and security

Child restraint LATCH
anchors attachment

1-2. Child safety

lowest position (if equipped).
 Adjust the pelvic support to the lowest position.
 Adjust the seatback side bolster to
the widest position (if equipped).
 Adjust the seat cushion side bolster
to the lowest position (if equipped).
 Adjust the hip support to the lowest
position (if equipped).
 If the head restraint interferes with
the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be
removed, remove the head restraint.
Otherwise, put the head restraint in
the upper most position.

■ When installing a child restraint

system to a power rear seat (if
equipped)

When using a child restraint system in
an outer rear seat, adjust the seat as
follows and install the child restraint
system.
 Adjust the seat cushion to the fully
rearward position.
 Adjust the upper seatback to the
rearmost position.
 Adjust the front of the seat cushion
to the lowest position.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

 Adjust the head restraint to the lowest and rearmost position.
 Adjust the shoulder bolster to the
lowest position.
 Adjust the lumbar support to the
lowest position.
 Adjust the pelvic support to the lowest position.
 Disable the automatic rear seat
operation. (→P.318)
 For the rear seat with an ottoman (if
equipped): Adjust the seatback to
the most upright position and ottoman (footrest) to the stowed position.

WARNING
■ When using a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Never install a rear-facing child

restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of
an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can
cause death or serious injury to the
child if the rear-facing child restraint
system is installed on the front passenger seat.

1-2. Child safety
WARNING
● A forward-facing child restraint system

● A forward-facing child restraint system

may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, adjust the seatback angle to the
most upright position, move the seat to
the rearmost position, and raise the
seat to the upper most position, even if
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated.

● When a booster seat is installed,

always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the
child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but
not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder.

● Use child restraint system suitable to

● If the driver’s seat interferes with the

For safety and security

may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A
child restraint system that requires a
top tether strap should not be used in
the front passenger seat since there is
no top tether strap anchor for the front
passenger seat.

the age and size of the child and install
it to the rear seat.
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the
right-hand rear seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so that

it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.

● Do not allow the child to lean his/her

head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat,
front or rear pillars, or roof side rails
from which the SRS side airbags or
SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even
if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.

Child restraint system fixed with
a seat belt
A child restraint system for a small
child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
■ Installing child restraint system

using a seat belt (child restraint
lock function belt)

Install the child restraint system in
accordance to the operation manual
enclosed with the child restraint system.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-2. Child safety

■ Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/con-

mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot
be extended.

vertible seat
1 Adjust the rear seat

Vehicles with power rear seat: If there is a
gap between the child seat and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good
contact is achieved.

2 Place the child restraint system on
the rear seat facing the rear of the
vehicle.
5 While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.

3 Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.

4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a
point where there is no slack in the belt,
pull the belt to check that it cannot be
extended.

6 After installing the child restraint
system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely.
(→P.53)
■ Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible

seat
1 Adjust the seat


When using the front passenger
seat

If installing the child restraint system to
the front passenger seat is unavoid-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-2. Child safety

able, refer to P.47 for front passenger
seat adjustment.


mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot
be extended.

When using the rear seat

If there is a gap between the child seat
and the seatback, adjust the seatback
angle until good contact is achieved.
2 Place the child restraint system on
the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

3 Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.

4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a
point where there is no slack in the belt,
pull the belt to check that it cannot be
extended.

6 If the child restraint has a top tether
strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s operation manual
regarding the installation, using the
top tether strap to latch onto the
top tether strap anchor. (→P.55)
7 After installing the child restraint
system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely.
(→P.53)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

5 While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until the
child restraint system is securely in
place.

1-2. Child safety

■ Booster seat

(→P.24)

1 If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat is
unavoidable, refer to P.47 for front
passenger seat adjustment.
2 Place the child restraint system on
the seat facing the front of the vehicle.


Booster type

■ Removing a child restraint system

installed with a seat belt

Press the buckle release button and
fully retract the seat belt.
When releasing the buckle, the child
restraint system may spring up due to the
rebound of the seat cushion. Release the
buckle while holding down the child
restraint system.


High back type

4 Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the child
restraint system according to the
manufacturer’s instructions and
insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not
twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly
positioned over the child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is as low as possible.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Since the seat belt automatically reels itself,
slowly return it to the stowing position.

WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint sys-

tem
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.

1-2. Child safety
WARNING
● Do not allow children to play with the

seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may
lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be
unfastened, scissors should be used to
cut the belt.
securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.

● Shake the child restraint system left

and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely
installed.

● After securing a child restraint system,

never adjust the seat.

● When a booster seat is installed,

● Follow all installation instructions pro-

vided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.

● When securing some types of child

restraint systems in rear seats, it may
not be possible to properly use the
seat belts in positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with it or
affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be
sure your seat belt fits snugly across
your shoulder and low on your hips. If it
does not, or if it interferes with the
child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.

● When installing a child restraint system

in the rear center seat, adjust both seat
cushions to the same position and
align both seatbacks at the same
angle. Otherwise, the child restraint
system cannot be securely restrained
and this may cause death or serious
injuries in the event of sudden braking,
sudden swerving or an accident.

■ When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR
lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to
tighten only. This could cause injury or
discomfort to the child. (→P.26)
■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when
installing a child restraint system, the seat
belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or
other passengers in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Child restraint system fixed with
a child restraint LATCH anchor
■ Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the
outboard rear seat. (Buttons displaying
the location of the anchors are
attached to the seats.)

■ Installation with LATCH system

Install the child restraint system in

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

● Ensure that the belt and plate are

1-2. Child safety

accordance to the operation manual
enclosed with the child restraint system.
1 Vehicles with power rear seat:
Adjust the seat
If there is a gap between the child seat and
the seatback, adjust the seatback angle
until good contact is achieved. (→P.48)

 Type A
4 Latch the hooks of the lower straps
onto the LATCH anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates A the presence of a
lower connector system.

2 Open the cover.

3 Insert the tab B into the slit A of
the cover.
The cover will be held open.

A Canada only

Type B
4 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH
anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint sys

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-2. Child safety

tem indicates A the presence of a
lower connector system.

WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint sys-

tem
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.

● After securing a child restraint system,

● When using the LATCH anchors, be

For safety and security

never adjust the seat.

sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat
belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system.

● Follow all installation instructions pro-

vided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.

● When securing some types of child

A Canada only

5 If the child restraint has a top tether
strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s operation manual
regarding the installation, using the
top tether strap to latch onto the
top tether strap anchor. (→P.55)
6 After installing the child restraint
system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely.
(→P.53)
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to

anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE
J1819.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Using an anchor bracket (for top
tether strap)
■ Anchor brackets (for top tether

strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for each
rear seat.
Use anchor brackets when fixing the
top tether strap.

56


1-2. Child safety

Outboard rear seats



Outboard rear seats

A Anchor brackets

A Hook

B Top tether strap



Rear center seat



Rear center seat

A Anchor bracket

A Hook

B Top tether strap

■ Fixing the top tether strap to the

anchor bracket

Install the child restraint system in
accordance to the operation manual
enclosed with the child restraint system.
Open the anchor bracket cover, latch
the hook onto the anchor bracket and
tighten the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is securely
latched. (→P.53)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to

anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE
J1819.
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint sys-

tem
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.

1-2. Child safety

WARNING
● Firmly attach the top tether strap and

make sure that the belt is not twisted.

● Do not attach the top tether strap to

anything other than the anchor
bracket.

● After securing a child restraint system,

● Follow all installation instructions pro-

For safety and security

never adjust the seat.

vided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.

● Be sure to have the top tether strap

pass over the top of the head restraint.
If the belt passes below the head
restraint, it is possible that the child
restraint system may not be securely
fixed.
NOTICE

■ Anchor brackets (for top tether

strap)
When not in use, make certain to close
the lid. If it remains open, the lid may be
damaged.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-3. Hybrid system

1-3.Hybrid system

Hybrid system features

Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your
vehicle, and operate it with care.
The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor
(traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and
reducing exhaust emissions.

System components
■ System components

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.
A Gasoline engine
B Electric motor (traction motor)
■ When stopped/during start off

The gasoline engine stops* when the
vehicle is stopped. During start off, the
electric motor (traction motor) drives
the vehicle. At slow speeds or when
traveling down a gentle slope, the
engine is stopped* and the electric
motor (traction motor) is used.
When the shift position is in N, the

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

hybrid battery (traction battery) is not
being charged.
*

: When the hybrid battery (traction battery) requires charging or the engine is
warming up, etc., the gasoline engine will
not automatically stop.

■ During normal driving

The gasoline engine is predominantly
used. The electric motor (traction
motor) charges the hybrid battery

1-3. Hybrid system

(traction battery) as necessary.
■ When accelerating sharply

When the accelerator pedal is
depressed heavily, the power of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) is
added to that of the gasoline engine via
the electric motor (traction motor).
ing)

The wheels operate the electric motor
(traction motor) as a power generator,
and the hybrid battery (traction battery) is charged.
■ Regenerative braking

In the following situations, kinetic energy is
converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction
with the recharging of the hybrid battery
(traction battery).
● The accelerator pedal is released while
driving with the shift position in D or M.
● The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift position in D or M.
■ EV indicator

The EV indicator comes on when the vehicle is driven using only the electric motor
(traction motor) or the gasoline engine is
stopped.

■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine

may not stop
The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions:
● During gasoline engine warm-up

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● During hybrid battery (traction battery)

charging

● When the temperature of the hybrid bat-

tery (traction battery) is high or low

● When the heater is switched on
● When the shift position is in M

Depending on the circumstances, the gasoline engine may also not stop automatically
in other situations.
■ Charging the hybrid battery (traction

battery)
As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid
battery (traction battery), the battery does
not need to be charged from an outside
source. However, if the vehicle is left parked
for a long time the hybrid battery (traction
battery) will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least
once every few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes fully
discharged and you are unable to contact
your Lexus dealer.

■ Charging the 12-volt battery

→P.447
■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged

or when the terminal has been removed
and installed during exchange, etc.
The gasoline engine may not stop even if
the vehicle is being driven by the hybrid battery (traction battery). If this continues for a
few days, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a

hybrid vehicle
There may be no engine sound or vibration
even though the vehicle is able to move with
the “READY” indicator is illuminated. For
safety, apply the parking brake and make
sure to shift the shift position to P when
parked.
The following sounds or vibrations may
occur when the hybrid system is operating
and are not a malfunction:
● Motor sounds may be heard from the
engine compartment.
● Relay operating sounds such as a snap or
soft clank will be emitted from the hybrid
battery (traction battery), behind the rear

For safety and security

■ When braking (regenerative brak-

1-3. Hybrid system

seats, when the hybrid system is started
or stopped.
● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid
battery (traction battery) behind the rear
seats when the hybrid system starts or
stops.
● Sounds from the hybrid system may be
heard when the trunk lid is open.
● Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the gasoline engine starts or
stops, when driving at low speeds, or
during idling.
● Engine sounds may be heard when
accelerating sharply.
● Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is
depressed or as the accelerator pedal is
released.
● Vibration may be felt or sounds may be
heard when the gasoline engine starts or
stops.
● Cooling fan sounds may be heard from
the air intake vents on the both sides of
the rear seatback.
■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and dis-

posal
Contact your Lexus dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do
not dispose of the vehicle yourself.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

Vehicle proximity notification
system
When driving with the gasoline engine
stopped, a sound, which changes in
accordance with the driving speed, will
be played in order to warn people
nearby of the vehicle’s approach. The
sound will stop when the vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 15 mph (25
km/h).

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Vehicle proximity notification system

In the following cases, the vehicle proximity
notification system may be difficult for surrounding people to hear.
● In very noisy areas
● In the wind or the rain
Also, as the vehicle proximity notification
system is installed on the front of the vehicle,
it may be more difficult to hear from the rear
of the vehicle compared to the front.
■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

1-3. Hybrid system

Hybrid system precautions
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it is a high voltage system (about
650 V at maximum) as well as contains parts that become extremely hot when
the hybrid system is operating. Obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle.

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.
A Warning label
B Power control unit
C Electric motor (traction motor)
D Hybrid battery (traction battery)
E Service plug
F High voltage cables (orange)
G Air conditioning compressor
■ Running out of fuel

When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the
hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the
vehicle with at least enough gasoline to
make the low fuel level warning light
(→P.430) go off. If there is only a small
amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

System components

be able to start. (The standard amount of
fuel is about 3.4 gal. [13 L, 2.8 Imp. gal.],
when the vehicle is on a level surface. This
value may vary when the vehicle is on a
slope. Add extra fuel when the vehicle is
inclined.)
■ Electromagnetic waves
● High voltage parts and cables on hybrid

vehicles incorporate electromagnetic
shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline
powered vehicles or home electronic
appliances.
● Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio
parts.
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)

The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a
limited service life. The lifespan of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) can

1-3. Hybrid system

change in accordance with driving style and
driving conditions.
■ Starting the hybrid system in an

extremely cold environment
When the hybrid battery (traction battery)
is extremely cold (below approximately
-22°F [-30°C]) under the influence of the
outside temperature, it may not be possible
to start the hybrid system. In this case, try to
start the hybrid system again after the temperature of the hybrid battery increases due
to the outside temperature increase etc.
WARNING
■ High voltage precautions

This vehicle has high voltage DC and AC
systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC
and AC high voltage is very dangerous
and can cause severe burns and electric
shock that may result in death or serious
injury.
● Never touch, disassemble, remove or

replace the high voltage parts, cables
or their connectors.

● The hybrid system will become hot

after starting as the system uses high
voltage. Be careful of both the high
voltage and the high temperature, and
always obey the warning labels
attached to the vehicle.

● Never try to open the service plug

access hole located behind the rear
seat. The service plug is used only
when the vehicle is serviced and is
subject to high voltage.

● Stop the vehicle in a safe place to pre-

vent subsequent accidents. While
depressing the brake pedal, apply the
parking brake and shift the shift position to P to stop the hybrid system.
Then, slowly release the brake pedal.

● Do not touch the high voltage parts,

cables and connectors.

● If electric wires are exposed inside or

outside your vehicle, an electric shock
may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.

● Do not touch the battery if liquid is

leaking from or adhering to it.
If electrolyte (carbonate ester-based
organic electrolyte) from the hybrid
battery (traction battery) comes into
contact with the eyes or skin, it could
cause blindness or skin wounds. In the
unlikely event that it comes into contact with the eyes or skin, wash it off
immediately with a large amount of
water, and seek immediate medical
attention.

● If electrolyte is leaking from the hybrid

battery (traction battery), do not
approach the vehicle.
Even in the unlikely event that the
hybrid battery (traction battery) is
damaged, the internal construction of
the battery will prevent a large amount
of electrolyte from leaking out. However, any electrolyte that does leak out
will give off a vapor. This vapor is an
irritant to skin and eyes and could
cause acute poisoning if inhaled.

● Do not bring burning or high-tem-

perature items close to the electrolyte.
The electrolyte may ignite and cause a
fire.

● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle,

■ Road accident cautions

Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of death or serious injury:

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

leave the vehicle as soon as possible.
Never use a fire extinguisher that is not
meant for electric fires. Using even a
small amount of water may be dangerous.

1-3. Hybrid system
WARNING
● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do

so with four wheels raised. If the
wheels connected to the electric
motor (traction motor) are on the
ground when towing, the motor may
continue to generate electricity. This
may cause a fire. (→P.422)

● Carefully inspect the ground under the

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
● Your vehicle contains a sealed lith-

ium-ion battery.

● Never resell, hand over or modify the

hybrid battery. To prevent accidents,
hybrid batteries that have been
removed from a disposed vehicle are
collected through your Lexus dealer.
Do not dispose of the battery yourself.
Unless the battery is properly collected,
the following may occur, resulting in
death or serious injury:
• The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and it is hazardous to the environment or someone
may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• The hybrid battery is intended to be
used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle. If the hybrid battery is used outside
of your vehicle or modified in any way,
accidents such as electric shock, heat
generation, smoke generation, an
explosion and electrolyte leakage may
occur.
When reselling or handing over your
vehicle, the possibility of an accident is
extremely high because the person
receiving the vehicle may not be aware
of these dangers.
● If your vehicle is disposed of without

the hybrid battery having been
removed, there is a danger of serious
electric shock if high voltage parts,
cables and their connectors are
touched. In the event that your vehicle
must be disposed of, the hybrid battery
must be disposed of by your Lexus
dealer or a qualified service shop. If
the hybrid battery is not disposed of
properly, it may cause electric shock
that can result in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) air

intake vents
Do not carry large amounts of water
such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery
(traction battery), the battery may be
damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.

For safety and security

vehicle. If you find that liquid has
leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave
the vehicle as soon as possible.

1-3. Hybrid system

Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vents

● Do not get water or foreign materials

in the air intake vents as this may cause
a short circuit and damage the hybrid
battery (traction battery).

Emergency shut off system

There are air intake vents on each side
of the rear seatback with the purpose
of cooling the hybrid battery (traction
battery). If the vents become blocked,
hybrid battery output may be reduced.
NOTICE
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) air

intake vents
● Make sure not to block the air intake
vent with anything, such as a seat
cover, plastic cover, or luggage. If the
vents become blocked, the hybrid battery (traction battery) input and output
may be restricted, leading to a reduction in hybrid battery (traction battery)
output and a malfunction.

When a certain level of impact is
detected by the impact sensor, the
emergency shut off system blocks the
high voltage current and stops the fuel
pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency
shut off system activates, your vehicle
will not restart. To restart the hybrid
system, contact your Lexus dealer.

Hybrid warning message
A message is automatically displayed
when a malfunction occurs in the
hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.
If a warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the
message and follow the instructions.

● When dust etc. has accumulated in the

air intake vent, periodically clean it
with a vacuum cleaner to prevent the
vent from clogging.

● A filter is installed to the air intake vent.

When the filter remains noticeably
dirty even after cleaning the air intake
vent, filter cleaning or replacement is
recommended. When cleaning or
replacing the filter, contact your Lexus
dealer.
Refer to P.374 for details on how to
clean the filters.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ If a warning light comes on, a warning

message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is disconnected
The hybrid system may not start. In this
case, try to start the system again. If the
“READY” indicator does not come on, con-

1-3. Hybrid system

tact your Lexus dealer.

For safety and security

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-4. Theft deterrent system

1-4.Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system

The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
hybrid system from starting if a key
has not been previously registered
in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not
guarantee absolute security
against all vehicle thefts.

Operating the system

The indicator light flashes after the
power switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after
the power switch has been turned to
ACCESSORY or ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.
■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type
immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to

malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact
with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with
a built-in transponder chip) of another
vehicle

■ Certification for the immobilizer system
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-4. Theft deterrent system

 For vehicles sold in Canada

■ To ensure the system operates cor-

rectly
Do not modify or remove the system. If
modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

NOTICE

1-4. Theft deterrent system

Alarm
The alarm uses light and sound to
give an alert when an intrusion is
detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:
 A locked door or trunk is
unlocked or opened in any way
other than using the entry function, wireless remote control or
mechanical key. (The doors will
lock again automatically.)
 The hood is opened.

Setting/canceling/stopping the
alarm system
■ Items to check before locking the

vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of
the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure
of the following:
 Nobody is in the vehicle.
 The windows and moon roof are
closed before the alarm is set.

■ Canceling or stopping

Do one of the following to deactivate
or stop the alarms:
 Unlock the doors.
 Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or start the
hybrid system. (The alarm will be
deactivated or stopped after a few
seconds.)
■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type
alarm system.
■ Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following
situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm
system.)
● The trunk is opened using the mechanical
key.

 No valuables or other personal
items are left in the vehicle.
■ Setting

Close the doors, trunk and hood, and
lock all the doors. The system will be
set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from being on
to flashing when the system is set.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● A person inside the vehicle opens a door,

the trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle.

1-4. Theft deterrent system

● The 12-volt battery is recharged or

■ Alarm-operated door lock

In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically lock to
prevent improper entry into the vehicle:
● When a person remaining in the vehicle
unlocks the door and the alarm is activated.
● While the alarm is activated, a person
remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates cor-

rectly
Do not modify or remove the system. If
modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

replaced when the vehicle is locked.
(→P.450)

1-4. Theft deterrent system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information
and indicators

2-1. Instrument cluster
.

Warning lights and indicators
............................................................72
Gauges and meters (except F
SPORT models) ........................ 77

Multi-information display.......... 86
Head-up display ........................... 92
Energy monitor/consumption
screen ............................................ 96

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

Gauges and meters (F SPORT
models)........................................... 81

2-1. Instrument cluster

2-1.Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, center panel and
outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various
systems.

Warning lights and indicators displayed on the instrument cluster
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning lights
and indicators illuminated.


Except F SPORT models



F SPORT models

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems.

(red)

(yellow)

(→P.427)
Brake system warning light*1
(→P.427)
Brake system warning light*1
(→P.427)
High coolant temperature
warning light*2 (→P.427)
Charging system warning
light*2 (→P.428)
Low engine oil pressure warning light*2 (→P.428)

(orange)

(flashes)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp
(→P.428)

Malfunction indicator lamp*1
(→P.428)

(flashes)

SRS warning light (→P.428)
Pop Up Hood warning light*1
(→P.429)
ABS warning light*1 (→P.429)
(U.S.A.)

Electric power steering system
warning light*1 (→P.430)

(flashes)

(flashes or
illuminates)

LKA indicator (if equipped)
(→P.431)
Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator*1 (→P.432)
RCTA OFF indicator*1
(→P.432)
RCD OFF indicator (if
equipped) (→P.432)
PKSB OFF indicator*1
(→P.433)
PCS warning light*1 (→P.433)
Slip indicator*1 (→P.433)

ABS warning light (→P.429)
(Canada)
Brake Override System warning light/Drive-Start Control
warning light*2 (→P.429)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Parking brake indicator
(flashes) (→P.434)
(U.S.A.)

Vehicle status information and indicators

(red)
(Canada)

Electric power steering system
warning light*1 (→P.430)

Low fuel level warning light
(→P.430)
Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt reminder light
(→P.430)
Rear passengers’ seat belt
reminder lights*3 (→P.431)
Tire pressure warning light*1
(→P.431)
LTA indicator (if equipped)
(→P.431)

Brake system warning light*1
(U.S.A.)

2-1. Instrument cluster

Parking brake indicator
(flashes) (→P.434)
(Canada)

(flashes)

Brake hold operated indicator*1
(→P.434)

Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the
operating state of the vehicle’s various
systems.
Turn signal indicator (→P.180)

Master warning light*4
(→P.434)
*1:

These lights come on when the power
switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will go off after the hybrid
system is on, or after a few seconds.
There may be a malfunction in a system
if the lights do not come on, or go off.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.

Headlight indicator (→P.185)
(U.S.A.)
Tail light indicator (→P.185)
(Canada)
Headlight high beam indicator
(→P.186)
AHB indicator (→P.188)

*2: This light illuminates on the multi-infor-

PCS warning light*1, 2 (→P.212,
222)
Cruise control indicator
(→P.257)
Dynamic radar cruise control
indicator (→P.250)
Cruise control “SET” indicator
(→P.250)
LTA indicator (if equipped)
(→P.234)

mation display.
*3
*4

: This light illuminates on the center
panel.

: F SPORT models: This light comes on
when the power switch is turned to ON
mode to indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will go off after
the hybrid system is on, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in
a system if the lights do not come on, or
go off. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.

(white)

WARNING
■ If a safety system warning light does

not come on
Should a safety system light such as the
ABS and SRS warning light not come on
when you start the hybrid system, this
could mean that these systems are not
available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer immediately if this
occurs.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

(green)

LKA indicator (if equipped)
(→P.242)
LTA indicator (if equipped)
(→P.234)
LKA indicator (if equipped)
(→P.243)
LTA indicator (if equipped)
(→P.234)

(orange) LKA indicator (if equipped)
(flashes) (→P.243)

BSM outside rear view mirror
indicators*1, 3 (→P.260, 273)

2-1. Instrument cluster

BSM indicator (→P.260)
Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator*1, 2 (→P.267)
RCTA OFF indicator*1, 2
(→P.273)
RCD OFF indicator*2
(→P.277)
PKSB OFF indicator*1, 2
(→P.281)

(U.S.A.)
“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicator*1, 6 (→P.40)
(Canada)

 Drive mode indicators


(flashes)

VSC OFF indicator*1, 2
(→P.304)
High mode indicator (if
equipped) (→P.300)
Smart access system with
push-button start indicator*4
(→P.168)

Snow mode indicator (→P.177)
Normal mode indicator
(→P.298)
Custom mode indicator
(→P.298)
Comfort mode indicator
(→P.298)
Eco drive mode indicator
(→P.298)
Sport S mode indicator
(→P.298)
Sport S+ mode indicator
(→P.298)

“READY” indicator (→P.168)
EV drive mode indicator
(→P.172)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Parking brake indicator
(→P.181)
Parking brake indicator
(→P.181)
Brake hold standby indicator*1
(→P.183)
Brake hold operated indicator*1
(→P.183)
EV indicator (→P.59)
Low outside temperature indicator*5 (→P.77, 81)
Security indicator*6 (→P.66,
68)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Except F SPORT models



F SPORT models
Snow mode indicator (→P.177)
Normal mode indicator
(→P.298)
Custom mode indicator
(→P.298)
Comfort mode indicator
(→P.298)

Vehicle status information and indicators

Slip indicator*1 (→P.303)

“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicator*1, 6 (→P.40)

2-1. Instrument cluster
Eco drive mode indicator
(→P.298)
Sport S mode indicator
(→P.298)
Sport S+ mode indicator
(→P.298)

: These lights come on when the power
switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will go off after the hybrid
system is on, or after a few seconds.
There may be a malfunction in a system
if the lights do not come on, or go off.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.

*2: This light comes on when the system is

turned off.
*3
*4

: This light illuminates on the outside rear
view mirrors.

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

*5: When the outside temperature is

approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, this
indicator will flash for approximately 10
seconds, then stay on.
*6

: This light illuminates on the center
panel.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2-1. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters (except F SPORT models)
Meter display
■ Locations of gauges and meters

A Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
B Odometer and trip meter display (→P.79)
C Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C)
D Hybrid System Indicator
Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (→P.78)
This display changes to a tachometer depending on the driving mode, and can be set to
show the tachometer in any driving mode on the settings display. (→P.90, 298)
E Speedometer
F Clock
Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (→P.353)
G Shift position indicator (→P.176)
H Shift range/gear position (→P.174)
I Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
J Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (→P.86)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.

2-1. Instrument cluster

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (→P.437)
■ Hybrid System Indicator

operation and driving conditions are the
same.
■ Hybrid System Indicator is displayed

A Charge area

Shows regeneration* status.
Regenerated energy will be used to charge
the hybrid battery (traction battery).
B Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is not
being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically stop
and restart under various conditions.
C Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an
Eco-friendly manner.
By keeping the bar display within Eco area,
more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.
D Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is
being exceeded (during full power driving
etc.)
*

: When used in this manual, regeneration
refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into
electrical energy.

■ Engine speed

On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve
fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc.
There are times when the engine speed that
is displayed may differ even when vehicle

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

when
The Hybrid System Indicator is displayed in
the following situations:
● The shift position is in D or M.
● The driving mode is other than sport
mode.
However, the Hybrid System Indicator will
not be displayed when the analog and digital speedometers are both enabled on
of the multi-information display. (→P.90)
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the correct

outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer
than normal to change:
• When stopped, or driving at low speeds
(less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature has
changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of
a garage, tunnel, etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system
may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle
to your Lexus dealer.
■ Liquid crystal display

→P.87
■ Customization

The gauges and meters can be customized
on
of the multi-information display.
(→P.90)
WARNING
■ The information display at low tem-

peratures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm
up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display
changes may be delayed.

2-1. Instrument cluster
WARNING
For example, there is a lag between the
driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could
cause the driver to downshift again,
causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in
death or injury.

changed. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the switch
will reset the trip meter.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and

its components

tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.

● The engine may be overheating if the

engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and check the engine after it has
cooled completely. (→P.453)

Odometer and trip meter display
■ Display items

■ Pop-up display

Distance until the next engine oil
change will displayed when a warning
message indicating that oil maintenance should be performed soon or is
required is displayed.

Changing the instrument panel
light brightness
The brightness of the instrument panel
lights can be adjusted.

 Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.

 Trip meter A/trip meter B
Displays the distance the vehicle has been
driven since the meter was last reset. Trip
meters A and B can be used to record and
display different distances independently.

 Distance until next engine oil
change

1 Darker
2 Brighter

Displays the distance the vehicle can be
driven until an oil change is necessary.

■ Brightness of the meters (day mode and

■ Changing the display

Each time the “ODO TRIP” switch is
pressed, the displayed item will be

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

night mode)
The brightness of the meters changes
between day mode and night mode.
● Day mode: When the tail lights are off or

Vehicle status information and indicators

● Do not let the indicator needle of the

2-1. Instrument cluster

when the tail lights are on but the surrounding area is bright
● Night mode: When the tail lights are on
and the surrounding area is dark

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2-1. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters (F SPORT models)
Meter display
■ Locations of gauges and meters

When the main meter is moved to the right, some of the meter displays and the
gauge layout will change. (→P.85)


Main meter in center position
2

A Odometer and trip meter display (→P.84)
B Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
C Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C)
D Hybrid System Indicator
Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (→P.78)
This display changes to a tachometer depending on the driving mode, and can be set to
show the tachometer in any driving mode on the settings display. (→P.90, 298)
• Rev indicator (→P.83)
• Rev peak (→P.83)
E Shift position/shift range/gear position (→P.174)
F Speedometer
G Clock
Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (→P.353)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.

2-1. Instrument cluster

H Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
I Shift position indicator (→P.176)
J Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (→P.86)
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (→P.437)


Main meter moved to the right

The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.
A Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C)
B Clock
Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (→P.353)
C Hybrid System Indicator
Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (→P.78)
This display changes to a tachometer depending on the driving mode, and can be set to
show the tachometer in any driving mode on the settings display. (→P.90, 298)
• Rev indicator (→P.83)
• Rev peak (→P.83)
D Shift position/shift range/gear position (→P.174)
E Speedometer
F Shift position indicator (→P.176)
G Odometer and trip meter display (→P.84)
H Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2-1. Instrument cluster

I Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
J Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (→P.86)
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (→P.437)
■ Hybrid System Indicator

■ Rev indicator

When the engine speed reaches a set
speed or the red zone, a ring-shaped
indicator ( A ) will be displayed on the
tachometer.

A Charge area

Shows regeneration* status.
Regenerated energy will be used to charge
the hybrid battery (traction battery).

The engine speed at which the rev indicator will begin to be displayed can be set on
of the multi-information display.
(→P.90)

B Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is not
being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically stop
and restart under various conditions.
C Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an
Eco-friendly manner.
By keeping the bar display within Eco area,
more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.
D Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is
being exceeded (during full power driving
etc.)
*

: When used in this manual, regeneration
refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into
electrical energy.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Rev peak

When the engine speed reaches or
exceeds 4000 rpm, an afterimage of
the tachometer will be displayed at the
highest engine speed for approximately 1 second.

Vehicle status information and indicators

The indicators will be displayed in amber
when the engine speed reaches a set
speed, and in red when the engine speed
reaches the red zone.

2-1. Instrument cluster
WARNING
■ The information display at low tem-

■ Engine speed

when
The Hybrid System Indicator is displayed in
the following situations:
● The shift position is in D or M.
● The driving mode is other than sport
mode.
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the correct

For example, there is a lag between the
driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could
cause the driver to downshift again,
causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in
death or injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and

its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the
tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the

engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and check the engine after it has
cooled completely. (→P.453)

Odometer and trip meter display
■ Display items

 Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.

→P.87

 Trip meter A/trip meter B

■ Customization

Displays the distance the vehicle has been
driven since the meter was last reset. Trip
meters A and B can be used to record and
display different distances independently.

The gauges and meters can be customized
on
of the multi-information display.
(→P.90)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

 Distance until next engine oil

2-1. Instrument cluster

change
Displays the distance the vehicle can be
driven until an oil change is necessary.
■ Changing the display

Each time the “ODO TRIP” switch is
pressed, the displayed item will be
changed. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the switch
will reset the trip meter.

1 Darker
2 Brighter
■ Brightness of the meters (day mode and

night mode)
The brightness of the meters changes
between day mode and night mode.
● Day mode: When the tail lights are off or
when the tail lights are on but the surrounding area is bright
● Night mode: When the tail lights are on
and the surrounding area is dark

The display can be switched between
the center and side positions.

The distance until the next engine oil
change will displayed when a warning
message indicating that oil maintenance should be performed soon or is
required is displayed.

Changing the instrument panel
light brightness
The brightness of the instrument panel
lights can be adjusted.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

Changing the main meter location

■ Pop-up display

2-1. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display
Display and menu icons
■ Display (except F SPORT models)

By selecting menu icons on the
multi-information display, a variety of
driving-related information can be displayed. The multi-information display
can also be used to change display settings and other vehicle settings.
Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up
displays are also displayed in certain
situations.



Main meter moved to the right

■ Display (F SPORT models)


Main meter in center position

The multi-information display presents
the driver with a variety of driving-related information.
Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up
displays are also displayed in certain
situations.

■ Menu icons

The menu icons will be displayed by
pressing
or
trol switch.

of the meter con-

F SPORT models: The menu icons can be
displayed when the main meter is moved to
the right.
Driving information display
(→P.87)
Navigation system-linked display (if equipped) (→P.89)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2-1. Instrument cluster
Audio system-linked display
(→P.90)
Driving support system information display (→P.90)
Warning message display
(→P.437)
Settings display (→P.90)
■ Liquid crystal display

WARNING
■ Caution for use while driving
● When operating the multi-information

display while driving, pay extra attention to the safety of the area around the
vehicle.

● Do not look continuously at the

multi-information display while driving
as you may fail to see pedestrians,
objects on the road, etc. ahead of the
vehicle.

■ The information display at low tem-

peratures
→P.78, 84

Changing the meter display
The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches.

: Select menu icons

/ : Change displayed content, scroll up/down the screen and
move the cursor up/down
B Press: Enter/Set

Press and hold: Reset

C Move the main meter* and return

to the previous screen

F SPORT models

Content of driving information
■ Display items (except F SPORT

models)

Press

of the meter control

switch and select
or

. Then press

to display the following items:

 Drive information 1
 Drive information 2
 Energy monitor (→P.97)
 Tire pressure (→P.397)
 Vehicle sway warning
 Display off
■ Display items (F SPORT models)


Main meter in center position

Press
or
of the meter control
switch to display the following items:
 Drive information 1
 Drive information 2
 Tire pressure (→P.397)
 Gear positions
 Units
 Display off

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

Small spots or light spots may appear on the
display. This phenomenon is characteristic
of liquid crystal displays, and there is no
problem continuing to use the display.

2-1. Instrument cluster

 Driving support system information*
(→P.90)
*:

Can be selected when a driving support
system is enabled. (→P.230, 240, 250)



Main meter moved to the right

Press

of the meter control

switch and select
or

. Then press

to display the following items:

 Drive information 1
 Drive information 2
 Energy monitor (→P.97)
 G-force
 Gear Position
 Vehicle sway warning

 Average fuel economy
After reset: Displays average fuel consumption since the display was reset*1
After start: Displays average fuel consumption since hybrid system start
After refuel: Displays average fuel consumption since refuel

 Average vehicle speed
After reset: Displays average vehicle
speed since the display was reset*1
After start: Displays average vehicle speed
since hybrid system start

 Elapsed time
After reset: Displays elapsed time since the
display was reset*1

 Tire pressure (→P.397)

After start: Displays elapsed time since
hybrid system start

 Display off

 Distance

■ Drive information 1/Drive infor-

Driving range: Displays driving range with
remaining fuel*2, 3

Displays drive information such as the
following:

After start: Displays the distance driven
since hybrid system start

Use the displayed values as a reference
only.

Blank: No item

mation 2

 Drive information 1

 Other
*1:

• Current fuel consumption

press and hold
switch.

• Average fuel economy (after reset)

 Drive information 2

your average fuel consumption. As a
result, the actual distance that can be
driven may differ from that displayed.

• Average vehicle speed (after reset)

changed on

. (→P.90)

 Current fuel consumption
Bar type: Displays instantaneous current
fuel consumption

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

of the meter control

*2: This distance is computed based on

• Distance (driving range)

Displayed items (listed below) can be

To reset, display the desired item and

: When only a small amount of fuel is
added to the tank, the display may not
be updated.
When refueling, turn the power switch
off. If the vehicle is refueled without
turning the power switch off, the display

2-1. Instrument cluster
may not be updated.

turn amber and be held for 2 seconds.

■ G-force (F SPORT models)

■ Gear Position (F SPORT models)

Displays lateral G-forces on the vehicle. Also displays, around the periphery of the G-force display, the left and
right steering amount, accelerator
pedal input, and brake fluid pressure.

Displays the current shift range or gear
position when the shift position is in D
or M.
■ Units (F SPORT models)

The units of measure used can be
changed while driving.

■ Vehicle sway warning

A Acceleration G-force on the vehi-

cle

B Current G-force value (analyzed

value of front/rear and left/right
G-forces)

C Record of the maximum G-forces
D Accelerator pedal input
E Brake fluid pressure
F Steering amount

This display is intended for use as a guideline. Depending on factors such as the road
surface condition, temperature and vehicle
speed, the display may not show the actual
condition of the vehicle.

 Resetting the record of maximum
G-forces
Press and hold
of the meter control
switch to reset the record.

 Peak hold function
If lateral G-forces of 0.5 G or greater are
generated, the G-force value display will

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Detects the sway of the vehicle within a
lane, which is often associated with a
decrease in the driver’s attention level,
and displays the decrease in attention
using a bar display.
The shorter the bar length, the more
the driver may need to rest.
■ Vehicle sway warning

This display is enabled when the operating
conditions of the vehicle sway warning of
the LTA (→P.236) or LKA (→P.244) are
met.

Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.
 Route guidance to destination
 Compass display (heading-up display)
■ Route guidance to destination display

When the route guidance to destination
display is enabled on the head-up display, it

Vehicle status information and indicators

Unlike the units setting performed on the
settings display, the units setting performed on the drive information display
can be changed while driving.

2-1. Instrument cluster

will not be displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.94)

Audio system-linked display
Select to enable selection of an audio
source or track on the meter using the
meter control switches.

Driving support system information display
Select to display the operational status
of the following systems:
 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped) (→P.230)
 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) (if
equipped) (→P.240)
 Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range (→P.250)
 RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped) (→P.247)

Settings display
■ Meter display settings that can be

changed

 Language
Select to change the language displayed.

 Units
Select to change the units of measure displayed.

 Speedometer display (except F
SPORT models)

tion 2
Select to select up to 2 items (→P.88) that
will be displayed on each Drive information
screen (Drive information 1 screen and
Drive information 2 screen) respectively.

 Clock
Select to switch between 12-hour display
and 24-hour display.

 Pop-up display
Select to enable/disable pop-up displays
for each relevant system.

 Accent color
Select to change the accent color on the
screen, such as the cursor color.

 Tachometer setting
Select to set the display of the Hybrid System Indicator or tachometer for each driving mode.

 Rev indicator (F SPORT models)
• Select to enable/disable the rev indicator.
• Select to set the engine speed at which
the rev indicator (amber) will begin to be
displayed.

 Rev peak (F SPORT models)
Select to enable/disable the rev peak.

 EV indicator
Select to enable/disable the EV indicator.

 Default setting
Select to reset the meter display settings to
the default setting.
■ Vehicle functions and settings that

can be changed

Select to set the display of the speedometer to digital/analog/both digital and analog.

→P.481

 Drive information 1/Drive informa-

■ Suspension of the settings display
● Some settings cannot be changed while

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2-1. Instrument cluster
driving. When changing settings, park
the vehicle in a safe place.
● If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will be suspended.

sage will not be displayed.
■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

WARNING
■ Cautions during setting up the dis-

NOTICE
■ During setting up the display

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge,
ensure that the hybrid system is operating while setting up the display features.

Suggestion function
Displays suggestions to the driver in
the following situations. To select a
response to a displayed suggestion,
use the meter control switches.
■ Suggestion to turn off the head-

lights

If the headlights are left on for a certain
amount of time with the headlight
switch in
after the power switch
has been turned off, a suggestion message will be displayed asking if you
wish to turn the headlights off.
To turn the headlights off, select “Yes”.
If a front door is opened after the power
switch is turned off, this suggestion mes-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

play
As the hybrid system needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure
that the vehicle is parked in a place with
adequate ventilation. In a closed area
such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may
collect and enter the vehicle. This may
lead to death or a serious health hazard.

2-1. Instrument cluster

Head-up display*
*

: If equipped

The head-up display projects a variety of driving-related information and the
operating state of the driving support systems on the windshield.

System components

Illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is
actually displayed by the head-up display.
A Navigation system-linked display area (if equipped)
Displays the following items which are linked to the navigation system:
• Route guidance to destination
• Street name
• Compass (heading-up display)
B Driving support system display area (→P.95)
C Speed limit/RSA (Road Sign Assist) display area (if equipped)
Displays the following items:
• Speed limit of the current road (linked to the navigation system) (U.S.A. only)
• RSA (Road Sign Assist) display (→P.247)
D Outside temperature display area
E Driving information display area

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2-1. Instrument cluster

Displays the following items:
• Speedometer
• Shift position/shift range/gear position (→P.174)
F Hybrid System Indicator/tachometer display area (→P.96)
G HUD (Head-up display) switch
■ Head-up display will operate when

The power switch is in ON mode.
■ When using the head-up display

■ Street name display

Only street names which are included in the
map data will be displayed.
■ Outside temperature display
● When the ambient temperature is

approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the
low outside temperature indicator will
flash for approximately 10 seconds and
the outside temperature display will turn
off. In this case, the display will be displayed again when the outside temperature becomes approximately 41°F (5°C)
or higher.
● In the following situations, the correct
outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer
than normal to change:
• When stopped, or driving at low speeds
(less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature has
changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of
a garage, tunnel, etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system
may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle
to your Lexus dealer.

■ When using the head-up display
● Check that the position and brightness

of the head-up display image does not
interfere with safe driving. Incorrect
adjustment of the image’s position or
brightness may obstruct the driver’s
view and lead to an accident, resulting
in death or serious injury.

● Do not continuously look at the

head-up display while driving as you
may fail to see pedestrians, objects on
the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.
NOTICE

■ Head-up display projector
● Do not place any drinks near the

head-up display projector. If the projector gets wet, electrical malfunctions
may result.

● Do not place anything on or put stick-

ers onto the head-up display projector.
Doing so could interrupt head-up display indications.

● Do not touch the inside of the head-up

display projector or thrust sharp edges
or the like into the projector.
Doing so could cause mechanical malfunctions.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

The head-up display may seem dark or hard
to see when viewed through sunglasses,
especially polarized sunglasses. Adjust the
brightness of the head-up display or
remove your sunglasses.

WARNING

2-1. Instrument cluster

Using the head-up display

 Display angle

■ Enabling/disabling the head-up dis-

Select to adjust the angle of the head-up
display.

Press the HUD switch.

■ Enabling/disabling of the head-up dis-

play

play
If the head-up display is disabled, it will
remain disabled when the power switch is
turned off then back to ON mode.

■ Display brightness

The brightness of the head-up display can
be adjusted on
of the multi-information
display. Also, it is automatically adjusted
according to the ambient brightness.
■ Changing settings of the head-up

display

The following settings can be changed
on
of the multi-information display.
(→P.481)
 Brightness and vertical position of
the head-up display
Select to adjust the brightness or vertical
position of the head-up display.

 Hybrid System Indicator/tachometer
Select to display the Hybrid System Indicator, tachometer or no content.

 Display content
Select to enable/disable the following
items:
• Route guidance to destination/street
name
• Driving support system display*
• Compass (heading-up display)
• Audio system operation status
*

: Make sure to enable this display when
using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Head-up display automatic position

adjustment
If the display position is recorded into memory, the head-up display will be automatically adjusted to the desired position.
(→P.139)

■ When the 12-volt battery is discon-

nected
The customize settings of the head-up display will be reset.
WARNING
■ Caution for changing settings of the

head-up display
As the hybrid system needs to be operating while changing the settings of the
head-up display, ensure that the vehicle
is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful carbon
monoxide (CO) may collect and enter
the vehicle. This may lead to death or a
serious health hazard.
NOTICE

■ When changing the settings of the

head-up display
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge,
ensure that the hybrid system is operating while the changing the settings of the
head-up display.

2-1. Instrument cluster

Driving support system display
area
Displays the operational status of the
following systems:
 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped) (→P.230)
 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) (if
equipped) (→P.240)

Details of content displayed on the
head-up display may differ from that displayed on the multi-information display. For
details, refer to the explanation of each system.

Pop-up display
Pop-up displays for the following systems will be displayed when necessary.
■ Driving support systems

Displays a warning/suggestion/advice
message or the operating state of a relevant system.
 PCS (Pre-Collision System)
(→P.209, 220)
 FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) (if
equipped) (→P.227)
 Intuitive parking assist (→P.266)
 Parking Support Brake function (for
static objects) (→P.286)
 Brake Override System (→P.159)
 Drive-Start Control (→P.159)
Details of content displayed on the
head-up display may differ from that displayed on the multi-information display. For

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

details, refer to the explanation of each system.
■

icons

These icons are linked to the
multi-information display
: Master warning icon
Displayed when a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display.
(→P.437)

: Information icon
Displayed when a suggestion pop-up display (→P.91) or advice pop-up display is
displayed on the multi-information display.
■ Warning message

Some warning messages are displayed
when necessary, according to certain
conditions.
Details of content displayed on the
head-up display may differ from that displayed on the multi-information display.
■ Audio system operation status

Displayed when an audio remote control switch on the steering wheel is
operated.
■ Hands-free system status

Displayed when the hands-free system
is operated.
■ When a pop-up display is displayed

When a pop-up display is displayed, a current display may no longer be displayed. In
this case, the display will return after the
pop-up display disappears.

Vehicle status information and indicators

 Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range (→P.250)

2-1. Instrument cluster

Hybrid System Indicator/tachometer
■ Hybrid System Indicator

Energy monitor/consumption screen
The state of the hybrid system can
be viewed on the multi-information
display and Center Display.
The energy monitor or consumption screen can be displayed and
operated on the side display.

System components
A Charge area
B Hybrid Eco area
C Eco area
D Power area
Displayed content is the same as that displayed on the meter (Hybrid System Indicator). For details, refer to P.78 or P.83.
■ Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

A Multi-information display
B Center Display
C Meter control switches
D “MENU” button
E Touchpad

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2-1. Instrument cluster
displayed, select “Energy”.

Energy monitor

■ Multi-information display

■ Center Display

Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select
menu screen.

on the

If a screen other than “Energy Monitor” is

Press the

switch and select
or
display.

meter control
, and then press

to select the energy monitor

When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor (traction motor)
Center Display

Multi-information display

Center Display

Multi-information display

When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine
Center Display

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Multi-information display

Vehicle status information and indicators

When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor (traction
motor)

2-1. Instrument cluster

When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)
Center Display

Multi-information display

When there is no energy flow
Center Display

Multi-information display

These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)

status



Center Display

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

A Low
B High

2-1. Instrument cluster


Multi-information display

One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 5
symbols are shown.
E Average vehicle speed since the

hybrid system was started.

F Elapsed time since the hybrid sys-

tem was started.

G Cruising range

A Low

These images are examples only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.

The image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.

Consumption

■ History

■ Trip information

Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select
menu screen.

on the

If a screen other than “Trip Information”
is displayed, select “Trip Information”.

A Resetting the consumption data
B Fuel consumption in the past 15

minutes

C Current fuel consumption
D Regenerated energy in the past 15

minutes

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select
menu screen.

on the

If a screen other than “History” is displayed, select “History”.

A Best recorded fuel consumption
B Latest fuel consumption
C Previous fuel consumption record
D Resetting the history data
E Updating the latest fuel consump-

tion data

Vehicle status information and indicators

B High

Average fuel consumption for the past
15 minutes is divided by color into past
averages and averages attained since
the power switch was last turned to
ON mode. Use the displayed average
fuel consumption as a reference.

100

2-1. Instrument cluster

The average fuel consumption history
is divided by color into past averages
and the average fuel consumption
since the last updated. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a
reference.

■ Trip information (type A)

The image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
■ Updating the history data

Update the latest fuel consumption by
selecting “Clip” to measure the current fuel
consumption again.
■ Resetting the data

The fuel consumption data can be deleted
by selecting “Clear”.
■ Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance
that can be driven with the quantity of fuel
remaining.
This distance is computed based on your
average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be
driven may differ from that displayed.

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■ Trip information (type B)

Displays the cruising range, latest fuel
consumption and the amount of time
elapsed since the hybrid system was
started.

Using the side display
Display the vehicle information on the
side display (→P.317), and then select
or
to display the desired
screen.
The image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
Displays the average fuel consumption
and regenerated energy for the past 10
minutes in 1 minute intervals, as well as
the cruising range.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■ History

Displays the average fuel consumption
and highest fuel consumption.

2-1. Instrument cluster

101

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■ Energy monitor

Displays the hybrid system operation
and energy recovery states.
Displayed content is the same as that
displayed on the multi-information display. →P.88
2

Vehicle status information and indicators

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

102

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

103

Before driving

3-1. Key information
.

Keys .................................................104
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the
doors and trunk
Doors...............................................108
Trunk................................................. 112
Smart access system with
push-button start ...................... 119

3-3. Adjusting the seats
Power rear seat........................... 135
Driving position memory ........ 139
Rear seat position memory.... 143
Head restraints............................ 144
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and
mirrors
Steering wheel............................. 147
Inside rear view mirror.............148
Outside rear view mirrors...... 149
3-5. Opening, closing the windows
and moon roof
Power windows............................ 151
Moon roof ..................................... 153

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

Front seats.....................................128

104

3-1. Key information

3-1.Key information

Keys
The keys

The following keys are provided with
the vehicle.

key does not operate properly.
● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical
key, push down the lock release button
using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to
pull it out, use a coin etc.
● To store the mechanical key in the card
key, insert it while pressing the lock
release button.

● If the battery cover is not installed and the

battery falls out or if the battery was
removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal
facing the Lexus emblem.

A Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access system with
push-button start (→P.119)
• Operating the wireless remote control
function (→P.106)
B Mechanical keys
C Key number plate
D Card key (electronic key) (if

equipped)

Operating the smart access system with
push-button start (→P.119)
■ Card key (if equipped)
● The card key is not waterproof.
● The mechanical key that is stored inside

the card key should be used only if a
problem arises, such as when the card

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an
aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside
the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that
the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the
electronic key to emit radio waves that
could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.

(The card key battery life is about a year
and a half.)
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will
sound in the cabin and a message will be
shown on the multi-information display
when the hybrid system is stopped.

3-1. Key information
● To reduce key battery depletion when the

■ Replacing the battery

→P.413
■ Confirmation of the number of regis-

tered keys
The number of keys already registered to
the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.

■ If “A New Key has been Registered

Contact Your Dealer for Details” is
shown on the multi-information display
This message will be displayed each time
the driver’s door is opened when the doors
are unlocked from the outside for approximately 10 days after a new electronic key
has been registered.
If this message is displayed but you have not
had a new electronic key registered, ask
your Lexus dealer to check if an unknown
electronic key (other than those in your
possession) has been registered.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to

strong shocks or bend them.

● Do not expose the keys to high tem-

peratures for a long period of time.

● Do not get the keys wet or wash them

in an ultrasonic washer etc.

● Do not attach metallic or magnetic

materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.

● Do not disassemble the keys.

● Do not attach a sticker or anything else

to the surface of the electronic key.

● Do not place the keys near objects that

produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,
audio systems and induction cookers,
or medical electrical equipment, such
as low-frequency therapy equipment.

■ Carrying the electronic key on your

person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm)
or more away from electric appliances
that are turned on. Radio waves emitted
from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10
cm) of the electronic key may interfere
with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

■ In case of a smart access system with

push-button start malfunction or
other key-related problems
→P.445

■ When an electronic key is lost

→P.444
■ Handling the card key (if equipped)
● Do not apply excess force when insert-

ing the mechanical key into the card
key. Doing so may damage the card
key.

Before driving

electronic key is to not be used for long
periods of time, set the electronic key to
the battery-saving mode. (→P.120)
● As the electronic key always receives
radio waves, the battery will become
depleted even if the electronic key is not
used. The following symptoms indicate
that the electronic key battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P.413)
• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control
does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface
does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not
leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m)
of the following electrical appliances that
produce a magnetic field:
• TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and
battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless
phones
• Table lamps
• Induction cookers

105

106

3-1. Key information
NOTICE

● If the battery or card key terminals get

wet, the battery may corrode and the
card key may stop working.
If the key is dropped into water, or if
drinking water, etc. is spilled on the key,
immediately remove the battery cover
and wipe the battery and terminals. (To
remove the battery cover, lightly grasp
and pull it.) If the battery is corroded,
have your Lexus dealer replace the
battery.

A Locks the doors (→P.108)
B Unlocks the doors (→P.108)

● Do not crush the battery cover or use

a screwdriver to remove the battery
cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover
may bend or damage the key.

C Opens the windows and moon

roof* (→P.108)
D Opens the trunk (→P.115)

● If the battery cover is frequently

removed, the battery cover may
become loose.

● When installing the battery, make sure

to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong
direction may cause the battery to
deplete rapidly.

● The surface of the card key may be

damaged, or its coating may peel off in
the following situations:
• The card key is carried together with
hard objects, such as coins and keys.

E Sounds the alarm
*

: This setting must be customized at your
Lexus dealer.

■ Theft deterrent panic mode

When is pressed for longer than about one
second, an alarm will sound intermittently
and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any
person from trying to break into or damage
your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
electronic key.

• The card key is scraped with a sharp
object, such as the tip of a mechanical
pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped
with thinner or benzene.

Wireless remote control
The electronic keys are equipped with
the following wireless remote control:

Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key, push
the release button and take the key out.
The mechanical key can only be inserted in
one direction, as the key only has grooves
on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-1. Key information

107

a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt
to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it in
the electronic key. Carry the mechanical
key together with the electronic key. If the
electronic key battery is depleted or the
entry function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(→P.413)

Before driving

■ When required to leave the vehicle’s

key with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch off
(→P.118) and lock the glove box (→P.344)
as circumstances demand.
Remove the mechanical key for your own
use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.

■ If you lose your mechanical keys

→P.444
■ If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely, isolated
from the internal mechanism.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

108

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

3-2.Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Doors

■ Wireless remote control

Unlocking and locking the doors
from the outside
■ Smart access system with

push-button start

Carry the electronic key to enable this
function.
1 Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely locked.

2 Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s
door. Pressing the button again within 5
seconds unlocks the other door.
Press and hold to open the windows and
moon roof.*

1 Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Holding the
driver’s door handle for approximately 2 seconds unlocks all the
doors. Grip any passenger door
handle to unlock all the doors.*
Make sure to touch the sensor on the back
of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.
*:

The door unlock settings can be
changed.

2 Touch the lock sensor (indentation
on the upper part of the door handle) to lock all the doors.
Check that the door is securely locked.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

: This setting must be customized at your
Lexus dealer.

■ Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry
function unlocks using the wireless remote
control.
1 Turn the power switch off.
2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold
,
or
for approximately 5
seconds while pressing and holding
.
The setting changes each time an operation
is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release
the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and
repeat step 3.)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Multi-information
display/Beep

Unlocking function
Holding the driver’s
door handle unlocks
only the driver’s
door.

Exterior: Beeps 3
times

Holding any of the
passenger door
Interior: Pings once handles unlocks all
the doors.

the security feature automatically locks the
vehicle again.
■ When the doors cannot be locked by the

lock sensor on the upper part of the
door handle
When the doors cannot be locked even if
the lock sensor on the surface of the door
handle is touched by a finger, touch the lock
sensor with the palm.
If you are wearing gloves, remove them.

Holding a door handle unlocks all the
doors.

Interior: Pings once
To prevent unintended triggering of the
alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless
remote control and open and close a door
once after the settings have been changed.
(If a door is not opened within 60 seconds
after
is pressed, the doors will be
locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In a case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (→P.68)
■ Impact detection door lock release sys-

tem
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a
strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the
type of accident, however, the system may
not operate.

■ Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once;
Unlocked: twice)
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating.
■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately
60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked,

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Open door warning buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when
a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds
continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the
door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
■ Setting the alarm

Locking the doors will set the alarm system.
(→P.68)
■ Conditions affecting the operation of

the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control
→P.120

■ If the smart access system with

push-button start or the wireless remote
control does not operate properly
Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock
the doors. (→P.445)
Replace the key battery with a new one if it
is depleted. (→P.413)

■ If the 12-volt battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked and unlocked
using the smart access system with
push-button start or wireless remote control. Lock or unlock the doors using the
mechanical key. (→P.445)
■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.

Before driving

Exterior: Beeps
twice

109

110

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

(→P.481)
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident

Unlocking and locking the doors
from the inside
■ Door lock switches (to

lock/unlock)

Observe the following precautions while
driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door
opening and an occupant throwing out of
the vehicle, resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Ensure that all doors are properly

closed and locked.

● Do not pull the inside handle of the

doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front doors,
as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.

1 Locks all the doors
2 Unlocks all the doors

● Set the rear door child-protector locks

■ Inside lock buttons (to lock)

when children are seated in the rear
seats.

■ When opening or closing a door

Push down the inside lock button to
lock the door.

Check the surroundings of the vehicle
such as whether the vehicle is on an
incline, whether there is enough space
for a door to open and whether a strong
wind is blowing. When opening or closing the door, hold the door handle tightly
to prepare for any unpredictable movement.
■ Vehicle height control precautions

(vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension)
In the following situations, make sure to
check the safety of the area around the
vehicle, as the vehicle height may change
and part of someone’s body may be
caught in the vehicle, possibly causing
injury or the vehicle may be damaged.

■ Inside door handles (to unlock)


For the front doors

Pull the handle to unlock and open the
door.

● When opening a door

When the door is unlocked, the inside lock
button will pop up.

● When unlocking the doors using the



smart access system with push-button
start

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For the rear doors

Pull the handle to unlock the door. Pull
the handle a second time to open the
door.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
When the door is unlocked, the inside lock
button will pop up.

■ Locking the front doors from the outside

111

WARNING
■ Door closer

In the event that a door is left slightly
open, the door closer will automatically
close it to the fully closed position. It
takes several seconds before the door
easy closer begins to operate.
If the child-protector lock is set, the door
closer will not stop during operation even
if an attempt is made to open the door
from inside the vehicle. Be careful not to
catch fingers or anything else in the door.
Failure to do so may result in serious
injury.

without a key
1 Push down the inside lock button.
2 Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the power
switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or
the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
However, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Before driving

■ Door closer

In the event that a door is left slightly open,
the door closer will automatically close it to
the fully closed position.
● The door closer will operate regardless
of the power switch mode.
● The door closer will not function if the
door has been closed while pulling the
inside or outside door handle.
● The door can be opened by pulling the
inside or outside door handle, even when
the door closer is operating (except
when the lock button is in the lock position or the child-protector lock is set).
● A motor sound may be heard for several
seconds after the door closer closes the
door. This does not indicate a malfunction.

NOTICE
■ To prevent door closer malfunction

Do not frequently repeat opening and
closing of doors, or apply excessive force
to a door while the door closer is operating.

Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

■ Open door warning buzzer

If a door or the trunk is not fully closed, a
buzzer will sound when the vehicle speed
reaches 3 mph (5 km/h).
The open door(s) or trunk is indicated on
the multi-information display.

1 Unlock

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

112

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

2 Lock
These locks can be set to prevent children
from opening the rear doors. Push down
on each rear door switch to lock both rear
doors.

Automatic door locking and
unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or
canceled:
For instructions on customizing, refer to
P.481.
Function
Speed linked
door locking
function

Operation
All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) or higher.

All doors are automatiShift position
cally locked when the
linked door lock- shift position is shifted
ing function
to a position other than
P.
Shift position
linked door
unlocking function

All doors are automatically unlocked when
the shift position is
shifted to P.

Driver’s door
linked door
unlocking function

All doors are automatically unlocked when
driver’s door is opened
within approximately
45 seconds after turning the power switch
off.

Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the
trunk opener switch, entry function
or wireless remote control.
The trunk can be closed using the
trunk closer.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
■ Before driving
● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully

closed. If the trunk lid is not fully
closed, it may open unexpectedly
while driving and hit near-by objects or
luggage in the trunk may be thrown
out, causing an accident.

● Do not allow children to play in the

trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the
trunk, they could suffer from heat
exhaustion, suffocation or other injuries.

● Do not allow a child to open or close

the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to
open unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be
caught by the closing trunk lid.

■ Important points while driving

Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the
event of sudden braking or a collision,
they are susceptible to death or serious
injury.
■ Using the trunk

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the
body to be caught, resulting in serious
injury.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
WARNING
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow

and ice, from the trunk lid before
opening it. Failure to do so may cause
the trunk lid to suddenly shut again
after it is opened.

● When opening or closing the trunk lid,

thoroughly check to make sure the
surrounding area is safe.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure

they are safe and let them know that
the trunk is about to open or close.

● Use caution when opening or closing

the trunk lid in windy weather as it may
move abruptly in strong wind.
not opened fully. It is more difficult to
open or close the trunk lid on an
incline than on a level surface, so
beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly
opening or closing by itself. Make sure
that the trunk lid is fully open and
secure before using the trunk.

● When closing the trunk lid, make sure

to press it lightly on its outer surface. If
the trunk handle is used to fully close
the trunk lid, it may result in hands or
arms being caught.

● Do not attach any accessories other

than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk
lid. Such additional weight on the trunk
lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut
again after it is opened.

■ Trunk easy closer

In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly
open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It
takes several seconds before the trunk
easy closer begins to operate. Be careful
not to catch fingers or anything else in
the trunk lid, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries.

■ Power trunk opener and closer

Observe the following precautions when
operating the power trunk opener and
closer.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● When closing the trunk lid, take extra

care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.

● Check the safety of the surrounding

area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any
of your belongings to get caught.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure

they are safe and let them know that
the trunk is about to open or close.

● If the trunk closer switch is pressed

while the trunk lid is opening during
automatic operation, the trunk lid
stops opening. Take extra care when
on an incline, as the trunk lid may open
or close suddenly.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

● The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is

113

114

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
WARNING

● On an incline, the trunk lid may sud-

denly shut after it opens automatically.
Make sure the trunk lid is fully open
and secure before using the trunk.

● In the following situations, the power

trunk opener and closer may detect an
abnormality and automatic operation
may be stopped. In this case, the trunk
lid has to be operated manually. Take
extra care in this situation, as the
stopped trunk lid may suddenly shut,
causing an accident.
• When the trunk lid contacts an obstacle
• When the 12-volt battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the power
switch is turned to ON mode or the
hybrid system is started during automatic operation

● Do not attach any accessories other

than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk
lid. The power trunk opener and closer
may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the trunk lid may suddenly
shut again after it is opened.

■ Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if

equipped)
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.

● Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust

pipes to become quite hot. When
operating the Hands Free Power Trunk
Lid, be careful not to touch the exhaust
pipe.

● Do not operate the Hands Free Power

Trunk Lid if there is little space under
the rear bumper.

■ Jam protection function

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Never use any part of your body to

intentionally activate the jam protection function.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● The jam protection function may not

work if something gets caught just
before the trunk lid fully closes. Be
careful not to catch fingers or anything
else in the trunk lid.

● The jam protection function may not

work depending on the shape of the
object that is caught. Be careful not to
catch fingers or anything else.
NOTICE

■ To prevent trunk easy closer malfunc-

tions
Do not apply force to the trunk lid while
the trunk easy closer is operating.

■ To prevent damage to the power

trunk opener and closer
● Make sure that there is no luggage or
snow on the trunk lid before operating
the power trunk opener and closer. In
addition, make sure that there is no ice
between the trunk lid and frame that
prevents movement of the trunk lid.
Operating the power trunk opener
and closer when excessive load is
present on the trunk lid may cause a
malfunction.
● Do not apply excessive force to the

trunk lid while the power trunk opener
and closer is operating.

Opening/closing the trunk
■ Trunk opener switch

Press the trunk opener switch.
The trunk lid will fully open.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

115

If the button is pressed while the trunk lid is
opening, the trunk lid will stop moving.

■ Smart access system with

push-button start

While carrying the electronic key,
press the button.
The trunk lid will fully open.

When all the doors are unlocked using
one of the following methods, the trunk
can be opened without the electronic
key:
 Entry function

equipped)
1 While carrying an electronic key,
stand slightly away from the vehicle,
move a foot under the center of the
rear bumper and then pull it back.
The trunk lid will not start operating while a
foot is detected under the rear bumper.
If another electronic key for your vehicle is
in the vehicle, it may take slightly longer
than normal for the trunk lid to start operating.

 Wireless remote control
 Door lock switches
 Automatic door unlocking system
 Mechanical key

2 A buzzer will sound and the trunk
lid will fully open/close.

■ Wireless remote control

Press and hold the switch.
A buzzer will sound and the trunk lid will
fully open.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

If a foot is moved under the rear bumper
while the trunk lid is opening, the trunk lid
will stop moving.
If a foot is moved under the rear bumper
while the trunk lid is closing, the trunk lid
will open.
■ Trunk closer switch

Press the trunk closer switch.

Before driving

If the button is pressed while the trunk lid is
opening, the trunk lid will stop moving.

■ Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if

116

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

A buzzer will sound and the trunk lid will
fully close.
Pressing the switch while the trunk lid is
closing opens the trunk lid again.

■ Trunk grip

Using the trunk grip, pull down the
trunk lid without applying sideways
force and push the trunk lid down from
the outside to close it.

open the trunk to the half open position
or more and then close it.
■ Function to prevent the trunk being

locked with the electronic key inside
● When all doors are locked, closing the
trunk lid with the electronic key left inside
the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened
pressing the trunk release button on the
trunk lid.
● If the spare electronic key is put in the
trunk with all the doors locked, the key
confinement prevention function is activated so the trunk can be opened. In
order to prevent theft, take all electronic
keys with you when leaving the vehicle.
● If the electronic key is put in the trunk with
all the doors locked, the key may not be
detected depending on the location of
the key and the surrounding radio wave
conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the
trunk is closed. Make sure to check
where the key is before closing the trunk.
● The key confinement prevention function
cannot be activated if any one of the
doors is unlocked. In this case, open the
trunk using the trunk opener.
■ Hands Free Power Trunk Lid operating

■ Trunk lid light/trunk light
● The trunk lid light/trunk light turns on

when the trunk is opened.
● If the trunk lid light/trunk light is left on
when the power switch is turned off, the
light will go off automatically after 20
minutes.
■ Trunk easy closer

In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly
open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.
● The trunk easy closer will operate
regardless of the power switch mode.
● If the trunk easy closer does not operate,

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

conditions (if equipped)
The Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor) is enabled and the power switch is
turned off.

■ Overload protection function

The trunk lid will not operate when excessive load is present on the top of the trunk
lid.
■ Fall-down protection function

While the trunk lid is opening automatically,
applying excessive force to it will stop the
opening operation to prevent the trunk lid
from rapidly falling down.
■ Jam protection function

While the trunk lid is closing automatically,
the trunk lid will stop closing and open if
something gets caught.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Internal trunk release lever

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the
glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside
of the trunk lid to the side.
The lever will continue to glow for some
time after the trunk lid is closed.

■ Using the mechanical key

■ If the smart access system with

push-button start or the wireless remote
control does not operate properly
Use the mechanical key to unlock the trunk.
(→P.446)
Replace the key battery with a new one if it
is depleted. (→P.413)

■ Situations in which the Hands Free

Power Trunk Lid may operate unintentionally (if equipped)
In the following situations, the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid may operate unintentionally.
To prevent unintentional operation, do not
leave the electronic key in the trunk and
keep it out of the effective range (detection
area) or disable the Hands Free Power
Trunk Lid (kick sensor).
● When a large amount of water is applied
to the rear bumper, such as when the
vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain
● When dirt is wiped off the rear bumper
● When a small animal or small object, such
as a ball, moves under the rear bumper
● When an object is moved from under the

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

rear bumper
● When snow, etc. is removed from under
the rear bumper
● If someone is swinging their legs while sitting on the rear bumper
● If the legs or another part of someone’s
body contacts the rear bumper while
passing by the vehicle
● When the vehicle is parked near an electrical noise source which affects the sensitivity of the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid,
such as a pay parking spot, gas station,
electrically heated road, or fluorescent
light
● When the vehicle is near a TV tower,
electric power plant, radio station, large
display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical
noise
● When the vehicle is parked in a place
where objects, such as grass, move near
the rear bumper
● If luggage, etc. is set near the rear
bumper
● If accessories or a vehicle cover is
installed/removed near the rear bumper
● When the vehicle is being towed
■ Situations in which the Hands Free

Power Trunk Lid may not operate properly (if equipped)
● In the following situations, the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid may not operate properly:
• If the rear bumper is strongly hit with a
foot or is touched for a while
Make sure not to touch the rear bumper
with a foot when operating the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid.
If the rear bumper has been touched for a
while, wait for a short time before attempting to operate the Hands Free Power Trunk
Lid again.
• When an external radio wave source
interferes with the communication
between the electronic key and the vehicle (→P.120)
• When the vehicle is parked near an elec-

Before driving

The trunk can be also opened using the
mechanical key. (→P.446)
If the trunk is unlocked using the mechanical key, the power trunk lid and trunk easy
closer will not be operational. To return
them to an operational state, fully close the
trunk lid by hand.

117

118

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

trical noise source which affects the sensitivity of the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid,
such as a pay parking spot, gas station,
electrically heated road, or fluorescent
light
• When the vehicle is near a TV tower,
electric power plant, radio station, large
display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical
noise
• When a large amount of water is applied
to the rear bumper, such as when the
vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain
• When mud, snow, ice, etc. is attached to
the rear bumper
• When the vehicle has been parked for a
while near objects that may move under
the rear bumper, such as grass
• When an accessory is installed to the rear
bumper
Make sure to disable the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor) if an accessory is installed to the rear bumper.
● The Hands Free Power Trunk Lid will not

operate in the following situations:
• When an electronic key is not carried
• When an electronic key is not within the
effective range (detection area)

■ Open door warning buzzer

→P.111
■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

Luggage security system
The trunk opener switch can be temporarily disabled to protect luggage
stored in the trunk against theft.
Turn the main switch in the glove box
off to disable the trunk opener.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

A On
B Off

The trunk lid cannot be opened even with
the wireless remote control, entry function
or Hands Free Power Trunk Lid.
■ When leaving a key to the vehicle with a

parking attendant
→P.107

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart access system with
push-button start
The following operations can be
performed simply by carrying the
electronic key (including the card
key) on your person, for example in
your pocket. The driver should
always carry the electronic key.
 Locks and unlocks the doors
(→P.108)
 Opens the trunk (→P.115)

■ Antenna location

■ Effective range (areas within which the

electronic key is detected)

A When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the
electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m)
of an outside door handle. (Only the doors
detecting the key can be operated.)
B When opening the trunk

The system can be operated when the
electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m)
of the trunk release button.
C When starting the hybrid system or
changing power switch modes

The system can be operated when the
electronic key is inside the vehicle.
■ Alarms and warning messages

A Antennas outside the cabin
B Antennas inside the cabin
C Antenna inside the trunk
D Antenna outside the trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

An alarm sounds and warning messages
are displayed on the multi-information display to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from
erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take appropriate measures based on the displayed message.
(→P.437)
When only an alarm sounds, circumstances
and correction procedures are as follows.
● When an exterior alarm sounds once for
5 seconds

Before driving

 Starts the hybrid system
(→P.168)

119

120

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Situation

Correction
procedure

Close all of the
An attempt was made to
doors and lock
lock the vehicle while a
the doors
door was open.
again.
The trunk was closed
while the electronic key
was still inside the trunk
and all the doors were
locked.

Retrieve the
electronic key
from the trunk
and close the
trunk lid.

● When an interior alarm sounds continu-

ously

Situation

Correction
procedure

The power switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s Turn the power
switch off and
door was open (The
close the
driver’s door was opened
when the power switch driver’s door.
was in ACCESSORY
mode).
The power switch was
turned off while the
driver’s door was open.

take some time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an
area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the
outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or
longer.
• The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or
longer.
● If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or
longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at
any doors except the driver’s door. In this
case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or
the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
■ Turning an electronic key to bat-

tery-saving mode
When battery-saving mode is set, battery
depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press

twice while pressing and holding

. Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the
smart access system with push-button start
cannot be used. To cancel the function,
press any of the electronic key buttons.

Close the
driver’s door.

■ If “Key Detected in Vehicle” is shown on

the multi-information display
An attempt was made to lock the doors
using the smart access system with pushbutton start while the electronic key was still
inside the vehicle. Retrieve the electronic
key from the vehicle and lock the doors
again.

■ Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key
battery and the 12-volt battery from being
discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time.
● In the following situations, the smart
access system with push-button start may

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart access system with push-button
start uses weak radio waves. In the following
situations, the communication between the
electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote
control and immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: →P.445)
● When the electronic key battery is
depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant,
gas station, radio station, large display,

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the

effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors
are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or
in a high place, or too close to the center
of the rear bumper when the trunk is
opened.
• The electronic key is on the instrument
panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the
door pockets or glove box when the
hybrid system is started or power switch

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

modes are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of
the instrument panel or near the door
pockets when exiting the vehicle.
Depending on the radio wave reception
conditions, it may be detected by the
antenna outside the cabin and the doors
will become lockable from the outside,
possibly trapping the electronic key
inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the
effective range, the doors may be locked
or unlocked by anyone. However, only
the doors detecting the electronic key
can be used to unlock the vehicle.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the
vehicle, it may be possible to start the
hybrid system if the electronic key is near
the window.
● The doors may unlock or lock if a large
amount of water splashes on the door
handle, such as in the rain or in a car
wash, when the electronic key is within
the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately
60 seconds if the doors are not opened
and closed.)
● If the wireless remote control is used to
lock the doors when the electronic key is
near the vehicle, there is a possibility that
the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote
control to unlock the doors.)
● Touching the door lock sensor while
wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock
operation.
● When the lock operation is performed
using the lock sensor, recognition signals
will be shown up to two consecutive
times. After this, no recognition signals
will be given.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the
electronic key is within the effective
range, the door may lock and unlock
repeatedly. In this case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the
vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft.
(2 m) or more away from the vehicle.
(Take care to ensure that the key is not
stolen.)

Before driving

airport or other facility that generates
strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular
phone, cordless phone or other wireless
communication device
● When the electronic key is in contact
with, or is covered by the following metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil
inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio
waves) are being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key
together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a
wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital
assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or
metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
● When the electronic key is placed near a
battery charger or electronic devices
● When the vehicle is parked in a pay parking spot where radio waves are emitted.

121

122

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

• Set the electronic key to battery-saving
mode to disable the smart access system
with push-button start. (→P.120)
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle
and a door handle becomes wet during a
car wash, a message may be shown on
the multi-information display and a
buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To
turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work properly if
it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud,
etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to
operate it again.
● A sudden approach to the effective
range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case,
return the door handle to the original
position and check that the doors unlock
before pulling the door handle again.
● If there is another electronic key in the
detection area, it may take slightly longer
to unlock the doors after the door handle
is gripped.
■ When the vehicle is not driven for

extended periods

● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not

leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m)
of the vehicle.
● The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.
● Setting the electronic key to battery-saving mode helps to reduce key battery
depletion. (→P.120)
■ To operate the system properly
● Make sure to carry the electronic key

when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle
when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding
condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system
may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

● Do not leave the electronic key inside the

trunk.
The key confinement prevention function

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

may not operate, depending on the location of the key (the inside edge of the
Trunk), conditions (inside a metal bag,
close to metallic objects) and the radio
waves in the surrounding area. (→P.116)
■ If the smart access system with

push-button start does not operate
properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and
trunk: →P.445
● Starting the hybrid system: →P.446
■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)
■ If the smart access system with

push-button start has been deactivated
in a customized setting
● Locking and unlocking the doors and
opening the trunk:
Use the wireless remote control or
mechanical key. (→P.108, 115, 445)
● Starting the hybrid system and changing
power switch modes: →P.446
● Stopping the hybrid system: →P.170

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

123

■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

Before driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

124

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

125

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Before driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

126

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

127

WARNING
■ Caution regarding interference with

● Users of any electrical medical device

other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under
the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should keep
away from the smart access system
with push-button start antennas.
(→P.119)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the
entry function can be disabled. Ask
your Lexus dealer for details, such as
the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then,
consult your doctor to see if you
should disable the entry function.

128

3-3. Adjusting the seats

3-3.Adjusting the seats

Front seats
WARNING

■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat

position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving
seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat

or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become
jammed in the seat mechanism.

● Make sure to leave enough space

around the feet so they do not get
stuck.

■ Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap
belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may
slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your
neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while
driving as the seat may unexpectedly
move and cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.

■ When the front passenger’s seat is

folded forward
If the outside rear view mirror is difficult
to see, due to the position of the front
passenger’s seat, move the front passenger’s seat to an appropriate position.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the
vehicle and cause an accident, resulting
in death or serious injury.
NOTICE

■ Operating the front passenger’s seat

from the driver’s seat or rear seat
Before operating the front passenger’s
seat, make sure that there is no luggage
or any other objects on the seat or in the
footwell that could prevent its operation.
Such items may result in excess force
being applied, causing damage to the
seat and/or the luggage.

Adjustment procedure
■ Seat adjustment switches

■ Operating the front passenger’s seat

from the driver’s seat or rear seat
Do not operate the front passenger’s seat
when a passenger is seated in it. In addition, do not let anyone sit down in the
front passenger’s seat while the seat is
being operated or when the head
restraint is being folded. The front passenger may catch their legs between the
instrument panel and seat, or the head
restraint may interfere with their head,
resulting in injury.

A Seat position adjustment switch
B Seatback angle adjustment switch
C Seat cushion (front) angle adjust-

ment switch

D Vertical height adjustment switch

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats
E Lumbar support adjustment switch
F Seat cushion length adjustment

switch (if equipped)

■ Center Display

1 Press the seat switch.

129

G Hip support adjustment (if

equipped)

4 Perform adjustment using the displayed buttons.
The seat will move while a button is
selected.
■ When adjusting the front seats

While adjusting a front seat, to avoid contact with the ceiling, instrument panel or
rear seats, the operation of the seat may be
restricted or parts of the seat other than that
being adjusted may move.
■ Operation after the power switch is

3 Select the button for the desired
adjustment.

■ Automatic angle adjustment of the rear

displays (if equipped)
When a seat is adjusted, the angle of the
rear display will be adjusted automatically
to maintain an optimal viewing angle for the
rear display from the rear seat.

A Head restraint adjustment

(→P.144)

B Shoulder bolster adjustment (if

equipped)

C Lumbar support adjustment
D Pelvic support adjustment
E Seatback side bolster adjustment (if

equipped)

F Seat cushion side bolster adjust-

ment (if equipped)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Pre-collision seatbacks for the passen-

ger seats
→P.210, 220

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

Before driving

2 Using the Remote Touch pad,
select “Driver Seat Adjustment” or
“Passenger Seat Adjustment”.

turned off
After a certain time elapses after the power
switch is turned off, the following parts of
the front seats will move to their neutral
positions.
● Shoulder bolster (if equipped)
● Lumbar support
● Pelvic support
● Seatback side bolster (if equipped)
● Seat cushion side bolster (if equipped)
● Hip support (if equipped)

130

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Operating the front passenger’s
seat from the driver’s seat

■ Using the Center Display (vehicles

with a foldable head restraint)
1 Press the seat switch.

■ Using the driver’s seat adjustment

switches to adjust the front passenger’s seat (front passenger mode)

The mode of the driver’s seat adjustment switches can be changed to
adjust the front passenger’s seat.
1 Press the mode change button on
the driver’s side door.
The indicator A will illuminate when front
passenger mode is selected.

2 Press the sub function button of the
Remote Touch. (→P.314)
3 Select the button for the desired
operation.

2 Using the seat adjustment switches
on the driver’s seat, adjust the front
passenger’s seat.
To cancel front passenger mode, press the
mode change button again.
Front passenger mode will be canceled
automatically if the driver’s seat adjustment
switches are not operated for approximately 30 seconds.

A Moves the front passenger’s seat

forward and folds the seatback and
head restraint forward

B Moves the front passenger’s seat

backward and the seatback and
head restraint to the upright position

If the rear seat behind the front passenger’s
seat is not in the upright position, it will
move to the upright position before the
front passenger’s seat moves to its upright
position.
To stop the front passenger seat while it is
moving, select the A or B button or
press the seat switch.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Operating the foldable head restraint

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

ger mode:
• The power switch is in ACCESSORY
mode or off.
• The front passenger’s seat position is
moved to a position forward of the neutral position.
■ Operating the foldable head restraint

using the front passenger’s seat adjustment switches (if equipped)
When the front passenger’s head restraint is
folded forward and the front passenger’s
door is open, if the front passenger’s seat
adjustment switches are used to move the
seat backward or recline the seatback, the
head restraint will move to the upright position automatically when the switch is
released.
To stop the operation of the front passenger’s head restraint part-way, perform any
of the following operations:
● Operate any front passenger’s seat
adjustment switch.
The head restraint will stop when the seat
position adjustment switch or seatback
angle adjustment switch is operated to
move the seat backward or recline the
seatback, and will resume operating when
the switch is released.
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press the “1”, “2” or “3” button.
● Press the seat switch.
■ Operation of the front passenger’s seat

using the Center Display will be canceled when (vehicles with a foldable
head restraint)
In the following situations, the front passenger’s seat cannot be operated using the
Center Display:
● The power switch is in ACCESSORY
mode or off.
● The weight of an occupant or heavy
object, etc. is detected on the front passenger’s seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
front passenger’s door is opened then
closed or the power switch is turned off.

Before driving

using the driver’s seat adjustment
switches in front passenger mode (if
equipped)
● When the front passenger’s seatback
angle is adjusted using the driver’s seat
adjustment switches in front passenger
mode, the front passenger’s head
restraint will operate automatically as follows:
• When the front passenger’s seatback is
moved forward to the upright position,
the head restraint will lower and fold forward when the seatback angle adjustment switch is released.
• When the front passenger’s seatback is
moved backward to the upright position,
the head restraint will move to the upright
position when the seatback angle adjustment switch is released.
● If any of the following conditions are met,
the front passenger’s head restraint will
not fold forward even though the front
passenger’s seatback angle is being
adjusted using the driver’s seat adjustment switches in front passenger mode:
• The power switch is in ACCESSORY
mode or off.
• The weight of an occupant or heavy
object, etc. is detected on the front passenger’s seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
front passenger’s door is opened then
closed or the power switch is turned off.
• The front passenger’s seat belt is fastened.
• The front passenger’s door is open. (The
front seat will not move forward.)
• The front passenger’s seat is not in the
lowest position.
• The front passenger’s seat seat cushion
(front) is not in the lowest position.
• The front passenger’s seat seat cushion is
extended (if equipped).
● If either of the following conditions is met,
the front passenger’s head restraint will
not return to the upright position even
though the front passenger’s seatback
angle is being adjusted using the driver’s
seat adjustment switches in front passen-

131

132

3-3. Adjusting the seats

● The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-

tened.
● The front passenger’s door is open. (The
front seat will not move forward.)

When the operating conditions are not
met, the buttons will be grayed out.

■ When the front passenger’s seat is

folded forward
By reclining the front passenger’s seat seatback, the forward view of the rear passenger can be improved.

Operating the front passenger’s
seat from the rear seat (vehicles
without power rear seat)

A Move the front passenger’s seat

forward and fold the seatback forward.

On vehicles with a foldable head restraint,
the head restraint will also fold forward.
B Move the front passenger’s seat

backward and the seatback to the
upright position.

1 Press and hold to move the front
passenger’s seat forward and fold
the seatback forward.
2 Press and hold to move the front
passenger’s seat backward and
move the seatback to the upright
position.

Operating the front passenger’s
seat from the rear seat (vehicles
with power rear seat)
■ Automatic operation

1 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.
2 Touch the button for the desired
operation.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

If the rear seat behind the front passenger’s
seat is not in the upright position, it will
move to the upright position before the
front passenger’s seat moves to its previous
position.
On vehicles with a foldable head restraint,
the head restraint will also move to the
upright position.
To stop the front passenger seat while it is
moving, touch “STOP”.
■ Manual operation

1 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.
2 Touch “Right”

3-3. Adjusting the seats

3 Touch the button for the desired
operation.

133

closed or the power switch is turned off.
● The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-

tened.

● The front passenger’s door is open. (The

front seat will not move forward.)

■ When the front passenger’s seat is

folded forward
→P.132

Front seat refresh system (if
equipped)
A Touch and hold to move the front

passenger’s seat forward and fold
the seatback forward.

B Touch and hold to move the front

passenger’s seat backward and the
seatback to the upright position.

On vehicles with a foldable head restraint,
the head restraint will also move to the
upright position.
■ Operating the front passenger’s seat

from the rear seat
In the following situations, the front passenger’s seat cannot be operated using the
Rear Multi Operation Panel:
● The power switch is in ACCESSORY
mode or off.
● The rear seat belt is not fastened and
weight is not detected on the rear seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
rear door is opened then closed or the
power switch is turned off.
● The weight of an occupant or heavy

object, etc. is detected on the front passenger’s seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
front passenger’s door is opened then

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2 Using the Remote Touch pad,
select “Driver Seat Refresh” or
“Passenger Seat Refresh”.
3 Select the desired mode.
 “Centripetal”
Applies pressure sequentially from the
front of the seat cushion to top of the seatback

 “Centrifugal”
Applies pressure sequentially from the top
of the seatback to the front of the seat
cushion

 “Upper Body”

Before driving

On vehicles with a foldable head restraint,
the head restraint will also fold forward.

Pneumatic chambers built into the
front seat apply pressure to the occupant’s body at different modes and
intensities.
1 Press the seat switch.

134

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Applies pressure sequentially from the bottom to the top of the seatback

 “Lower Body”
Applies pressure sequentially from the
front to the back of the seat cushion

 “Lumbar”

■ Using the refresh system
● Those who are pregnant, have recently

given birth, or suffer from ailments
requiring rest (heart disease etc.)
should consult a doctor before use.

● Do not allow children to use the

refresh function.

Applies pressure sequentially from the bottom to the top of the lumbar area of the
seatback

● Do not use immediately after consum-

4 Select the desired intensity and
then confirm the setting.

● If you feel sick while using the refresh

The intensity can be adjusted in 5 steps.
To stop the operation select “Stop”.
If a seat is not occupied, do not operate the
front seat refresh system for that seat.
■ Refresh system
● Operating conditions

• The power switch is in ON mode.
• The temperature in the cabin is not
extremely high.
• For the front passenger’s seat: The weight
of an occupant is detected on the front
passenger’s seat or the front passenger’s
seat belt is fastened.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
front passenger’s door is opened then
closed or the power switch is turned off.

● Automatic stop function

• The operation will be canceled automatically after approximately 15 minutes.
• If the power easy access system begins
operating, the front seat refresh system
will stop.
WARNING
■ Important points while driving

Do not adjust the driver’s seat refresh
system while driving.
Using it may affect your ability to control
the vehicle, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

ing a meal or alcohol, or for an
extended period of time.

function, immediately discontinue use.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Power rear seat*
*

: If equipped
WARNING

■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat

position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving
seat.

● When adjusting the rear seat with an

ottoman, make sure there is sufficient
space so that a foot does not get
caught between the ottoman and front
passenger seat. (If equipped)
system: When the rear seat is moving
to the Entertainment Mode position,
do not allow hands near the rear display. Otherwise, a hand or finger may
be caught, possibly causing injury.

■ Seat adjustment

If someone sits on the ottoman, the seat
belt cannot be fitted properly, and they
may be thrown from the seat, resulting in
death or serious injury in the event of an
accident or sudden braking.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● When getting in or out of the vehicle,

retract the ottoman. If the ottoman is
not retracted, it may cause a fall, resulting in injury.

● Do not operate the ottoman when the

vehicle is moving.

● Do not allow anyone to put their hands

or feet under the rear seat when stowing the ottoman.
NOTICE

■ To prevent an ottoman malfunction (if

equipped)
● Do not place any objects in the rear
seat footwell that could prevent the
operation of the ottoman.
● Do not place heavy luggage on the

ottoman.

● Do not place any objects under the

ottoman while it is raised for use. These
objects may interfere with the ottoman
being folded, causing damage to the
ottoman or the objects themselves.

■ To prevent a rear display malfunction

(if equipped)
Do not attempt to move the rear display
by hand, as doing so may damage the
rear display.

Adjustment procedure
■ Manual operation

1 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.
2 Touch “Left” or “Right”.

Before driving

● Vehicle with rear seat entertainment

135

136

3-3. Adjusting the seats

3 Select the button for the desired
adjustment.

met, the preset buttons will be grayed out.

A Moves the left-hand rear seat to the
A Head restraint adjustment

(→P.144)

B Shoulder bolster adjustment
C Lumbar/pelvic support adjustment
D Seatback angle adjustment
E Seat cushion (front) angle adjust-

ment

F Ottoman adjustment (if equipped)

4 Perform adjustment using the displayed buttons.
The seat will move while a button is
touched.
■ Automatic operation

The seat can be moved to preset positions.
1 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.
2 Touch the desired preset button.
When the operating conditions are not

upright position (Business Mode)

B Moves the right-hand rear seat to

the upright position (Business
Mode)

C Moves the rear seat with an otto-

man to a slightly reclined position
(Entertainment Mode) (if
equipped)

Vehicle without rear seat entertainment
system: Moves the front passenger’s seat
forward.
Vehicle with rear seat entertainment system: Moves the front passenger’s seat and
rear display to allow the rear display to be
comfortably viewed.
D Moves the rear seat with an otto-

man to a deeply reclined position
(Relaxation Mode) (if equipped)

Moves the front passenger’s seat forward
and folds the seatback and head restraint
forward.
To stop the front passenger seat while it is
moving, touch “STOP”.
■ Adjustment of the rear seat

When a rear seat is close to a front seat, the
operation of the rear seat may be restricted.
■ Operating conditions of Business Mode

When the rear seat belt is not fastened and

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats
weight is not detected on the rear seat,
Business Mode cannot be selected.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
rear door is opened then closed or the
power switch is turned off.
■ The rear seat with an ottoman cannot be

● The weight of an occupant or heavy

object, etc. is detected on the front passenger’s seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
front passenger’s door is opened then
closed or the power switch is turned off.

● The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-

tened.

● The front passenger’s door is open.
■ When the front passenger’s seat is

folded forward
→P.132

■ Automatic angle adjustment of the rear

displays (if equipped)
When a seat is adjusted, the angle of the
rear display will be adjusted automatically
to maintain an optimal viewing angle for the
rear display from the rear seat.

■ Operation after the power switch is

turned off
After a certain time elapses after the power
switch is turned off, the following parts of
the rear seats will move to their neutral
positions.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Shoulder bolster
● Lumbar/pelvic support
■ Seat return function linked to the door

opening operation
The rear seat will return to the upright position automatically when the rear door is
opened for easier entry and exit of the vehicle.
For the rear seat with an ottoman (if
equipped): When the rear door on the side
with the rear seat with an ottoman is
opened, the seatback of the rear seat with
an ottoman will move to a more upright
position. The seatback will move to the
upright position after the door is closed and
the system determines that the rear passenger has exited.
However, if the armrest is stowed, the rear
seat will not move.

■ Shift-linked rear seat reclining function

When the shift position is shifted from P, to
enhance rear visibility for the driver, the rear
seats will recline slightly.
However, the shift-linked rear seat reclining
function will not operate in the following situations:
● The weight of an occupant or heavy
object, etc. is detected on a rear seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
rear door is opened then closed or the
power switch is turned off.
● A rear seat belt is fastened.
● A rear door is open.
● The armrest is stowed.

When a front seat is close to a rear seat, the
rear seats may not operate or the range of
movement may be restricted.
■ Pre-collision seatbacks for the passen-

ger seats
→P.210, 220

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

Before driving

moved to Entertainment Mode/Relaxation Mode when (if equipped)
In the following situations, Entertainment
Mode or Relaxation Mode cannot be
selected:
● The power switch is in ACCESSORY
mode or off.
● The rear seat belt is not fastened and
weight is not detected on the rear seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
rear door is opened then closed or the
power switch is turned off.

137

138

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Returning the rear seat from the
front seats
1 Press the seat switch.

WARNING
■ When returning the rear seats to the

neutral position
To avoid injuring the rear passengers,
wait until they have gotten out of the
vehicle before operating the switch.

Rear seat relaxation system (if
equipped)

2 Press the sub function button of the
Remote Touch. (→P.314)
3 Select A .
The rear seat will move to the upright position.

■ Operation of the rear seats from the

front seats
In the following situations, the rear seats
cannot be operated from the front seats.
● When the armrest is stowed and weight
of an occupant, heavy object, etc. is
detected on a rear seat
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
rear door is opened then closed or the
power switch is turned off.
● When the armrest is stowed and a rear

seat belt is fastened.

The rear seat relaxation system utilizes
pneumatic chambers and dedicated
heaters, and applies pressure to the
occupant’s body at different modes
and intensities.
To display the rear seat relaxation system screen, display the home screen
on the Rear Multi Operation Panel
(→P.318) and then touch “Relaxation”.

A Touch to select the desired rear

seat.

B Touch to select the desired mode.
When a button is touched, operation will
begin.
C Touch to adjust the intensity.
The intensity can be adjusted in 5 steps.
D Touch to turn the spot heaters

on/off.

E Touch to stop the operation.

If a seat is not occupied, do not operate the

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats
rear seat relaxation system for that seat.
■ Relaxation system
● Operating conditions

• The power switch is in ON mode.
• The temperature in the cabin is not
extremely high.
• The weight of an occupant is detected on
the rear seat or the rear seat belt is fastened.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
rear door is opened then closed or the
power switch is turned off.

● Automatic stop function

WARNING
■ Using the relaxation system
● Those who are pregnant, have recently

given birth, or suffer from ailments
requiring rest (heart disease etc.)
should consult a doctor before use.

● Do not allow children to use the relax-

ation function.

● Do not use immediately after consum-

ing a meal or alcohol, or for an
extended period of time.

● If you feel sick while using the relax-

ation function, immediately discontinue use.

Driving position memory
This feature automatically adjusts
the positions of the front seats,
steering wheel, outside rear view
mirrors and head-up display (if
equipped) to make entering and
exiting the vehicle easier or to suit
your preferences.
Up to 3 different driving positions
can be recorded.
Each electronic key (including a
card key) can be registered to
recall your preferred driving position.

Power easy access system
The seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to allow the driver to
enter and exit the vehicle easily.


Driver’s seat

When all of the following have been
performed, the seat and steering
wheel are automatically adjusted to a
position that allows driver to enter and
exit the vehicle easily.
• The shift position has been shifted to
P.
• The power switch has been turned
off.
• The driver’s seat belt has been
unfastened.
When the driver’s seat adjustment
switches are in front passenger mode
(→P.130), the seat and steering wheel will
not move.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

• The operation will be canceled automatically after approximately 15 minutes.
• If the door for a seat that the relaxation
system is currently being used is opened,
the relaxation system will stop operating.

139

140

3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Operation of the power easy access sys-

On vehicles with adjustable seat cushion side bolsters, when the driver’s
door is opened with the power switch
off, the seat cushion side bolsters will
lower if they are in the default position.
When any of the following has been
performed, the seat and steering
wheel automatically return to their
original positions.
• The power switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY mode or ON
mode.
• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.


Front passenger’s seat

If all of the following have been performed while the vehicle is stopped,
the lumbar support, pelvic support,
shoulder bolster (if equipped), seatback side bolster (if equipped), and hip
support (if equipped) will be moved to
their default position. On vehicles with
adjustable seat cushion side bolsters,
the seat cushion side bolsters will
lower.
• The passenger’s seat belt has been
unfastened.
• The front passenger’s door is
opened.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

tem
● When exiting the vehicle, the power easy
access system may not operate if the seat
is already in the rearmost or uppermost
position or close to the rear seat.
● If the seat position is adjusted during
power easy access system operation, the
automatic operation will stop. (The seat
will change to manual operation.)
● If the seat position is adjusted during or
after the power easy access system operation when the driver is exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system will not
operate when entering the vehicle.
■ Seat cushion side bolster adjustment (if

equipped)
If the seat cushion side bolsters have been
lowered, when the front door is closed, the
seat cushion side bolsters will move to their
default position.
If the seat is adjusted while the seat cushion
side bolsters are moving to the default position, their movement will be temporarily
suspended. (The seat cushion side bolsters
will move to the default position after a certain amount of time.)

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

Recording a driving position into
memory
1 Turn the power switch to ON
mode.
2 Check that the shift position is in P.
3 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering
wheel, outside rear view mirrors
and head-up display (if equipped)
to the desired positions.
4 While pressing the “SET” button, or
within 3 seconds after the “SET”

3-3. Adjusting the seats

button is pressed, press button “1”,
“2” or “3” until the buzzer sounds.
If the selected button has already been
preset, the previously recorded position
will be overwritten.
When the driver’s seat adjustment
switches are in front passenger mode
(→P.130), the position of the driver’s seat
cannot be registered.

141

3 Press one of the buttons for the
driving position you want to recall
until the buzzer sounds.
When the driver’s seat adjustment
switches are in front passenger mode
(→P.130), a driving position cannot be
recalled.

■ In order to correctly use the driving

position memory function
If a seat position is already in the furthest
possible position and the seat is operated in
the same direction, the recorded position
may be slightly different when it is recalled.
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that
the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the
steering wheel.

Recalling a driving position
1 Turn the power switch to ON
mode.
2 Check that the shift position is in P.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

part-way through
Perform any of the following operations:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Press the mode change button.
● Operate any of the seat adjustment
switches (only cancels seat position
recall).
● Operate the tilt and telescopic steering
control switch (only cancels steering
wheel position recall).
■ Recalling a driving position

If a driving position is recalled, the movement of the front seat may be stopped partway if the seat moves close to the rear seat.
If a rear passenger is determined to be in
the vehicle, the rearward movement of the
front seat may be stopped partway to
ensure sufficient space for the rear passenger.
■ Recalling the front passenger’s seat

position (vehicles with a rear seat with
an ottoman)
If the ottoman of the rear seat is extended,
the front passenger’s seat position cannot
be recalled.

Before driving

To record the position of the front passenger’s seat, adjust the front passenger’s seat to the desired position and
perform step 4 using the buttons on
the front passenger’s side.

■ To stop the position recall operation

142

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ Operating the driving position memory

after turning the power switch off
Driver’s seat:
Recorded seat positions can be activated
up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is
opened and another 60 seconds after it is
closed again.
Front passenger’s seat:
Recorded seat positions can be recalled up
to 180 seconds after the front passenger’s
door is opened.

Registering/canceling/recall a
driving position to an electronic
key (including a card key) (memory recall function)
■ Registering procedure

Record your driving position to button
“1”, “2” or “3” before performing the
following:
Carry only the key you want to register,
and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the
driving position cannot be recorded
properly.
1 Turn the power switch to ON
mode.
2 Check that the shift position is in P.
3 Recall the driving position that you
want to record.
4 While pressing the recalled button,
press and hold the door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the
buzzer sounds.
If the button could not be registered, the
buzzer sounds continuously for approxi-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

mately 3 seconds.

■ Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key you want to cancel
and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the
driving position cannot be canceled
properly.
1 Turn the power switch to ON
mode.
2 Check that the shift position is in P.
3 While pressing the “SET” button,
press and hold the door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the
buzzer sounds twice.
If the button could not be canceled, the
buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.
■ Recall procedure

1 Make sure that the doors are
locked before recalling the driving
position. Carry the electronic key
that has been registered to the driving position, and then unlock and
open the driver’s door using the
smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control.
The driving position will move to the
recorded position (not including the steering wheel and head-up display [if
equipped]). However, the seat will move to
a position slightly behind the recorded
position in order to make entering the vehi-

3-3. Adjusting the seats
cle easier.
If the driving position is in a position that
has already been recorded, the seat and
outside rear view mirrors will not move.

2 Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode or ON mode, or fasten a seat belt.
The seat, steering wheel and head-up display (if equipped) will move to the
recorded position.
■ Recalling the driving position using the

143

Rear seat position memory*
*

: If equipped

The rear seat position can be memorized and recalled with the touch
of a button.

Recording a position into memory
1 Turn the power switch to ON
mode.

■ Customization

5 Touch “1” or “2”.

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

If the preset is being used, the previously
recorded seat position will be overwritten.

2 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.
3 Touch “Left” or “Right”.
4 Adjust the rear seat to the desired
position and then touch “Set Memory”.

■ In order to correctly use the position

memory function
If a seat position is already in the furthest
possible position and the seat is operated in
the same direction, the recorded position
may be slightly different when it is recalled.
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that
the rear passengers do not strike the
front seats.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

memory recall function
● Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore,
the driving position that is recalled may
be different depending on the key being
carried.
● If a door other than the driver’s door is
unlocked with the smart access system
with push-button start, the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press
the driving position button which has
been set.

144

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Recalling the memorized position
1 Turn the power switch to ON
mode.
2 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.
3 Touch “1” or “2”.
When the operating conditions are not
met, the buttons will be grayed out.
To stop the operation touch “STOP”.
If the seat is adjusted while a memorized
position is being recalled, the automatic
operation will stop. (The seat will change to
manual operation.)

Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all
seats.
Vehicles with power rear seat: The
head restraint for the rear center
seat is integrated into the seatback
and cannot be adjusted.
WARNING
■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions
regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious
injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for

each respective seat.

■ Operating condition

The weight of an occupant is detected on
the rear seat or the rear seat belt is fastened.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
rear door is opened then closed or the
power switch is turned off.

● Adjust the head restraints to the cor-

rect position at all times.

● Manual type: After adjusting the head

restraints, push down on them and
make sure they are locked in position.

● Do not drive with the head restraints

removed.

■ Recalling a rear seat position

If a memorized rear seat position is recalled,
the seat may stop part-way to ensure sufficient space for the rear passenger.
■ Recalling the ottoman position (if

equipped)
When a seat position is recalled, the ottoman will not raise or extend. The ottoman
position can only be recalled if the memorized position is lower and shorter than the
current position.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Adjusting a head restraint vertically and horizontally (power
head restraints)
Front seats
1 Press the seat switch.


3-3. Adjusting the seats

2 Using the Remote Touch pad,
select “Driver Seat Adjustment” or
“Passenger Seat Adjustment”.
3 Select A then the desired adjustment button B , C , D , or E to
adjust the head restraint.

145

B Up
C Backward
D Down
E Forward

The head restraint moves while the adjustment button is touched.

Adjusting a head restraint vertically (manual head restraints)
3

Before driving

B Up
C Backward
D Down
E Forward

1 Up

The head restraint moves while the adjustment button is selected.

Pull the head restraints up.

Rear seats
1 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button A .



2 Touch “Left” or “Right”.
3 Touch A then the desired adjustment button B , C , D , or E to
adjust the head restraint.

2 Down

■ Front seat head restraints (power head

restraints)
Depending on the position of the front seat,
the front head restraint may not be able to
be adjusted upward if it is close to the ceiling.

■ Adjusting the height of the head

restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

146

3-3. Adjusting the seats

adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraints

(manual head restraints)
Always raise the head restraint one level
from the stowed position when using.

Adjusting the side supports (if
equipped)
Push the sides of the head restraint.

Removing the head restraints
(manual head restraints)
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button A .

■ Removing the head restraints (power

head restraints)
For removal and installation of the head
restraint, contact your Lexus dealer.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Installing the head restraints
(manual head restraints)
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the
lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button
A when lowering the head restraint.

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

147

3-4.Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure

Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:

WARNING
■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Sounding the horn
Press on or close to the

mark.
3

Up
Down
Toward the driver
Away from the driver

■ The steering wheel can be adjusted

when
The power switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode*.
*: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the
steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of power switch mode.
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering

position
A desired steering position can be entered
to memory and recalled automatically by
the driving position memory system.
(→P.139)

■ Power easy access system

The steering wheel and driver’s seat move
in accordance with power switch mode and
the driver’s seat belt condition. (→P.139)
■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

1
2
3
4

148

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s position can
be adjusted to enable sufficient
confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view
mirror

When the automatic anti-glare function is
in ON mode, the indicator A illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode each
time the power switch is turned to ON
mode.
Pressing the button turns the function to
OFF mode. (The indicator A also turns
off.)

The height of the rear view mirror can
be adjusted to suit your driving posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.
■ To prevent sensor error

To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.

WARNING
■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror
while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the
vehicle and cause an accident, resulting
in death or serious injury.

Anti-glare function
Responding to the level of brightness
of the headlights of vehicles behind, the
reflected light is automatically
reduced.
Turn the automatic anti-glare function
mode on/off

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Outside rear view mirrors

149

2 To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.

The rear view mirror’s position can
be adjusted to enable sufficient
confirmation of the rear view.
WARNING
■ Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while
driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Both the driver and passenger side

mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

Adjustment procedure
1 To select a mirror to adjust, press
the switch.
The indicator comes on.

B Right
C Down
D Left
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode.
■ Defogging the mirrors

The outside rear view mirrors can be
cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on
the rear window defogger to turn on the
outside rear view mirror defoggers.
(→P.324)
■ Auto anti-glare function

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror
is set to automatic mode, the outside rear
view mirrors will activate in conjunction with
the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to
reduce reflected light. (→P.148)
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror

A Left

angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered
to memory and recalled automatically by
the driving position memory. (→P.139)

B Right

■ Linked mirror function when reversing

Pressing the same switch again will put the
switch in neutral.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select
switch is selected, the outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards
when the vehicle is reversing in order to
give a better view of the ground.
To disable this function, select neither “L”

Before driving

● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

A Up

150

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

nor “R”.
To set the mirror angle used when the vehicle is reversing, adjust the mirror angle at a
desired position with the shift position in R.
The adjusted angle will be memorized and
the mirror will automatically tilt to the memorized angle whenever the shift position is
shifted to R from next time.
The memorized downward tilt position of
the mirror is linked to the normal position
(angle adjusted with the shift position in
other than R). Therefore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt
position will also change.
When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing.

locking/unlocking of the doors.
Press the “AUTO” switch to set automatic mode.
The indicator A will come on.
Pressing the switch once more will return
to manual mode.

WARNING
■ When the mirror defoggers are oper-

ating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.

Folding and extending the mirrors
■ Using the switch

Press the switch to fold the mirrors.
Press it again to extend them to the original
position.

■ When disconnecting and reconnecting

12-volt battery terminals
The automatic folding/extending mirror
function will return to off as default. To turn
the function on, press the switch again to
select on.

■ Using automatic mode in cold weather

When automatic mode is used in cold
weather, the door mirror could freeze up
and automatic stowing and return may not
be possible. In this case, remove any ice and
snow from the door mirror, then either
operate the mirror using manual mode or
move the mirror by hand.
■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)
WARNING
■ When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand
caught by the moving mirror.
■ Setting automatic mode

Automatic mode allows the folding or
extending of the mirrors to be linked to

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

151

Power windows

mode or turned off. They cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is
opened.

Opening and closing the power
windows

■ Jam protection function

3-5.Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

The power windows can be opened
and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

If an object becomes jammed between the
window and the window frame while the
window is closing, window movement is
stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ Catch protection function

If an object becomes caught between the
door and window while the window is opening, window movement is stopped.
■ When the side window cannot be

2 One-touch closing*
3 Opening
4 One-touch opening*
*

: To stop the window partway, operate the
switch in the opposite direction.

■ The power windows can be operated

when
The power switch is in ON mode.

■ When the driver’s power window switch

is used to open a rear power window
(vehicles with rear door sunshades)
If a rear door sunshade is extended or being
extended when the driver’s power window
switch is pushed, only the rear door sunshade will be retracted. To open the rear
power window from the driver’s seat, push
the driver’s power window switch again.

■ Operating the power windows after

turning the hybrid system off
The power windows can be operated for
approximately 45 seconds even after the
power switch is turned to ACCESSORY

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

1 Closing

opened or closed
When the jam protection function or catch
protection function operates unusually and
the side window cannot be opened or
closed, perform the following operations
with the power window switch of that door.
● Stop the vehicle. With the power switch in
ON mode, within 4 seconds of the jam
protection function or catch protection
function activating, continuously operate
the power window switch in the
one-touch closing direction or one-touch
opening direction so that the side window
can be opened and closed.
● If the side window cannot be opened and
closed even when performing the above
operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.
1 Turn the power switch to ON mode.
2 Pull and hold the power window switch
in the one-touch closing direction and
completely close the side window.
3 Release the power window switch for a
moment, resume pulling the switch in
the one-touch closing direction, and
hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.
4 Press and hold the power window
switch in the one-touch opening direction. After the side window is completely opened, continue holding the
switch for an additional 1 second or
more.
5 Release the power window switch for a
moment, resume pushing the switch in
the one-touch opening direction, and

152

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or more.
6 Pull and hold the power window switch
in the one-touch closing direction
again. After the side window is completely closed, continue holding the
switch for a further 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the window is
moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window reverses and cannot be fully
closed or opened, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Door lock linked window operation
● The power windows can be opened and
*

closed using the mechanical key.
(→P.446)
● The power windows can be opened using
the wireless remote control.* (→P.108)
*: These settings must be customized at
your Lexus dealer.
■ Power windows open warning buzzer

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown
on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the power switch is
turned off and the driver’s door is opened
with the power windows open.
■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all the

power window operations, including
the operation for the passengers. In
order to prevent accidental operation,
especially by a child, do not let a child
operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers
to have body parts caught in the power
window. Also, when riding with a child,
it is recommended to use the window
lock switch. (→P.153)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Check to make sure that all passen-

gers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught
when a window is being operated.

● When using the wireless remote con-

trol or mechanical key and operating
the power windows, operate the
power window after checking to make
sure that there is no possibility of any
passenger having any of their body
parts caught in the window. Also do
not let a child operate window by the
wireless remote control or mechanical
key. It is possible for children and other
passengers to get caught in the power
window.

● When exiting the vehicle, turn the

power switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There
may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to
an accident.

■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to

intentionally activate the jam protection function.

● The jam protection function may not

work if something gets jammed just
before the window is fully closed. Be
careful not to get any part of your body
jammed in the window.

■ Catch protection function
● Never use any part of your body or

clothing to intentionally activate the
catch protection function.

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof

WARNING
● The catch protection function may not

work if something gets caught just
before the window is fully opened. Be
careful not to get any part of your body
or closing caught in the window.

Preventing accidental operation
(window lock switch)

153

Use the overhead switches to open
and close the moon roof and tilt it
up and down.

Operating the moon roof
■ Opening and closing

This function can be used to prevent
children from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.

Press the switch.

The passenger windows can still be
opened and closed using the driver’s
switch even if the lock switch is on.

1 Opens the moon roof*
The moon roof tilts up and then fully opens.

2 Closes the moon roof*
*

: Lightly press either side of the moon roof
switch to stop the moon roof partway.

■ Tilting up and down

■ The power windows can be operated

when
The power switch is in ON mode.

■ When the 12-volt battery is discon-

nected
The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after
reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

1 Tilts the moon roof up*
2 Tilts the moon roof down*
*:

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Lightly press either side of the moon roof
switch to stop the moon roof partway.

Before driving

The indicator A will come on and the passenger windows will be locked.

154

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ The moon roof can be operated when

rectly, have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.

The power switch is in ON mode.

■ If the moon roof does not move normally

■ Operating the moon roof after turning

the hybrid system off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power switch
is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
off. It cannot, however, be operated once
either front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon
roof and the frame while the moon roof is
closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and
the moon roof opens slightly.
■ Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed
manually. However, the sunshade will open
automatically when the moon roof is
opened.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be opened and

If the moon roof does not open or close
normally or the automatic opening function
does not operate, perform the following initialization procedure.
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the “DOWN” switch.*
The moon roof will stop at the tilt-up position. After that, it will open, close, tilt up, tilt
down, and stop at the fully closed position.
3 Confirm that the moon roof has completely stopped and release the switch.
*
: If you release the switch while the moon
roof is moving, perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
If, after performing the above procedures
correctly, the moon roof still does not open
or close normally or the automatic opening
function does not operate, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.

closed using the mechanical key.*
(→P.446)
● The moon roof can be opened using the
wireless remote control.* (→P.108)
*: These settings must be customized at
your Lexus dealer.

■ Moon roof open warning buzzer

■ When the moon roof does not close nor-

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

mally
Perform the following procedure:
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause
for approximately 10 seconds. Then it will
close again and stop at the completely
closed position.
3 Check to make sure that the moon roof
is completely closed and then release
the switch.
*: If the switch is released at the incorrect
time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
If the moon roof does not fully close even
after performing the above procedure cor-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown
on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the power switch is
turned off and the driver’s door is opened
with the moon roof open.
■ Customization

WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Opening the moon roof
● Do not allow any passengers to put

their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.

● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
WARNING
■ Opening and closing the moon roof
● The driver is responsible for moon roof

opening and closing operations.
In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a
child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers
to have body parts caught in the moon
roof.

● Check to make sure that all passen-

gers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught
when the moon roof is being operated.

155

■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to

intentionally activate the jam protection function.

● The jam protection function may not

work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof is fully closed.
Also, the jam protection function is not
designed to operate while the moon
roof switch is being pressed. Take care
so that your fingers, etc. do not get
caught.

Before driving

● When using the wireless remote con-

trol or mechanical key and operating
the moon roof, operate the moon roof
after checking to make sure that there
is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in
the moon roof. Also, do not let a child
operate moon roof by the wireless
remote control or mechanical key. It is
possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the moon roof.

● When exiting the vehicle, turn the

power switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There
may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to
an accident.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

156

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

157

Driving

4-1. Before driving
.

Driving the vehicle.....................158
Cargo and luggage................... 164
Vehicle load limits...................... 166
Trailer towing............................... 166
Dinghy towing ............................. 167
4-2. Driving procedures

4
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)
........................................................227
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .... 230
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
....................................................... 240
RSA (Road Sign Assist).......... 247
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range...................... 250
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).... 260

EV drive mode ............................ 172
Hybrid transmission .................. 174

PKSA (Parking Support Alert)
....................................................... 265

Turn signal lever..........................180

Intuitive parking assist............. 266

Parking brake ............................... 181

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
function....................................... 273

Brake Hold....................................183
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch.........................185
AHB (Automatic High Beam)
.........................................................188
Windshield wipers and washer
.........................................................190
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap...... 194
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lexus Safety System+A........... 196
Lexus Safety System+ .............203
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A) .......................................209
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+)
........................................................220

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

RCD (Rear Camera Detection)
function....................................... 277
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
.......................................................280
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects)......................... 286
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) ....... 291
Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) .................. 295
Driving mode select switch .. 298
Electronically modulated air suspension....................................... 299
Driving assist systems.............. 302
4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle driving tips .... 307
Winter driving tips....................309

Driving

Power (ignition) switch ............168

158

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle

5 Slowly release the brake pedal.

The following procedures should be
observed to ensure safe driving:

6 Lock the door, making sure that you
have the electronic key on your
person.

4-1.Before driving

Driving procedure
■ Starting the hybrid system

→P.168
■ Driving

1 With the brake pedal depressed,
shift the shift position to D. (→P.174)
Check that the shift position indicator
shows D.

2 If the parking brake is in manual
mode, release the parking brake.
(→P.181)
3 Gradually release the brake pedal
and gently depress the accelerator
pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping

1 With the shift position in D, depress
the brake pedal.
2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an
extended period of time, shift the shift position to P. (→P.176)
■ Parking the vehicle

1 With the shift position in D, depress
the brake pedal to stop the vehicle
completely.
2 If the parking brake is in manual
mode, set the parking brake.
(→P.181)
3 Shift the shift position to P. (→P.176)
4 Press the power switch to stop the
hybrid system.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as
needed.
■ Starting off on a steep uphill

1 Make sure that the parking brake is
set and shift the shift position to D.
Hill-start assist control will operate.
(→P.303)

2 Gently depress the accelerator
pedal.
3 Release the parking brake.
■ For fuel-efficient driving

Keep in mind that hybrid vehicles are similar
to conventional vehicles, and it is necessary
to refrain from activities such as sudden
acceleration. (→P.307)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because

visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road
will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain,
because the road surface will be especially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on
an expressway in the rain, because there
may be a layer of water between the tires
and the road surface, preventing the
steering and brakes from operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine
speed may become high while driving. This
is due to automatic up-shifting control or
down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden
acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill
or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released

4-1. Before driving
● When the brake pedal is depressed
■ Restraining the hybrid system output

(Brake Override System)

● When the accelerator and brake pedals

are depressed at the same time, the
hybrid system output may be restrained.
● A warning message is displayed on the
multi-information display while the system is operating.
■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start

Control)

● When the following unusual operation is

•

● While Drive-Start Control is being acti-

vated, your vehicle may have trouble
escaping from the mud or fresh snow. In
such case, deactivate TRAC (→P.304)
to cancel Drive-Start Control so that the
vehicle may become able to escape from
the mud or fresh snow.

■ Breaking in your new Lexus

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing
the following precautions is recommended:
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):

•
•
•
•

Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for
extended periods.

■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

needs bedding-down of the brake shoes
periodically or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your
Lexus dealer perform the bedding down
operation.
■ Brake pads and discs (F SPORT models)

The brake pads and discs are designed for
use under high load conditions. Therefore,
brake noise may be generated depending
on the vehicle speed, braking force and
vehicle environment (temperature, humidity, etc.).
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign

country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (→P.461)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the “READY”
indicator is illuminated. This prevents the
vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with

the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the
wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal
will result in sudden acceleration that
may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your
body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to
operate the pedals properly.

Driving

•

performed, the hybrid system output may
be restrained.
When the shift position is shifted from R
to D, D to R, N to R, P to D*, or P to R* (D
includes M) with the accelerator pedal
depressed, a warning message appears
on the multi-information display. If a
warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the message and follow the instruction.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
too much while the vehicle is in reverse.
Depending on the situation, the shift
position may not be changed.

159

160

4-1. Before driving
WARNING

• Make sure to keep a correct driving
posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly. This allows you to depress
the brake and accelerator pedals
properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your
right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay
response in an emergency, resulting in
an accident.
● The driver should pay extra attention

to pedestrians when the vehicle is
powered only by the electric motor
(traction motor). As there is no engine
noise, the pedestrians may misjudge
the vehicle’s movement. Even with the
vehicle proximity notification system
activate, drive with care as pedestrians
in the vicinity may still not notice the
vehicle if the surrounding area is noisy.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop

the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases
can be extremely hot. These hot parts
may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

● During normal driving, do not turn off

the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid
system off while driving will not cause
loss of steering or braking control,
however, power assist to the steering
will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should
pull over and stop the vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so.
In the event of an emergency, such as if
it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P.420

● Use engine braking (downshift) to

maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may
cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (→P.174)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Do not adjust the positions of the

steering wheel, the seat, or the inside
or outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle
control.

● Always check that all passengers’

arms, heads or other parts of their
body are not outside the vehicle.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed

limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140
km/h) unless your vehicle has
high-speed capability tires. Driving
over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in
tire failure, loss of control and possible
injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your
vehicle are high-speed capability tires
or not before driving at such speeds.

■ When driving on slippery road sur-

faces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and

steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle.

● Sudden acceleration, engine braking

due to shifting, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to skid.

● After driving through a puddle, lightly

depress the brake pedal to make sure
that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the
brakes from functioning properly. If the
brakes on only one side are wet and
not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.

■ When shifting the shift position
● Do not let the vehicle roll backward

while a forward driving position is
selected, or roll forward while the shift
position is in R.
Doing so may result in an accident or
damage to the vehicle.

4-1. Before driving
WARNING
● Do not shift the shift position to P while

the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission
and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift position to R while

the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission
and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift position to a driv-

ing position while the vehicle is moving
backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission
and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Changing the shift position to N while

● Be careful not to change the shift posi-

tion with the accelerator pedal
depressed. Changing the shift position to any positions other than P or N
may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious
injury.
After changing the shift position, make
sure to confirm the current shift position displayed on the shift position indicator inside the meter.

■ Brake pad wear

If any of the following situations occurs,
have the brake pads visually checked and
replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
● If the thickness of the brake pads

exceeds the brake pad wear limit when
visually checking all four brake pads
(for the brake pad wear limit, refer to
P.465)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● If a warning message is displayed on

the multi-information display (only the
right-side pads can be detected)

Rotor damage may result if the pads are
not replaced when needed.
F SPORT models: Moderate levels of the
brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced
braking power. As a result, the discs may
wear more quickly than conventional
brake discs. Therefore, when replacing
the brake pads, Lexus recommends that
you also have the thickness of the discs
measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when
the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal

unnecessarily.
If the shift position is any position other
than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

● In order to prevent accidents due to

the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while
stopped with the “READY” indicator is
illuminated, and apply the parking
brake as necessary.

● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline,

in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake
as needed.

● Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed
while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which
could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.

Driving

the vehicle is moving will disengage
the hybrid system. Engine braking is
not available with the hybrid system
disengaged.

161

162

4-1. Before driving
WARNING

■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters,

spray cans, or soft drink cans in the
vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter
or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle
may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or
crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing
the contents to spray over the interior
of the vehicle, and may also cause a
short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical
components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the

vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the
floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is
adjusted, causing a fire.

● Do not attach adhesive discs to the

windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on
the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act
as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

● Do not leave a door or window open if

the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored
one. Reflected sunlight may cause the
glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

● Always apply the parking brake, shift

the shift position to P, stop the hybrid
system and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended
while the “READY” indicator is illuminated.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while

the “READY” indicator is illuminated
or immediately after turning the hybrid
system off.
Doing so may cause burns.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal,
this could cause an accident or fire due
to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more

cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the
brakes are wet, and this may cause one
side of the vehicle to brake differently
than the other side. Also, the parking
brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

● If the electronically controlled brake

system does not operate, do not follow
other vehicles closely and avoid hills or
sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but
the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.

● The brake system consists of 2 or more

individual hydraulic systems; if one of
the systems fails, the other(s) will still
operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than
usual and the braking distance will
increase. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.

■ If the vehicle becomes stuck

Do not spin the wheels excessively when
a driven wheel is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may
damage the driveline components or
propel the vehicle forward or backward,
causing an accident.

4-1. Before driving
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and

brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain the hybrid
system output.

● Do not use the accelerator pedal or

depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the
vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake, and shift
the shift position to P. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to move or the
vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the
accelerator pedal is accidentally
depressed.

either direction and hold it there for an
extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power
steering motor.

● When driving over bumps in the road,

drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the
vehicle, etc.

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the
brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehi-

cle.

● The vehicle will make abnormal

sounds or vibrations.

● The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat
tire (→P.442)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded
after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause
the following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water

immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded
road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure
to have your Lexus dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil

and fluid used for the engine, hybrid
transmission, transfer (AWD models),
differential, etc.

● Lubricant condition for the propeller

shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible), and the function of
all joints, bearings, etc.

If the shift control system is damaged by
flooding, it may not be possible to shift
the shift position to P, or from P to other
positions. In this case, contact your Lexus
dealer.
■ When parking the vehicle

Driving

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in

163

164

4-1. Before driving

Cargo and luggage

gage load capacity calculated in Step
4.

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions,
cargo capacity and load:

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
(→P.166)

Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total
weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)

Lexus does not recommend towing a
trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not
designed for trailer towing.

Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit —

Calculation formula for your
vehicle

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750
(5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and lug-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

A Cargo capacity
B Total load capacity (vehicle capac-

ity weight) (→P.460)

When 2 people with the combined
weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your
vehicle, which has a total load capacity
(vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg),
the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as
follows:
B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)
*1

: A =Weight of people

: B =Total load capacity

4-1. Before driving
*3

: C =Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with
the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on,
the available cargo and luggage load will
be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)
*4

: D =Additional weight of people

*5: E =Available cargo and luggage load

WARNING
■ Things that must not be carried in the

trunk
The following things may cause a fire if
loaded in the trunk:

● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals
from being depressed properly, may
block the driver’s vision, or may result in
items hitting the driver or passengers,
possibly causing an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk

whenever possible.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on

the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver

• On the front passenger or rear seats
(when stacking items)
• On the package tray
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
• In front of the Center Display
● Secure all items in the occupant com-

partment.

■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle

weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.

● Even if the total load of occupant’s

weight and the cargo load is less than
the total load capacity, do not apply the
load unevenly. Improper loading may
cause deterioration of steering or
braking control which may cause
death or serious injury.

Driving

As shown in the example above, if the
number of occupants increases, the
cargo and luggage load will be
reduced by an amount that equals the
increased weight due to the additional
occupants. In other words, if an
increase in the number of occupants
causes an excess of the total load
capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load),
you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

165

166

4-1. Before driving

Vehicle load limits

Trailer towing

Vehicle load limits include total
load capacity, seating capacity,
towing capacity and cargo capacity.

Lexus does not recommend towing
a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus
also does not recommend the
installation of a tow hitch or the use
of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your
vehicle is not designed for trailer
towing or for the use of tow hitch
mounted carriers.

 Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight): →P.460
Total load capacity means the combined
weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

 Seating capacity:5 occupants
(Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum
number of occupants whose estimated
average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per
person.

 Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a
trailer with your vehicle.

 Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or
decrease depending on the weight and
the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire
and loading information label. (→P.408)
WARNING
■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires,
but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

167

Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehi-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

cle
Do not tow your vehicle with the four
wheels on the ground.

168

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch

4 Check that the “READY” indicator
is illuminated.

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the hybrid
system or changes power switch
modes.

The vehicle cannot be driven if the
“READY” indicator is off.

4-2.Driving procedures

Starting the hybrid system
1 Press the parking brake switch to
check that the parking brake is set.
(→P.181)
The parking brake indicator will come on.

2 Firmly depress the brake pedal.
and a message will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.
When the shift position is N, the hybrid system cannot start. Shift the shift position to P
when starting the hybrid system. (→P.176)

3 Press the power switch shortly and
firmly.
When operating the power switch, one
short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.
If the “READY” indicator turns on, the
hybrid system will operate normally.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until
the “READY” indicator is illuminated.
The hybrid system can be started from any
power switch mode.

■ Power switch illumination

According to the situation, the power
switch illumination operates as follows.
● When a door is opened, or the power
switch mode is changed from ACCESSORY or ON mode to off, the power
switch illumination slowly blinks.
● When depressing the brake pedal with
carrying the electronic key on your person, the power switch illumination rapidly
blinks.
● When the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the power switch
illumination illuminates.
■ If the hybrid system does not start
● The immobilizer system may not have

been deactivated. (→P.66)
Contact your Lexus dealer.
● If a message related to start-up is shown
on the multi-information display, read the
message and follow the instructions.
■ When the ambient temperature is low,

such as during winter driving conditions
● When starting the hybrid system, the
flashing time of the “READY” indicator
may be long. Leave the vehicle as it is until
the “READY” indicator is steady on, as
steady means the vehicle is able to move.
● When the hybrid battery (traction battery) is extremely cold (below approximately -22°F [-30°C]) under the
influence of the outside temperature, it
may not be possible to start the hybrid
system. In this case, try to start the hybrid
system again after the temperature of the
hybrid battery increases due to the outside temperature increase etc.
■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a

hybrid vehicle
→P.59

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

169

■ If the 12-volt battery is discharged

cle, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

The hybrid system cannot be started using
the smart access system with push-button
start. Refer to P.447 to restart the hybrid
system.

■ If the hybrid system is malfunctioning

→P.64

■ Electronic key battery depletion

→P.413

→P.104

■ Operation of the power switch
● If the switch is not pressed shortly and

■ Conditions affecting operation

→P.120
■ Notes for the entry function

→P.121
■ Steering lock function
● After turning the power switch off and

firmly, the power switch mode may not
change or the hybrid system may not
start.
● If attempting to restart the hybrid system
immediately after turning the power
switch off, the hybrid system may not start
in some cases. After turning the power
switch off, please wait a few seconds
before restarting the hybrid system.
■ Customization

If the smart access system with push-button
start has been deactivated in a customized
setting, refer to P.445.
WARNING
■ When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress
the accelerator pedal while starting the
hybrid system under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving

● To prevent the steering lock motor from

overheating, the motor may be suspended if the hybrid system is turned on
and off repeatedly in a short period of
time. In this case, refrain from operating
the power switch. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume
functioning.

■ If the “READY” indicator does not come

on
In the event that the “READY” indicator
does not come on even after performing
the proper procedures for starting the vehi-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

If hybrid system failure occurs while the
vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and
complete stop. Activation of the steering
lock in this circumstance may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ When starting the hybrid system

If the hybrid system becomes difficult to
start, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer immediately.

Driving

opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the power
switch again automatically cancels the
steering lock.
● When the steering lock cannot be
released, “Push Power Switch While
Turning Steering Wheel in Either Direction” will be displayed on the multi-information display.
Press the power switch shortly and firmly
while turning the steering wheel left and
right.

■ Electronic key battery

170

4-2. Driving procedures
NOTICE

■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction

with the power switch
If the power switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such
as the switch sticking slightly, there may
be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus
dealer immediately.

Stopping the hybrid system
1 Stop the vehicle completely.
2 If the parking brake is in manual
mode, set the parking brake.
(→P.181)
3 Shift the shift position to P. (→P.176)
Check that the shift position indicator
shows P. (→P.176)

4 Press the power switch.
The hybrid system will stop, and the meter
display will be extinguished (the shift position indicator will be extinguished a few
seconds after the meter display).

5 Release the brake pedal and check
that “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is not shown on the
meter.
■ Automatic P position selection function

→P.177

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING
■ Stopping the hybrid system in an

emergency
● If you want to stop the hybrid system in
an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the power switch
for more than 2 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession.
(→P.420)
However, do not touch the power
switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the hybrid system off
while driving will not cause loss of
steering or braking control, however,
power assist to the steering will be lost.
This will make it more difficult to steer
smoothly, so you should pull over and
stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so.
● If the power switch is operated while

the vehicle is running, a warning message will be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds.

● When restarting the hybrid system

after an emergency shutdown, press
the power switch.

Changing power switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing
the power switch with the brake pedal
released. (The mode changes each
time the switch is pressed.)

4-2. Driving procedures

171

■ When the shift control system malfunc-

tions
When attempting to turn the power switch
off while there is a malfunction in the shift
control system, the power switch mode may
change to ACCESSORY mode. In this
case, ACCESSORY mode may be turned
off by applying the parking brake and pressing the power switch again. If there is a malfunction in the system, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
● Do not leave the power switch in

ACCESSORY or ON mode for long
periods of time without the hybrid system on.

The emergency flashers can be used.

2 ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the
audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the
meter.

3 ON mode
All electrical components can be used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on the
meter.
■ Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode
for more than 20 minutes or ON mode
(with hybrid system not operating) for more
than an hour with the shift position in P, the
power switch will automatically turn off.
However, this function cannot entirely prevent the 12-volt battery discharge. Do not
leave the vehicle with the power switch in
ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not
operating.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION

ON” is displayed on the meter, the
power switch is not off. Exit the vehicle
after turning the power switch off.

Driving

1 Off

172

4-2. Driving procedures

EV drive mode
In EV drive mode, electric power is
supplied by the hybrid battery
(traction battery), and only the
electric motor (traction motor) is
used to drive the vehicle.
This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning
and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for
noises and gas emissions.
However, when the vehicle proximity notification system is active, the
vehicle may produce sound.

Operating instructions
Turns EV drive mode on/off
When EV drive mode is turned on, the EV
drive mode indicator will come on. Pressing the switch when in EV drive mode will
return the vehicle to normal driving (using
the gasoline engine and electric motor
[traction motor]).

■ Situations in which EV drive mode can-

not be turned on
It may not be possible to turn EV drive
mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a
message will be shown on the multi-infor-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

mation display.
● The temperature of the hybrid system is
high.
The vehicle has been left in the sun,
driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.
● The temperature of the hybrid system is
low.
The vehicle has been left in temperatures
lower than about 32°F (0°C) for a long
period of time etc.
● The gasoline engine is warming up.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery) is
low.
The remaining battery level indicated in
the “Energy Monitor” display is low.
(→P.96)
● Vehicle speed is high.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly
or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
● The windshield defogger is in use.
● When the shift position is in M.
■ Switching to EV drive mode when the

gasoline engine is cold
If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will
start automatically in order to warm up. In
this case, you will become unable to switch
to EV drive mode.
To prevent gasoline engine warm up in
order to reduce noises, start the hybrid system without starting the gasoline engine,
pressing the power switch with fully
depressing the brake pedal and pressing
the EV drive mode switch.

■ Automatic cancelation of EV drive

mode
When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the
following situations. When EV drive mode

4-2. Driving procedures
is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the EV
drive mode indicator will flash and go off.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery)
becomes low.
The remaining battery level indicated in
the “Energy Monitor” display is low.
(→P.96)
● Vehicle speed is high.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly
or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
When it is possible to inform the driver of
automatic cancelation in advance, a prior
notice screen will appear on the multi-information display.
■ Possible driving distance when driving in

■ Fuel economy

The hybrid system is designed to achieve
the best possible fuel economy during normal driving (using the gasoline engine and
electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in
EV drive mode more than necessary may
lower fuel economy.
■ If “EV Mode Unavailable” is shown on

the multi-information display
The EV drive mode is not available. The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the
vehicle is idling, battery charge is low, vehicle speed is higher than the EV drive mode
operating speed range or accelerator pedal
is depressed too much) may be displayed.
Use the EV drive mode when it becomes
available.

■ If “EV Mode Deactivated” is shown on

the multi-information display
The EV drive mode has been automatically
canceled. The reason the EV drive mode is
not available (the battery charge is low,
vehicle speed is higher than the EV drive
mode operating speed range or accelera-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

tor pedal is depressed too much) may be
displayed. Drive the vehicle for a while
before attempting to turn on the EV drive
mode again.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving

When driving in EV drive mode, pay special attention to the area around the vehicle. Because there is no engine noise,
pedestrians, people riding bicycles or
other people and vehicles in the area
may not be aware of the vehicle starting
off or approaching them, so take extra
care while driving. Therefore, take extra
care while driving even if the vehicle
proximity notification system is active.
4

Driving

EV drive mode
EV drive mode’s possible driving distance
ranges from a few hundred meters to
approximately 0.6 mile (1 km). However,
depending on vehicle conditions, there are
situations when EV drive mode cannot be
used.
(The distance that is possible depends on
the hybrid battery [traction battery] level
and driving conditions.)

173

174

4-2. Driving procedures

Hybrid transmission
Select the shift position depending
on your purpose and situation.

Shift position purpose and functions
Shift position

Objective or function

Parking the vehicle/starting
the hybrid system

Reversing

Neutral (Condition in which
the power is not transmitted)

Normal driving*1

M mode driving*2 (→P.179)

: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce
noise, set the shift position in D for normal driving. You can choose gear range
suitable for your driving situation by
operating the paddle shift switches.

*2: Any gear range can be fixed when driv-

ing in M mode.
■ For the shift positions
● When the power switch is off or in

ACCESSORY mode, the shift position
cannot be changed.
● When the power switch is in ON mode
(the hybrid system is not operating), the
shift position can only be changed to N.
● When the “READY” indicator is on, the
shift position can be changed from P to D,
N or R.
● When the “READY” indicator is flashing,
the shift position cannot be changed from
P to another position even if the shift lever
is operated. Wait until the “READY” indicator changes from a flashing to a solid

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

light, and then operate the shift lever
again.
● The shift position can only be changed to
M directly from D.
In addition, if an attempt is made to change
the shift position by moving the shift lever or
by pressing the P position switch in any of
the following situations, the buzzer will
sound and the shifting operation will be disabled or the shift position will automatically
change to N. When this happens, select an
appropriate shift position.
● Situations where the shifting operation
will be disabled:
• When an attempt is made to change the
shift position from P to another position
by moving the shift lever without depressing the brake pedal.
• When an attempt is made to change the
shift position from P or N to M by moving
the shift lever.
• When the P position switch is pressed
while the vehicle is running.*1
● Situations where the shift position will
automatically change to N:
• When an attempt is made to select the R
position by moving the shift lever when
the vehicle is moving forward.*2
• When an attempt is made to select the D
position by moving the shift lever when
the vehicle is moving in reverse.*3
• When the shift position is changed from
R to M
● If N is selected while driving at a certain
speed, even if the shift lever is not held in
the N position, the shift position changes
to N. In this situation, the buzzer sounds
and a confirmation message is displayed
on the multi-information display to inform
the driver that the shift position has
changed to N.
*1
: Shift position may be changed to P
when driving at extremely low speeds.
*2

: Shift position may be changed to R
when driving at low speeds.

*3: Shift position may be changed to D

when driving at low speeds.

4-2. Driving procedures
■ Reverse warning buzzer

When shifting into R, a buzzer will sound to
inform the driver that the shift position is in
R.
■ To protect the hybrid transmission

If the transmission fluid temperature is high,
“Transmission Fluid Temp High See
Owner’s Manual” will be displayed on the
multi-information display and the vehicle
will go into transmission protection mode
automatically. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Lexus dealer.
■ When driving with the dynamic radar

■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start

Control)
→P.159

■ AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance
and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when
the shift position is in D. (Shifting the shift
position to the M position cancels the function.)
■ If a message about a shift operation is

shown
To prevent the shift position from being
selected incorrectly or the vehicle from
moving unexpectedly, the shift position may
be changed automatically or operating the
shift lever may be required. In this case,
change the shift position following the messages on the multi-information display.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ After recharging/reconnecting the

12-volt battery
→P.393

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)
WARNING
■ When driving on slippery road sur-

faces
Do not accelerate or shift the shift position suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may
cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting
in an accident.
NOTICE

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)

charge
If the shift position is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be
charged. To help prevent the battery
from discharging, avoid leaving the N
position selected for an extended period
of time.

■ Situations where shift control system

malfunctions are possible
If any of the following situations occurs,
shift control system malfunctions are
possible.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place on level ground, apply the parking
brake, and then contact your Lexus
dealer.

● When the warning message indicating

the shift control system appears on the
multi-information display.

● The display indicates that no shift posi-

tion is selected for more than a few
seconds.

Driving

cruise control with full-speed range
activated
Even when performing the following
actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not be activated because the dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range will not be
canceled.
● While driving in the D position, downshifting to 9, 8, 7, 6, 5 or 4.
● When switching the driving mode to
sport mode while driving in the D position
(→P.298)

175

176

4-2. Driving procedures

Shifting the shift lever

The current shift position is illuminated.
When selecting the shift position, make
sure that the shift position has been
changed to the desired position by checking the shift position indicator provided on
the instrument cluster.
C P position switch

WARNING
■ For the shift lever
● Do not remove the shift lever knob or

use anything but a genuine Lexus shift
lever knob. Also, do not hang anything
on the shift lever.
Doing so could prevent the shift lever
from returning to position, causing
unexpected accidents to occur when
the vehicle is in motion.

● In order to prevent the shift position

A Shift lever
Operate the shift lever gently and securely
in the direction of the arrow on the shift
position indicator.
To shift to N, slide the shift lever in the
direction of the arrow and hold it.
Release the shift lever after each shifting
operation to allow it to return to its regular

position (

Shifting to M is only possible when the shift
position is in D.
When shifting from P to N, D or R, from N,
D, M or R to P, from D or M to R, or from R
to D, ensure that the brake pedal is being
depressed and the vehicle is stationary.
B Shift position indicator
Meter display:
The current shift position is highlighted.
When any shift position other than D or M
is selected, the arrow toward M and the M
position indicator are displayed in gray.
Shift lever display:

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

from accidentally being changed, do
not touch the shift lever when not using
them.

P position switch
■ When shifting the shift position to P

Fully stop the vehicle and set the parking brake, and then press the P position
switch.
When the shift position is changed to P, the
switch illuminates.
Check that the shift position indicator
shows P.

4-2. Driving procedures
■ Shifting the shift position from P to

other positions

 While depressing the brake pedal
firmly, operate the shift lever. If the
shift lever is operated without
depressing the brake pedal, the
buzzer will sound and the shifting
operation will be disabled.
 When selecting the shift position,
make sure that the shift position has
been changed to the desired position by checking the shift position
indicator provided on the instrument cluster.
 The shift position cannot be
changed from P to M directly.

In the following situations, the shift position
is automatically changed to P.
● When pressing the power switch with the
vehicle stopped while the power switch is
in ON mode and the shift position is in a
position other than P (after the shift position has changed to P, the power switch
will turn off)*
● When the vehicle is stopped after the
hybrid system has been stopped in an
emergency while driving
● When voltage of the 12-volt battery
drops while the shift position is in a position other than P
*
: When the power switch is pressed while
driving at extremely slow speeds, such
as immediately before stopping the vehicle, the shift position may automatically
change to P. Make sure that the vehicle
is completely stopped before pressing
the power switch.
■ If the shift position cannot be shifted

from P
There is a possibility that the 12-volt battery

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

is discharged. Check the 12-volt battery in
this situation. (→P.447)
WARNING
■ P position switch
● Do not press the P position switch

while the vehicle is moving.
If the P position switch is pressed when
driving at very low speeds (for example, directly before stopping the vehicle), the vehicle may stop suddenly
when the shift position switches to P,
which could lead to an accident.

● In order to prevent the shift position

from accidentally being changed, do
not touch the P position switch or shift
lever when not using them.
4
NOTICE

■ Notes regarding shift lever and P

position switch operation
Avoid repeatedly operating the shift
lever and P position switch in quick succession.
The system protection function may activate and it will not be temporarily possible to shift the shift position other than P.
If this happens, please wait for a while
before attempting to change the shift
position again.

Selecting the driving mode
■ Driving mode

→P.298
■ Snow mode

Snow mode can be selected to suit the
conditions when driving on slippery
road surfaces, such as on snow.
Turn the snow mode switch backward.
The snow mode indicator illuminates.
Turn the snow mode switch backward
again to return to normal mode.

Driving

■ Automatic P position selection function

177

178

4-2. Driving procedures

A Except F SPORT models

B F SPORT models

■ Snow mode automatic deactivation

Snow mode is automatically deactivated if
the power switch is turned off after driving
in snow mode.

Selecting shift ranges in the D
position
To drive using temporary shift range
selection, operate the “-” or “+” paddle
shift switch.
When the “-” paddle shift switch is
operated, the shift range switches to a
range that enables engine braking
force that is suitable to driving conditions. When the “+” paddle shift switch
is operated, the shift range switches to
a range that is one range higher than
the current range.
Changing the shift range allows
restriction of the highest gear, preventing unnecessary upshifting and
enabling the level of engine braking
force to be selected.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting
The selected shift range, from D1 to D10,
will be displayed on the meter.
To return to normal D position driving, the
“+” paddle shift switch must be held down
for a period of time.
Meter display

Function

D2 - D10

A gear in the range between
D1 and the selected shift
range is automatically chosen depending on vehicle
speed and driving conditions

Setting the shift range at D1

A lower shift range will provide greater
engine braking forces than a higher shift
range.
■ Automatic deactivation of shift range

selection in the D position
Shift range selection in the D position will
be deactivated in the following situations:
● When the vehicle comes to a stop
● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for
more than a certain period of time
● When the shift position is shifted to a
position other than D.

4-2. Driving procedures
● When the “+” paddle shift switch is

pressed and held

■ Downshifting restriction warning

buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances,
downshifting may not be possible even
when the paddle shift switch is operated. (A
buzzer will sound twice.)

Selecting gears in the M position
To enter M mode, shift the shift position
to M. Gears can be selected by operating the paddle shift switches, allowing
you to drive in the gear of your choosing.

179

 When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).
 When vehicle speed increases
(upshift only).
 When the accelerator pedal is firmly
depressed.
 When it is necessary to protect the
transmission when the transmission
fluid temperature is high or low, or
other reasons.
Also, the gear will not shift when the
vehicle speed is low, even if an upshift
operation is performed.
■ Downshifting restrictions warning

A Except F SPORT models
B F SPORT models

1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting
The gear changes once every time the
paddle shift switch is operated.
The selected gear, from M1 to M10, will be
fixed and displayed on the meter.

When in the M position, the gear will
not change unless the paddle shift
switches are operated.
However, even when in the M position,
the gears will be automatically
changed in the following situations:

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

180

4-2. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever
Operating instructions

1 Right turn
2 Lane change to the right (move the
lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.

3 Lane change to the left (move the
lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

4 Left turn
■ Turn signals can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear
turn signal lights has not burned out.
■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a

lane change has been performed
Operate the lever again.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

(→P.481)

4-2. Driving procedures

Parking brake
The parking brake can be set or
released automatically or manually.
In automatic mode, the parking
brake can be set or released automatically according to the shift
lever operation. Also, even in automatic mode, the parking brake can
be set or released manually.

Operating instructions

181

2 Pull the switch to release the parking brake
• Operate the parking brake switch while
depressing the brake pedal.
• Using the parking brake automatic
release function, the parking brake can
be released by depressing the accelerator pedal. When using this function,
slowly depress the accelerator pedal.
Make sure that the parking brake indicator
light turn off.

If the parking brake indicator light
flashes, operate the switch again.
(→P.434)
■ Turns automatic mode on

The parking brake can be set and
released manually.

While the vehicle is stopped, press and
hold the parking brake switch until a
message is shown on the multi-information display

A U.S.A.
B Canada

1 Push the switch to set the parking
brake
The parking brake indicator light will turn
on.
Press and hold the parking brake switch if
an emergency occurs and it is necessary to
operate the parking brake while driving.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When the automatic mode is turned
on, the parking brake operates as follows.
 When the shift position is shifted
from P, the parking brake will be
released, and the parking brake
indicator light will turn off.
 When the shift position is shifted to
P, the parking brake will be set, and
the parking brake indicator light will
turn on.

Driving

■ Using the manual mode

182

4-2. Driving procedures

Operate the shift lever and P position
switch with the vehicle stopped and the
brake pedal depressed.
■ Turns automatic mode off

While the vehicle is stopped, pull and
hold the parking brake switch until a
message is shown on the multi-information display

after about 1 minute.
■ If “EPB Activation Stopped Incom-

pletely” or “EPB unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display
Operate the parking brake switch. If the
message does not disappear after operating the switch several times, the system may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ Parking brake operation sound

When the parking brake operates, a motor
sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Parking brake operation
● Depending on the power switch mode,

■ Parking brake operation
● When the power switch is not in ON

mode, the parking brake cannot be
released using the parking brake switch.
● When the power switch is not in ON
mode, automatic mode (automatic brake
setting and releasing) is not available.
■ Parking brake automatic release func-

tion

● When the shift position is shifted from P,

the parking brake will be released in
automatic mode.
● When all of the following conditions are
met in manual mode, the parking brake
can be released by depressing the accelerator pedal.
• The driver’s door is closed
• The driver is wearing the seat belt
• The shift position is in D, M or R
■ If “EPB Frequently Operated Wait a

Minute” is displayed on the multi-information display
If the parking brake is operated repeatedly
over a short period of time, the system may
restrict operation to prevent overheating. If
this happens, refrain from operating the
parking brake. Normal operation will return

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

the parking brake indicator light will turn
on and stay on as described below:
ON mode: Comes on until the parking
brake is released.
Not in ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.
● When the power switch is turned off with
the parking brake set, the parking brake
indicator light will stay on for about 15
seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ When the parking brake switch mal-

functions
Automatic mode (automatic brake setting
and releasing) will be turned on automatically.

■ Parking the vehicle

→P.158
■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven
with the parking brake engaged. “EPB
Applied” is displayed on the multi-information display. (with the vehicle reached a
speed of 3 mph [5 km/h])
■ If the brake system warning light comes

on
→P.427

■ Usage in winter time

→P.309

4-2. Driving procedures
WARNING
■ When parking the vehicle

Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone.
The parking brake may be released unintentionally and there is the danger of the
vehicle moving that may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, set the
parking brake, shift the shift position to P
and make sure that the vehicle does not
move.
■ When the system malfunctions

183

Brake Hold
The brake hold system keeps the
brake applied when the shift position is in D, M or N with the system
on and the brake pedal has been
depressed to stop the vehicle. The
system releases the brake when the
accelerator pedal is depressed with
the shift position in D or M to allow
smooth start off.

Enabling the system
Press the brake hold switch to turn the
system on

■ When the parking brake cannot be

The brake hold standby indicator (green)
A comes on. While the system is holding
the brakes, the brake hold operated indicator (yellow) B comes on.

released due to a malfunction
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking
performance and increase brake wear.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

■ Brake hold system operating conditions

The brake hold system cannot be turned on
in the following conditions:
● The driver’s door is not closed.
● The driver is not wearing the seat belt.
If any of the conditions above are detected
when the brake hold system is enabled, the
system will turn off and the brake hold
standby indicator light will go off. In addition, if any of the conditions are detected
while the system is holding the brake, a
warning buzzer will sound and a message

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and
check the warning messages.

184

4-2. Driving procedures

will be shown on the multi-information display. The parking brake will then be set
automatically.
■ Brake hold function
● If the brake pedal is left released for a

period of about 3 minutes after the system has started holding the brake, the
parking brake will be set automatically. In
this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a
message is shown on the multi-information display.
● To turn the system off while the system is
holding the brake, firmly depress the
brake pedal and press the button again.
● The brake hold function may not hold the
vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep
incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. A
warning buzzer will sound and the
multi-information display will inform the
driver of this situation. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information
display, read the message and follow the
instructions.
■ When the parking brake is set automati-

cally while the system is holding the
brakes
Perform any of the following operations to
release the parking brake.
● Depress the accelerator pedal. (The
parking brake will not be released automatically if the seat belt is not fastened.)
● Operate the parking brake switch with
the brake pedal depressed.
Make sure that the parking brake indicator
light goes off. (→P.181)
■ When an inspection at your Lexus

dealer is necessary
When the brake hold standby indicator
(green) does not illuminate even when the
brake hold switch is pressed with the brake
hold system operating conditions met, the
system may be malfunctioning. Have the
vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ If “Brake Hold Fault Depress Brake to

Deactivate Visit Your Dealer” or “Brake
Hold Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is
displayed on the multiinformation display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ Warning messages and buzzers

Warning messages and buzzers are used to
indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow
the instructions.
■ If the brake hold operated indicator

flashes
→P.434

WARNING
■ When the vehicle is on a steep incline

When using the brake hold system on a
steep incline exercise caution. The brake
hold function may not hold the vehicle in
such a situation.
■ When stopped on a slippery road

The system cannot stop the vehicle when
the gripping ability of the tires has been
exceeded. Do not use the system when
stopped on a slippery road.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle

The brake hold system is not designed
for use when parking the vehicle for a
long period of time. Turning the power
switch off while the system is holding the
brake may release the brake, which
would cause the vehicle to move. When
operating the power switch, depress the
brake pedal, shift the shift position to P
and set the parking brake.

185

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

lights listed above turn on and off
automatically.

4-3.Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated
manually or automatically.

(Canada) The daytime running lights turn on. (→P.185)

Operating instructions
Turning the end of the lever turns on
the lights as follows:

(U.S.A.) Off

■ AUTO mode can be used when

The power switch is in ON mode.
■ Daytime running light system
● The daytime running lights illuminate

• The headlight switch is in the
ada only),

(Can-

position

: When the surroundings are bright

A U.S.A.
B Canada

The side marker, parking, tail,
license plate, instrument panel
lights, and daytime running lights
(→P.185) turn on.

The headlights and all lights
listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.

The headlights, daytime running lights (→P.185) and all the

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The daytime running lights remain on after
they illuminate, even if the parking brake is
set again.
● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights
can be turned off by operating the switch.
● Compared to turning on the headlights,
the daytime running light system offers
greater durability and consumes less
electricity, so it can help improve fuel
economy.
■ Headlight control sensor

Driving

using the same lights as the parking lights
and illuminate brighter than the parking
lights.
● To make your vehicle more visible to
other drivers during daytime driving, the
daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions
are met. (The daytime running lights are
not designed for use at night.)
• The hybrid system is operating
• The parking brake is released

186

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause
the automatic headlight system to malfunction.
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights are on: The head-

lights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after the driver’s door is opened and
closed if the power switch is turned to
ACCESSORY mode or turned off. (The
lights turn off immediately if
on the
key is pressed after all the doors are
closed.)
● When only the tail lights are on: The tail
lights turn off automatically if the power
switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode
or turned off and the driver’s door is
opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the power
switch to ON mode, or turn the light switch
off once and then back to

switch is turned off the 12-volt battery saving function will operate and automatically
turn off all the lights after approximately 20
minutes. When the power switch is turned
to ON mode, the 12-volt battery-saving
function will be disabled.
When any of the following are performed,
the 12-volt battery-saving function is canceled once and then reactivated. All the
lights will turn off automatically 20 minutes
after the 12-volt battery-saving function has
been reactivated:
● When the headlight switch is operated
● When a door is opened or closed
■ Welcome light illumination control

The front position and tail lights automatically turn on at night when the doors are
unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if the light switch is in
the

position.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

■ Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the power switch is
turned off or turned to ACCESSORY
mode and the driver’s door is opened while
the lights are turned on.
■ Automatic headlight leveling system

The level of the headlights is automatically
adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the
vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not
interfere with other road users.

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than
necessary when the hybrid system is off.

Turning on the high beam headlights

■ Windshield wiper linked headlight illu-

mination
When driving during daytime with the

headlight switch turned to
, if the windshield wipers are used, the headlights will
turn on automatically after several seconds
to help enhance the visibility of your vehicle.
■ 12-volt battery-saving function

In order to prevent the 12-volt battery of the
vehicle from discharging, if the headlights
and/or tail lights are on when the power

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1 With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on the
high beams.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Pull the lever toward you to the center
position to turn the high beams off.

2 Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high beams
once.
You can flash the high beams with the
headlights on or off.

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System) (if equipped)

AFS operates at speeds of approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

Cornering lights
 When the steering wheel or turn
signal lever is operated while the
headlights are on (low beam), a cornering light will turn on and light up
the direction of movement of the
vehicle. The cornering lights are
designed to ensure excellent visibility when making a turn at an intersection.
However, when vehicle speed is approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or higher, the
cornering lights will not turn on.

 When the shift position is in R while

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

the headlights are on (low beam),
both cornering lights will turn on.
This is designed to enhance visibility
when parking.
■ Cornering lights

When the cornering lights are on for more
than 30 minutes, they will turn off automatically.

Driving

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)
secures excellent visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically
adjusting the direction of the light axis
of the headlights according to vehicle
speed and the degree of the tire’s angle
as controlled by steering input.

187

188

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
The AHB indicator will come on when the
system is operating.

AHB (Automatic High
Beam)
The Automatic High Beam uses a
camera sensor located behind the
upper portion of the windshield to
assess the brightness of the lights of
vehicles ahead, streetlights, etc.,
and automatically turns the high
beams on or off as necessary.

■ Conditions to turn the high beams on/off

WARNING

automatically

■ Limitations of the Automatic High

Beam
Do not overly rely on the Automatic High
Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and turning
the high beams on or off manually if necessary.

■ To prevent incorrect operation of the

Automatic High Beam system
Do not overload the vehicle.

Activating the Automatic High
Beam
1 Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.

● When all of the following conditions are

met, the high beams will be turned on
automatically (after approximately 1 second):
• The vehicle speed is approximately 21
mph (34 km/h) or more.
• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few streetlights on the road
ahead.
● If any of the following conditions are met,
the high beams will turn off automatically:
• The vehicle speed is below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
• Vehicles ahead have their headlights or
tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the road
ahead.
■ Camera sensor detection information
● The high beams may not be automatically

2 Push the lever away from you with
the headlight switch in the
position.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

turned off in the following situations:
• When a vehicle suddenly appears from
around a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of by
another vehicle
• When vehicles ahead cannot be
detected due to repeated curves, road
dividers or roadside trees
• When vehicles ahead appear in a faraway lane on a wide road
• When the lights of vehicles ahead are not
on
● The high beams may be turned off if a

189

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness
• When frequently and repeatedly driving
ascending/descending roads, or roads
with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces
(such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads,
etc.)
• When frequently and repeatedly taking
curves or driving on a winding road
• When there is a highly reflective object
ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or
mirror
• When the back of a preceding vehicle is
highly reflective, such as a container on a
truck
• When the vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly
• When the vehicle is listing or titling due to
a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.
• When the headlights are changed
between the high beams and low beams
repeatedly in an abnormal manner
• When the driver believes that the high
beams may be flashing or dazzling
pedestrians or other drivers
■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.
1 Turn the power switch on while the following conditions are met.
● The headlight switch is in

● The headlight switch lever is in high beam

position.

● Automatic High Beam switch is on.

2 Turn the power switch to ON mode.
3 Within 30 seconds after step 2, repeat
pulling the headlight switch lever to the
original position then pushing it to the
high beam position quickly 10 times,
then leave the lever in high beam position.
4 If the sensitivity is changed, the AHB
indicator is turn on and off 3 times.
Automatic High Beam (headlights) may
turn on even when the vehicle is stopped.

Driving

vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without its headlights turned on is detected.
● House lights, street lights, traffic signals,
and illuminated billboards or signs and
other reflective objects may cause the
high beams to change to the low beams,
or the low beams to remain on.
● The following factors may affect the
amount of time taken for the high beams
to turn on or off:
• The brightness of the headlights, fog
lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead
• The movement and direction of vehicles
ahead
• When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side
• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled
vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient,
curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)
• The number of passengers and amount of
luggage in the vehicle
● The high beams may turn on or off unexpectedly.
● Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be
detected.
● In the following situations the system may
not be able to correctly detect the surrounding brightness level. This may cause
the low beams to remain on or the high
beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or
vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is necessary to manually switch between the high
and low beams.
• When driving in inclement weather
(heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)
• When the windshield is obscured by fog,
mist, ice, dirt, etc.
• When the windshield is cracked or damaged
• When the camera sensor is deformed or
dirty
• When the temperature of the camera
sensor is extremely high
• When the surrounding brightness level is
equal to that of headlights, tail lights or
fog lights
• When headlights or tail lights of vehicles
ahead are turned off, dirty, changing
color, or not aimed properly
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,
dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle

190

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Turning the high beams on/off
manually
■ Switching to the low beams

Pull the lever to its original position.
The AHB indicator will turn off.
Push the lever away from you to activate
the Automatic High Beam system again.

Windshield wipers and
washer
Operating the lever can switch
between automatic operation and
manual operation, or can use the
washer.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

Operating the wiper lever
Operate the lever and switch as fol■ Switching to the high beams

Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The AHB indicator will turn off and the
high beam indicator will turn on.
Press the switch to activate the Automatic
High Beam system again.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

lows to use the wipers. When
is
selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically
adjusts wiper timing in accordance
with rain volume and vehicle speed.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

(U.S.A.) or

(Canada)

Off
2

Rain-sensing wiper operation

The wipers will operate automatically when
the sensor detects falling rain. The system
automatically adjusts wiper timing in
accordance with rain volume and vehicle
speed.

(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Low speed wiper operation

(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
High speed wiper operation

(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Temporary operation

8 Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a couple
of times after the washer squirts.
(After operating several times, the wipers
operate once more time after a short delay
to prevent dripping. However, the dripping
prevention does not operate while the
vehicle is moving.)
Vehicles with headlight cleaners:
When the power switch is in ON mode
and the headlights are on, if the lever is
pulled, the headlight cleaners will operate
once. After this, the headlight cleaners will
operate every 5th time the lever is pulled.
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be

operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.

■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper opera-

tion
Even when the wipers are not in AUTO
mode, vehicle speed affects the time until
the drip prevention wiper sweep occurs.
With low speed windshield wiper operation
selected, wiper operation will be switched
from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
(However, when the sensor sensitivity is
adjusted to the highest level, the mode cannot be switched.)

■ Raindrop sensor
● The raindrop sensor judges the amount

6 Increases the sensitivity
7 Decreases the sensitivity

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

of raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight from the
rising or setting of the sun intermittently
strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are
present on the windshield.

Driving

When
is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by turning the
switch ring.

191

192

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

● If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode

while the power switch is in ON mode,
the wipers will operate once to show that
AUTO mode is activated.
● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor
is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or 5°F
(-15°C) or lower, automatic operation
may not occur. In this case, operate the
wipers in any mode other than AUTO
mode.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not
blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

The outside rear view mirror defoggers
automatically turn off approximately 15
minutes after the wipers stop.
For details about the outside rear view mirror defoggers: →P.324
WARNING
■ Caution regarding the use of wind-

shield wipers in AUTO mode
The windshield wipers may operate
unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or
the windshield is subject to vibration in
AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers
or anything else do not become caught
in the windshield wipers.

■ Caution regarding the use of washer

■ Front door opening linked windshield

wiper stop function

When
is selected and the windshield
wipers are operating, if a front door is
opened while the vehicle is stopped and the
P shift position is selected, operation of the
windshield wipers will be stopped to prevent anyone near the vehicle from being
sprayed by water from the wipers. When
the front door is closed, wiper operation will
resume.
■ When stopping hybrid system in an

emergency while driving
If the windshield wipers are operating when
hybrid system is stopped, the windshield
wipers will operate in high speed operation.
After the vehicle is stopped, operation will
return to normal when the power switch is
turned to ON mode, or operation will stop
when the driver’s door is opened.

■ Outside rear view mirror defogger acti-

vation linked to windshield wiper operation
The outside rear view mirror defoggers
automatically turn on when you operate the
windshield wipers.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer
fluid until the windshield becomes warm.
The fluid may freeze on the windshield
and cause low visibility. This may lead to
an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE

■ When there is no washer fluid spray

from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may
be caused if the lever is pulled toward
you and held continually.

■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.

Changing the windshield wiper
rest position/Lifting the windshield wipers
When the windshield wipers are not
being used, they retract to below the
hood. To enable the windshield wipers
to be lifted when parking in cold conditions or when replacing a windshield

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

193

wiper insert, change the rest position of
the windshield wipers to the service
position using the wiper lever.
■ Raising the wipers to the service

position

Within approximately 45 seconds of
turning the power switch off, move the
wiper lever to the
(U.S.A.) or
(Canada) position and hold it for
approximately 2 seconds or more.
The wipers will move to the service position.

■ Lowering the windshield wipers to the

retracted position
With the windshield wipers placed on the
windshield, turn the power switch to ON
mode and then move the wiper lever to an
operating position. When the wiper switch
is turned off, the windshield wipers will stop
at the retracted position. Even if the wipers
deviate while the power switch is off, the
wipers will return to the normal position.

■ When lifting the windshield wipers
● Do not lift the windshield wipers when

they are in the retracted position
below the hood. Otherwise, they may
contact the hood, possibly resulting in
damage to a windshield wiper and/or
the hood.

● Do not lift a windshield wiper by the

wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper
blade may be deformed.

■ Lifting the windshield wipers

While holding the hook portion A of
the wiper arm, lift the windshield wiper
from the windshield.
● Do not operate the wiper lever when

the windshield wipers are lifted. Otherwise, the windshield wipers may
contact the hood, possibly resulting in
damage to the windshield wipers
and/or hood.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

NOTICE

194

4-4. Refueling

4-4.Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

The fuel tank of your vehicle has a
special structure, which requires a
reduction in fuel tank pressure
before refueling. After the opener
switch has been pressed, it will take
several seconds until the vehicle is
ready for refueling.

Before refueling the vehicle
 Close all the doors and windows,
and turn the power switch off.
 Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types

→P.470
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded
fuel pumps.
WARNING
■ When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while
refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before

opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge
any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors
to ignite while refueling.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank

cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard
when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard
before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray
out the filler neck and cause injury.

● Do not allow anyone that has not dis-

charged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel
tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are
harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling the vehi-

cle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite
and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch

any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to
build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.

■ When refueling

Observe the following precautions to
prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the

fuel filler neck.

● Stop filling the tank after the fuel noz-

zle automatically clicks off.

● Do not top off the fuel tank.

4-4. Refueling
NOTICE
■ Refueling
● Finish refueling within 30 minutes. If

more than 30 minutes passes, the
internal valve closes. In this condition,
fuel may overflow during the refueling
process.
Press the fuel filler door opener switch
again.
● Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle,
such as causing the emission control
system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle’s painted surface.

Opening the fuel tank cap
1 Press the opener switch.

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly and
remove it, then put it into the holder
on the fuel filler door.

■ If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

→P.445

Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap
until you hear a click. Once the cap is
released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

WARNING
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus
fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious
injury.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

The fuel filler door will open within about
10 seconds of the switch being pressed.
Before refueling is possible, a message will
be shown on the multi-information display
in the instrument cluster to indicate the
progress of the fuel filler door opener.

195

196

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lexus Safety System+A*

4-5.Using the driving support systems

: If equipped

The Lexus Safety System+A consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and
comfortable driving experience:

Drive assist systems of Lexus
Safety System+A
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)(vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System+A)

→P.209
■ FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)

→P.227
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

→P.230
■ AHB (Automatic High Beam)

→P.188
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist)

→P.247
■ Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range

→P.250

WARNING
■ Lexus Safety System+A

The Lexus Safety System+A is designed
to operate under the assumption that the
driver will drive safely, and is designed to
help reduce the impact to the occupants
and the vehicle in the case of a collision
or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance
that this system can provide, do not
overly rely on this system. The driver is
always responsible for paying attention
to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving
safely.

Vehicle data recording
The pre-collision system is equipped
with a sophisticated computer that will
record certain data, such as:
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the pre-collision
system functions
• Information (such as the distance
and relative speed between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead or
other objects)
• Images from the camera sensor
(available only in situations when
sudden inputs occur while driving
[sudden acceleration, etc.], the
pre-collision braking function or the
pre-collision brake assist function
was operating, the Parking Support
Brake function [static objects] was
operating, or your vehicle was
involved in a collision)
The pre-collision system does not

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

197

record conversations, sounds or
images of the inside of the vehicle.
 Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in this
computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and
improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to
a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or
with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the
police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit

 Recorded images can be erased
using a specialized device.
The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled,
data from when the pre-collision system
operates will not be available.

Sensors
Four types of sensors, located behind
the front grille, front bumper, rear
bumper and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive
assist systems.
 Front

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

B Front side radar sensors
C Camera sensor

 Rear
Rear side radar sensors (→P.260)
4

Driving

• For research purposes where the data is
not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner

A Front radar sensor

198

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Certification
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

199

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Driving

WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the front

radar sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not
operate properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

200

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

● Keep the radar sensor and front grille

emblem clean at all times.

■ To avoid malfunction of the front side

radar sensors
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not
operate properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.

● Keep the radar sensors and their sur-

rounding areas on the front bumper
clean at all times.

A Radar sensor
B Front grille emblem

If the front of the radar sensor or the front
or back of the front grille emblem is dirty
or covered with water droplets, snow,
etc., clean it.
Clean the radar sensor and front grille
emblem with a soft cloth so you do not
mark or damage them.
● Do not attach accessories, stickers

(including transparent stickers), or
other items to the radar sensor, front
grille emblem or surrounding area.

● Do not subject the radar sensor or sur-

rounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor is moved even
slightly off position, the system may
malfunction and objects may not be
detected correctly.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front
bumper has been subjected to a
strong impact, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar sen-

sor, front grille emblem or surrounding
area.

● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front

bumper needs to be removed and
installed, or replaced, contact your
Lexus dealer.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

If a radar sensor or its surrounding area
on the front bumper is dirty or covered
with snow, the system may not operate
and a warning message (→P.440) will
be displayed.
If this occurs, clean off the dirt or snow
and drive the vehicle for approximately
10 minutes.
If the warning message does not disappear, have your vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach accessories, stickers

(including transparent stickers), aluminum tape or other items to the radar
sensors or their surrounding area.

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Do not subject a radar sensor or its

surrounding area on the front bumper
to a strong impact.
If a radar sensor is moved even slightly
off position, the system may malfunction
and vehicles may not be detected correctly.
In the following situations, have your
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
• If a radar sensor or its surrounding
area is subject to a strong impact

201

• If a glass coating agent is applied to the
windshield, it will still be necessary to
use the windshield wipers to remove
water droplets, etc. from the area of
the windshield in front of the camera
sensor.
• If the inner side of the windshield
where the camera sensor is installed is
dirty, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach objects, such as stickers,

transparent stickers, and so forth, to
the outer side of the windshield in front
of the camera sensor (shaded area in
the illustration).

• If the area on the front bumper around
a radar sensor is scratched or dented,
or the front bumper has become partially disengaged

● Do not disassemble the radar sensors.

their surrounding area on the front
bumper.

● If a radar sensor or the front bumper

needs to be removed and installed, or
replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

● Do not paint the front bumper any

color other than an official Lexus color.

■ To avoid malfunction of the camera

sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the camera sensor may not
operate properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.

● Keep the windshield clean at all times.

• If the windshield is dirty or covered
with an oily film, water droplets, snow,
etc., clear the windshield.
• As some glass coating agents may
affect the detection performance of
the camera sensor, consult your Lexus
dealer when using a glass coating
agent.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

A From the top of the windshield to
approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below
the bottom of the camera sensor
B Approximately 14.2 in. (36 cm)
(Approximately 7.1 in. [18 cm] to the
right and left from the center of the
camera sensor)
● If the part of the windshield in front of

the camera sensor is fogged up or
covered with condensation or ice, use
the windshield defogger to remove the
fog, condensation or ice. (→P.324)

Driving

● Do not modify the radar sensors or

202

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

● If water droplets cannot be properly

removed from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor by
the windshield wipers, replace the
wiper insert or wiper blade.
If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need
to be replaced, contact your Lexus
dealer.

● Do not attach window tinting to the

windshield.

● Replace the windshield if it is damaged

or cracked.
If the windshield needs to be replaced,
contact your Lexus dealer.

● Do not get the camera sensor wet.
● Do not allow bright lights to shine into

the camera sensor.

● Do not dirty or damage the camera

sensor.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to
contact the lens. Also, do not touch the
lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact
your Lexus dealer.

● Do not subject the camera sensor to a

strong impact.

● Do not change the installation position

or direction of the camera sensor or
remove it.

● Do not disassemble the camera sen-

sor.

● Do not modify any components of the

vehicle around the camera sensor
(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.

● Do not attach any accessories that

may obstruct the camera sensor to the
hood, front grille or front bumper.
Contact your Lexus dealer.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● If a surfboard or other long object is to

be mounted on the roof, make sure
that it will not obstruct the camera sensor.

● Do not modify the headlights or other

lights.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lexus Safety System+*
*

: If equipped

The Lexus Safety System+ consists
of the following drive assist systems
and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:

Drive assist systems of Lexus
Safety System+
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)(vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System+)

→P.220
■ LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
■ AHB (Automatic High Beam)

→P.188

■ Dynamic radar cruise control with

The pre-collision system does not
record conversations, sounds or
images of the inside of the vehicle.

→P.250

 Data usage

full-speed range

WARNING
■ Lexus Safety System+

The Lexus Safety System+ is designed to
operate under the assumption that the
driver will drive safely, and is designed to
help reduce the impact to the occupants
and the vehicle in the case of a collision
or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance
that this system can provide, do not
overly rely on this system. The driver is
always responsible for paying attention
to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving
safely.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Lexus may use the data recorded in this
computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and
improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to
a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or
with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the
police, a court of law or a government
agency

Driving

→P.240

203

204

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is
not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner

Sensors
Two types of sensors, located behind
the front grille and windshield, detect
information necessary to operate the
drive assist systems.

A Radar sensor
B Camera sensor

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

205

■ Certification
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

Driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

206

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 For vehicles sold in Canada

WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sen-

sor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not
operate properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Keep the radar sensor and front grille

emblem clean at all times.

207

■ To avoid malfunction of the camera

sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the camera sensor may not
operate properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.

● Keep the windshield clean at all times.

• If the windshield is dirty or covered
with an oily film, water droplets, snow,
etc., clear the windshield.
A Radar sensor
B Front grille emblem

If the front of the radar sensor or the front
or back of the front grille emblem is dirty
or covered with water droplets, snow,
etc., clean it.

● Do not attach accessories, stickers

(including transparent stickers), or
other items to the radar sensor, front
grille emblem or surrounding area.

• If the inner side of the windshield
where the camera sensor is installed is
dirty, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach objects, such as stickers,

transparent stickers, and so forth, to
the outer side of the windshield in front
of the camera sensor (shaded area in
the illustration).

● Do not subject the radar sensor or sur-

rounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front
bumper has been subjected to a
strong impact, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar sen-

sor, front grille emblem or surrounding
area.

● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front

bumper needs to be removed and
installed, or replaced, contact your
Lexus dealer.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

A From the top of the windshield to
approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below
the bottom of the camera sensor
B Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)
(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the
right and left from the center of the
camera sensor)

Driving

Clean the radar sensor and front grille
emblem with a soft cloth so you do not
mark or damage them.

208

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

● If the part of the windshield in front of

the camera sensor is fogged up or
covered with condensation or ice, use
the windshield defogger to remove the
fog, condensation or ice. (→P.324)

● If water droplets cannot be properly

● Do not attach window tinting to the

windshield.

● Replace the windshield if it is damaged

or cracked.
If the windshield needs to be replaced,
contact your Lexus dealer.

● Do not get the camera sensor wet.
● Do not allow bright lights to shine into

the camera sensor.

● Do not dirty or damage the camera

sensor.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to
contact the lens. Also, do not touch the
lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact
your Lexus dealer.

● Do not subject the camera sensor to a

strong impact.

● Do not change the installation position

or direction of the camera sensor or
remove it.

● Do not disassemble the camera sen-

sor.

● Do not modify any components of the

vehicle around the camera sensor
(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Do not attach any accessories that

may obstruct the camera sensor to the
hood, front grille or front bumper.
Contact your Lexus dealer.

● If a surfboard or other long object is to

be mounted on the roof, make sure
that it will not obstruct the camera sensor.

● Do not modify the headlights or other

lights.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

209

PCS (Pre-Collision System)
(vehicles with Lexus Safety
System+A)

The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. (→P.213)

System functions

■ Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high, a
buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the
multi-information display to urge the
driver to take evasive action.

■ Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the system applies greater braking
force in relation to how strongly the
brake pedal is depressed.

■ Pedestrian alert

■ Pre-collision braking

When the system determines that
there is a possibility of a frontal collision
with a stationary or moving pedestrian
in front of your vehicle, a message will
be displayed on the head-up display to
warn the driver.

When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a
frontal collision is extremely high, the
brakes are automatically applied to
help avoid the collision or reduce the
collision speed.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

The pre-collision system uses a
front radar sensor and camera sensor to detect vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle and front
side sensors to detect vehicles
approaching from the front left or
right side. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal
collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to
urge the driver to take evasive
action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver
avoid the collision. If the system
determines that the possibility of a
frontal collision with a vehicle or
pedestrian is extremely high, the
brakes are automatically applied to
help avoid the collision or help
reduce the impact of the collision.

210

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Active steering assist

■ Steering control

If the system determines that the possibility of a collision with an object, such
as a guardrail, or pedestrian is high,
even though the brakes are applied,
and that the collision may be avoidable
through steering control, the system
will steer the vehicle automatically to
help avoid the collision or help reduce
the impact of the collision.

When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high
and the driver is operating the steering
wheel, the LDH system (→P.303) will
control the turning angle of the front
and rear wheels and effort necessary
to turn the steering wheel to help
enhance steering responsiveness.

■ Pre-collision seat belts (front seat

only)

If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the
system will retract the seat belts. Additionally, the system may retract the seat
belts if the brakes are applied suddenly
or control of the vehicle is lost.
■ Pre-collision seatbacks (front pas-

senger’s seat / power rear seat [if
equipped])

If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, it may
move the seatbacks of the front passenger’s seat and power rear seats to
the upright position automatically, if
reclined.
If a seat is being adjusted, it may not be
moved by the pre-collision seat function.
■ Suspension control

When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the Adaptive Variable Suspension System (→P.303) will control the damping force of the shock absorbers to
help maintain an appropriate vehicle
posture.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
● The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system
instead of normal braking operations
under any circumstances. This system
will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system.
Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.

● Although this system is designed to

help avoid a collision or help reduce
the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various
conditions, therefore the system may
not always be able to achieve the same
level of performance.
Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system
and always drive carefully.
• Conditions under which the system
may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision: →P.214

• Conditions under which the system
may not operate properly: →P.216
● Do not attempt to test the operation of

the pre-collision system yourself, as the
system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking func-

tion is operating, a large amount of
braking force will be applied.

● If the vehicle is stopped by the opera-

tion of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function
operation will be canceled after
approximately 2 seconds. Depress the
brake pedal as necessary.

● The pre-collision braking function may

not operate if certain operations are
performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly
or the steering wheel is being turned,
the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and may
prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.
sion braking function is operating,
operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is
depressed strongly or the steering
wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive
action.

● If the brake pedal is being depressed,

the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the
pre-collision braking function.

■ Active steering assist
● The steering wheel may turn automati-

cally when active steering assist is
operating.

● As active steering assist operation will

be canceled when the system determines that a collision has been
avoided, operate the steering wheel as
necessary.

● In the following situations, the system

may determine that the driver is taking
evasive action. In this case, the active
steering assist may not operate or may
be canceled.
• If the accelerator pedal is being
depressed strongly or the steering
wheel is being operated. In this case
the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and the
pre-collision braking may not operate.
• In some situations, while the active
steering assist is operating, operation
of the function may be canceled if the
accelerator pedal is depressed
strongly or the steering wheel is turned
and the system determines that the
driver is taking evasive action.
• When the active steering assist is
operating, if the steering wheel is held
firmly or is operated in the opposite
direction to that which the system is
generating torque, the function may be
canceled.
• If the brake pedal is depressed, the system may determine that the driver is
taking evasive action and the active
steering assist operation may be
delayed.

■ Pre-collision seat belts with comfort

function
If the pre-collision seat belts have operated and the seat belts are locked in a
retracted position, immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release and
retract the seat belts to unlock them and
then fasten them again.
Also, if a seat belt can be loosened, it can
be unlocked by slightly retracting it without releasing it.

■ When to disable the pre-collision sys-

tem
In the following situations, disable the
system, as it may not operate properly,
possibly leading to an accident resulting
in death or serious injury:

● When the vehicle is being towed

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

● In some situations, while the pre-colli-

211

212

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

● When your vehicle is towing another

vehicle

● When transporting the vehicle via

truck, boat, train or similar means of
transportation

● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with

the hybrid system on and the tires are
allowed to rotate freely

● When inspecting the vehicle using a

drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or
when using an on vehicle wheel balancer

● When a strong impact has been

applied to the front bumper, rear
bumper or front grille, due to an accident or other situation

● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a sta-

ble manner, such as when the vehicle
has been in an accident or is malfunctioning

● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty

Changing settings of the pre-collision system
■ Enabling/disabling the pre-colli-

sion system

The pre-collision system can be
enabled/disabled on
(→P.86) of
the multi-information display.
The system is automatically enabled each
time the power switch is turned to ON
mode

If the system is disabled, the PCS warning light will turn on and a message will
be displayed on the multi-information
display.
If the pre-collision system is disabled,
the pedestrian alert system will also be
disabled. At this time, the FCTA (Front
Cross Traffic Alert) (→P.227) system
will also be disabled.

manner or off-road

● When the tires are not properly

inflated

● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than speci-

fied are installed

● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or an

emergency tire puncture repair kit is
used

● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may

obstruct a sensor is temporarily
installed to the vehicle

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Enabling/Disabling the pedestrian

alert system

The pedestrian alert can be
enabled/disabled on
(→P.86) of
the multi-information display. At this
time, the FCTA (Front Cross Traffic
Alert) system will also be enabled/disabled.

4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Changing the pre-collision warn-

ing timing

The pre-collision warning timing can
be changed on
(→P.86) of the
multi-information display. The warning
timing for the pedestrian and FCTA
(Front Cross Traffic Alert) system will
also be changed.
The operation timing setting is retained
when the power switch is turned off.

The warning will begin to operate earlier
than with the default timing.

2 Middle
This is the default setting.

3 Near
The warning will begin to operate later
than with the default timing.
■ Changing the pedestrian alert tim-

ing

If the pre-collision warning timing is
changed, the pedestrian alert and
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) timing
will also be changed accordingly.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Operational conditions

The pre-collision system is enabled and the
system determines that the possibility of a
frontal collision with a vehicle, pedestrian/bicyclist, guardrail, etc. or a front side
collision with a vehicle is high. Each function
is operational at the following speeds:
● Pedestrian alert:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
20 and 40 mph (30 and 65 km/h)
● Pre-collision warning:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
3 and 110 mph (5 and 180 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian or bicyclist, vehicle speed is between approximately 3
and 50 mph [5 and 80 km/h] and for
detecting a vehicle approaching from the
front left or right side, vehicle speed is
between approximately 7 and 37 mph
[10 and 60 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle
and the detected pedestrian, bicyclist or
vehicle ahead is approximately 3 mph (5
km/h) or more. (For detecting a vehicle
approaching from the front left or right
side, the speed of the approaching vehicle is between approximately 10 and 37
mph [15 and 60 km/h].)
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian or bicyclist, vehicle speed is between approximately 20
and 50 mph [30 and 80 km/h] and for
detecting a vehicle approaching from the
front left or right side, vehicle speed is
between approximately 19 and 37 mph
[30 and 60 km/h].)

Driving

1 Far

213

214

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• The relative speed between your vehicle
and the detected pedestrian, bicyclist or
vehicle ahead is approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h) or more. (For detecting a vehicle approaching from the front left or
right side, the speed of the approaching
vehicle is between approximately 10 and
37 mph [15 and 60 km/h].)
● Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
3 and 110 mph (5 and 180 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian or bicyclist, vehicle speed is between approximately 3
and 50 mph [5 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle
and the detected pedestrian, bicyclist or
vehicle ahead is approximately 3 mph (5
km/h) or more.
● Active steering assist
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
25 and 50 mph (40 and 80 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is
between approximately 25 and 40 mph
[40 and 65 km/h] and for detecting a
guardrail, vehicle speed is between
approximately 37 and 50 mph [60 and
80 km/h].)
The system may not operate in the following
situations:
● If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the
vehicle has not been driven for a certain
amount of time
● If the shift position is in R
● If VSC is disabled (only the pedestrian
alert and pre-collision warning function
will be operational)
● When there is insufficient safe or unobstructed space for the vehicle to be
steered into
● When an object is approaching the area
the vehicle is to be steered into

person, preventing the system from operating properly. (→P.216)

■ Cancelation of pre-collision braking

and active steering assist
If either of the following occur while the
pre-collision braking function is operating, it
will be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is depressed
strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned sharply or
abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the system may

operate even if there is no possibility of a
collision
● In some situations such as the following,
the system may determine that there is a
possibility of a frontal collision and operate.
• When passing a vehicle, pedestrian or
bicyclist
• When changing lanes while overtaking a
preceding vehicle
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle
that is changing lanes
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle
that is making a left/right turn

■ Pedestrian and bicyclist detection func-

tion
The pre-collision system detects pedestrians and bicyclists based on the size, profile,
and motion of the person. However, a
pedestrian or bicyclist may not be detected
depending on the surrounding brightness
and the motion, posture, and angle of the

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming
lane that is stopped to make a right/left
turn

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When driving on a road where relative
location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent
lane may change, such as on a winding
road

215

• When passing through a place with a low
structure above the road such as a low
ceiling, underpass, bridge girder, traffic
sign, etc.

4
• When passing under an object (billboard,
etc.) at the top of an uphill road

• When rapidly closing on an electric toll
gate barrier, parking area barrier, or
other barrier that opens and closes
• When using an automatic car wash
• When driving through or under objects
that may contact the vehicle, such as thick
grass, tree branches, or a banner
• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object (manhole
cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, dips, or a
protrusion on the road surface or roadside
• When a crossing pedestrian or bicyclist
approaches very close to the vehicle

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,
dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke

Driving

• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead
• When the road surface is uneven or
undulating
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered
• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, traffic signs, utility poles, street lights, trees, walls, etc.
• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, bicyclist, or object by the roadside at the
entrance of a curve

216

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When there are patterns or paint on the
road, a wall, or billboard that may be mistaken for a vehicle, pedestrian, or bicyclist
• When driving near an object that reflects
radio waves, such as a large truck or
guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or
other location where strong radio waves
or electrical noise may be present
• When passing an oncoming vehicle on a
narrow road
• When driving close to objects such as
walls or poles on a median
• When passing an oncoming vehicle
around a sharp curve
• When passing a vehicle which is making
a left/right turn

• When being passed by a vehicle
approaching from the left or right side in
front of your vehicle

• When passing an object on the side of the
road, such as a parked vehicle
• When passing an oncoming vehicle on a
S curve
• When there is an object that may be mistaken for a pedestrian, such as a utility
pole, tree, or pole on the roadside or at
the entrance of a curve
• When there is a bicycle or motorcycle on
the roadside at the entrance of a curve
• If the preceding vehicle is a bicycle or
motorcycle
● The system may operate the pedestrian
alert unnecessarily if it detects the following:
• Pedestrians on a sidewalk
• Bicycles and motorcycles
• Patterns or paint on the road, a wall,
median, billboard, etc. that may be mistaken for a pedestrian or bicyclist
■ Situations in which the system may not

• When making a left/right turn while a
vehicle is approaching from the left or
right side in front of your vehicle

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

operate properly
● In some situations, such as the following,
a vehicle or other object may not be
detected by the sensors, preventing the
system from operating properly:
• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching
your vehicle
• When approaching the side or front of a
vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear
end, such as an unloaded truck
• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,
such as a low bed trailer

4-5. Using the driving support systems

•
•
•
• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which
protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high
ground clearance

•
•
•
•
•

217

or the headlights of oncoming traffic,
shines directly into the camera sensor
When driving in a location where there
are many objects which reflect radar,
such as a tunnel or parking garage
When driving at night or in a tunnel with
the headlights off
When the surrounding area is dim, such
as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in
a tunnel
After the hybrid system has started the
vehicle has not been driven for a certain
amount of time
While making a left/right turn and for a
few seconds after making a left/right turn
While driving on a curve and for a few
seconds after driving on a curve
If your vehicle is skidding
If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered
4

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped,
such as a tractor or side car
• If the sun or other light is shining directly
on a vehicle or guardrail ahead
• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or
emerges from beside a vehicle
• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt
maneuver (such as sudden swerving,
acceleration or deceleration)
• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle
• When a vehicle ahead is not directly in
front of your vehicle

• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera
sensor
• The vehicle is wobbling.
• The vehicle is being driven at extremely
high speeds.
• When driving on a hill
• If a sensor is misaligned
• If the headlights are misaligned
• When approaching a guardrail at a wide
or narrow angle
• When a vehicle approaches your vehicle
from the front left or right side while your
vehicle is entering an intersection with
poor visibility
• When a vehicle approaches your vehicle
from the rear left or right side
• When a vehicle approaches the side of
your vehicle at a shallow angle
• When driving on a road with a grade that
changes sharply (sharp incline/decline)
● In some situations, such as the following,
the sensors may not detect the lane lines
or a safe space the vehicle can be steered

218

4-5. Using the driving support systems

into, preventing the active steering assist
from operating properly:
• When the white (yellow) lane lines are
difficult to see, such as when they are
faint, diverging/merging, or a shadow is
cast upon them
• When the lane is more wide or narrow
than normal
• When there is a light and dark pattern on
the road surface , such as due to road
repairs
• If the system determines that a collision
can be avoided by only using the brakes
• When a pedestrian is detected near the
centerline of the vehicle
● In some situations such as the following,
sufficient braking force or steering force
may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:
• If the braking functions cannot operate to
their full extent, such as when the brake
parts are extremely cold, extremely hot,
or wet
• If the vehicle is not properly maintained
(brakes or tires are excessively worn,
improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven on a
gravel road or other slippery surface
• If there are deep ruts in the road
• When driving on a slope
• When driving on a horizontally slanted
road
● Some pedestrians and bicyclists, such as
the following, may not be detected by the
sensors, preventing the system from
operating properly:
• Pedestrians and bicyclists shorter than
approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than
approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)
• Bicyclists riding on unusual bicycles
(bicycles for small children, tricycles,
folding bicycles, BMX bicycles, tandem
bicycles, etc.)
• Pedestrians and bicyclists who are wearing white and look extremely bright
• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are not
illuminated by the headlights at night, in a
tunnel, etc.
• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to
be nearly the same color or brightness as
their surroundings
• Pedestrians and bicyclists near walls,
fences, guardrails, or large objects

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are on a
metal object (manhole cover, steel plate,
etc.) on the road
• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are moving fast
• Pedestrians and bicyclists which change
speed or direction abruptly
• Pedestrians and bicyclists which suddenly
emerge from behind a vehicle or large
object
• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are
extremely close to the side of the vehicle
(outside rear view mirror, etc.)
• Pedestrians and bicyclists wearing oversized clothing, such as a rain coat, long
skirt, etc., making their silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians and bicyclists who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella,
etc., hiding part of their body
• Pedestrians and bicyclists behind an
object that hides part of their body
• Pedestrians and bicyclists who are bending forward or squatting
• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller,
wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle
• Groups of pedestrians/bicyclists which
are close together
● Some guardrails, such as the following,
may not be detected by the sensors, preventing the system from operating properly:
• Guardrails which are less than approximately 1.9 ft. (60 cm) tall
• Short guardrails
• Irregularly-shaped guardrails (wire cable
guardrails, guardrails made of thin poles,
etc.)
• Guardrails which are not illuminated by
the headlights at night, in a tunnel, etc.
• Guardrails which appear to be nearly the
same color or brightness as their surroundings
• Guardrails which appear to be nearly the
same shape as their surroundings (walls,
etc.)
• Guardrails which are over a metal object
(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.)
• Guardrails which are hidden behind thick
grass
• Guardrails which are extremely close to
the side of the vehicle (outside rear view
mirror, etc.)
• Curved guardrails or guardrails at the
entrance of a curve

4-5. Using the driving support systems
● In some situations such as the following,

•
•
•
•
•

the system may detect a pedestrian and
display a warning on the head-up display,
even though no pedestrian exists:
If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is
uneven or undulating (due to ruts, etc.)
When driving on a slope
When driving on a horizontally slanted
road
If the driver’s posture (driver seat position) is extreme, such as excessively
reclined
If the head-up display position is set
extremely high

219

sion braking functions are also disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on and
“VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake
System Unavailable” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.

■ If the PCS warning light flashes or illumi-

■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled (→P.302), the

pre-collision brake assist and pre-colli-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

nates and a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display
The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.
● In the following situations, the warning
light will turn off, the message will disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating conditions
return:
• When a sensor or the area around a sensor is hot, such as in the sun
• When a sensor or the area around a sensor is cold, such as in an extremely cold
environment
• When a sensor is dirty or covered with
snow, etc.
• When the part of the windshield in front
of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice (Defogging the windshield: →P.324)
• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such
as when the hood is open or a sticker is
attached to the windshield near the camera sensor
● If the PCS warning light continues to flash
or remains illuminated or the warning
message does not disappear even
though the vehicle has returned to normal, the system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.

220

4-5. Using the driving support systems

PCS (Pre-Collision System)
(vehicles with Lexus Safety
System+)
The pre-collision system uses a
radar sensor and camera sensor to
detect vehicles and pedestrians in
front of your vehicle. When the system determines that the possibility
of a frontal collision with a vehicle
or pedestrian is high, a warning
operates to urge the driver to take
evasive action and the potential
brake pressure is increased to help
the driver avoid the collision. If the
system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a
vehicle or pedestrian is extremely
high, the brakes are automatically
applied to help avoid the collision or
help reduce the impact of the collision.
The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. (→P.222)

System functions
■ Pre-collision warning

■ Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the system applies greater braking
force in relation to how strongly the
brake pedal is depressed.
■ Pre-collision braking

senger’s seat / power rear seat [if
equipped])

When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high,

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

the Adaptive Variable Suspension System (→P.303) will control the damping force of the shock absorbers to
help maintain an appropriate vehicle
posture.
■ Steering control

● Although this system is designed to

• Conditions under which the system
may not operate properly: →P.225

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Do not attempt to test the operation of

the pre-collision system yourself, as the
system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.

■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking func-

tion is operating, a large amount of
braking force will be applied.

● If the vehicle is stopped by the opera-

tion of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function
operation will be canceled after
approximately 2 seconds. Depress the
brake pedal as necessary.

● The pre-collision braking function may

● In some situations, while the pre-colli-

sion braking function is operating,
operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is
depressed strongly or the steering
wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive
action.

● If the brake pedal is being depressed,

the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the
pre-collision braking function.

■ When to disable the pre-collision sys-

tem
In the following situations, disable the
system, as it may not operate properly,
possibly leading to an accident resulting
in death or serious injury:

● When the vehicle is being towed
● When your vehicle is towing another

vehicle

Driving

■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
● The driver is solely responsible for safe

221

222

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

● When transporting the vehicle via

truck, boat, train or similar means of
transportation

● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with

the hybrid system on and the tires are
allowed to rotate freely

● When inspecting the vehicle using a

The system is automatically enabled each
time the power switch is turned to ON
mode

If the system is disabled, the PCS warning light will turn on and a message will
be displayed on the multi-information
display.

drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or
when using an on vehicle wheel balancer

● When a strong impact is applied to the

front bumper or front grille, due to an
accident or other reasons

● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a sta-

ble manner, such as when the vehicle
has been in an accident or is malfunctioning

● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty

manner or off-road

● When the tires are not properly

inflated

● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than speci-

fied are installed

■ Changing the pre-collision warn-

ing timing

The pre-collision warning timing can
be changed on
(→P.86) of the
multi-information display.
The operation timing setting is retained
when the power switch is turned off.

● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or an

emergency tire puncture repair kit is
used

● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may

obstruct the radar sensor or camera
sensor is temporarily installed to the
vehicle

Changing settings of the pre-collision system
■ Enabling/disabling the pre-colli-

sion system
The pre-collision system can be
enabled/disabled on
(→P.86) of
the multi-information display.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1 Far
The warning will begin to operate earlier
than with the default timing.

2 Middle

4-5. Using the driving support systems

223

This is the default setting.

■ Pedestrian detection function

3 Near

The pre-collision system detects pedestrians based on the size, profile, and motion of
a detected object. However, a pedestrian
may not be detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the detected object,
preventing the system from operating properly. (→P.225)

The warning will begin to operate later
than with the default timing.
■ Operational conditions

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Cancelation of the pre-collision braking
If either of the following occur while the
pre-collision braking function is operating, it
will be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is depressed
strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned sharply or
abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the system may

operate even if there is no possibility of a
collision
● In some situations such as the following,
the system may determine that there is a
possibility of a frontal collision and operate.
• When passing a vehicle or pedestrian
• When changing lanes while overtaking a
preceding vehicle
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle
that is changing lanes
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle
that is making a left/right turn

Driving

The pre-collision system is enabled and the
system determines that the possibility of a
frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian
is high.
Each function is operational at the following
speeds:
● Pre-collision warning:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is
between approximately 7 and 50 mph
[10 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle
and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is
approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is
between approximately 20 and 50 mph
[30 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle
and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or
more.
● Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is
between approximately 7 and 50 mph
[10 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle
and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is
approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
The system may not operate in the following
situations:
● If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the
vehicle has not been driven for a certain
amount of time
● If the shift position is in R
● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision
warning function will be operational)

224

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming
lane that is stopped to make a right/left
turn

• When passing through a place with a low
structure above the road (low ceiling,
traffic sign, etc.)
• When driving on a road where relative
location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent
lane may change, such as on a winding
road

• When passing under an object (billboard,
etc.) at the top of an uphill road
• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is
uneven or undulating
• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility poles,
trees, or walls
• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, or
object by the roadside at the entrance of
a curve

• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object (manhole
cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion on the road surface or roadside
• When a crossing pedestrian approaches
very close to the vehicle

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,
dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When there are patterns or paint on the

4-5. Using the driving support systems
road or a wall that may be mistaken for a
vehicle or pedestrian
• When driving near an object that reflects
radio waves, such as a large truck or
guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or
other location where strong radio waves
or electrical noise may be present

225

emerges from beside a vehicle
• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt
maneuver (such as sudden swerving,
acceleration or deceleration)
• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle
• When a vehicle ahead is not directly in
front of your vehicle

■ Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

● In some situations such as the following, a

•
•
•
•

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which
protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high
ground clearance

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped,
such as a tractor or side car
• If the sun or other light is shining directly
on a vehicle ahead
• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• When driving in inclement weather such
as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,
dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly,
such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
• When a very bright light, such as the sun
or the headlights of oncoming traffic,
shines directly into the camera sensor
• When the surrounding area is dim, such
as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in
a tunnel
• After the hybrid system has started the
vehicle has not been driven for a certain
amount of time
• While making a left/right turn and for a
few seconds after making a left/right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a few
seconds after driving on a curve
• If your vehicle is skidding
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered

• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera
sensor

Driving

•

vehicle may not be detected by the radar
sensor and camera sensor, preventing
the system from operating properly:
If an oncoming vehicle is approaching
your vehicle
If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle
When approaching the side or front of a
vehicle
If a preceding vehicle has a small rear
end, such as an unloaded truck
If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,
such as a low bed trailer

226

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• The vehicle is wobbling.
• The vehicle is being driven at extremely
high speeds.
• When driving on a hill
• If the radar sensor or camera sensor is
misaligned
● In some situations such as the following,
sufficient braking force may not be
obtained, preventing the system from
performing properly:
• If the braking functions cannot operate to
their full extent, such as when the brake
parts are extremely cold, extremely hot,
or wet
• If the vehicle is not properly maintained
(brakes or tires are excessively worn,
improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven on a
gravel road or other slippery surface
● Some pedestrians such as the following
may not be detected by the radar sensor
and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
• Pedestrians shorter than approximately
3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately
6.5 ft. (2 m)
• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing
(a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their
silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding
part of their body
• Pedestrians who are bending forward or
squatting
• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller,
wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle
• Groups of pedestrians which are close
together
• Pedestrians who are wearing white and
look extremely bright
• Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night
or while in a tunnel
• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to
be nearly the same color or brightness as
their surroundings
• Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails,
or large objects
• Pedestrians who are on a metal object
(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the
road
• Pedestrians who are walking fast
• Pedestrians who are changing speed
abruptly

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• Pedestrians running out from behind a
vehicle or a large object
• Pedestrians who are extremely close to
the side of the vehicle (outside rear view
mirror, etc.)
■ If the PCS warning light flashes or illumi-

nates and a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display
The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.
● In the following situations, the warning
light will turn off, the message will disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating conditions
return:
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor
or the area around either sensor is hot,
such as in the sun
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor
or the area around either sensor is cold,
such as in an extremely cold environment
• When a front sensor is dirty or covered
with snow, etc.
• When the part of the windshield in front
of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice (Defogging the windshield: →P.324)
• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such
as when the hood is open or a sticker is
attached to the windshield near the camera sensor
● If the PCS warning light continues to flash
or remains illuminated or the warning
message does not disappear even
though the vehicle has returned to normal, the system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled (→P.302), the

pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking functions are also disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on and
“VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake
System Unavailable” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

227

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic
Alert)*
*:

If equipped

When approaching an intersection
at low speed, the radar sensors on
the front side of the vehicle can
detect approaching vehicles to the
left and right of the front of the vehicle. In this case, the head-up display
is used to inform the driver of
detected vehicles.

 Multi-information display

FCTA system functions

Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

When the system determines that your
vehicle may be about to enter an intersection even though a vehicle is
approaching from the left or right in
front of your vehicle, a buzzer will
sound and a message will be displayed
on the multi-information display to
urge you to depress the brake pedal.
 Head-up display

WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the

function
The driver is solely responsible for safe
driving. Always drive safely, taking care
to observe your surroundings.
The FCTA system is a supplementary
system that informs the driver of vehicles
approaching from the left and right of the
front of the vehicle.
Do not overly rely on the FCTA system.
Over reliance on the system may lead to
an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
The details of the warning display may
differ from the actual traffic conditions.
Although the warning display will stop
being displayed after a certain amount of
time, this does not indicate that vehicles
or pedestrians are no longer around your
vehicle.

■ The FCTA function is operational when

The system operates when all of the following conditions are met.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

When the system detects a vehicle
approaching from the left or right in
front of your vehicle when approaching
an intersection, a notification will be
displayed on the head-up display and
panoramic view monitor*.

228

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● Setting for “PCS” and “CAUTION” in

(→P.86) of the multi-information
display.
● A shift position other than P or R is
selected.
● Your vehicle is approaching an intersection at approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
lower.
● A vehicle is approaching from the left or
right in front of your vehicle at a speed
between approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
and 37 mph (60 km/h).
● There are no preceding vehicles ahead of
your vehicle.
● The accelerator pedal is not strongly
depressed.
● The brake pedal is not being strongly
depressed.
■ Situations in which the system may

operate even though no vehicles are
approaching
In certain situations, such as the following,
the system may operate even though no
vehicles are approaching:
● When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, traffic signs, utility poles, street lights, trees, or walls
● When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or
other location where strong radio waves
or electrical noise may be present
● When passing an object on the side of the
road, such as a parked vehicle
● When a vehicle or pedestrian is
approaching from the left or right in front
of your vehicle from far away
● When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving
within a parking spot, etc. next to the lane
your vehicle is driving in
● When a pedestrian or bicyclist is moving
on a sidewalk
● When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving
away from your vehicle
● When a vehicle approaching from the left
or right in front of your vehicle is decelerating or stops
● When a vehicle approaching from the left

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

or right in front of your vehicle makes a
left/right turn immediately in front of your
vehicle
● When a pedestrian is approaching your
vehicle
● When an oncoming vehicle makes a
left/right turn
● When your vehicle enters an intersection
before a vehicle approaching from the
left or right in front of your vehicle
● When stopped at traffic light and a vehicle approaches from the left or right in
front of your vehicle
● When driving in a location where there
are objects which reflect radar, such as
vehicles, guardrails, walls, traffic signs,
etc.
● When making a left/right turn in front of
an approaching vehicle

● When passing an oncoming vehicle
● When being overtaken by another vehi-

cle

● When driving next to another vehicle or a

pedestrian

● When a vehicle or pedestrian

approaches the side of your vehicle
Some objects, such as the following, may be
detected and cause the FCTA system to
operate:
● Pedestrians
■ Situations in which the system may not

operate properly
In some situations, such as the following, a
vehicle may not be detected by a front side
radar sensor, preventing the system from
operating properly:
● If the front end or side of an approaching
vehicle is small (sports cars, etc.)

4-5. Using the driving support systems
● If the front end of an approaching vehicle

is low (low-slung sports cars, etc.)
● If the ground clearance of an approaching vehicle is extremely high
● If the shape of an approaching vehicle is
unusual (tractors, motorcycles with sidecars, etc.)
● If a vehicle suddenly enters the detection
area on the left or right in front of your
vehicle from a parking lot, etc.

● If an approaching vehicle moves sud-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ When the PCS warning light is flashing

and a message is displayed on the
multi-information display
The system may be temporarily unavailable
or may be malfunctioning.

Driving

denly (sudden steering, acceleration,
deceleration, etc.)
● When driving in inclement weather such
as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
● After the hybrid system has been started
and the vehicle has not been driven for a
certain amount of time
● When driving on a road with a grade that
changes sharply (sharp incline/decline)
● When driving around a sharp curve or on
an undulating road
● If a vehicle is approaching from the left or
right of the front of your vehicle diagonally
● When a vehicle is approaching from the
left or right in front of your vehicle from
far away
● When there is an object between your
vehicle and an approaching vehicle
● When driving in a location where there
are objects which reflect radar, such as
guardrails, walls, vehicles, etc.
● When a group of vehicles which are close
together approach
● Immediately after the FCTA system has
been enabled

229

230

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)*
*

: If equipped

When driving on highways and
freeways with white or yellow lines,
this function alerts the driver when
the vehicle might depart from its
lane and provides assistance by
operating the steering wheel to
keep the vehicle in its lane. Furthermore, the system also provides
steering assistance when dynamic
radar cruise control with full-speed
range is operating to keep the vehicle in its lane.
The LTA system recognizes white or
yellow lane lines using a camera
sensor. Additionally, it detects preceding and surrounding vehicles
using the camera sensor and front
radar sensor.

WARNING
■ Before using LTA system

Do not rely solely upon the LTA system.
The LTA system does not automatically
drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of
attention that must be paid to the area in
front of the vehicle. The driver must
always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to
the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path
of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take
adequate breaks when fatigued, such as
from driving for a long period of time.
Failure to perform appropriate driving
operations and pay careful attention may
lead to an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
■ To avoid operating LTA system by mis-

take
When not using the LTA system, use the
LTA switch to turn the system off.

Functions included in LTA system
■ Lane departure alert function

When the system determines that the
vehicle might depart from its lane or
course*, a warning is displayed on the
multi-information display, and either a
warning buzzer will sound or the steering wheel will vibrate to alert the driver.
*

: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

When the warning buzzer sounds or
the steering wheel vibrates, check the
area around your vehicle and carefully
operate the steering wheel to move the
vehicle back to the center of the lane.
When the system determines that the
vehicle might depart from its lane and
that the possibility of a collision with an

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

overtaking vehicle in the adjacent lane
is high, the lane departure alert will
operate even if the turn signals are
operating.

231

sound. If the steering assist function is
canceled, release the steering wheel
and then grip it again to enable the
function.
When the system determines that the
vehicle might depart from its lane and
that the possibility of a collision with an
overtaking vehicle in the adjacent lane
is high, the steering assist function will
operate even if the turn signals are
operating.

Driving

■ Steering assist function

When the system determines that the
vehicle might depart from its lane or
course*, the system provides assistance as necessary by operating the
steering wheel in small amounts for a
short period of time to keep the vehicle
in its lane.
*:

Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

If the system detects that the steering
wheel has not been operated for a certain amount of time or the steering
wheel is not being firmly gripped, the
steering assist function may be canceled temporarily, a warning message
may be displayed on the multi-information display and a warning buzzer may

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Vehicle sway warning function

When the vehicle is swaying within a
lane, the warning buzzer will sound and
a message will be displayed on the
multi-information display to alert the
driver.

232

4-5. Using the driving support systems

wheel firmly.

■ Lane centering function

This function is linked with radar cruise
control and provides the required
assistance by operating the steering
wheel to keep the vehicle in its current
lane.

■ Situations unsuitable for LTA system

When radar cruise control is not operating, the lane centering function does
not operate.

● When the follow-up cruising display is

In situations where the white (yellow)
lane lines are difficult to see or are not
visible, such as when in a traffic jam,
this function will operate to help follow
a preceding vehicle by monitoring the
position of the preceding vehicle.
If the system detects that the steering
wheel has not been operated for a
fixed amount of time or the steering
wheel is not being firmly gripped, a
warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the warning buzzer
sounds. Make sure to grip the steering

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING
Do not use the LTA system in the following situations, as doing so may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
displayed (→P.234) and the preceding vehicle changes lanes. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle
and also change lanes.)

● When the follow-up cruising display is

displayed (→P.234) and the preceding vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle
may sway accordingly and depart from
the lane.)

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● When the follow-up cruising display is

displayed (→P.234) and the preceding vehicle is being driven extremely
close to the left/right lane line. (Your
vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and depart from the lane.)

233

● Objects or patterns that could be mis-

taken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of the road (guardrails,
curbs, reflective poles, etc.).

● Vehicle is driven where the road

diverges, merges, etc.

● Vehicle is being driven around a sharp

curve.

● Vehicle is driven on a road surface

which is slippery due to rainy weather,
fallen snow, freezing, etc.

● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered

road.

due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.

● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or
● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow)

line marks, etc. are present due to road
repair.

restricted lane due to construction
work.

● Vehicle is driven in a construction

zone.

● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are

equipped.

● When the tires have been excessively

worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.

● Tires which differ by structure, manu-

facturer, brand or tread pattern are
used.

● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other

than on highways and freeways.

■ Preventing LTA system malfunctions

and operations performed by mistake

● Do not modify the headlights or place

stickers, etc. on the surface of the
lights.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see

234

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

● Do not modify the suspension etc. If

Indications on multi-information
display

the suspension etc. needs to be
replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

● Do not install or place anything on the

hood or grille. Also, do not install a
grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar,
etc.).

● If your windshield needs repairs, con-

tact your Lexus dealer.

Turning LTA system on
Press the LTA switch to turn the LTA
system on.
The LTA indicator illuminates and a
message is displayed on the
multi-information display.
Press the LTA switch again to turn the
LTA system off.
When the LTA system is turned on or
off, operation of the LTA system continues in the same condition the next time
the hybrid system is started.

A LTA indicator
The illumination condition of the indicator
informs the driver of the system operation
status.
Illuminated in white:
LTA system is operating.
Illuminated in green:
Steering wheel assistance of the steering
assist function or lane centering function is
operating.
Flashing in orange:
Lane departure alert function is operating.
B Operation display of steering

wheel operation support

Indicates that steering wheel assistance of
the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.
Displayed on the outer side of both lane
displays:
Indicates that steering wheel assist of the
lane centering function is operating.
Displayed on the outer side of a lane display:
Indicates that steering wheel assist of the
steering assist function is operating.
Display flashing on the outer side of both
lane displays:
Alerts the driver that their input is necessary to stay in the center of the lane (lane

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems
centering function).
C Lane departure alert function dis-

play

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system
information screen.


Inside of displayed white lines is
white



Inside of displayed white lines is
black

played, if the preceding vehicle changes
lanes, your vehicle may change lanes as
well. Always pay careful attention to your
surroundings and operate the steering
wheel as necessary to correct the path of
the vehicle and ensure safety.
■ Warning display

When the lane centering function is operating and the system determines that the
vehicle may depart from its lane due to a
sharp curve, etc., a warning display urging
the driver to operate the steering wheel,
will be displayed.
In some situations a warning display may
not be displayed.

Indications on head-up display
Some displays, which are the same as
those displayed on the multi-information display, will be displayed.
■ LTA system curve display on the

head-up display

Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or is temporarily canceled.
D Follow-up cruising display
Indicates that steering assist of the lane
centering function is operating by monitoring the position of a preceding vehicle.
When the follow-up cruising display is dis-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Indicates that the system is recognizing
white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle
departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from
flashes orange.

235

236

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The curve display on the head-up display
changes according to the direction and
curvature of the curve.
■ Operation conditions of each function
● Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LTA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
• System recognizes white (yellow) lane
lines. (When a white [yellow] line is recognized on only one side, the system will
operate only for the recognized side.)
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8
ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated. (Except
when a vehicle is in the lane on the side
the turn signal was operated)
• Vehicle is not being driven around a
sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(→P.238)
● Steering assist function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the
operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” in
of the
multi-information display is set to “On”.
(→P.86)
• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated
by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a
steering force level suitable for changing
lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. (→P.237)
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• Setting for “Sway Warning” in
of the
multi-information display is set to “On”.
(→P.86)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8
ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(→P.238)
● Lane centering function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LTA is turned on.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” and “Lane
Center” in
of the multi-information
display are set to “On”. (→P.86)
• This function recognizes white (yellow)
lane lines or the position of a preceding
vehicle (except when the preceding vehicle is small, such as a motorcycle).
• The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range is operating in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 10
to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is not being driven around a
sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(→P.238)
• Vehicle does not accelerate or decelerate by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a
steering force level suitable for changing
lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. (→P.237)
• The driver has one or both hands on the
steering wheel.
• The vehicle is being driven in the center
of a lane.
• Steering assist function is not operating.
■ Temporary cancellation of functions

When operation conditions are no longer
met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the
function is automatically restored.
(→P.236)
If the operating conditions are no longer
met while the lane centering function is

4-5. Using the driving support systems
operating, a buzzer may sound to indicate
that the function has been temporarily canceled . If the alert type customization setting
is set to vibrate the steering wheel, the
buzzer will not sound. (The steering wheel
will vibrate.)
If a message urging operation of the steering wheel is displayed, operate the steering
wheel.
■ Steering assist function/lane centering

■ Lane departure alert function

The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear
due to external noise, audio playback, etc.
Also, it may be difficult to feel steering
wheel vibrations due to the road conditions,
etc.
If the edge of the road is not clear or
straight, the lane departure alert function or
steering assist function may not operate.
In situations such as the following, it may not
be possible for the system to determine if
there is danger of a collision with an overtaking vehicle in an adjacent lane:
● When the relative speed between your
vehicle and surrounding vehicles is large
● When driving around a curve
Do not attempt to activate the lane departure alert function.
■ Hands off steering wheel alert

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

mation display. If the driver continues to
keep the hands off of the steering wheel for
6 seconds, a buzzer sounds, a warning
message is displayed and the function is
temporarily canceled. This alert also operates in the same way when the driver continuously operates the steering wheel only a
small amount. If the steering assist function
is canceled, release the steering wheel and
then grip it again to enable the function.
In situations such as the following, the system may not be able to detect when the
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel:
● If a steering wheel cover is installed.
● If the driver is wearing gloves.
● If something is attached to the steering
wheel.
● If the driver is gripping the wood trim,
stitched area, spokes, or other part of the
steering wheel that does not have sensors.
In situations such as the following, the hands
off steering wheel alert may not operate
and the steering assist function and lane
centering function may operate even if the
driver’s hands are off the steering wheel:
● If an object contacts the steering wheel.
● If a wide object or arms are held in front
of the steering wheel.
■ Conditions in which functions may not

operate properly
In the following situations, the functions may
not operate properly:
● There are shadows on the road that run
parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow)
lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area without
white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a
tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are cracked,
“Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker”
or stones are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen
or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface
that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.

Driving

function
Depending on the vehicle speed, lane
departure situation, road conditions, etc.,
the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all.
The steering control of the function is overrided by the driver’s steering wheel operation.
When the vehicle speed is approximately
31 mph (50 km/h) or less, the warning display of the lane centering function will not
operate.
Do not attempt to activate the steering
assist function.

237

238

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be

more difficult to recognize than lines that
are white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb,
etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface,
such as concrete.
● If the edge of the road is not clear or
straight.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is
bright due to reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area where the
brightness changes suddenly, such as at
the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.
● Light from the headlights of an oncoming
vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts
left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or
rough road.
● The vehicle is driven around a sharp
curve.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or
wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper
tire pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle is
extremely short.
● The preceding vehicle changes lanes.
(Your vehicle may follow the preceding
vehicle and also change lanes.)
● The preceding vehicle is swaying. (Your
vehicle may sway accordingly and depart
from the lane.)
● The vehicle is moving up and down a
large amount due to road conditions
during driving (poor roads or road
seams).
● When driving in a tunnel or at night with
the headlights off or when a headlight is
dim due to its lens being dirty or it being
misaligned.
● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.
● The vehicle has just changed lanes

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

through operation of the steering wheel
by the driver or crossed an intersection.
● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
● The vehicle is being driven at extremely
high speeds.
■ Warning message

If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and
the LTA indicator illuminates in orange, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
Warning message

“LTA Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer”

Details/Actions
The system may not be
operating properly.
→Have the vehicle
inspected at your
Lexus dealer.

Dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., are
present on the windshield in front of the
camera sensor.
“Front Camera
Unavailable
→Turn the LTA system
Remove Debris off, remove any dirt,
On Windshield” rain, condensation, ice,
snow, etc., from the
windshield, and then
turn the LTA system
back on.

4-5. Using the driving support systems
Warning message

239

Details/Actions

Function

Setting details

The operation conditions of the camera
sensor (temperature,
etc.) are not met.

Lane departure
alert function

Adjust alert sensitivity

Steering assist
function

Turn steering wheel
assistance on and off

→When the operation conditions of the
“Front Camera camera sensor (temUnavailable” perature, etc.) are met,
the LTA system will
become available. Turn
the LTA system off, wait
for a little while, and
then turn the LTA system back on.

→Turn the LTA system
off and follow the
“LTA Unavailable”
appropriate troubleshooting procedures
for the warning message. Afterward, drive
the vehicle for a short
time, and then turn the
LTA system back on.
The LTA system cannot
“LTA Unavailable be used as the vehicle
at Current
speed is too high.
Speed”
→Slow down.
If a different warning message is displayed,
follow the instructions displayed on the
screen.
■ Customization

The following settings can be changed.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Lane centering
function

Turn function on and
off
Adjust alert sensitivity
Turn function on and
off

For how to change settings, refer to
→P.481
4

Driving

The LTA system is temporarily canceled due
to a malfunction in a
sensor other than the
camera sensor.

Vehicle sway
warning function

Adjust alert type

240

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)*
*

: If equipped

When the warning buzzer sounds or
the steering wheel vibrates, check the
surrounding road situation and carefully operate the steering wheel to
move the vehicle back to the center of
the lane.

The LKA system recognizes visible
white or yellow lines with the camera sensor on the upper portion of
the windshield.

■ Steering assist function

Functions included in LKA system
■ Lane departure alert function

When the system determines that the
vehicle might depart from its lane, a
warning is displayed on the multi-information display, and either the warning
buzzer sounds or the steering wheel
vibrates to alert the driver.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When the system determines that the
vehicle might depart from its lane, the
system provides assistance as necessary by operating the steering wheel in
small amounts for a short period of
time to keep the vehicle in its lane.
If the system detects that the steering
wheel has not been operated for a
fixed amount of time or the steering
wheel is not being firmly gripped, a
warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the function is temporarily canceled.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

241

■ Lane centering function

This function is linked with radar cruise
control and provides the required
assistance by operating the steering
wheel to keep the vehicle in its current
lane.
When radar cruise control is not operating, the lane centering function does
not operate.

When the vehicle is swaying or
appears as if it may depart from its lane
multiple times, the warning buzzer
sounds and a message is displayed on
the multi-information display to alert
the driver.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■ Vehicle sway warning function

If the system detects that the steering
wheel has not been operated for a
fixed amount of time or the steering
wheel is not being firmly gripped, a
warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the function is temporarily canceled.

242

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

■ Before using LKA system

Do not rely solely upon the LKA system.
The LKA system does not automatically
drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of
attention that must be paid to the area in
front of the vehicle. The driver must
always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to
the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path
of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take
adequate breaks when fatigued, such as
from driving for a long period of time.
Failure to perform appropriate driving
operations and pay careful attention may
lead to an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
■ To avoid operating LKA system by

mistake
When not using the LKA system, use the
LKA switch to turn the system off.

■ Situations unsuitable for LKA system

Do not use the LKA system in the following situations.
The system may not operate properly
and lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are

● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow)

line marks, etc. are present due to road
repair.

● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or

restricted lane due to construction
work.

● Vehicle is driven on a road surface

which is slippery due to rainy weather,
fallen snow, freezing, etc.

● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other

than on highways and freeways.

● Vehicle is driven in a construction

zone.

■ Preventing LKA system malfunctions

and operations performed by mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or place
stickers, etc. on the surface of the
lights.
● Do not modify the suspension etc. If

the suspension etc. needs to be
replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

● Do not install or place anything on the

hood or grille. Also, do not install a
grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar,
etc.).

● If your windshield needs repairs, con-

tact your Lexus dealer.

equipped.

● When the tires have been excessively

worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.

● Tires which differ by structure, manu-

facturer, brand or tread pattern are
used.

● Objects or patterns that could be mis-

taken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of the road (guardrails,
curbs, reflective poles, etc.).

● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered

road.

● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see

due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Turning LKA system on
Press the LKA switch to turn the LKA
system on.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

243

LKA system is operating.
Illuminated in green:
Steering wheel assistance of the steering
assist function or lane centering function is
operating.
Flashing in orange:
Lane departure alert function is operating.
B Operation display of steering

wheel operation support

Indicates that steering wheel assistance of
the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.

Press the LKA switch again to turn the
LKA system off.
When the LKA system is turned on or
off, operation of the LKA system continues in the same condition the next
time the hybrid system is started.

C Lane departure alert function dis-

play

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system
information screen.

Inside of displayed white lines is
white

Driving

The LKA indicator illuminates and a
message is displayed on the
multi-information display.



Indications on multi-information
display

Indicates that the system is recognizing
white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle
departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from
flashes orange.

A LKA indicator
The illumination condition of the indicator
informs the driver of the system operation
status.
Illuminated in white:

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

244


4-5. Using the driving support systems

Inside of displayed white lines is
black

Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or is temporarily canceled.
■ Operation conditions of each function
● Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LKA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8
ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or
around a gentle curve with a radius of
more than approximately 492 ft. (150 m).
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(→P.246)
● Steering assist function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the
operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” in
of the
multi-information display is set to “On”.
(→P.86)
• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated
by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a
steering force level suitable for changing
lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. (→P.245)
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• Setting for “Sway Warning” in
of the
multi-information display is set to “On”.
(→P.86)
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8
ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(→P.246)
● Lane centering function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LKA is turned on.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” and “Lane
Center” in
of the multi-information
display are set to “On”. (→P.86)
• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
• Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range is operating.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 8.2
to 13.5 ft. (2.5 to 4.1 m).
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or
around a gentle curve with a radius of
more than approximately 656 ft. (200
m).
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(→P.246)
• Vehicle does not accelerate or decelerate by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a
steering force level suitable for changing
lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. (→P.245)
• Steering assist function is not operating.
■ Temporary cancellation of functions

When operation conditions are no longer
met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the

4-5. Using the driving support systems
function is automatically restored.
(→P.244)
■ Steering assist function/lane centering

function
Depending on the vehicle speed, lane
departure situation, road conditions, etc.,
the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all.

■ Lane departure alert function

■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side

of road
The LKA system will not operate for the
side on which white (yellow) lines could not
be recognized.

■ Conditions in which functions may not

operate properly
In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow) lines and
various functions may not operate normally.
● There are shadows on the road that run
parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow)
lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area without
white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a
tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are cracked,
“Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker”

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

or stones are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen
or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface
that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be
more difficult to recognize than lines that
are white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb,
etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface,
such as concrete.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is
bright due to reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area where the
brightness changes suddenly, such as at
the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.
● Light from the headlights of an oncoming
vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.
● The vehicle is driven where the road
diverges, merges, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts
left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or
rough road.
● The vehicle is driven around a sharp
curve.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or
wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper
tire pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle is
extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and down a
large amount due to road conditions
during driving (poor roads or road
seams).
● The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a
faint amount of light at night, or the beam
axis has deviated.
● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.
● The vehicle has just changed lanes or
crossed an intersection.
● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.

Driving

When the system determines that the driver
has removed the hands from the steering
wheel while the steering assist function or
lane centering function is operating, a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display. If the driver continues to
keep the hands off of the steering wheel, a
warning message is displayed and the function is temporarily canceled. This alert also
operates in the same way when the driver
continuously operates the steering wheel
only a small amount. However, depending
on the road conditions, etc., the function
may not cancel.

245

246

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Warning message

If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and
the LKA indicator illuminates in orange, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
Warning message
“Lane Keeping
Assist Malfunction Visit Your
Dealer”

Details/Actions
The system may not be
operating properly.
→Have the vehicle
inspected at your
Lexus dealer.

Dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., are
present on the windshield in front of the
camera sensor.
“Front Camera
Unavailable
→Turn the LKA sysRemove Debris tem off, remove any
On Windshield” dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc.,
from the windshield,
and then turn the LKA
system back on.

Warning message

Details/Actions
The operation conditions of the camera
sensor (temperature,
etc.) are not met.

→When the operation conditions of the
“Front Camera camera sensor (temUnavailable” perature, etc.) are met,
the LKA system will
become available. Turn
the LKA system off,
wait for a little while,
and then turn the LKA
system back on.
The LKA system is
temporarily canceled
due to a malfunction in
a sensor other than the
camera sensor.
“Lane Keeping
Assist Unavailable”

→Turn the LKA system off and follow the
appropriate troubleshooting procedures
for the warning message. Afterward, drive
the vehicle for a short
time, and then turn the
LKA system back on.

If a different warning message is displayed,
follow the instructions displayed on the
screen.
■ Customization

The following settings can be changed.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Function

Setting details

Lane departure
alert function

Adjust alert sensitivity

Steering assist
function

Turn steering wheel
assistance on and off

Adjust alert type

4-5. Using the driving support systems
Function
Vehicle sway
warning function
Lane centering
function

RSA (Road Sign Assist)*

Setting details
Turn function on and
off
Adjust alert sensitivity
Turn function on and
off

For how to change settings, refer to
→P.481

247

: If equipped

The RSA system recognizes specific road signs using the camera
sensor and navigation system
(when data is available) to provide
information to the driver via the
multi-information display and
head-up display.

Driving

If the system judges that the vehicle
is being driven over the speed limit,
performing prohibited actions, etc.
in relation to the recognized road
signs, it alerts the driver using a
warning display and warning
buzzer*.
*

: This setting needs to be customized.
WARNING

■ Before using the RSA

Do not rely solely upon the RSA system.
RSA is a system which supports the
driver by providing information, but it is
not a replacement for a driver’s own
vision and awareness. Drive safely by
always paying careful attention to the
traffic rules.
Inappropriate or negligent driving could
lead to an unexpected accident.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

248

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Indication on the multi-information display
When the camera sensor recognizes a
sign or information of a sign is available
from the navigation system , the sign
will be displayed on the multi-information display.

 When a tab other than the driving
support system information tab is
selected, only a recognized speed
limit sign or do not enter sign (when
notification is necessary) will be displayed. (→P.86)

 When the driving support system
information is selected, a maximum
of 3 signs can be displayed.
(→P.86)

If signs other than speed limit signs are recognized, they will be displayed in an overlapping stack under the current speed limit
sign.

Supported types of road signs
The following types of road signs are recognized.
Non-official or recently introduced traffic signs may not be recognized.
Type
Speed limit begins/ends*

Do Not Enter

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Multi-information display

4-5. Using the driving support systems
Type

249

Multi-information display

Stop

Yield
*

: Displayed when speed limit information for the road is available from the navigation system

Warning indication
In the following situations, the RSA system will alert the driver.

 When the RSA system recognizes a
do not enter sign and determines
that your vehicle has entered a
no-entry area, the displayed sign will
flash and a buzzer will sound.
Depending on the situation, traffic
environment (traffic direction, speed,
unit) may be detected incorrectly and a
warning display may not operate properly.
■ Turning the system on/off

Select
on of the multi-information display (→P.86)

2 Press

on the steering wheel.

■ Automatic turn-off of RSA sign display

In the following situations, a displayed
speed limit sign will stop being displayed
automatically:

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

distance. (When speed limit information
is not available from the navigation system)
In the following situations, do not enter, stop
and yield signs will stop being displayed
automatically:
● The system determines that your vehicle
has passed the sign.
● The road changes due to a left or right
turn, etc.
■ Conditions in which the function may

not operate or detect correctly
In the following situations, RSA does not
operate normally and may not recognize
signs, display the incorrect sign, etc. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.
● The camera sensor is misaligned due to a
strong impact being applied to the sensor, etc.
● Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the windshield near the camera sensor.
● In inclement weather such as heavy rain,
fog, snow or sand storms
● Light from an oncoming vehicle, the sun,
etc. enters the camera sensor.
● The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent.
● All or part of the sign is hidden by the
leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.
● The sign is only visible to the camera sensor for a short amount of time.
● The driving scene (turning, lane change,
etc.) is judged incorrectly.

Driving

 When the vehicle speed exceeds
the speed warning threshold of the
speed limit sign displayed, the sign
display will be emphasized and a
buzzer will sound.

● A new sign is not recognized for a certain

250

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● Even if it is a sign not appropriate for the

currently traveled lane, such a sign exists
directly after a freeway branches, or in an
adjacent lane just before merging.
● Stickers are attached to the rear of the
preceding vehicle.
● A sign resembling a system compatible
sign is recognized.
● The front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load.
● The surrounding brightness is not sufficient or changes suddenly.
● When a sign intended for trucks, etc. is
recognized.
● The navigation system map data is old.
● The navigation system is not operating.
● Side road speed signs may be detected
and displayed (if positioned in sight of the
camera sensor) while the vehicle is traveling on the main road.
● Roundabout exit road speed signs may
be detected and displayed (if positioned
in sight of the camera sensor) while traveling on a roundabout.
■ Speed limit sign display

If the power switch was last turned off while
a speed limit sign was displayed on the
multi-information display, the same sign displays again when the power switch is turned
to ON mode.

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates, decelerates and
stops to match the speed changes
of the preceding vehicle even if the
accelerator pedal is not depressed.
In constant speed control mode,
the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range on freeways and highways.
 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (→P.253)
 Constant speed control mode
(→P.257)

System Components
■ Meter display

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

A Display
B Set speed
C Indicators

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Operation switches

251

■ Cautions regarding the driving assist

systems
Observe the following precautions, as
there are limitations to the assistance
provided by the system.
Failure to do so may cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.

● Assisting the driver to measure follow-

A Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
B “+RES” switch
C Cruise control main switch
D Cancel switch
E “-SET” switch

■ Before using dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed range
Driving safely is the sole responsibility of
the driver. Do not rely solely on the system, and drive safely by always paying
careful attention to your surroundings.
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range provides driving assistance to reduce the driver’s burden.
However, there are limitations to the
assistance provided.
Set the speed appropriately depending
on the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, weather conditions, etc. The
driver is responsible for checking the set
speed.
Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding
vehicle as detected by the system may
differ from the condition observed by the
driver. Therefore, the driver must always
remain alert, assess the danger of each
situation and drive safely. Relying solely
on this system or assuming the system
ensures safety while driving can lead to
an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Assisting the driver to judge proper

following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range determines whether
the following distance between the
driver’s own vehicle and a designated
vehicle traveling ahead is within a set
range. It is not capable of making any
other type of judgement. Therefore, it
is absolutely necessary for the driver to
remain vigilant and to determine
whether or not there is a possibility of
danger in any given situation.

● Assisting the driver to operate the

vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range does not include
functions which will prevent or avoid
collisions with vehicles ahead of your
vehicle. Therefore, if there is ever any
possibility of danger, the driver must
take immediate and direct control of
the vehicle and act appropriately in
order to ensure the safety of all
involved.

Driving

WARNING

ing distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range is only intended to
help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s
own vehicle and a designated vehicle
traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism
that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist
the driver in low-visibility conditions. It
is still necessary for driver to pay close
attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

252

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

■ To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar

cruise control with full-speed range
activation
Switch the dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range setting to off, using
the cruise control main switch when not
in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic

radar cruise control with full-speed
range
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate
speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Roads where there are pedestrians,

cyclists, etc.

● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those cov-

ered with rain, ice or snow

● On steep downhills, or where there

are sudden changes between sharp up
and down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set
speed when driving down a steep hill.

● At entrances to freeways and highways
● When weather conditions are bad

enough that they may prevent the sensors from detecting correctly (fog,
snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

● When there is rain, snow, etc. on the

front surface of the radar sensor or
camera sensor

● In traffic conditions that require fre-

quent repeated acceleration and
deceleration

● When an approach warning buzzer is

heard often

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

253

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following
distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle
ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill slopes.

Driving

A Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance
can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.
B Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates
your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies
the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in
the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by
the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to
prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the “+RES” switch or depressing
the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up cruising.
Vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A: If your vehicle is being driven at approximately 43
mph (70 km/h) or more, when the turn signal is operated and a lane change is made to
pass the vehicle ahead, the system will start accelerating your vehicle up to the set speed to
assist smooth overtaking.
C Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

254

4-5. Using the driving support systems

speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant
speed cruising.

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)

mately 30 mph (50 km/h).

1 Press the cruise control main switch
to activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will come on
and a message will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
Press the switch again to deactivate the
cruise control.
If the cruise control main switch is pressed
and held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system turns on in constant speed control
mode. (→P.257)

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above
approximately 30 mph [50 km/h])
and press the “-SET” switch to set
the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
switch is released becomes the set speed.
If the switch is operated while the vehicle
speed is below approximately 30 mph (50
km/h) and a preceding vehicle is present,
the set speed will be adjusted to approxi-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the
“+RES” or “-SET” switch until the
desired set speed is displayed.

1 Increases the speed
(Except when the vehicle has been
stopped by system control in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

2 Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Press the switch.
Large adjustment: Press and hold the
switch to change the speed, and
release when the desired speed is
reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be

4-5. Using the driving support systems

255

increased or decreased as follows:


For the U.S. mainland, Hawaii

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1
km/h (0.6mph)*2 each time the switch is
pressed
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases
in 1mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2
increments for as long as the switch is held


For Canada, Guam and Puerto Rico

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1
km/h (0.6mph)*2 each time the switch is
pressed
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases
in 5 mph (8 km/h)*1 or 5 km/h (3.1 mph)*2
increments for as long as the switch is held

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1
km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time the switch is
pressed
Large adjustment: The speed will continue
to change while the switch is held.
*1

: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
Pressing the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the power
switch is turned ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark A will also be displayed.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
Select a distance from the table below.
Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
increases/decreases in accordance
with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is
stopped by system control, the vehicle
stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle
distance depending on the situation.
Distance
options

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long

Approximately 160 ft. (50
m)

Driving

In the constant speed control mode
(→P.257), the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:

1 Long
2 Medium
3 Short

256

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Distance
options

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Medium

Approximately 130 ft. (40
m)

Short

Approximately 100 ft. (30
m)

Resuming follow-up cruising
when the vehicle has been
stopped by system control (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
After the vehicle ahead of you starts
off, press the “+RES” switch.
Your vehicle will also resume follow-up
cruising if the accelerator pedal is
depressed after the vehicle ahead of
you starts off.

Canceling and resuming the
speed control

1 Pressing the cancel switch cancels
the speed control.
The speed control is also canceled when
the brake pedal is depressed.
(When the vehicle has been stopped by
system control, depressing the brake pedal
does not cancel the setting.)

2 Pressing the “+RES” switch
resumes the cruise control and
returns vehicle speed to the set
speed.
However, when a vehicle ahead is not
detected, cruise control does not resume
when the vehicle speed is approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or less.

Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
When your vehicle is too close to a
vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic
deceleration via the cruise control is
not possible, the display will flash and
the buzzer will sound to alert the driver.
An example of this would be if another
driver cuts in front of you while you are
following a vehicle. Depress the brake
pedal to ensure an appropriate vehi-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

cle-to-vehicle distance.

257

Immediately after the switch is pressed, the
radar cruise control indicator will come on.
Afterwards, it switches to the cruise control indicator.
Switching to constant speed control mode
is only possible when operating the switch
with the cruise control off.

■ Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, warnings
may not occur even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small.
 When the speed of the preceding
vehicle matches or exceeds your
vehicle speed

 Immediately after the cruise control
speed was set
 When depressing the accelerator
pedal

Selecting constant speed control mode
When constant speed control mode is
selected, your vehicle will maintain a
set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this
mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function
correctly due to a dirty radar sensor,
etc.
1 With the cruise control off, press
and hold the cruise control main
switch for 1.5 seconds or more.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
switch is released becomes the set speed.
Adjusting the speed setting: →P.254
Canceling and resuming the speed setting:
→P.256

■ Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range can be set when

● The shift position is in D.
● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected

Driving

 When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above
approximately 25 mph [40 km/h])
and press the “-SET” switch to set
the speed.

258

4-5. Using the driving support systems

by using the paddle shift switch.
● Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
However, when a preceding vehicle is
detected, the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set even
if the vehicle speed is below approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).

● The sensor cannot detect correctly

■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle

vehicle has been stopped by system control:
• The driver is not wearing a seat belt.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle has been stopped for about 3
minutes.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

speed
The vehicle can accelerate by operating the
accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the
set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the
vehicle speed may decrease below the set
speed in order to maintain the distance to
the preceding vehicle.

■ When the vehicle stops while follow-up

cruising
● Pressing the “+RES” switch while the
vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up
cruising if the vehicle ahead starts off
within approximately 3 seconds after the
switch is pressed.
● If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 seconds after your vehicle stops, follow-up
cruising will be resumed.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is
automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls at or below
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) when
there are no vehicles ahead.
● The preceding vehicle leaves the lane
when your vehicle is following at a vehicle
speed at or below approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h). Otherwise, the sensor cannot
properly detect the vehicle. (“CRUISE
NOT AVAILABLE No Preceding Vehicles” is displayed on the multi-information
display.)
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is
turned off.
● When snow mode is set.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

because it is covered in some way.

● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The parking brake is operated.
● The vehicle is stopped by system control

on a steep incline.

● The following are detected when the

■ Automatic cancelation of constant

speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than
approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below
the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is
turned off.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there
may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ If “Radar Cruise Control Unavailable” is

shown on the multi-information display
The radar cruise control system cannot be
used temporarily. Use the system when it
becomes available again.

■ Brake system operation sound

When the brakes are operated in vehicle-to-vehicle distance mode, a brake operating sound may be heard. This is not a
malfunction.

4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Warning messages and buzzers for

dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range
Warning messages and buzzers are used to
indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the message
and follow the instructions.

259

● Preceding vehicle has an extremely high

ground clearance

■ When the sensor may not be correctly

■ Conditions under which the vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode
may not function correctly
In the case of the following conditions,
operate the brake pedal (or accelerator
pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly
detect vehicles ahead, the system may not
operate properly.
● When driving around a curve, on a narrow road, or on a bridge, in a tunnel, etc.,
where there are objects on the roadside

● When steering wheel operation or your

position in the lane is unstable

● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
● When water or snow thrown up by the

surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards
(caused by a heavy load in the luggage
compartment, etc.)
● When the vehicle ahead of you deceler-

ates suddenly
● While the vehicle speed is decreasing to
the set speed after the vehicle accelerates by depressing the accelerator pedal.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

detecting the vehicle ahead
In the case of the following and depending
on the conditions, operate the brake pedal
when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal
when acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly
detect these types of vehicles, the approach
warning (→P.256) may not be activated.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the same
lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers
with no load on board, etc.)

260

4-5. Using the driving support systems

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system
that uses rear side radar sensors
installed on the inner side of the
rear bumper on the left and right
side to assist the driver in confirming safety when changing lanes.
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the sys-

tem
The driver is solely responsible for safe
driving. Always drive safely, taking care
to observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a
vehicle is in a blind spot of the outside
rear view mirrors or is approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot. Do not
overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor. As
the function cannot judge if it is safe to
change lanes, over reliance could lead to
an accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
As the system may not function correctly
under certain conditions, the driver’s own
visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

System components

A Meter control switches
Turning the Blind Spot Monitor on/off.
B Outside rear view mirror indicators

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot
of the outside rear view mirrors or
approaching rapidly from behind into a
blind spot, the outside rear view mirror
indicator on the detected side will illuminate. If the turn signal lever is operated
toward the detected side, the outside rear
view mirror indicator flashes.
C BSM indicator
Illuminates when the Blind Spot Monitor is
enabled
■ Outside rear view mirror indicator visi-

bility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

■ When “BSM Not Available” is shown on

the multi-information display
Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the
rear bumper around the sensors. (→P.261)
The system should return to normal operation after removing the ice, snow, mud, etc.
from the rear bumper. Additionally, the sensors may not operate normally when driving
in extremely hot or cold environments.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

261

■ Certification
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Driving

WARNING
■ Handling the rear side radar sensor

Blind Spot Monitor sensors are installed
behind the left and right sides of the rear
bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor
can operate correctly.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

262

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

● Keep the sensors and the surrounding

areas on the rear bumper clean at all
times.
If a sensor or its surrounding area on the
rear bumper is dirty or covered with
snow, the Blind Spot Monitor may not
operate and a warning message
(→P.260) will be displayed. In this situation, clear off the dirt or snow and drive
the vehicle with the operation conditions
of the BSM function (→P.264) satisfied
for approximately 10 minutes. If the
warning message does not disappear,
have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.

● Do not modify the sensor or surround-

ing area on the rear bumper.

● If a sensor or the rear bumper needs to

be removed/installed or replaced,
contact your Lexus dealer.

● Do not paint the rear bumper any

color other than an official Lexus color.

Turning the Blind Spot Monitor
on/off
Use the meter control switches to turn
on/off the function.
1 Press

to select

2 Press

to select

then press

● Do not attach accessories, stickers

(including transparent stickers), aluminum tape, etc. to a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper.

● Do not subject a sensor or its sur-

rounding area on the rear bumper to a
strong impact.
If a sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and
vehicles may not be detected correctly.
In the following situations, have your
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
• A sensor or its surrounding area is
subject to a strong impact.
• If the surrounding area of a sensor is
scratched or dented, or part of them
has become disconnected.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

.
and

4-5. Using the driving support systems

263

Blind Spot Monitor operation
■ Vehicles that can be detected by the Blind Spot Monitor

The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the following vehicles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the presence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear view mirrors.

A Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the outside rear

view mirrors (the blind spots)

using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

■ The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of each detection area is:
A Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of the vehicle*1
B Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper
C Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper
D Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear bumper*2
*1

: The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle
cannot be detected.

*2: The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected vehicle is,

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

B Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are not visible

264

4-5. Using the driving support systems

the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash.
■ The Blind Spot Monitor is operational

when
The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when
all of the following conditions are met:
● The Blind Spot Monitor is on.
● The shift position is in a position other
than R.
● The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
■ The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a

vehicle when
The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle
present in the detection area in the following situations:
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes
your vehicle.
● You overtake a vehicle in adjacent lane
slowly.
● Another vehicle enters the detection
area when it changes lanes.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot

Monitor will not detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor is not designed to
detect the following types of vehicles and/or
objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,
etc.*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles
and similar stationary objects*
● Following vehicles that are in the same
lane*
● Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your
vehicle*
*
: Depending on the conditions, detection
of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot

Monitor may not function correctly
● The Blind Spot Monitor may not detect
vehicles correctly in the following situa-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

tions:
• When the sensor is misaligned due to a
strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is
covering the sensor or surrounding area
on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is
wet with standing water during bad
weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are approaching
with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When the distance between your vehicle
and a following vehicle is short
• When there is a significant difference in
speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area
• Vehicles which are being overtaken rapidly by your vehicle.
• When the difference in speed between
your vehicle and another vehicle is
changing
• When a vehicle enters a detection area
traveling at about the same speed as your
vehicle
• As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehicle remains in the detection area
• When driving up and down consecutive
steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the
road, etc.
• When driving on roads with sharp bends,
consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
• When vehicle lanes are wide, or when
driving on the edge of a lane, and the
vehicle in an adjacent lane is far away
from your vehicle
• When an accessory (such as a bicycle
carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in
height between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area
• Immediately after the Blind Spot Monitor
is turned on
● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor
unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or
object may increase in the following situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned due to a
strong impact to the sensor or its sur-

4-5. Using the driving support systems
rounding area
• When the distance between your vehicle
and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the
detection area is short
• When driving up and down consecutive
steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the
road, etc.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when
driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehicle traveling in a lane other than the adjacent lanes enters the detection area
• When driving on roads with sharp bends,
consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
• When the tires are slipping or spinning
• When the distance between your vehicle
and a following vehicle is short
• When an accessory (such as a bicycle
carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle

265

PKSA (Parking Support
Alert)*
*:

If equipped

The Parking Support Alert system
consists of the following functions
that operate when driving at a low
speed or backing up, such as when
parking. When the system determines that a collision with a
detected object, such as a wall, or
pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action.

■ Intuitive parking assist

Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect
static objects in the detection area
when driving at a low speed or backing
up. (→P.266)
■ RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

function

Radar sensors are used to detect
approaching vehicles in the detection
areas behind the vehicle when backing
up. (→P.273)
■ RCD (Rear camera detection)

function (if equipped)

A rear camera sensor is used to detect
pedestrians in the detection area
behind the vehicle when backing up.
(→P.277)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

PKSA (Parking Support Alert)
system

266

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Intuitive parking assist

Setting the buzzer volume
■ Adjusting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on
the multi-information display. The volume of buzzers for the intuitive parking
assist, RCTA function and RCD function will be adjusted simultaneously.
Use the meter control switches to
change settings. (→P.87)
1 Press

to select

2 Press

to select “PKSA”

and then press
3 Press

then press

System components

.
to select

The distance from your vehicle to
objects, such as a wall, when parallel parking or maneuvering into a
garage is measured by the sensors
and communicated via the
multi-information display, head-up
display (if equipped), Center Display and a buzzer. Always check the
surrounding area when using this
system.

and

■ Types of sensors

Each time the switch is pressed, the volume
level will change between 1, 2, and 3.
■ Muting a buzzer

A mute button will be displayed on the
multi-information display when an
object or pedestrian is detected. To
mute the buzzer, press
.
The buzzers for the intuitive parking
assist, RCTA function and RCD function will be muted simultaneously.
Mute will be canceled automatically in
the following situations:
 When the shift position is changed.
 When the operating function is temporarily canceled.
 When the operating function is disabled manually.
 When the power switch is turned
off.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

A Front corner sensors
B Front center sensors
C Rear corner sensors
D Rear center sensors
■ Display

When the sensors detect an object,
such as a wall, a graphic is shown on
the multi-information display, head-up
display (if equipped) and Center Display depending on the position and distance to the object.
 Multi-information display and
head-up display

267

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When an object is detected, a graphic will
be displayed on the panoramic view monitor (if equipped).

A Front corner sensor detection
B Front center sensor detection
C Rear corner sensor detection
D Rear center sensor detection

 Center Display

Turning intuitive parking assist
on/off

A graphic is shown when the Lexus parking assist monitor (if equipped) is displayed.

Use the meter control switches to
enable/disable the Lexus parking
assist-sensor. (→P.87)

A simplified image is displayed on the
Center Display when an object is detected.

1 Press

to select

• When the R shift position is selected

2 Press

to select “PKSA”

3 Press

then press

Driving

and then press

.
to select

and

When the intuitive parking assist function is disabled, the intuitive parking
assist OFF indicator (→P.72) illuminates on the multi-information display.
• When the N, M or D shift position is
selected (vehicle moving forward)

To re-enable the system when it was
disabled, select

on the multi-infor-

mation display, select
and then On.
If disabled using this method, the system will not be re-enabled by turning
the power switch off and then to ON
mode.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

268

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

■ When using the intuitive parking

assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle
being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.

● Do not use the sensor at speeds in

excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).

● The sensors’ detection areas and reac-

tion times are limited. When moving
forward or reversing, check the areas
surrounding the vehicle (especially the
sides of the vehicle) for safety, and
drive slowly, using the brake to control
the vehicle’s speed.

● Do not install accessories within the

sensors’ detection areas.

● The area directly under the bumpers is

not detected.

■ When to disable the function

In the following situations, disable the
function as it may operate even though
there is no possibility of a collision.
● The vehicle is equipped with a fender
pole or wireless antenna.
● The front or rear bumper or a sensor
receives a strong impact.
● A non-genuine Lexus suspension
(lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.
● Towing eyelets are installed.
● A backlit licence plate is installed.
■ When using intuitive parking assist

● If the area around a sensor collides

with something, or is subjected to
strong impact.

● If the bumper or grille collides with

something.

● If the display flashes or is displayed

continuously and a buzzer does not
sound, except when the mute function
has been turned on.

● If a display error occurs, first check the

sensor.
If the error occurs even when there is
no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is
likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.

■ Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or
steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
● When using a high pressure washer to

wash the vehicle, do not spray the sensors directly, as doing so may cause a
sensor to malfunction.

● When using steam to clean the vehicle,

do not direct steam too close to the
sensors as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.

■ The system can be operated when
● The power switch is in ON mode.
● Intuitive parking assist function is on.
● The vehicle speed is less than about 6

mph (10 km/h).

In the following situations, the system
may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer.

● A shift position other than P is selected.

● The intuitive parking assist operation

■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable Clean

display flashes or shows continuously,
and a buzzer sounds when no objects
are detected.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the
multi-information display. (→P.266)
Parking Assist Sensor” is displayed on
the multi-information display
A sensor may be covered with ice, snow,
dirt, etc. Remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc.,
from the sensor to return the system to nor-

4-5. Using the driving support systems
mal.
Also, due to ice forming on a sensor at low
temperatures, a warning message may be
displayed or the sensor may not be able to
detect an object. Once the ice melts, the
system will return to normal.
■ Sensor detection information
● The following situations may occur

■ Conditions under which the function

may not function correctly
Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability
of a sensor to correctly detect objects. Particular instances where this may occur are
listed below.
● There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.
(Cleaning the sensors will resolve this
problem.)
● A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will
resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is
frozen the sensor display may be displayed abnormally, or objects, such as a
wall, may not be detected.
■ Certification
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● A sensor is covered in any way.
● When a sensor or the area around a sen-

sor is extremely hot or cold.
● On an extremely bumpy road, on an
incline, on gravel, or on grass.
● The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to
vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, or other loud
noises producing ultrasonic waves.
● There is another vehicle equipped with
parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
● A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray
or heavy rain.
● If a sensor is hit by a large amount of
water, such as when driving on a flooded
road.
● If the vehicle is significantly tilted.
● The vehicle is approaching a tall or
curved curb.
● If objects draw too close to the sensor.
■ Objects which may not be properly

detected
The shape of the object may prevent the
sensor from detecting it. Pay particular
attention to the following objects:
● Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
● Cotton, snow and other materials that
absorb sound waves
● Sharply-angled objects
● Low objects
● Tall objects with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle
People may not be detected if they are
wearing certain types of clothing.

Driving

during use.
• Depending on the shape of the object
and other factors, the detection distance
may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• There will be a short delay between
object detection and display. Even at low
speeds, there is a possibility that the
object will come within the sensor’s
detection areas before the display is
shown and the warning beep sounds.
• It might be difficult to hear the buzzer due
to the volume of the audio system or air
flow noise of the air conditioning system.

269

270

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Sensor detection display, object
distance
■ Detection range of the sensors

A Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)
B Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
C Approximately 1.9 ft. (65 cm)
The diagram shows the detection range of
the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot
detect objects that are extremely close to
the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change
depending on the shape of the object, etc.

■ Multi-information display, head-up display (if equipped) and Center Display

When an object is detected by a sensor, the approximate distance to the object will
be displayed on the multi-information display, Center Display, and head-up display
(if equipped). (As the distance to the object becomes short, the distance segments
may blink.)
 Approximate distance to object: 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 1.9 ft. (65 cm)* (Rear center
sensor)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems
Multi-information display

Center Display

271

Head-up display

: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.272)

 Approximate distance to object: 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 1.9 ft. (65 cm)* (Front center
sensor)
Multi-information display

Center Display

Head-up display

Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.272)

Multi-information display

Center Display

Head-up display

: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.272)

 Approximate distance to object: 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)*
Multi-information display

Center Display

Head-up display

: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.272)

 Approximate distance to object: 1.0 ft. (30 cm) to 0.5 ft. (15 cm)*1
Multi-information display*2

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Center Display*2

Head-up display

Driving

 Approximate distance to object: 1.9 ft. (65 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)*

272

4-5. Using the driving support systems

: Automatic buzzer mute function is disabled. (→P.272)

: The distance segments will blink slowly.

 Approximate distance to object: Less than 0.5 ft. (15 cm)*1
Multi-information display*2

*1:
*2

Center Display*2

Head-up display

Automatic buzzer mute function is disabled. (→P.272)
: The distance segments will blink rapidly.

■ Buzzer operation and distance to

an object

A buzzer sounds when the sensors are
operating.
 The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an object. When the
vehicle comes within the following
distance of the object, the buzzer
sounds continuously:
Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

 When 2 or more objects are
detected simultaneously, the buzzer
sounds for the nearest object. If one
or more objects come within
approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) of the
vehicle, the buzzer will repeat a long
tone, followed by fast beeps.
 Automatic buzzer mute function:
After a buzzer begins sounding, if
the distance between the vehicle
and the detected object does not
become shorter, the buzzer will be
muted automatically. (However, if
the distance between the vehicle
and object is 1.0 ft. (30 cm) or less,
this function will not operate.)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The buzzer sounds volume can be
adjusted. (→P.266)

273

4-5. Using the driving support systems

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) function
The RCTA function uses the BSM
rear side radar sensors installed
behind the rear bumper. This function is intended to assist the driver
in checking areas that are not easily
visible when backing up.

System components

If a vehicle approaching from the right or
left at the rear of the vehicle is detected,
the RCTA icon (→P.274) for the detected
side will be displayed on the Center Display. This illustration shows an example of a
vehicle approaching from both sides of the
vehicle.
D RCTA buzzer
If a vehicle approaching from the right or
left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, a
buzzer will sound. The buzzer also sounds
for approximately 1 second immediately
after the RCTA function is turned on.

Turning the RCTA function
on/off

1 Press

to select

2 Press

to select “PKSA”

and then press
3 Press

and then press

A Meter control switches
Turning the RCTA function on/off.
When the RCTA function is disabled, the
RCTA OFF indicator illuminates.
B Outside rear view mirror indicators
When a vehicle approaching from the right
or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected,
both outside rear view mirror indicators
will flash.
C Center Display

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

.
to select “RCTA”
.

When the RCTA function is disabled, the
RCTA OFF indicator (→P.72) illuminates
on the multi-information display. (Each
time the power switch is turned off then
changed to ON mode, the RCTA function
will be enabled automatically.)

Driving

Use the meter control switches to
enable/disable the RCTA function.
(→P.87)

274

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the use of the

function
The driver is solely responsible for safe
driving. Always drive safely, taking care
to observe your surroundings.
The RCTA function is only a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a
vehicle is approaching from the right or
left at the rear of the vehicle. As the
RCTA function may not function correctly under certain conditions, the
driver’s own visual confirmation of safety
is necessary. Over reliance on this function may lead to an accident resulting
death or serious injury.

■ Outside rear view mirror indicator visi-

ror indicator may be difficult to see.
■ Hearing the RCTA buzzer

The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear
over loud noises, such as if the audio system
volume is high.
■ When “RCTA NOT AVAILABLE” is

shown on the multi-information display
Water, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to
the rear bumper around the sensors.
(→P.262) Removing the water, snow, mud,
etc., from the attached to the rear bumper
around the sensors to normal.
Additionally, the function may not function
normally when used in extremely hot or
cold environments.

■ Rear side radar sensors

→P.262

bility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mir-

RCTA function
■ Operation of the RCTA function

The RCTA function uses rear side radar sensors to detect vehicles approaching
from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and alerts the driver of the presence
of such vehicles by flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a
buzzer.

A Approaching vehicles
B Detection areas of approaching vehicles
■ RCTA icon display

When a vehicle approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle is

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

detected, the following will be displayed on the Center Display.
 Example (Lexus parking assist mon-

4-5. Using the driving support systems

275

itor) (if equipped): Vehicles are
approaching from both sides of the
vehicle

■ RCTA function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

Driving

The buzzer can alert the driver of
faster vehicles approaching from farther away.
Example:
Approaching vehicle speed

A Approximate
alert distance

18 mph (28 km/h)
(fast)

65 ft. (20 m)

5 mph (8 km/h)
(slow)

18 ft. (5.5 m)

■ The RCTA function is operational when

The RCTA function operates when all of the
following conditions are met:
● The power switch is in ON mode.
● The RCTA function is on.
● The shift position is in R.
● The vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● The approaching vehicle speed is

between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
and 18 mph (28 km/h).

■ Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the
multi-information display. (→P.266)
■ Conditions under which the RCTA func-

tion will not detect a vehicle
The RCTA function is not designed to
detect the following types of vehicles and/or
objects:
● Vehicles approaching from directly
behind
● Vehicles backing up in a parking space
next to your vehicle
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect
due to obstructions

276

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles

and similar stationary objects

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,

etc.

● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking

spaces next to your vehicle

■ Conditions under which the RCTA func-

tion may not function correctly

• When backing out of a shallow angle
parking spot

● The RCTA function may not detect vehi-

cles correctly in the following situations:
• When a sensor is misaligned due to a
strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is
covering a sensor or its surrounding area
on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is
wet with standing water during bad
weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are approaching
with only a small gap between each vehicle
• If a vehicle is approaching the rear of
your vehicle rapidly
• When a towing eyelet is installed to the
rear of the vehicle.
• When backing up on a slope with a sharp
change in grade

• Immediately after the RCTA function is
turned on
• Immediately after the hybrid system is
started with the RCTA function on
• When the sensors cannot detect a vehicle due to obstructions

● Instances of the RCTA function unneces-

sarily detecting a vehicle and/or object
may increase in the following situations:
• When a vehicle passes by the side of your
vehicle
• When the parking space faces a street
and vehicles are being driven on the
street

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

277

4-5. Using the driving support systems

RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function*
*:

• When the distance between your vehicle
and metal objects, such as a guardrail,
wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may
reflect electrical waves toward the rear of
the vehicle, is short
• When a towing eyelet is installed to the
rear of the vehicle

If equipped

When the vehicle is backing up, the
rear camera detection function can
detect pedestrians in the detection
area behind the vehicle. If a pedestrian is detected, a buzzer will
sound and an icon will be displayed
on the Center Display to inform the
driver of the pedestrian.

Center Display
4

Driving
A Pedestrian detection icon
Displayed automatically when a pedestrian
is detected.
B RCD OFF icon
When the RCD function is disabled, the
RCD OFF icon illuminates. (Each time the
power switch is turned off then changed to
ON mode, the RCD function will be
enabled automatically.)

Turning the RCD function on/off
Use the meter control switches to
enable/disable the RCD function.
(→P.87)
1 Press

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

to select

278

4-5. Using the driving support systems

2 Press

and then press
3 Press

and then press

to select “PKSA”
.
to select “RCD”
.

When the RCD function is disabled, the
RCD OFF icon (→P.72) illuminates on the
multi-information display.

When a pedestrian is detected
If the rear camera detection function
detects a pedestrian in the detection
area, the buzzer and pedestrian detection will operate as follows:

Sounds repeatedly
Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3
times and then stays on
C If the system determines that your

vehicle may collide with a pedestrian in area C
Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly
Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3
times and then stays on

■ The rear camera detection function is

operational when
● The power switch is in ON mode.
● RCD function is on.
● The shift position is in R.
■ Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the
multi-information display. (→P.266)
■ If “Rear Camera Detection Unavailable

Remove the Dirt of Rear Camera” is displayed on the multi-information display
A rear camera lens may be dirty or covered
with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is
removed from the rear camera lens, the system should return to normal. (It may be necessary to drive the vehicle for some time
before the system returns to normal.)

■ If “Rear Camera Detection Unavail-

A If a pedestrian is detected in area
A

Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly
Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3
times and then stays on
B If a pedestrian is detected in area
B

Buzzer (When the vehicle is stationary): Sounds 3 times
Buzzer (When the vehicle is backing up, when a pedestrian
approaches the rear of the vehicle):

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

able” is displayed on the multi-information display
● If this message is displayed after the
12-volt battery has been disconnected
and reconnected, fully turn the steering
wheel to the left and then the right on
level ground.
● If this message is displayed only when the
R shift position is selected, the rear camera lens may be dirty. Clean the rear
camera lens.
■ Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

● Some pedestrians, such as the following,

may not be detected by the rear camera
detection function, preventing the function from operating properly:

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet
road surface
• The roadside or bumps on the road
• Shadows on the road
● In some situations, such as the following,
the rear camera detection function may
operate even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area.
• When backing up toward the roadside or
a bump on the road
• If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as
when carrying a heavy load
• When backing up toward an
incline/decline
• If the suspension has been modified or
tires of a size other than specified are
installed
• If the rear of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
• If an electronic component, such as a
backlit license plate or rear fog light, is
installed near the rear camera
• If a bumper protector, such as an additional trim strip, is installed to the rear
bumper
• If the orientation of the rear camera has
been changed due to a collision or other
impact, or removal and installation
• If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of
the vehicle
• When water is flowing over the rear camera lens
• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,
snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
• If there is a flashing light in the detection
area, such as the emergency flashers of
another vehicle
● Situations in which the rear camera
detection function may be difficult to
notice
• If buzzer may be difficult to hear if the
surrounding area is noisy, the volume of
the audio system volume is high, the air
conditioning system is being used, etc.
• If the temperature in the cabin is
extremely high or low, the audio system
screen may not operate correctly.

Driving

• Pedestrians who are bending forward or
squatting
• Pedestrians who are lying down
• Pedestrians who are running
• Pedestrians who suddenly enter the
detection area
• Pedestrians riding a bicycle, skateboard,
or other light vehicle
• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing
such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making
their silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians whose body is partially hidden by an object, such as a cart or
umbrella
• Pedestrians which are obscured by darkness, such as at night
● In some situations, such as the following,
pedestrians may not be detected by the
rear camera detection function, preventing the function from operating properly:
• When backing up in inclement weather
(rain, snow, fog, etc.)
• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,
snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
• When a very bright light, such as the sun,
or the headlights of another vehicle,
shines directly into the rear camera
• When backing up in a place where the
surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a
garage or underground parking lot
• When backing up in a dim environment
such as during dusk or in an underground
parking lot
● Even though there are no pedestrians in
the detection area, some objects, such as
the following, may be detected, possibly
causing the rear camera detection function to operate.
• Three dimensional objects, such as a
pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehicle
• Moving objects, such as a car or motorcycle
• Objects moving toward your vehicle
when backing up, such as flags or puddles (or airborne matter, such as smoke,
steam, rain, or snow)
• Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails,
road repairs, white lines, pedestrian
crossings or fallen leaves on the road
• Metal covers (gratings), such as those
used for drainage ditches

279

280

4-5. Using the driving support systems

PKSB (Parking Support
Brake)*
*:

If equipped

The Parking Support Brake system
consists of the following functions
that operate when driving at a low
speed or backing up, such as when
parking. When the system determines that a collision with a
detected object or pedestrian is
high, a warning operates to urge
the driver to take evasive action. If
the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected
object or pedestrian is extremely
high, the brakes are automatically
applied to help avoid the collision or
help reduce the impact of the collision.

PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
system
■ Parking Support Brake function

(static objects) (if equipped)

Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect
static objects, such as a wall, in the
detection area when driving at a low
speed or backing up. (→P.286)
■ Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles)(if
equipped)

Rear radar sensors are used to detect
approaching vehicles in the detection
area behind the vehicle when backing
up. (→P.291)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) (if equipped)

A rear camera sensor is used to detect
pedestrians in the detection area
behind the vehicle when backing up.
(→P.295)
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Parking Support

Brake system
Do not overly rely on the system, as
doing so may lead to an accident.

● The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive carefully, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
The Parking Support Brake system is
designed to provide support to lessen
the severity of collisions. However, it
may not operate in some situations.

● The Parking Support Brake system is

not designed to stop the vehicle completely. Additionally, even if the system
has stopped the vehicle, it is necessary
to depress the brake pedal immediately as brake control will be canceled
after approximately 2 seconds.
NOTICE

■ If “Parking Support Brake Unavail-

able” is displayed on the multi-information display and the PKSB OFF
indicator is flashing
If this message is displayed immediately
after the power switch is changed to ON
mode, operate the vehicle carefully, paying attention to your surroundings. It may
be necessary to drive the vehicle for a
certain amount of time before the system
returns to normal. (If the system is not
return to normal after driving for a while,
clean the rear camera lens.)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

281

Enabling/Disabling the Parking
Support Brake

output restriction control will operate to
either limit acceleration or restrict output
as much as possible.

The Parking Support Brake can be
enabled/disabled on the multi-information display. All of the Parking Support
Brake functions (static objects,
rear-crossing vehicles, and rear pedestrians) are enabled/disabled simultaneously.

 Hybrid system output restriction
control is operating (acceleration
restriction)

Use the meter control switches to
enable/disable the parking support
brake. (→P.87)

Multi-information display: “Object
Detected Acceleration Reduced”

1 Press

to select

Buzzer: Does not sound

2 Press

to select
.

Center Display (Panoramic view monitor):
No warning displayed

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated

 Hybrid system output restriction
control is operating (output
restricted as much as possible)

When the Parking Support Brake is disabled, the PKSB OFF indicator (→P.72)
illuminates on the multi-information display.
To re-enable the system when it was disabled, select
on the multi-information

The system has determined that stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary.

display, select
and then On. If disabled using this method, the system will not
be re-enabled by turning the power switch
off and then to ON mode.

Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”

Displays and buzzers for hybrid
system output restriction control and brake control
If the hybrid system output restriction control or brake control operates, a buzzer will
sound and a message will be displayed on
the Center Display and multi-information
display, to alert the driver. On vehicles with
a head-up display, the head-up display will
display the same message as the
multi-information display.
Depending on the situation, hybrid system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Center Display (Panoramic view monitor):
“BRAKE!”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep

 Brake control is operating
The system determined that emergency
braking is necessary.
Center Display (Panoramic view monitor):
“BRAKE!”
Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep

 Vehicle stopped by system operation
The vehicle has been stopped by brake
control operation.

Driving

and then press

Acceleration greater than a certain
amount is restricted by the system.

282

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Center Display (Panoramic view monitor):
“Press Brake Pedal”

played.)

Multi-information display: “Switch to
Brake” (If the accelerator pedal is not
depressed, “Press Brake Pedal” will be dis-

Buzzer: Short beep

PKSB OFF indicator: Illuminated

System overview
If the Parking Support Brake determines that a collision with a detected object or
pedestrian is possible, the hybrid system output will be restricted to restrain any
increase in the vehicle speed. (Hybrid system output restriction control: See figure
2 below.)
Additionally, if the accelerator pedal continues to be depressed, the brakes will be
applied automatically to reduce the vehicle speed. (Brake control: See figure 3
below.)
 Figure 1 When the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) is disabled

A Hybrid system output
B Braking force
C Time

 Figure 2 When hybrid system output restriction control operates

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

283

A Hybrid system output
B Braking force
C Time
E System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is high
F Hybrid system output reduced
G Example: Multi-infomation display:

“BRAKE!”

 Figure 3 When brake control operates

A Hybrid system output
B Braking force
C Time

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

D Hybrid system output restriction control begins operating

284

4-5. Using the driving support systems

D Hybrid system output restriction control begins operating
E System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is high
F Hybrid system output reduced
G System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is extremely

high

H Brake control begins operating
I Brake control strength increased
J Example: Multi-infomation display:

“BRAKE!”

K Example: Multi-infomation display: “Switch to Brake”
■ If the Parking Support Brake has oper-

ated
If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of
the Parking Support Brake, the Parking
Support Brake will be disabled and the
PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate. If the
Parking Support Brake operates unnecessarily, brake control can be canceled by
depressing the brake pedal or waiting for
approximately 2 seconds for it to automatically be canceled. Then, the vehicle can be
operated by depressing the accelerator
pedal.

■ Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake

To re-enable the Parking Support Brake
when it is disabled due to operation of the
Parking Support Brake, either enable the
system again (→P.281), or turn the power
switch off and then back to ON mode.
Additionally, if the object becomes no longer in the traveling direction of the vehicle
or if the traveling direction of the vehicle
changes (such as changing from moving
forward to backing up, or from backing up
to moving forward), the system will be
re-enabled automatically.
■ If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable”

is displayed on the multi-information
display and the PKSB OFF indicator is
flashing
If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of
the Parking Support Brake, the Parking
Support Brake will be disabled and the
PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● A sensor may be covered with ice, snow,

dirt, etc. Remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc.,
from the sensor to return the system to
normal.
Also, due to ice forming on a sensor at
low temperatures, a warning message
may be displayed or the sensor may not
be able to detect an object. Once the ice
melts, the system will return to normal.
● If this message is displayed only when the
R shift position is selected, the rear camera lens may be dirty. Clean the camera
lens. If this message is displayed in any
forward shift position , a sensor on the
front or rear bumper may be dirty. Clean
the sensors and their surrounding area
on the bumpers.
● If this message continues to be displayed
even after cleaning the sensor, or is displayed even though the sensor is clean,
have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
● Initialization may not have been performed after a 12-volt battery terminal
was disconnected and reconnected. Initialize the system. (→P.284)
If this message continues to be displayed
even after initialization, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If a 12-volt battery terminal has been

disconnected and reconnected
The system needs to be initialized. To initialize the system, drive the vehicle straight
ahead for 5 seconds or more at a speed of
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or more.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

285

Additionally, for vehicles with the Parking
Support Brake function, turn the steering
wheel fully to the left and right with the vehicle stopped.

Driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

286

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Parking Support Brake function (static objects)*
*:

If equipped

If the sensors detect a static object, such as a wall, in the travelling direction of
the vehicle and the system determines that a collision may occur due to the
vehicle suddenly moving forward due to an accidental accelerator pedal operation, the vehicle moving the unintended direction due to the wrong shift position being selected, or while parking or traveling at low speeds, the system will
operate to lessen the impact with the detected static object and reduce the
resulting damage.

Examples of function operation
This function will operate in situations such as the following if an object is detected
in the traveling direction of the vehicle.
■ When traveling at a low speed and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is

depressed late

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

287

■ When the accelerator pedal is depressed excessively

■ When the vehicle moves in the unintended direction due to the wrong shift

position being selected

Driving

Types of sensors
→P.266
WARNING
■ To ensure the Parking Support Brake

can operate properly
Observe the following precautions
regarding the sensors (→P.287). Failure
to do so may cause a sensor to not operate properly, and may cause an accident.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Do not modify, disassemble or paint

the sensors.

● Do not replace a sensor with a part

other than a genuine part.

● Do not subject a sensor or its sur-

rounding area to a strong impact.

● Do not damage the sensors, and

always keep them clean.

288

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

● If the area around a radar sensor is

subjected to an impact, the system
may not operate properly due to a
sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ Handling the suspension

Do not modify the suspension, as
changes to the height or inclination of the
vehicle may prevent the sensors from
detecting objects correctly or cause the
system to not operate or operate unnecessarily.
■ If the Parking Support Brake function

(static objects) operates unnecessarily, such as at a railroad crossing
In the event that the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) operates
unnecessarily, such as at a railroad crossing, brake control will be canceled after
approximately 2 seconds, allowing you
to proceed forward and leave the area,
brake control can also be canceled by
depressing the brake pedal. Depressing
the accelerator pedal after brake control
is canceled will allow you to proceed forward and leave the area.

■ Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or
steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
● When using a high pressure washer to

wash the vehicle, do not spray the sensors directly, as doing so may cause a
sensor to malfunction.

● When using steam to clean the vehicle,

do not direct steam too close to the
sensors as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.

■ When to disable the Parking Support

Brake
In the following situations, disable the
Parking Support Brake as the system
may operate even though there is no
possibility of a collision.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● When inspecting the vehicle using a

chassis roller, chassis dynamo or free
roller

● When loading the vehicle onto a boat,

truck or other transport vessel

● If the suspension has been modified or

tires of a size other than specified are
installed

● If the front of the vehicle is raised or

lowered due to the carried load

● When equipment that may obstruct a

sensor is installed, such as a towing
eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or
snow plow

■ The Parking Support Brake function

(static object) will operate when
The function will operate when the PKSB
OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing
(→P.73, 74) and all of the following conditions are met:
● Hybrid system output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.
• The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or
less.
• There is a static object in the traveling
direction of the vehicle and 6 to 13 ft. (2
to 4 m) away.
• The Parking Support Brake determines
that a stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision.
● Brake control
• Hybrid system output restriction control
is operating.
• The Parking Support Brake determines
that an immediate brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision.
■ The Parking Support Brake function

(static objects) will stop operating when
The function will stop operating if any of the
following conditions are met:
● Hybrid system output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• The system determines that the collision
has become avoidable with normal brake
operation.

4-5. Using the driving support systems
• The static object is no longer 6 to 13 ft. (2
to 4 m) away from the vehicle or in the
traveling direction of the vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed
since the vehicle was stopped by brake
control.
• The brake pedal is depressed after the
vehicle is stopped by brake control.
• The static object is no longer 6 to 13 ft. (2
to 4 m) away from the vehicle or in the
traveling direction of the vehicle.

289

of the approximate distance to the object.
■ Situations in which the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) may
operate even if there is no possibility of a
collision
In some situations, such as the following, the
Parking Support Brake function (static
objects) may operate even though there is
no possibility of a collision.
● Vehicle surroundings
• When driving on a narrow road

■ Detection range of the Parking Support

■ Objects that the Parking Support Brake

• When driving on a gravel road or in an
area with tall grass

■ Intuitive parking assist buzzer

• When driving toward a banner, flag,
low-hanging branch or boom barrier
(such as those used at railroad crossings,
toll gates and parking lots)
• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When parallel parking
• When there is a rut or hole in the surface
of the road
• When driving on a metal cover (grating),
such as those used for drainage ditches
• When driving on a steep slope
• If a sensor is hit by a large amount of
water, such as when driving on a flooded
road

function (static objects) may not detect
The sensors may not be able to detect certain objects, such as the following:
● Pedestrian
● Cotton cloth, snow, and other materials
that are poor reflectors of ultrasonic
waves
● Objects which are not perpendicular to
the ground, are not perpendicular to the
traveling direction of the vehicle, are
uneven or are waving
● Low objects
● Thin objects such as wires, fences, ropes
and signposts
● Objects that are extremely close to the
bumper

Regardless of whether the intuitive parking
assist system is enabled or not (→P.267), if
the Parking Support Brake function (static
objects) is enabled (→P.281), the front or
rear sensors detect an object and brake
control is performed, the intuitive parking
assist buzzer will sound to notify the driver

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Brake function (static objects)
The detection range of the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) differs from
the detection range of the intuitive parking
assist. (→P.270) Therefore, even if the intuitive parking assist detects an object and
provides a warning, the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) may not start
operating.

290

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● Weather

• If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt,
etc. (when cleared, the system will return
to normal)
• If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor
• When driving in inclement weather such
as fog, snow or a sandstorm
● Other ultrasonic wave sources
• When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors,
motorcycle engines, air brakes of large
vehicles, the clearance sonar of other
vehicles or other devices which produce
ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle
• If a sticker or an electronic component,
such as a backlit license plate (especially
fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole
or wireless antenna is installed near a
sensor
● Changes in the vehicle posture
• If the vehicle is significantly tilted
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
• If the orientation of a sensor has been
changed due to a collision or other
impact
■ Situations in which the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) may not
operate properly
In some situations, such as the following, this
function may not operate properly.
● Weather
• When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold

• When strong winds are blowing

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt,
etc. (when cleared, the system will return
to normal)
• If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor
• When driving in inclement weather such
as fog, snow or a sandstorm
● Vehicle surroundings
• When an object that cannot be detected
is between the vehicle and a detected
object
• If an object such as a vehicle, motorcycle,
bicycle or pedestrian cuts in front of the
vehicle or runs out from the side of the
vehicle
● Other ultrasonic waves sources
• When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors,
motorcycle engines, air brakes of large
vehicles, the clearance sonar of other
vehicles or other devices which produce
ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle
• If a sticker or an electronic component,
such as a backlit license plate (especially
fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole
or wireless antenna is installed near a
sensor
● Changes in the vehicle posture
• If the vehicle is significantly tilted
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
• If the orientation of a sensor has been
changed due to a collision or other
impact

4-5. Using the driving support systems

291

Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)*
*:

If equipped

If a rear radar sensor detects a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the
rear of the vehicle and the system determines that the possibility of a collision
is high, this function will perform brake control to reduce the likelihood of an
impact with the approaching vehicle.

Examples of function operation
This function will operate in situations such as the following if a vehicle is detected
in the traveling direction of the vehicle.
■ When reversing, a vehicle is approaching and the brake pedal is not

depressed, or is depressed late

Driving

Types of sensors
→P.262
WARNING
Observe the following precautions
regarding the rear radar sensors
(→P.262). Failure to do so may cause a
sensor to not operate properly, and may
cause an accident.
● Do not modify, disassemble or paint

the sensors.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Do not replace a rear radar sensor

with a part other than a genuine part.

● Do not damage the rear radar sensors,

and always keep the radar sensors and
their surrounding area on the bumper
clean.

■ To prevent a rear radar sensor from

malfunctioning
● If the area around a rear radar sensor
is subjected to an impact, the system
may not operate properly due to a
sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.

292

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

● Observe the rear radar sensor han-

dling precautions. (→P.281)

■ The Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) will operate
when
The function will operate when the PKSB
OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing
(→P.73, 74) and all of the following conditions are met:
● Hybrid system output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.
• The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or
less.
• Vehicles which are approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a
traveling speed of less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
• The shift position is in R.
• The Parking Support Brake determines
that a stronger than normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with
an approaching vehicle.
● Brake control
• Hybrid system output restriction control
is operating.
• The Parking Support Brake determines
that an emergency brake operation is
necessary to avoid a collision with an
approaching vehicle.

• A vehicle is no longer approaching from
the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.
■ Detection area of the Parking Support

Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)
The detection area of the Parking Support
Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) differs from the detection area of the RCTA
function (→P.275). Therefore, even if the
RCTA function detects a vehicle and provides an alert, the Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing vehicles) may not
start operating.

■ Conditions under which the Parking

Support Brake function (rear-crossing
vehicles) will not detect a vehicle
The Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) is not designed to
detect the following types of vehicles and/or
objects:
● Vehicles approaching from directly
behind
● Vehicles backing up in a parking space
next to your vehicle
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect
due to obstructions

■ The Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) will stop operating when
The function will stop operating if any of the
following conditions are met:
● Hybrid system output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• The collision becomes avoidable with
normal brake operation.
• A vehicle is no longer approaching from
the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed
since the vehicle was stopped by brake
control.
• The brake pedal is depressed after the
vehicle is stopped by brake control.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Vehicles which suddenly accelerate or

decelerate near your vehicle

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles

and similar stationary objects

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,

etc.

● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking

spaces next to your vehicle
● Objects which are extremely close to a
radar sensor
● Vehicles which are approaching from the

4-5. Using the driving support systems

293

right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a
traveling speed of less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
● Vehicles which are approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a
traveling speed of more than approximately 15 mph (24 km/h)
■ PKSB buzzer

If the Parking Support Brake is enabled and
brake control is performed, a buzzer will
sound to notify the driver.
■ Situations in which the system may

and metal objects, such as a guardrail,
wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may
reflect electrical waves toward the rear of
the vehicle, is short

Driving

operate even though there is no possibility of a collision
In some situations such as the following, the
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) may operate even
though there is no possibility of a collision.
● When the parking space faces a street
and vehicles are being driven on the
street

● When the distance between your vehicle

● When there are spinning objects near

your vehicle such as the fan of an air conditioning unit
● When water is splashed or sprayed
toward the rear bumper, such as from a
sprinkler
● When a detected vehicle turns while

approaching the vehicle

● When a vehicle passes by the side of your

vehicle

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Situations in which the Parking Support

Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)
may not operate properly
In some situations, such as the following, the
radar sensors may not detect an object and
this function may not operate properly
● Stationary objects
● When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold
● If the rear bumper is covered with ice,
snow, dirt, etc.
● When it is raining heavily or water strikes
the vehicle
● If the vehicle is significantly tilted
● When equipment that may obstruct a
sensor is installed, such as a towing eye-

294

4-5. Using the driving support systems

let, bumper protector (an additional trim
strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
● If the suspension has been modified or
tires of a size other than specified are
installed
● If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
● If a sticker or an electronic component,
such as a backlit license plate (especially
fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole
or wireless antenna is installed near a
radar sensor
● If the orientation of a radar sensor has
been changed
● When multiple vehicles are approaching
with only a small gap between each vehicle
● If a vehicle is approaching the rear of
your vehicle rapidly
● Situations in which the radar sensor may
not detect a vehicle
• When a vehicle approaches from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle while
you are turning while backing up
• When turning while backing up

• When backing out of a shallow angle
parking spot

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• When backing up on a slope with a sharp
change in grade

• When a vehicle turns into the detection
area

4-5. Using the driving support systems

295

Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians)*
*:

If equipped

If the rear camera sensor detects a pedestrian behind the vehicle while backing up and the system determines that the possibility of colliding with the
detected pedestrian is high, a buzzer will sound. If the system determines that
the possibility of colliding with the detected pedestrian is extremely high, the
brakes will be applied automatically to help reduce the impact of the collision.

Examples of system operation
When a pedestrian is detected behind the vehicle while backing up, the brake
pedal is not depressed or is depressed late.
4

Driving

Center Display
Displays a message to urge the driver
to take evasive action when a pedestrian is detected in the detection area
behind the vehicle. (A message will
also be displayed on the multi-information display and head-up display (if
equipped).)

A Pedestrian detection icon with

brake reminder

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

296

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

■ If the Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) operates unnecessarily
Depress the brake pedal immediately
after the Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) operates. (Operation
of the function is canceled by depressing
the brake pedal.)

■ Parking Support Brake function (rear

pedestrians) will operate when
The function will operate when the PKSB
OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing
(→P.73, 74) and all of the following conditions are met:
● Hybrid system output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.
• The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or
less.
• The shift position is in R.
• The rear camera sensor detects a pedestrian behind the vehicle while backing up
and the system determines that the possibility of colliding with the detected
pedestrian is high.
● Brake control
• Hybrid system output restriction control
is operating.
• The Parking Support Brake determines
that an emergency brake operation is
necessary to avoid a collision with a
pedestrians.
■ The Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) will stop operating
when
The function will stop operating if any of the
following conditions are met:
● Hybrid system output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• The collision becomes avoidable with
normal brake operation.
• The pedestrian is no longer detected
behind your vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed
since the vehicle was stopped by brake

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

control.
• The brake pedal is depressed after the
vehicle is stopped by brake control.
• The pedestrian is no longer detected
behind your vehicle.
■ Detection area of the Parking Support

Brake function (rear pedestrians)
The detection area of the Parking Support
Brake function (rear pedestrians) differs
from the detection area of the RCD function (→P.278). Therefore, even if the RCD
function detects a vehicle and provides an
alert, the Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) may not start operating.
■ Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

● Some pedestrians, such as the following,

may not be detected by the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians),
preventing the function from operating
properly:
• Pedestrians who are bending forward or
squatting
• Pedestrians who are lying down
• Pedestrians who are running
• Pedestrians who suddenly enter the
detection area
• Pedestrians riding a bicycle, skateboard,
or other light vehicle
• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing
such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making
their silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians whose body is partially hidden by an object, such as a cart or
umbrella
• Pedestrians which are obscured by darkness, such as at night
● In some situations, such as the following,
pedestrians may not be detected by the
Parking Support Brake function (rear
pedestrians), preventing the function
from operating properly:
• When backing up in inclement weather
(rain, snow, fog, etc.)
• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,
snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
• When a very bright light, such as the sun,
or the headlights of another vehicle,
shines directly into the rear camera
• When backing up in a place where the
surrounding brightness changes sud-

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of
the vehicle
• When water is flowing over the rear camera lens
• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,
snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
• If there is a flashing light in the detection
area, such as the emergency flashers of
another vehicle

Driving

denly, such as at the entrance or exit of a
garage or underground parking lot
• When backing up in a dim environment
such as during dusk or in an underground
parking lot
● Even though there are no pedestrians in
the detection area, some objects, such as
the following, may be detected, possibly
causing the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) to operate.
• Three dimensional objects, such as a
pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehicle
• Moving objects, such as a car or motorcycle
• Objects moving toward your vehicle
when backing up, such as flags or puddles (or airborne matter, such as smoke,
steam, rain, or snow)
• Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails,
road repairs, white lines, pedestrian
crossings or fallen leaves on the road
• Metal covers (gratings), such as those
used for drainage ditches
• Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet
road surface
• The roadside or bumps on the road
• Shadows on the road
● In some situations, such as the following,
the Parking Support Brake function (rear
pedestrians) may operate even though
there are no pedestrians in the detection
area.
• When backing up toward the roadside or
a bump on the road
• If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as
when carrying a heavy load
• When backing up toward an
incline/decline
• If the suspension has been modified or
tires of a size other than specified are
installed
• If the rear of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
• If an electronic component, such as a
backlit license plate or rear fog light, is
installed near the rear camera
• If a bumper protector, such as an additional trim strip, is installed to the rear
bumper
• If the orientation of the rear camera has
been changed due to a collision or other
impact, or removal and installation

297

298

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving mode select switch
The driving modes can be selected
to suit driving condition.

Selecting a drive mode

Provides an optimal balance of fuel economy, quietness, and dynamic performance.
Suitable for city driving.
When the shift position is in D, an appropriate gear for sporty driving may automatically be selected according to driver
performance and driving conditions.
• Custom mode
Allows you to drive with the powertrain,
chassis and air conditioning system functions set to your preferred settings. Custom mode settings can only be changed on
the drive mode customization display of
the Center Display. (→P.316)

2 Comfort mode
By controlling the suspension, riding comfort is further enhanced. Suitable for city
driving.
When not in comfort mode and the driving
mode select switch is turned backward, the
comfort mode indicator comes on.

3 Eco drive mode

A Except F SPORT models
B F SPORT models

1 Normal mode/Custom mode
Normal mode and custom mode are
selected by pressing the driving mode
select switch. Each time the switch is
pressed, the driving mode changes
between normal mode and custom mode.
When normal mode is selected, the normal
mode indicator comes on.
When custom mode is selected, the custom mode indicator comes on.
Press the switch to change the driving
mode to normal mode when not in normal
mode.
• Normal mode

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Helps the driver accelerate in an
eco-friendly manner and improve fuel
economy through moderate throttle characteristics and by controlling the operation
of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling).
When in comfort mode, if the driving mode
select switch is turned backward, the Eco
drive mode indicator comes on.

4 Sport mode
• Sport S mode
Controls the hybrid system to provide
quick, powerful acceleration. This mode is
suitable for when agile driving response is
desired, such as when driving on roads
with many curves.
When not in Sport S mode, if the driving
mode select switch is turned forward, the
Sport S mode indicator comes on.
• Sport S+ mode

4-5. Using the driving support systems
Helps to ensure steering performance and
driving stability by simultaneously controlling the steering and suspension in
addition to the hybrid system. Suitable for
sportier driving.
When in Sport S mode, if the driving mode
select switch is turned forward, the Sport
S+ mode indicator comes on.
■ If the driving mode select switch is oper-

ated while the opening screen is being
displayed
If the driving mode select switch is operated
while the opening screen is being displayed,
the driving mode will be changed and the
meter display will change accordingly after
the opening screen operation has completed.

■ Operation of the air conditioning sys-

■ Automatic deactivation of sport mode

and custom mode
If the power switch is turned off after driving
in sport mode or custom mode, the drive
mode will be changed to normal mode.

■ Driving mode pop-up display

When the driving mode is changed, the
selected driving mode will be temporarily
displayed on the side display. (→P.317)

Electronically modulated air
suspension*
*:

If equipped

The height of the vehicle when driving can be selected using the vehicle height adjustment switch. The
selected height level will be maintained regardless of the number of
passengers or weight of cargo.
Additionally, settings of the following functions can be changed:
 Access mode control
 Parking height control
 Vehicle height control
■ Situations in which the vehicle height

control may not operate properly

● In the following situations, the vehicle

height may change slowly or may not
change to the correct height:
• When the vehicle comes into contact
with snow, ice, stone, etc.
• When the ambient temperature is low
• When the accumulator tank pressure is
low
● In the following situations, the vehicle
height may not change:
• If the hood or trunk is not fully closed
• If the brake pedal depressed and the
vehicle is stopped
• When the vehicle is on a significantly
uneven or undulating road
• When the vehicle is on a slanted road or a
slope
■ Operating sound of the air suspension

compressor and valves
When the vehicle height is changed, such
as due to passengers entering the vehicle or
cargo being loaded, or when the vehicle
height is changed using the vehicle height
adjustment switch, the air suspension compressor and valves may operate and a
sound may be heard. This does not indicate

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

tem in Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency.
To improve air conditioning performance,
perform the following operations:
● Turn off eco air conditioning mode
(→P.327)
● Adjust the fan speed (→P.323)
● Turn off Eco drive mode

299

300

4-5. Using the driving support systems

a malfunction.
■ When the accumulator tank pressure is

low
When the accumulator tank pressure is low,
the air suspension compressor and valves
may operate repeatedly even though the
vehicle height is not being changed. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
WARNING
■ Situations in which the operation of

the electronically modulated air suspension should be canceled
In the following situations, make sure to
disable all functions of the vehicle height
control of the electronically modulated
air suspension and then stopping the
hybrid system. Otherwise, the vehicle
height may change and part of your body
may be caught under the vehicle, possibly causing injury.

● When the vehicle is parked on a curb
● If any of the wheels is not touching the

ground

● If the vehicle needs to be jacked up
● If the vehicle is to be tied down
● If the vehicle is to be towed
■ Vehicle height control precautions

NOTICE
■ Parking precaution

If the vehicle is parked for a long time, the
vehicle height may change due to
changes in the ambient temperature.
When parking the vehicle, make sure
that the area above and below the vehicle is clear, so that the vehicle will not
contact anything if its height changes.
Be careful when parking the vehicle in an
area with a low ceiling or near low hanging objects, as the vehicle height will
increase when passengers exit the vehicle and the access mode control operates.

Selecting the vehicle height
To adjust the vehicle height to one
appropriate for road and driving conditions, press the vehicle height adjustment switch.
When high mode is enabled, the high
mode indicator on the meter will illuminate.
When the vehicle height is increased by
the access mode control function, press
the vehicle height adjustment switch twice
to enable/disable high mode.

In the following situations, make sure to
check the safety of the area around the
vehicle, as the vehicle height may change
and part of someone’s body may be
caught in the vehicle, possibly causing
injury or the vehicle may be damaged.
● When opening a door
● When unlocking the doors using the

smart access system with push-button
start

● When changing the vehicle height

using the vehicle height adjustment
switch

■ The vehicle height adjustment switch

can be changed when
The power switch is in ON mode.

■ System protection function

If the vehicle height is repeatedly increased

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

301

4-5. Using the driving support systems
and decreased using the vehicle height
adjustment switch, etc., the system may not
operate temporarily.

Changing setting of the access
mode control and parking height
control
The following settings can be changed
using the meter control switches for
the easy access to the vehicle. (→P.87)
1 Press

to select

2 Press

to select “Vehicle

Settings” and then press
or

and then press

to select
.

4 Press
or
to select “Access
Mode” or “Select Parking Height”
and then press

These settings are memorized even if the
power switch is turned off.

 Access mode control (“Access
Mode”)
When access mode control is enabled, the
vehicle height will increase automatically in
the following situations:
• When the doors are unlocked using the
smart access system with push-button
start
• When the doors are unlocked using the
wireless remote control and then a door
is opened.
The vehicle height will increase by approximately 1.2 in. (30 mm) from its normal
position.
The vehicle height may not increase, if the
vehicle height already reaches the

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The vehicle will return to its normal height
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
When access mode control is disabled, the
parking height control will also be disabled.

 Parking height control (“Select
Parking Height”)
When “High” is selected, the vehicle height
will automatically increase when the P shift
position is selected and a door is opened.
The vehicle height will increase by approximately 0.4 in. (10 mm) from its normal
position.
The vehicle height may not increase, if the
vehicle height already reaches the
selected height.

The vehicle will return to its normal height
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

Driving

3 Press

selected height.

■ When the vehicle height has been

increased by the access mode control
function
Press the vehicle height adjustment switch
with the power switch in any mode to return
the vehicle to its previous vehicle height.

■ Situations in which the access mode

control function will not operate
The access mode control function will not
operate if the vehicle is not parked on a
level road surface.

Disabling the vehicle height control functions
The vehicle height control functions
can be disabled using the meter control switches. (→P.87)
1 Press

to select

302
2 Press

4-5. Using the driving support systems

to select “Vehicle

Settings” and then press
3 Press

and then press
4 Press

to select
.
to select “Height

Control” and then press

Driving assist systems

This setting is memorized even if the power
switch is turned off.

Even if the vehicle height control functions are disabled, they will be enabled
automatically when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 19 mph (30
km/h).

To keep driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to
various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are
supplementary and should not be
relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

Summary of the driving assist
systems
■ ECB (Electronically Controlled

Brake System)

■ When “Check Air Suspension System”

is displayed on the multi-information
display
The system may not operate properly. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)

The electronically controlled system
generates braking force corresponding to the brake operation
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the
brakes are applied suddenly, or if the
brakes are applied while driving on a
slippery road surface
■ Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a
panic stop situation
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding
when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces.
■ Secondary Collision Brake

When the airbag sensor detects a collision, the brakes and brake lights are
automatically controlled to reduce the

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

vehicle speed and that helps reduce
the possibility of further damage due to
a secondary collision.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
■ Hill-start assist control

Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on an
uphill
■ VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steer-

ing) (if equipped)

■ DRS (Dynamic Rear Steering) (if

equipped)

Contributes to the turning characteristics and responsiveness of the vehicle
by adjusting the rear wheel angle of the
vehicle in accordance with steering
wheel movement.
■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce
the amount of effort needed to turn the
steering wheel.
■ Adaptive Variable Suspension Sys-

tem

By independently controlling the
damping force of the shock absorbers
for each of the 4 wheels according to
the road and driving conditions, this
system helps riding comfort with superior vehicle stability, and helps good

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

vehicle posture.
Also, the damping force changes
depending on the selected driving
mode. (→P.298)
■ LDH (Lexus Dynamic Handling

system) (if equipped)

Provides integrated control of the
VGRS, DRS and EPS. Contributes to
turning characteristics at low speeds,
responsiveness at medium speeds and
safety at high speeds by controlling the
steering angle of the front and rear
wheels in accordance with the steering
wheel operation and vehicle speed.
■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Inte-

grated Management)

Provides integrated control of the
ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC,
hill-start assist control, EPS, VGRS (if
equipped), DRS (if equipped) and
Adaptive Variable Suspension System
Helps to maintain vehicle stability when
swerving on slippery road surfaces by
controlling the brakes, hybrid system
output, steering assist, and steering
ratio
■ When the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are

operating
The slip indicator light will flash while the
TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating.

Driving

Adjusts the front wheel turning angle in
accordance with the vehicle speed and
steering wheel movement

303

304

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Disabling the TRAC system

Lexus dealer.

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow,
the TRAC system may reduce power from
the hybrid system to the wheels. Pressing
the
switch to turn the system off may
make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in
order to free it.
To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press
and release the
switch.

■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist

The “Traction Control Turned Off” will be
shown on the multi-information display.
Press the
switch again to turn the system back on.

■ Disabling both TRAC and VSC systems

To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off,
press and hold the
switch for more
than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will come on
and the “Traction Control Turned Off” will
be shown on the multi-information display.*
Press the
switch again to turn the system back on.
*

: On vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision
System), PCS will also be disabled (only
Pre-Collision warning is available). The
PCS warning light will come on and a
message will be displayed on the
multi-information display. (→P.219,
226)

■ When the message is displayed on the

multi-information display showing that
TRAC has been disabled even if the
switch has not been pressed

TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

control
When the following four conditions are met,
the hill-start assist control will operate:
● The shift position is in a position other
than P or N (when stating off forward/backward on an upward incline)
● The vehicle is stopped
● The accelerator pedal is not depressed
● The parking brake is not engaged
■ Automatic system cancelation of

hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn off in any
of the following situations:
● Shift the shift position to P or N
● The accelerator pedal is depressed
● The parking brake is engaged
● 2 seconds at maximum elapsed after the
brake pedal is released
■ VGRS is disabled when

VGRS may stop operating in the following
situations.
In this event, the steering wheel may move
from its straight forward position, but it will
return when the system restarts.
● When the steering wheel is operated for
an extended period of time while the
vehicle is stopped or is moving very
slowly (on vehicles with LDH, DRS is disabled together with VGRS)
● When the steering wheel has been held
fully to the left or right
The center position of the steering wheel
may change when VGRS is disabled. However, the position will return to normal after
VGRS is reactivated.
■ When the 12-volt battery is discon-

nected (vehicles with VGRS)
The steering wheel may move from its
straight forward position, but this will be
corrected automatically when driving.

4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the

ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC, hill-start
assist control and VGRS systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine
compartment when the brake pedal is
depressed repeatedly, when the hybrid
system is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in
any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may
occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle
body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard also after
the vehicle comes to a stop.
■ ECB operating sound

■ EPS, VGRS and DRS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a
motor sound (whirring sound) may be
heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and

VSC systems
After turning the TRAC and VSC systems
off, the systems will be automatically
re-enabled in the following situations:
● When the power switch is turned off
● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the
TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed
increases
If both the TRAC and VSC systems are
turned off, automatic re-enabling will not
occur when vehicle speed increases.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS sys-

tem
The effectiveness of the EPS system is
reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering
input over an extended period of time. The
steering wheel may feel heavy as a result.
Should this occur, refrain from excessive
steering input or stop the vehicle and turn
the hybrid system off. The EPS system
should return to normal within 10 minutes.

■ Secondary Collision Brake operating

conditions
The vehicle speed is approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or more and the airbag sensor
detects a collision. (The Secondary Collision Brake will not operate when the vehicle
speed is below approximately 6 mph [10
km/h].)

■ Secondary Collision Brake automatic

cancellation
The Secondary Collision Brake is automatically canceled in the following situations:
● The vehicle speed drops below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
● A certain amount of time elapses during
operation
● The accelerator pedal is depressed a
large amount
■ When “Check VGRS System” or

“CHECK DRS” is displayed on the
multi-information display
The VGRS or DRS may not operate properly. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ The ABS does not operate effectively

when
● The limits of tire gripping performance
have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered
road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving

at high speed on wet or slick roads.

Driving

ECB operating sound may be heard in the
following cases, but it does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred.
● Operating sound heard from the engine
compartment when the brake pedal is
operated.
● Motor sound of the brake system heard
from the front part of the vehicle when
the driver’s door is opened.
● Operating sound heard from the engine
compartment when one or two minutes
passed after the stop of the hybrid system.

305

306

4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is

operating may exceed that of normal
conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the
vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you, especially in the following
situations:

● When driving on dirt, gravel or

snow-covered roads

● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes

or uneven surfaces

■ TRAC/VSC may not operate effec-

tively when
Directional control and power may not
be achievable while driving on slippery
road surfaces, even if the TRAC/VSC
system is operating. Drive the vehicle
carefully in conditions where stability and
power may be lost.

■ Hill-start assist control does not oper-

ate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist
control. Hill-start assist control may
not operate effectively on steep
inclines and roads covered with ice.
● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start

assist control is not intended to hold
the vehicle stationary for an extended
period of time. Do not attempt to use
hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead
to an accident.

■ When the TRAC/ABS/VSC is acti-

vated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always
drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular
care when the indicator light flashes.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are

turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed
appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are the systems to help ensure
vehicle stability and driving force, do not
turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless
necessary.

■ Secondary Collision Brake

Do not overly rely on the Secondary Collision Brake. This system is designed to
help reduce the possibility of further
damage due to a secondary collision,
however, that effect changes according
to various conditions. Overly relying on
the system may result in death or serious
injury.
■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total
load capacity. In addition, make sure that
the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will
not function correctly if different tires are
installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further
information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or
modifying the suspension will affect the
driving assist systems, and may cause a
system to malfunction.

4-6. Driving tips
4-6.Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips

For economical and ecological
driving, pay attention to the following points:

Using Eco drive mode

Use of Hybrid System Indicator
The Eco-friendly driving is possible by
keeping the indicate of Hybrid System
Indicator within Eco area. (→P.78, 83)

Changing the shift position
Shift the shift position to D when
stopped at a traffic light, or driving in
heavy traffic etc. Shift the shift position
to P when parking. When using the N
position, there is no positive effect on
fuel consumption. In the N position, the
gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. Also, when
using the air conditioning system, etc.,
the hybrid battery (traction battery)
power is consumed.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Accelerator pedal/brake pedal
operation
 Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid
abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and
deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use
gasoline engine power.
 Avoid repeated acceleration.
Repeated acceleration consumes
hybrid battery (traction battery)
power, resulting in poor fuel consumption. Battery power can be
restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released.

When braking
Make sure to operate the brakes gently
and in a timely manner. A greater
amount of electrical energy can be
regenerated when slowing down.

Delays
Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic
lights, will lead to bad fuel economy.
Check traffic reports before leaving
and avoid delays as much as possible.
When driving in a traffic jam, gently
release the brake pedal to allow the
vehicle to move forward slightly while
avoiding overuse of the accelerator
pedal. Doing so can help control
excessive gasoline consumption.

Driving

When using Eco drive mode, the
torque corresponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can be
generated more smoothly than it is in
normal conditions. In addition, the
operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel economy.
(→P.298)

307

308

4-6. Driving tips

Highway driving
Control and maintain the vehicle at a
constant speed. Before stopping at a
toll booth or similar, allow plenty of
time to release the accelerator and
gently apply the brakes. A greater
amount of electrical energy can be
regenerated when slowing down.

Air conditioning
Use the air conditioning only when
necessary. Doing so can help reduce
excessive gasoline consumption.
In summer: When the ambient temperature is high, use the recirculated
air mode. Doing so will help to reduce
the burden on the air conditioning system and reduce fuel consumption as
well.
In winter: Because the gasoline engine
will not automatically cut out until it and
the interior of the vehicle are warm, it
will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater.

Checking tire inflation pressure
Make sure to check the tire inflation
pressure frequently. Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor fuel
economy.
Also, as snow tires can cause large
amounts of friction, their use on dry
roads can lead to poor fuel economy.
Use tires that are appropriate for the
season.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Luggage
Carrying heavy luggage will lead to
poor fuel economy. Avoid carrying
unnecessary luggage. Installing a large
roof rack will also cause poor fuel
economy.

Warming up before driving
Since the gasoline engine starts up and
cuts out automatically when cold,
warming up the engine is unnecessary.
Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to excess
fuel consumption.

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive
the vehicle in a manner appropriate
to the prevailing weather conditions.

Preparation for winter
 Use fluids that are appropriate to
the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine/power control unit coolant
• Washer fluid

309

● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120

km/h), regardless of the type of snow
tires being used.

● Use snow tires on all, not just some

wheels.

■ When installing tire chains

Before installing tire chains, make sure to
disable all functions of the vehicle height
control of the electronically modulated
air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle
height may change while installing the
tire chains and part or your body may be
caught under the vehicle, possibly causing injury. (→P.301)
■ Driving with tire chains

 Have a service technician inspect
the condition of the 12-volt battery.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed

 Have the vehicle fitted with four
snow tires or purchase a set of tire
chains for the rear tires.*

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces

Ensure that all tires are the specified size
and brand, and that chains match the size
of the tires.
*

: Tire chains cannot be mounted on vehicles with front and rear tires of differing
sizes.
WARNING

■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of
vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended level of air

pressure.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
or over potholes.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt

steering, sudden braking and shifting
operations that cause sudden engine
braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering

a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.

● Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

system. (if equipped)

● Do not use LKA (Lane-Keeping

Assist) system. (if equipped)

Driving

Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle
being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.

310

4-6. Driving tips
NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow
tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire
retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation
of the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters.

Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the
driving conditions:
 Do not try to forcibly open a window
or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour
warm water over the frozen area to
melt the ice. Wipe away the water
immediately to prevent it from
freezing.
 To ensure proper operation of the
climate control system fan, remove
any snow that has accumulated on
the air inlet vents in front of the
windshield.

When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and shift the shift position to P without setting the parking
brake. The parking brake may freeze
up, preventing it from being released. If
the vehicle is parked without setting
the parking brake, make sure to block
the wheels.
Failure to do so may be dangerous
because it may cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly, possibly leading to
an accident.

Selecting tire chains


Vehicles with front and rear tires of
the same size

Use the correct tire chain size when
mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire
size.

 Check for and remove any excess
ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s
roof, chassis, around the tires or on
the brakes.
 Remove any snow or mud from the
bottom of your shoes before getting
in the vehicle.

When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a
safe distance between you and the
vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced
speed suitable to road conditions.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

A Side chain (0.12 in. [3 mm] in diam-

eter)

B Cross chain (0.16 in. [4 mm] in

diameter)



Vehicles with front and rear tires of
differing sizes

Tire chains cannot be mounted.
Snow tires should be used instead.

4-6. Driving tips

311

Regulations on the use of tire
chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary depending on location and
type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
■ Tire chain installation

NOTICE
■ Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.

Windshield wipers
To enable the windshield wipers to be
lifted when heavy snow or icy conditions are expected, change the rest
position of the windshield wipers from
the retracted position below the hood
to the service position using the wiper
lever. (→P.193)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Observe the following precautions when
installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe
location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not
install tire chains on the front tires.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires as
tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 1/4⎯1/2 mile (0.5⎯1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

312

4-6. Driving tips

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

313

Interior features

5-1. Remote Touch/Display
.

Remote Touch............................. 314
Center Display............................ 316
Rear Multi Operation Panel
.........................................................318
5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge
Lexus Climate Concierge...... 321
5-3. Using the air conditioning system
and defogger
Front automatic air conditioning
system ......................................... 323
Rear air conditioning system
........................................................333

5-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list.........................340
5-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features............ 343
Trunk features.............................348
5-6. Using the other interior features
Other interior features ............ 351
Garage door opener...............358
Lexus Enform Safety Connect
........................................................ 364

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators................336

314

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

5-1.Remote Touch/Display

Remote Touch

The Remote Touch can be used to
operate the Center Display.
For details on the Remote touch,
refer to “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.

function, letter or screen button. Certain
finger movements on the touchpad can
perform functions, such as changing map
scalings and scrolling list screens.
E Sub function button

When
is displayed on the screen, a
function screen assigned to the screen can
be displayed.
■ Using the touchpad

Remote Touch operation
■ Switches

A “MAP” button
Vehicles with navigation function:
Press this button to display the vehicle’s
current position.
Vehicles without navigation function:
Press this button to display the compass
mode screen.
B “MENU” button
Press this button to display the menu
screen.
C Back button
Press this button to display the previous
screen.
D Touchpad
Slide your finger on the touchpad and
move the pointer to select a function, letter
and screen button.
Press the touchpad to enter the selected

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1 Select: Touch the touchpad to
select the desired button on the
screen.
2 Enter: Buttons on the screen can be
selected by either depressing or
double tapping the touchpad.
Once a button has been selected,
the screen will change.
■ Touch operation

Operations are performed by touching
the touchpad with your finger.
 Trace
Trace the pad surface while maintaining
contact with the touchpad. Moving the
cursor and the pointer.

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

 Double tap
Tap the touchpad twice, quickly. Select the
button on the screen.

315

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the Remote

Touch
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the
Remote Touch.

● Do not allow food, liquid, stickers or lit

cigarettes to contact the Remote
Touch.

● Do not subject the Remote Touch to

excessive pressure or strong impact.

Quick and short movement along the
touchpad with you finger. Move the list
screen.

 Pinch in/Pinch out
Slide fingers toward each other or apart on
the touchpad. Change the scale of the
map.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Do not push the touchpad with a

strong force or use a sharp pointed
object to operate the pad.

Interior features

 Flick

316

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

Center Display

Switch

Function
Select to display the
media control
screen.*1

Center Display overview
■ Menu screen

Select to display the
hands-free control
screen.*1

Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch to display the menu
screen.
The displays shown in the illustrations
are used for example only and may differ from the actual vehicle.

Select to display the
“Apps” screen.*1, 2
Select to display the
information screen.*1
(→P.97)
Select to display the
setup screen.*1
Select to display the
air conditioning control screen.
(→P.326)

Switch

Function
Select to display the
“Destination”
screen.*1
Select to display the
radio control
screen.*1

*1:

Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.

: This function is not available on some
models.

■ Split-screen display

Different information can be displayed on the left and right sides of the screen. For
example, air conditioning system screen can be displayed and operated while the
fuel consumption information screen is being displayed. The large screen on the
left of the display is called the main display, and the small screen to the right is
called the side display.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

■ Main display

E Show/hide the side display*

For details about the functions and
operation of the main display, refer to
the respective section and “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ Side display

to display the desired

A Navigation system*
B Audio*
C Vehicle information (→P.100)
D Air conditioning system (→P.329)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.

■ Screen display during low temperatures

When the ambient temperature is
extremely low, screen response may be
delayed even if the Remote Touch is operated.

Interior features

The following functions can be displayed and operated on the side display.
Select
screen.

317

318

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

(if equipped)/rear interior light control screen. (→P.355)

Rear Multi Operation Panel*
*

: If equipped

The Rear Multi Operation Panel
built-into the rear armrest can be
used to operate the rear audio system, air conditioning system, etc.

Rear Multi Operation Panel
overview
■ Home screen

F Touch to display the Rear Multi

Operation Panel settings screen.
(→P.318)

G Show the progress of unlocking the

Rear Multi Operation Panel.

H Touch and hold to unlock the Rear

Multi Operation Panel.

I Shortcut button
Shortcut screen is displayed. Touch to display/hide commonly used buttons for a
selected mode on the bottom portion of
the screen.
J

button

Press to display the home screen.
■ Rear Multi Operation Panel set-

tings screen

Screen operation settings and the
brightness of the screen can be
changed.
A Touch to display the audio control

screen.
Refer to “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.

B Touch to display the rear air condi-

tioning control screen. (→P.334)

C Touch to display the rear seat

adjustment screen. (→P.136)

D Touch to display the relaxation seat

(if equipped) control screen.
(→P.138)

E Touch to display the rear sunshade

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

319

(10/30/60/120 seconds) the Rear
Multi Operation Panel must be idle
before the automatic screen transition function operates.
■ Operating the Rear Multi Operation

Panel

● When operating the Rear Multi Opera-

A Touch to turn the screen off.
B Touch to lock the Rear Multi Oper-

ation Panel.

C Touch to adjust the brightness of

the screen.

D Touch to display the automatic

screen transition settings screen.
(→P.319)

E Touch to display the rear seat

■ Auto screen change settings

hold the

screen

button to turn the Rear

Multi Operation Panel off, and then press
the

button again to turn it back

on and operate it.
● In the following situations, the Rear Multi

•
•
A Touch to turn the automatic screen

transition function on/off.

•
•

B Touch to set whether the screen will

transition to the home screen or
turn off when the automatic screen
transition function operates.

C Touch to set the amount of time

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

•

Operation Panel may not operate properly:
If wearing gloves during operation, non
response may occur.
If a wet hand is used to operate the Rear
Multi Operation Panel.
If a screen cover or coating is applied to
on the Rear Multi Operation Panel.
If the Rear Multi Operation Panel is dirty
or has liquid attached to it, incorrect
operation or non-response may occur.
If the Rear Multi Operation Panel
receives electro magnetic waves, incorrect operation or non-response may
occur.
If a mobile phone or other wireless communication device brought near the Rear

Interior features

return function settings screen.
(→P.137)

tion Panel, only use the tip of a finger. The
Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be
operated with a fingernail, pen, etc.
● Use only one finger when operating the
Rear Multi Operation Panel. The Rear
Multi Operation Panel cannot be operated with multiple fingers .
● When the power switch is changed to
ACCESSORY or ON mode, if a hand
object, liquid or foreign matter is touching the Rear Multi Operation Panel, it
may not operate correctly. In this case,
remove anything touching the Rear Multi
Operation Panel and wait for approximately 30 seconds before operating it
again.
If the Rear Multi Operation Panel still
cannot be operated normally, press and

320

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

Multi Operation Panel.
● If the a metal object, such as the following, is touching or covering the Rear
Multi Operation Panel:
• Coins
• Keys
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Magnetic isolation cards
• Metallic foil, such as the inner packaging
of a cigarette box
• Disposable heat packs
• Discs, such as a CD or DVD, Cables,
such as a USB cable
• Mobile devices, such as smartphones,
mobile phones, tablets, etc.
● Make sure to keep the Rear Multi Operation Panel clean . If the Rear Multi Operation Panel is dirty, it may not operate
correctly. (When cleaning the Rear Multi
Operation Panel, turn the screen off to
avoid unexpected operation.)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the Rear Multi

Operation Panel
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the
Rear Multi Operation Panel.

● Keep the Rear Multi Operation Panel

free of liquids, such as drinks or rain ,
as they may cause a short circuit.

● Do not sit on or set heavy objects on

the Rear Multi Operation Panel.

● Do not push the Rear Multi Operation

Panel with a strong force or use a
sharp pointed object to operate the
panel.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

321

5-2.Lexus Climate Concierge

Lexus Climate Concierge

The seat heaters, seat ventilators
and heated steering wheel (if
equipped) are each automatically
controlled according to the set
temperature of the air conditioning
system, the outside and cabin temperature, etc. Lexus Climate Concierge allows a comfortable
condition to be maintained without
adjusting each system.

■ Changing Lexus Climate Con-

cierge control screen between
front/rear (vehicles with 4-ZONE
climate control)

Select “Rear” to display the rear air
conditioning system screen.

menu and move the cursor to
to display the climate control short-

Select “Front” to display the front air conditioning system screen.

cut buttons. Then, select
to display the Lexus Climate Concierge
control screen.

■ When using the Lexus Climate Con-

Turning on Lexus Climate Concierge
Select

cierge
Lexus Climate Concierge can be operated
on the sub function menu or option control
screen. (→P.326)

Operation of each system
■ Automatic air conditioning system

(→P.323, 333)

The indicator on the Lexus Climate Concierge control screen illuminates, and the
automatic air conditioning system, seat
heaters and ventilators, and heated steering wheel operate in automatic mode.

The temperature can be adjusted independently for each seat.

If any of the system is operated manually,
the indicator turns off. However, all other
functions continue to operate in automatic
mode.

Heating or ventilation is automatically
selected according to the set temperature of the air conditioning system, the
outside temperature, etc.

■ Seat heaters and ventilators

(→P.336)

■ Heated steering wheel (if

equipped) (→P.336)

Heated steering wheel operates automatically according to the set tempera-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch to display the main

322

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

ture of the air conditioning system, the
outside temperature, etc.
■ Passenger detection functions
● When a passenger is detected in the

front passenger seat, the seat heater and
ventilator will operate automatically.
● When a passenger is detected in a rear
seat, the seat heater and ventilator will
operate automatically. (vehicles with
4-ZONE climate control)
■ Seat heater/ventilator operation

When automatic mode is selected using the
seat heater/ventilator switch, passenger
detection is not performed.
■ Rear seat heater operation (vehicles

with DUAL-ZONE climate control)
The rear seat heaters are not controlled by
the Lexus Climate Concierge.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

323

5-3.Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Front automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the main menu and
move the cursor to
select

to display the climate control shortcut buttons. Then,

to display the air conditioning control screen.

The air conditioning system can be displayed and operated on the side display.

Air conditioning controls

Interior features

A Left-hand side temperature control switch
B Automatic mode switch
C Off switch
D Fan speed decreases switch
E Fan speed increases switch
F Windshield defogger switch
G Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch
H Outside/recirculated air mode switch
I Right-hand side temperature control switch
■ Adjusting the temperature

■ Setting the fan speed

Operate the temperature control
switch upwards to increase the temperature and downwards to decrease
the temperature.

Operate the

switch to increase the

fan speed and the
switch to
decrease the fan speed.
Press the off switch to turn the fan off.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

324

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Changing the air flow mode

→P.326
■ Switching between outside air and

recirculated air modes

after a while. The operation time changes
according to the ambient temperature and
vehicle speed.
■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if

equipped)

Press the outside/recirculated air
mode switch.

→P.329

The mode changes as follows each time
the switch is pressed.

■ When the outside temperature exceeds

automatic mode →

(outside air

mode) →
(recirculated air mode)
→ automatic mode
When the system is switched to automatic
mode, the air conditioning system operates
automatically.
■ Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.
Press the windshield defogger switch.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode
switch to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side windows quickly, turn the air flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press the
windshield defogger switch again when the
windshield is defogged.
■ Defogging the rear window and

outside rear view mirrors

Defoggers are used to defog the rear
window, and to remove raindrops, dew
and frost from the outside rear view
mirrors.
Press the rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers switch.
The defoggers will automatically turn off

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning
system is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning
power consumption, the air conditioning
system may switch to recirculated air
mode automatically. This may also
reduce fuel consumption.
● It is possible to switch to outside air mode
at any time by pressing the outside/recirculated air mode switch.
■ Fogging up of the windows

The windows will easily fog up when the
humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning “A/C”
on will dehumidify the air from the outlets
and defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn “A/C” off, the windows may fog
up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tun-

nels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode switch to the
recirculated air mode. This is effective in
preventing outside air from entering the
vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will
also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside
temperature.
■ Registering air conditioning settings to

electronic keys

● Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic

key and turning the power switch to ON
mode will recall that key’s registered air
conditioning settings.

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
● When the power switch is turned off, the

current air conditioning settings will automatically be registered to the electronic
key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
● The system may not operate correctly if
more than one electronic key is in the
vicinity or if the smart access system with
push-button start is used to unlock a passenger door.
● The doors that can recall the air conditioning setting* when unlocked using the
smart access system with push-button
start can be changed. For details, contact
your Lexus dealer.
*
: The doors that can recall the driving
position memory are changed at the
same time.
■ Operation of the air conditioning sys-

■ When the outside temperature falls to

nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not
operate even when “A/C” is selected.

■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning

system to the outside air mode.

● During use, various odors from inside and

outside the vehicle may enter into and
accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occur-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

ring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be
delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is
started in automatic mode or with the
micro dust and pollen filter on.
● When parking, the system automatically
switches to outside air mode to encourage better air circulation throughout the
vehicle, helping to reduce odors that
occur when starting the vehicle.
■ Using the voice command system

Air conditioning system can be operated
using voice commands. For details, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ Air conditioning filter

→P.411
■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield from fog-

ging up
Do not use the windshield defogger
switch during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference
between the temperature of the outside
air and that of the windshield can cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog
up, blocking your vision.

■ When the outside rear view mirror

defoggers are operating
Do not touch the outside rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very
hot and burn you.

Interior features

tem in Eco drive mode
In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel
efficiency:
● Engine speed and compressor operation
controlled to restrict heating/cooling
capacity
● Fan speed restricted when automatic
mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance,
perform the following operations:
● Turn off eco air conditioning mode
(→P.326)
● Adjust the fan speed
● Turn off Eco drive mode (→P.298)

325

326

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
NOTICE

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system
on longer than necessary when the
hybrid system is off.

Air conditioning control screen
■ Main control screen

Using the touchpad of the Remote
Touch, select the button on the screen.
B to E and H can be adjusted by

performing the following operations.
Flick operation: Move the pointer to
the desired item and flick the touchpad
up or down.
The item can be adjusted by one level.

screen
: Display the heated steering
wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventilator control screen
: Display the rear seat heater/rear seat
ventilator control screen (if equipped)
: Display the Lexus Climate Concierge control screen
: Display the option control screen
B Adjust the left side seat tempera-

ture setting

C Adjust the fan speed setting
D Select the air flow mode

: Air flows to the upper body

Trace operation: After selecting the
desired item, trace the pad surface.

: Air flows to the upper body and feet

The item can be adjusted by the amount
that you trace.

: Air flows to the feet

Trace operation cannot be used while driving.

: Air flows to the feet and the wind-



Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate
control

shield defogger operates
E Adjust the right side seat tempera-

ture setting

F Function on/off indicators
When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the control screen.
G Sub function menu
When the sub function button on the
Remote Touch is pressed, the following
functions can be switched on and off.
A Sub menu
Selecting the sub menu item to switch the
main screen.

: Display the air conditioning control

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

: Set Lexus Climate Concierge
(→P.321)
“AUTO”: Set automatic mode on/off
(→P.330)
“OFF”: Turn the fan off

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
“A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification
function
“DUAL”: Adjust the temperature for driver
and passenger seats separately (“DUAL”
mode) (→P.331)
: Set eco air conditioning mode


Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control

327

: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the upper body and feet
: Air flows to the feet
: Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates
D Select the left side seat air flow

mode

E Adjust the fan speed setting
F Function on/off indicators
When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the control screen.

: Display the front air conditioning
control screen
: Display the heated steering
wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventilator control screen
: Display the rear air conditioning control screen
: Display the rear seat heater/rear seat
ventilator control screen
: Display the Lexus Climate Concierge control screen
: Display the option control screen
B Adjust the left side seat tempera-

ture setting

C Select the right side seat air flow

mode

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

: Set Lexus Climate Concierge
(→P.321)
“AUTO”: Set automatic mode on/off
(→P.330)
“OFF”: Turn the fan off
“A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification
function
“4-ZONE”: Adjust the temperature for the
driver, front passenger and left and right
rear passenger seats separately
(“4-ZONE” mode) (→P.331)
: Set eco air conditioning mode
H Adjust the right side seat tempera-

ture setting

■ Option control screen

Select
on the sub menu to display
the option control screen.
The functions can be switched on and off.

Interior features

A Sub menu
Selecting the sub menu item to switch the
main screen.

G Sub function menu
When the sub function button on the
Remote Touch is pressed, the following
functions can be switched on and off.

328

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the screen.




Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control

Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate
control

A Set Lexus Climate Concierge

(→P.321)

A Set Lexus Climate Concierge

(→P.321)

B Adjusting the temperature for

driver and passenger seats separately (“DUAL” mode) (→P.331)

C Set eco air conditioning mode
Air conditioning and heater output is limited to prioritize fuel economy.
D Cooling and dehumidification func-

tion

E Select the S-FLOW mode

(→P.330)

F Prevent ice from building up on the

windshield and wiper blades
(Windshield wiper de-icer) (if
equipped)

G Removing pollen from the air

(Micro dust and pollen filter)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

B Adjust the temperature for driver,

passenger and rear seats separately (“4-ZONE” mode) (→P.331)

C Set eco air conditioning mode
Air conditioning and heater output is limited to prioritize fuel economy.
D Cooling and dehumidification func-

tion

E Select the S-FLOW mode

(→P.330)

F Prevent ice from building up on the

windshield and wiper blades
(Windshield wiper de-icer) (if
equipped)

G Removing pollen from the air

(Micro dust and pollen filter)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Side display


Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate
control

329

seat ventilators control screen
(→P.337)
B Adjust the left-hand front seat side

temperature setting

C Adjust the fan speed setting
D Adjust the right side seat tempera-

ture setting

E Select the left side seat air flow

mode

F Set cooling and dehumidification
A Display the front seat heaters/front

seat ventilators control screen
(→P.337)

B Adjust the left-hand front seat side

temperature setting

C Adjust the fan speed setting
D Adjust the right side seat temperaE Set cooling and dehumidification

function on/off

F Adjusting the temperature for

driver and passenger seats separately (“DUAL” mode) (→P.331)

G Select the air flow mode


Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control

G Adjust the temperature for driver,

passenger and rear seats separately (“4-ZONE” mode) (→P.331)

H Select the right side seat air flow

mode

5
■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)

This feature is used to prevent ice from
building up on the windshield and wiper
blades.
The windshield de-icer will automatically
turn off after a while.
■ Eco air conditioning mode

When Eco drive mode is selected using the
driving mode select switch, eco air conditioning mode turns on.
When a drive mode other than Eco drive
mode is selected, eco air conditioning
mode may turn off.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter

A Display the front seat heaters/front

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed
from the air and the air flows to the upper
part of the body.
Usually the system will automatically turn
off after a while.
In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the
dehumidification function may operate or
the outside/recirculated air mode may not

Interior features

ture setting

function on/off

330

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

switch to

(recirculated air) mode.

Pollen is filtered even if the micro dust and
pollen filter is turned off.
WARNING
■ To prevent burns (vehicles with wind-

shield wiper de-icer)
Do not touch the glass at lower part of
the windshield or to the side of the front
pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer
is on.

Using automatic mode
1 Press the automatic mode switch or
select “AUTO” on the sub function
menu. (→P.326)
2 Press the outside/recirculated air
mode switch to switch to automatic
air intake mode.
The air conditioning system automatically
switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.

3 Adjust the temperature setting.
4 To stop the operation, press the off
switch or select “OFF” on the sub
function menu. (→P.326)

■ Windshield fog detection function

When automatic mode is set, the humidity
sensor detects fog on the windshield and
controls the air conditioning system to prevent fog.
■ Automatic mode for air intake control

In automatic mode, the system detects
exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and
recirculated air modes.
When the dehumidification function is off,
and the fan is operating, turning automatic
mode on will activate the dehumidification
function.
NOTICE
■ Humidity sensor

In order to detect fog on the windshield,
a sensor which monitors the temperature
of the windshield, the surround humidity,
etc. is installed.
Follow these points to avoid damaging
the sensor:
● Do not disassemble the sensor
● Do not spray glass cleaner on the sen-

sor or subject it to strong impacts

● Do not stick anything on the sensor

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes
are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for
functions other than that operated is maintained.
■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the
ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after the automatic mode switch is
pressed or “AUTO” is selected.
Cool air may blow around the upper body
even when the heater is on due to sunlight.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

S-FLOW mode
In S-FLOW mode, priority for the airflow is given to the front seats, reducing
the airflow and air conditioning effect
on the rear seats.
The system determines whether or not

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

a front passenger is in the vehicle by
the opening and closing of the front
passenger’s door.
When a front passenger is determined
not to be in the vehicle, the temperature indicator and air flow indicator for
the front passenger side will turn off. In
this case, depending on the set temperature and ambient temperature,
priority for the airflow will be given to
the driver’s seat only.
The following S-FLOW modes are
available:


Automatic S-FLOW mode

331

system determines that a passenger is in the
vehicle. In this case, priority for the airflow
will be changed from the driver’s seat only
to the front seats only or all seats, respectively.
(Depending on the set temperature or
ambient temperature, priority for the airflow may not be given to the driver’s seat
only.)
If a passenger is judged to be in the vehicle,
the system will retain the judgement for a
certain amount of time after the power
switch is turned off.
■ Operation of automatic S-FLOW mode

When the system is operating in automatic
S-FLOW mode, if a rear door is opened
and then closed, S-FLOW mode will be disabled. To enable S-FLOW mode, select the
S-FLOW mode switch.

In this mode, the system determines
whether or not a rear passenger is in
the vehicle by the opening and closing
of a rear door. When a rear passenger
is determined to be in the vehicle,
S-FLOW mode will be automatically
disabled.

■ Changing from manual S-FLOW mode

The indicator will illuminate on the air conditioning control screen when S-FLOW
mode is enabled.

Adjusting the temperature for
the driver and passenger seats
separately



Manual S-FLOW mode

When the S-FLOW mode switch is
selected, S-FLOW mode will be manually enabled/ disabled.
The indicator will illuminate on the air conditioning control screen when S-FLOW
mode is enabled.
■ Operation of the air conditioning sys-

tem in S-FLOW mode
If the front passenger’s door or a rear door
is opened then closed, the air conditioning

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)



Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate
control

To turn on the “DUAL” mode, perform
any of the following procedures:
 Select “DUAL” on the sub function
menu. (→P.326)
 Select “DUAL” on the option control screen.
 Adjust the passenger’s side temperature setting.
The indicator on the main control screen
comes on when the “DUAL” mode is on.

Interior features

To enable/disable S-FLOW mode and
enter manual S-FLOW mode, select the
S-FLOW mode switch.

to automatic S-FLOW mode
Select the S-FLOW mode switch to disable S-FLOW mode.
2 Turn the power switch off.
3 After 60 minutes have elapsed, change
the power switch to ON mode.
1

332


5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control

To turn on the “4-ZONE” mode, perform any of the following procedures:

■ Adjusting the position of and open-

ing and closing the air outlets



Front center/front side

 Select “4-ZONE” on the sub function menu. (→P.326)
 Select “4-ZONE” on the option
control screen.
 Adjust a passenger seat temperature setting.
The indicator on the main control screen
comes on when the “4-ZONE” mode is on.

Air outlet layout and operations
■ Location of air outlets

1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
2 Turn the knob to open or close the
vent


Rear center/rear side

The air outlets and air volume changes
according to the selected air flow
mode.

1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
2 Turn the knob to open or close the
vent

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear air conditioning system*

WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield defogger

from operating improperly
Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,
preventing the windshield defoggers
from defogging.

333

If equipped

The air outlets and fan speed are
automatically adjusted according
to the temperature setting.
The rear air conditioning system
can be operated using the Center
Display and Rear Multi Operation
Panel.
 Center Display
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch to display the main menu
and move the cursor to
to display
the climate control shortcut buttons.
to display the rear air
Then, select
conditioning control screen.

Touch “Climate” on the home screen to
display the rear air conditioning control
screen.(→P.318)
Touching the shortcut button on the
home screen will also display operation
buttons for some of the rear air conditioning system functions.
*:

The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be used to operate the rear air
conditioning system if the function is
disabled. (→P.333)

Rear air conditioning control
screen
■ Center Display

Using the touchpad of the Remote
Touch, select the button on the screen.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

 Rear Multi Operation Panel*

334

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

A to E can be adjusted by perform-

ing the following operations.

Flick operation: Move the pointer to
the desired item and flick the touchpad
up or down.
The item can be adjusted by one level.

Trace operation: After selecting the
desired item, trace the pad surface.
The item can be adjusted by the amount
that you trace.
Trace operation cannot be used while driving.

When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the control screen.
G Sub function menu
When the sub function button on the
Remote Touch is pressed, the following
functions can be switched on and off.
“Rear off”: Turn the rear seats fan off
“Rear AUTO”: Set the rear seats automatic
mode on/off (→P.335)

: Disables operation of the rear air
conditioning system using the Rear Multi
Operation Panel
■ Rear Multi Operation Panel*

Various functions can be operated by
touching the displayed buttons on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel.
*

: The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot
be used to operate the rear air conditioning system if the function is disabled.
(→P.333)



Rear air conditioning control screen

A Adjust the left side rear seat tem-

perature setting

B Select the left side rear seat air flow

mode

: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the upper body and feet
: Air flows to the feet
C Adjust the rear seats fan speed set-

ting

D Select the right side rear seat air

flow mode

E Adjust the right side rear seat tem-

perature setting

F Function on/off indicators

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

A Adjust the left side rear seat tem-

perature setting

B Select the left side rear seat air flow

mode

: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the upper body and feet
: Air flows to the feet

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
C Set the rear seats automatic mode

on/off (→P.335)

D Select the right side rear seat air

flow mode

E Turn the rear seats fan off
F Adjust the right side rear seat tem-

perature setting

G Adjust the rear seats fan speed set-

ting



Shortcut screen

335

 Rear Multi Operation Panel
1 Select “AUTO” on the rear air conditioning control screen. (→P.334)

2 To stop the operation, select “OFF”
on the rear air conditioning control
screen. (→P.333)
If the fan speed setting or air flow
modes are operated, the automatic
mode indicator goes off. However,
automatic mode for functions other
than that operated is maintained.
■ Using automatic mode

perature setting

B Adjust the right side rear seat tem-

perature setting

Using automatic mode
Center Display
1 Select “Rear AUTO” on the sub
function menu. (→P.333)


2 To stop the operation, select “Rear
off” on the sub function menu.
(→P.333)
If the fan speed setting or air flow
modes are operated, the automatic
mode indicator goes off. However,
automatic mode for functions other
than that operated is maintained.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Adjusting the temperature setting of the rear seats
The temperature setting of the rear
seats can be adjusted using the following methods:
 When the “4-ZONE” indicator is
off: Adjust the driver’s seat temperature.
Adjust the temperature setting of each
rear seat using the Center Display or Rear
Multi Operation Panel.

 Adjust the temperature setting of
each rear seat using the Center Display (rear air conditioning control
screen) or Rear Multi Operation
Panel.

Interior features

A Adjust the left side rear seat tem-

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the
ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after “Rear AUTO” is selected or
“AUTO” is touched.
Cool air may blow around the upper body
even when the heater is on due to sunlight.

336

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

The temperature setting of each rear seat
can be changed independently.

Air outlet layout and operations
■ Rear center outlets and rear side

outlets

Heated steering wheel*/seat
heaters/seat ventilators
*:

If equipped

 Heated steering wheel
Warms up the grip of the steering wheel

 Front seat heaters/Rear seat
heaters
Warm up the seat upholstery

 Front seat ventilators/Rear seat
ventilators
Maintain good ventilation by pulling air
through the seat upholstery

1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
2 Turn the knob to open or close the
vent
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system
on longer than necessary when the
hybrid system is off.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The Center Display and Rear Multi
Operation Panel/rear control
panel can be used to operate the
heated steering wheel, seat heaters
and seat ventilators as follows:

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

 Center Display

NOTICE

Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch to display the main menu
and move the cursor to

to display

the shortcut buttons. Then, select
to display the heated steering
wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventilator control screen.
To display the rear seat heater/rear seat
ventilator control screen, select
equipped)

. (if

■ To prevent damage to the seat heat-

ers and seat ventilators
Do not put heavy objects that have an
uneven surface on the seat and do not
stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
into the seat.

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not use the functions when the hybrid
system is off.

Control screen

 Rear Multi Operation Panel

■ Center Display

Touch “Climate” on the home screen to
display the air conditioning control
screen.(→P.318)



 Rear control panel
The rear seat heaters can be operated.
WARNING
■ To prevent minor burn injuries

Care should be taken if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with
the steering wheel or seats when the
heater is on:
● Babies, small children, the elderly, the

sick and the physically challenged

● Persons with sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alcohol or

drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

Main screen

Using the touchpad of the Remote
Touch, select the button on the screen.
A to C can be adjusted by performing the following operations.

Flick operation: Move the pointer to
the desired item and flick the touchpad
up or down.
The item can be adjusted by one level.

Trace operation: After selecting the
desired item, trace the touchpad surface.
The item can be adjusted by the amount
that you trace.
Trace operation cannot be used while driving.

Interior features

Touching the shortcut button on the
home screen will display operation buttons for the rear seat heaters and rear
seat ventilators.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

337

338

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

A Adjust the seat ventilator fan speed

level

The seat ventilator can be adjusted in 3 levels. (Low, Mid or Hi)
B Adjust the seat heater temperature

level

The seat heater can be adjusted in 3 levels.
(Low, Mid or Hi)
C Adjust the heated steering wheel

temperature level*
The heated steering wheel can be adjusted
in 2 levels. (Low or Hi)
D Automatic mode on/off indicators
When the automatic mode is on, the indicator illuminates on the screen.
E Sub function menu
When the sub function button on the
Remote Touch is pressed, the following
functions can be set to automatic mode.

: Left-hand side seat heater/seat
ventilator

B Adjust the front seat heater tem-

perature level

Each time the switch is selected, the temperature level and level indicator (orange)
change as follows:
AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF
C Adjust the front seat ventilator fan

speed level

Each time the switch is selected, the fan
speed level and level indicator (blue)
change as follows:
AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF
D Adjust the heated steering wheel

temperature level

Each time the switch is selected, the temperature level and level indicator change
as follows:
AUTO→Hi→Lo→OFF
■ Rear Multi Operation Panel (if

equipped)



Rear air conditioning control screen

: Heated steering wheel*
: Right-hand side seat heater/seat
ventilator
*:


Available on the front seat control
screen only

Side screen
A Adjust the rear seat heater tem-

perature level

Each time the switch is selected, the temperature level and level indicator (orange)
change as follows:
AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF
B Adjust the rear seat ventilator fan
A Display the air conditioning control

screen →P.329

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

speed level

Each time the switch is selected, the fan

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
speed level and level indicator (blue)
change as follows:
AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF


Shortcut screen

339

B Enables/Disables the automatic

mode of the rear seat heaters

C Decreases the rear seat heater

temperature level

If this switch is selected when the rear seat
heater temperature level is set to Lo, the
rear seat heater will turn off.
■ The heated steering wheel, seat heaters

and seat ventilators wheel can be used
when
The power switch is in ON mode.

■ Air conditioning system-linked control

A Adjust the rear seat heater tem-

perature level

Each time the switch is selected, the temperature level and level indicator (orange)
change as follows:
AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF
B Adjust the rear seat ventilator fan

■ Rear control panel (if equipped)

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)
WARNING
■ To prevent overheating and minor

burn injuries
Observe the following precautions when
using the seat heaters.
● Do not cover the seat with a blanket or
cushion when using the seat heater.
● Do not use seat heater more than nec-

essary.

A Increases the rear seat heater tem-

perature level

The seat ventilator can be adjusted in 3 levels. (Low, Mid or Hi)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

speed level

Each time the switch is selected, the fan
speed level and level indicator (blue)
change as follows:
AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF

mode
When the seat ventilator fan speed level is
Hi, the seat ventilator fan speed becomes
higher according to the fan speed of the air
conditioning system.

340

5-4. Using the interior lights

5-4.Using the interior lights

Interior lights list
Location of the interior lights

A Rear personal lights (→P.341)
B Inside door handle lights
C Instrument panel ornament lights (if equipped)
D Front personal lights (→P.341)
E Front interior lights (→P.341)
F Clock light
G Footwell lights
H Power switch light
I Door trim ornament lights
J Door courtesy lights
K Seat belt buckle lights
L Outer foot lights
M Rear interior light (→P.341)
N Shift lever lights

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-4. Using the interior lights

341

Operating the interior lights
■ Turning the door position on

Press the door-linked interior light
switch
The lights are turned on and off according
to whether the doors are opened/closed.
When the door position is on, the indicator
A illuminates.

■ Using the Rear Multi Operation

Panel (if equipped)
1 Display the home screen and then
touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”.
(→P.318)
2 To turn on/off the rear interior
lights, touch the respective button.

■ Turning the lights on/off

Front

Interior features



Turns the lights on/off (touch the light)
When a door is opened while the door
position is on, the lights turn on.

Operating the personal lights
■ Turning the lights on/off


Front

Turns the lights on/off (touch the light)
When a door is opened while the door
position is on, the lights turn on.


Rear

On/off
The rear interior lights turn on/off together
the front interior lights.
When a door is opened while the door
position is on, the lights turn on.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

342

5-4. Using the interior lights
■ Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to the power switch mode, the presence
of the electronic key, whether the doors are
locked/unlocked, and whether the doors
are open/closed.
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from



Rear

On/dimmed/off
When a door is opened while the door
position is on, the lights turn on.

being discharged
If the interior lights remain on when the
power switch is turned off, the lights will go
off automatically after 20 minutes.

■ When front interior light or front per-

sonal lights do not respond as normal
● When water, dirt, etc., have adhered to
the lens surface
● When operated with a wet hand
● When wearing gloves, etc.
■ Customization

Some functions can be customized.
(→P.481)
NOTICE
■ Using the Rear Multi Operation

Panel (if equipped)
1 Display the home screen and then
touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”.
(→P.318)
2 To turn on/dimmed/off the rear personal lights, touch the respective
button.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than
necessary when the hybrid system is off.
■ Removing light lenses

Never remove the lens for the front interior light and front personal lights. Otherwise, the lights will be damaged. If a lens
needs to be removed, contact your Lexus
dealer.

5-5. Using the storage features

343

5-5.Using the storage features

List of storage features
Location of the storage features



Vehicles without power rear seat

B Auxiliary boxes (→P.347)
C Cup holders (→P.345)
D Console box (→P.346)
E Coin holder (→P.345)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

A Glove box (→P.344)

344


5-5. Using the storage features

Vehicles with power rear seat

A Glove box (→P.344)
B Auxiliary boxes (→P.347)
C Cup holders (→P.345)
D Console box (→P.346)
E Coin holder (→P.118)

WARNING

Glove box

■ Items that should not be left in the

storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray
cans in the storage spaces, as this may
cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

● Glasses may be deformed by heat or

cracked if they come into contact with
other stored items.

● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If

they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire
or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1 Open (push button)
2 Unlock with the mechanical key
3 Lock with the mechanical key

5-5. Using the storage features
WARNING

■ Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the tail
lights are on.
■ Trunk opener main switch

The trunk opener main switch is located in
the glove box. (→P.118)
■ Removing the partition

The partition inside the glove box can be
removed by pulling it.

345

■ Caution while driving

Keep the coin holder closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Cup holders


Front

Press in and release the button.

WARNING
Keep the glove box closed. In the event
of sudden braking or sudden swerving,
an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box
or the items stored inside.



Rear (vehicles without power rear
seat)

Pull the armrest down then push in the
cup holder trim to extend the cup holders.

Coin holder
Push the button.



Rear (vehicles with power rear seat)

Press in and release the button.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

■ Caution while driving

346

5-5. Using the storage features

Console box

■ When stowing the rear cup holders

(vehicles without power rear seat)
Stow the cup holder with the armrest down.
The cup holder cannot be stowed if the
armrest is not down.
WARNING

Press a button to open the console box.
The console box can be opened from
either side.
■ Tray in the console box

■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or
beverage cans in the cup holders.
Inappropriate items must not be stored in
the cup holders even if the lid is closed.
Other items may be thrown out of the
holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■ When not in use

Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the rear cup

holder (vehicles without power rear
seat)
Stow the cup holder before stowing the
armrest.

■ To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the lid of the power outlet in the
front cup holder when the power outlet is
not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that
enter the power outlet may cause a short
circuit.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The tray can be slid and removed.
■ Console box light

The console box light turns on when the tail
lights are on.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■ Tray

Do not insert items exceeding the height
of the tray. Doing so may prevent opening and closing of the lid.

5-5. Using the storage features

347

Auxiliary boxes


Overhead

Press in the button.
This box is useful for temporarily storing
sunglasses and similar small items.

WARNING
■ Caution while driving

Do not leave the auxiliary box open while
driving.
Items may fall out and cause death or
serious injury in case of an accident or
sudden stop.


Rear seat (vehicles without power
rear seat)

Pull the armrest down then push the
knob and lift the lid to open it.

Rear seat (vehicles with power rear
seat)

Pull the armrest down then press the
button to open the lid.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

head)
Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb.
(0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to
open and the items inside may fall out,
resulting in an accident.

Interior features



■ Items unsuitable for storing (over-

348

5-5. Using the storage features

Trunk features

Shopping bag hooks

Cargo net (if equipped)
The cargo net is provided for securing
loose items on the floor or items inside
the trunk.
Raise the cargo hooks on the floor.
Hook the net on the cargo hooks.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the grocery

bag hooks
Do not hang any object heavier than 11 lb.
(5 kg) on the grocery bag hooks.

Luggage mats


Side

Pull the strap upwards to lift the luggage mat and remove it.

WARNING
■ When the cargo net is not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo
hooks on the floor to their stowed positions.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features
 Front
1 Pull the strap upwards and lift up
the luggage mat.

2 Lift the luggage mat until it engages
with the hook.

349

Auxiliary boxes

Auxiliary boxes are under the luggage
mats.

First-aid kit storage belt

1 Loosen the belt
2 Tighten the belt

Warning reflector storage belt
■ Using a belt to hold an object

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the hook for

the front luggage mat
Do not hang a grocery bag or any other
object from the hook.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1 Loosen the belt

Interior features

To return the luggage mat to its original
position, push the hook and lower the
luggage mat.

350

5-5. Using the storage features

2 Pass the belt through the clip
3 Tighten the belt
Depending on the size and shape of an
object, such as the case of a warning
reflector, the object may not be able to be
secured with the belts or stowed in an auxiliary box.
■ Stowing the belt

1 Fold the belt
2 Secure the belt with the clip
To prevent damage to the warning reflector storage belt when it is not in use, stow
the belt.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

351

5-6.Using the other interior features

Other interior features
USB charging ports

■ The USB charging ports can be used

when
The power switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode.

The USB charging ports are used to
supply 2.1 A of electricity at 5 V to
external devices.
The USB charging ports are for
charging only. They are not designed
for data transfer or other purposes.
Depending on the external device, it
may not charge properly. Refer to the
manual included with the device
before using a USB charging port.

■ Situations in which the USB charging

■ Using the USB charging ports

■ About connected external devices

Open the console box lid and open the
lid.

Depending on the connected external
device, charging may occasionally be suspended and then start again. This is not a
malfunction.



Vehicles without power rear seat

ports may not operate correctly
● If a device which consumes more than 2.1
A at 5 V is connected
● If a device designed to communicate with
a personal computer, such as a USB
memory device, is connected
● If the connected external device is turned
off (depending on device)
● If the temperature inside the vehicle is
high, such as after the vehicle has been
parked in the sun

■ To prevent damage to the USB

charging ports
● Do not insert foreign objects into the
ports.
● Do not spill water or other liquids into

the ports.



Vehicles with power rear seat

● When the USB charging ports are not

in use, close the lids. If a foreign object
or liquid enters a port may cause a
short circuit.

● Do not apply excessive force to or

impact the USB charging ports.

● Do not disassemble or modify the USB

charging ports.

■ To prevent damage to external

devices
● Do not leave external devices in the
vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in
damage to an external device.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

NOTICE

352

5-6. Using the other interior features
NOTICE

● Do not push down on or apply unnec-

essary force to an external device or
the cable of an external device while it
is connected.

Assist grips
An assist grip installed on the ceiling
can be used to support your body
while sitting on the seat.

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not use the USB charging ports for a
long period of time with the hybrid system stopped.

Armrest


Vehicle without power rear seat

Pull the armrest down for use.
WARNING
■ Assist grip

Do not use the assist grip when getting in
or out of the vehicle or rising from your
seat.
Doing so could damage the assist grip, or
could cause you to injure yourself by falling over.



Vehicle with power rear seat

Pull the lock release lever and fold the
rear seatback down.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the assist grip

Do not hang any heavy object or put a
heavy load on the assist grip.

Coat hooks
To use the coat hook, push it on.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not place too much strain on the armrest.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

353

WARNING
■ Items that must not be hung on the

hook
Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard
or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy, these items
may become projectiles that cause death
or serious injury.

Clock
The GPS clock’s time is automatically
adjusted by utilizing GPS time information. For details, refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.



Console box

Open the console box and open the
lid.

Rear (if equipped)

Open the lid.

Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for the
following components:
12 V: Accessories that run on less than
10 A.
120 VAC: Accessories that use less
than 100 W.

■ 120 VAC (if equipped)

■ 12 V

Open the lid.



Front

Open the cup holder, and open the lid.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features



354

5-6. Using the other interior features
■ Appliances that may not operate

properly (120 VAC)
The following 120 VAC appliances may
not operate properly even if their power
consumption is under 100 W.
● Appliances with high initial peak wattage
● Measuring devices that process pre-

cise data

■ The power outlet can be used when
● 12 V

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode.

● Other appliances that require an

extremely stable power supply

Sun visors

● 120 VAC

The power switch is in ON mode.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the
power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
● 12 V

Do not use an accessory that uses more
than 12 V 10 A.
● 120 VAC

Do not use a 120 VAC appliance that
requires more than 100 W. If a 120 VAC
appliance that consumes more than 100
W is used, the protection circuit will cut
the power supply.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not use the power outlet longer than
necessary when the hybrid system is off.

1 To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.
2 To set the visor in the side position,
flip down, unhook, and swing it to
the side.
3 To use the side extender, place the
visor in the side position, then slide
it backward.

Vanity mirrors


Front

Slide the cover to open.
The vanity light turns on.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

355

the driver’s power window switch and
Rear Multi Operation Panel.
■ From driver’s seat

Operate the driver’s power window
switch.



Rear

Press the button to open.
The vanity light turns on.

A Rear quarter sunshade (if

equipped)

B Rear door sunshade

1 Extend
*

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

If the vanity lights remain on when the
power switch is turned off, the lights will go
off automatically after 20 minutes.
NOTICE
■ When not in use

Keep the rear vanity mirror closed.
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from

being discharged
Do not leave the vanity lights on for
extended periods while the hybrid system is off.

Rear door/rear quarter sunshades (if equipped)
The rear door/rear quarter sunshades
can be extended and retracted using

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

: If the driver’s power window switch is
operated when a rear door sunshade/rear quarter sunshade is
retracted or being retracted, the rear
window will open.

■ From rear seat

The rear seat power window switches
cannot be used to extend the rear door
sunshades/rear quarter sunshades.
1 Display the home screen and then
touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”.
(→P.318)

Interior features

2 Retract*

356

5-6. Using the other interior features

2 To fully extend/retract a rear
door/rear quarter sunshade, touch
the respective button.

WARNING
■ When the rear door/rear quarter sun-

shades are being extended or
retracted
Do not place fingers or other objects in
the shade mechanism or in the opening
as injury may result.

■ Jam protection function

Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

■ Operating conditions
● The power switch is in ON mode.
● The rear side windows are fully closed.
■ Operation of rear door sunshades/rear

quarter sunshades when extended
If a rear door power window switch is operated when the rear door sunshade/rear
quarter sunshade is extended, the rear door
sunshade/rear quarter sunshade will retract
while the rear window is opening.

■ Operating the rear door/rear quarter

sunshades after turning the hybrid system off
The rear door/rear quarter sunshades can
be operated for a while even after the
power switch is turned to ACCESSORY
mode or off.
However, they cannot be operated using
the driver’s power window switch after
either front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between a rear
door sunshade and the window frame, the
rear door sunshade will stop and then
extend/retract slightly.
■ When reconnecting the 12-volt battery

The rear door/rear quarter sunshades will
always be retracted the first time the button
is pressed.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

NOTICE
■ To ensure normal operation of the

sunshades
Observe the following precautions:
● Do not place excessive load on the
motor or other components.

● Do not place objects where they may

hinder opening and closing operations.

● Do not attach items to the rear

door/rear quarter sunshades.

● Keep the opening clean and clear of

obstructions.

● Do not operate the rear door/rear

quarter sunshades continuously for
long periods of time.

Rear sunshade (if equipped)
The rear sunshade can be raised and
lowered by operating any of the
switches shown below.
■ From front seat

Extend/retract

5-6. Using the other interior features

357

■ Operating the rear sunshade after turn-

ing the hybrid system off
The rear sunshade can be operated for a
while even after the power switch is
switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
off.

■ Reverse operation feature

■ From rear seat


Vehicles without power rear seat

Extend/retract

2 To fully extend/retract a rear door
sunshade, touch the respective button.

WARNING
■ When the rear sunshade is being

raised or lowered
Do not place fingers or other objects in
the shade mechanism or in the opening
as injury may result.
NOTICE

■ To ensure normal operation of the

sunshade
Observe the following precautions:
● Do not place excessive load on the
motor or other components.

● Do not place objects where they may

hinder opening and closing operations.

■ The rear sunshade can be used when

The power switch is in ON mode.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Do not attach items to the rear sun-

shade.

Interior features

Vehicles with power rear seat
1 Display the home screen and then
touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”.
(→P.318)


To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear
sunshade automatically lowers when the
shift position is shifted to R.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again
if any of the following occurs:
● The switch is pressed again.
● The shift position is shifted to P.
● The shift position is shifted out of P and R,
and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h).
If the hybrid system is turned off when the
rear sunshade has been lowered due to the
reverse operation feature, it will not be
raised even when the hybrid system is
turned on again and the vehicle reaches a
speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the switch.

358

5-6. Using the other interior features
NOTICE

● Keep the opening clean and clear of

obstructions.

● Do not operate the rear sunshade con-

tinuously for long periods of time.

Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be
programmed using the HomeLink® to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks,
home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.

System components
The HomeLink® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which
can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming methods on the following pages
to determine the method which is
appropriate for the device.

A HomeLink® indicator light
B Garage door operation indicators
C HomeLink® icon

Illuminates while HomeLink® is operating.
D Buttons
■ Codes stored in the HomeLink® mem-

ory
● The registered codes are not erased even
if the 12-volt battery cable is disconnected.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features
● If learning failed when registering a dif®

ferent code to a HomeLink button that
already has a code registered to it, the

359

already registered code will not be
erased.

■ Certification for the garage door opener
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Interior features

■ When support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com/lexus or call 1-800-355-3515.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING
■ When programming a garage door or

other remote control device
The garage door or other device may
operate, so ensure people and objects
are out of danger to prevent potential
harm.

360

5-6. Using the other interior features
WARNING

■ Conforming to federal safety stan-

dards

Do not use the HomeLink® compatible
transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by federal
safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door
or device without these features
increases the risk of death or serious
injury.
■ When operating or programming

HomeLink®
Never allow a child to operate or play
with the HomeLink® buttons.

Programming the HomeLink®

■ Programming HomeLink®

Steps 1 through 3 must be performed
within 60 seconds, otherwise the indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not be able to be
completed.
1 Press and release the HomeLink®
button you want to program and
check that the HomeLink® indicator light flashes (orange).
2 Point the remote control transmitter for the device at the rear view
mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)
from the HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in
view while programming.

■ Before programming HomeLink®

 During programming, it is possible
that garage doors, gates, or other
devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door
or other devices to prevent injury or
other potential harm.
 It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control
transmitter for more accurate programming.
 Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be
equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need
a stepladder or other sturdy, safe
device to reach the “Learn” or
“Smart” button on the garage door
opener motor.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3 Program a device.


Programming a device other than
an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)

Press and hold the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flashing
orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green
(fixed code), then release the button.

5-6. Using the other interior features

361

gramming a rolling code system”.
5 Repeat the steps above to program
another device for any of the
remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■ Programming a rolling code sys-

tem



Programming an entry gate (for
U.S.A. owners)/Programming a
device in the Canadian market

Press and release the remote control
transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink®
indicator light changes from slowly
flashing (orange) to rapidly flashing
(green) (rolling code) or continuously
lit (green) (fixed code).

2 or more people may be necessary to
complete rolling code programming.
1 Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener
motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
unit. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer. Refer to the owner’s
manual supplied with the garage door
opener motor for details.
5

 Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device has
completed. The garage door or
other device should operate when a
HomeLink® button is pressed and
released.
 Indicator light flashes rapidly: The
garage door opener motor or other
device is equipped with a rolling
code. To complete programming,
firmly press and hold the HomeLink® button for 2 seconds then
release it.
 If the garage door or other device
does not operate, proceed to “Pro-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

4 Test the HomeLink® operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button and observing the indicator
light:

2 Press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button.
Perform 3 within 30 seconds after performing 2.

362

5-6. Using the other interior features

3 Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button (inside the vehicle)
for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat
this sequence (press/hold/release)
up to 3 times to complete programming.
If the garage door opener motor
operates when the HomeLink®
button is pressed, the garage door
opener motor recognizes the
HomeLink® signal.

■ Enabling 2-way communication

with a garage door (only available
for compatible devices)

When enabled, 2-way communication
allows you to check the status of the
opening and closing of a garage door
through indicators in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only available
if the garage door opener motor used
is a compatible device. (To check
device compatibility, refer to
www.homelink.com.)
1 Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has
been completed, if the garage door
opener motor is trained to HomeLink®, both garage door operation
indicators will flash rapidly (green)
and the light on the garage door

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is
enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and
3 within the first 10 presses of the HomeLink® button after programming has been
completed.

2 Press a programmed HomeLink®
button to operate a garage door.
3 Within 1 minute of pressing the
HomeLink® button, after the
garage door operation has
stopped, press the “Learn” or
“Smart” button on the garage door
opener motor. Within 5 seconds of
the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door
opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will
flash rapidly (green) and the light
on the garage door opener motor
will blink twice, indicating that
2-way communication is enabled.
■ Reprogramming a single Home-

Link® button
When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have
devices registered to them can be
overwritten:
1 With one hand, press and hold the
desired HomeLink® button.
2 When the HomeLink® indicator
starts flashing (orange), continue to
hold the HomeLink® button and
perform “Programming HomeLink®” 1 (it takes 20 seconds for

5-6. Using the other interior features

the HomeLink® indicator to start
flashing).
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the transmitter.
● The battery side of the transmitter must

be pointed away from the HomeLink®.
®

Operating HomeLink

363

The indicators can operate within
approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the
garage door. However, if there are
obstructions between the garage door
and the vehicle, such as houses and
trees, feedback signals from the
garage door may not be received.
To recall the previous door operation
status, press and release either Home-

Press the appropriate HomeLink®
button. The HomeLink® indicator light
should turn on.

Link® buttons

The status of the opening and closing
of a garage door is shown by the indicators.

last recorded status will be displayed
for 3 seconds.

B Closing
This function is only available if the garage
door opener motor used is a compatible
device. (To check device compatibility,
refer to www.homelink.com.)

Color

Status

Orange (flashing)

Currently opening/closing

Green

Opening/closinghas
completed

Red (flashing)

Feedback signals
cannot be received

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

simultaneously. The

Erasing the entire HomeLink®
memory (all three codes)

Press and hold the 2 outside buttons
for 10 seconds until the HomeLink®
indicator light changes from continuously lit (orange) to rapidly flashing
(green).

Interior features

A Opening

and

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the
programs stored in the HomeLink® memory.

364

5-6. Using the other interior features

Lexus Enform Safety Connect*
*:

System components

If equipped

Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that
uses Global Positioning System
(GPS) data and embedded cellular
technology to provide safety and
security features to subscribers.
Safety Connect is supported by
Lexus’ designated response center,
which operates 24 hours per day, 7
days per week.
Safety Connect service is available
by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound
by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and
Conditions, as in effect and
amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at
Lexus.com. All use of the Safety
Connect service is subject to such
then-applicable Terms and Conditions.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

A “SOS” button
B LED light indicators
C Microphone

5-6. Using the other interior features

365

■ Certification for Lexus Enform

Interior features

Services
Subscribers have the following Safety
Connect services available:

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

 Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response
from emergency service providers.
(→P.367)

366
*

5-6. Using the other interior features

: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2

 Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft.
(→P.367)

 Emergency Assistance Button
(“SOS”)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (→P.367)

 Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (→P.367)

Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics
Subscription Service Agreement and
are enrolled, you can begin receiving
services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus
dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS
(1-800-255-3987) in the Unites
States (1-877-539-8777 in Puerto
Rico, 1-800-26-LEXUS in Canada) or
push the “SOS” button in your vehicle
for further subscription details.
■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Blue-

tooth® technology will not be possible

during Safety Connect.

● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall

2009 on select Lexus models (in the
contiguous United States only). Contact
with the Safety Connect response center
is dependent upon the telematics device
being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to
reach the response center or receive
emergency service support. Enrollment
and Telematics Subscription Service

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary
by subscription term selected and location.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle
Location will function in the United
States, including Hawaii and Alaska,
Puerto Rico and in Canada, and
Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States, Puerto Rico and
in Canada.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle Location and Enhanced Roadside Assistance
will not function in the United States Virgin Islands.
No Safety Connect services will function
outside of the United States in countries
other than Canada.
For vehicles first sold in the USVI, no
Safety Connect services will function in
and outside the United States Virgin
Islands.
● Safety Connect services are not subject
to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages

The Safety Connect response center will
offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice
prompts in English, Spanish, and French.
Please indicate your language of choice
when enrolling.
■ When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response
center if the network is busy.

Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the power switch is turned to
ON mode, the red indicator light
comes on for 2 seconds then turns off.
Afterward, the green indicator light
comes on, indicating that the service is
active.

5-6. Using the other interior features

The following indicator light patterns
indicate specific system usage conditions:
 Green indicator light on = Active
service
 Green indicator light flashing =
Safety Connect call in process
 Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Lexus dealer)
 No indicator light (off) = Safety
Connect service not active

Safety Connect services
■ Automatic Collision Notification

■ Stolen Vehicle Location

If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect
can work with local authorities to assist
them in locating and recovering the
vehicle. After filing a police report, call
the Safety Connect response center at
1-800-25-LEXUS
(1-800-255-3987) and follow the

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

prompts for Safety Connect to initiate
this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle,
Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle
location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further
information is available at Lexus.com.
■ Emergency Assistance Button

(“SOS”)

In the event of an emergency on the
road, push the “SOS” button to reach
the Safety Connect response center.
The answering agent will determine
your vehicle’s location, assess the
emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button,
tell the response-center agent that you are
not experiencing an emergency.
■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds
GPS data to the already included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help
with a wide range of needs, such as:
towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a
description of the Roadside Assistance
services and their limitations, please
see the Safety Connect Terms and
Conditions, which are available at
Lexus.com.

Interior features

In case of either airbag deployment or
severe rear-end collision, the system is
designed to automatically call the
response center. The responding agent
receives the vehicle’s location and
attempts to speak with the vehicle
occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to
communicate, the agent automatically
treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services
provider to describe the situation, and
requests that assistance be sent to the
location.

367

368

5-6. Using the other interior features

Safety information for Safety
Connect
Important! Read this information about
exposure to radio frequency signals
before using Safety Connect;
The Safety Connect system installed in
your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also
sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted
RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those
guidelines are consistent with the
safety standards previously set by the
following U.S. and international standards bodies.
 ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
 NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement)
Report 86 [1986]
 ICNIRP (International Commission
on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of
the relevant scientific literature. Over
120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries
reviewed the available body of
research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

369

Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care
.

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior................................370
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior ................................. 373
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
........................................................378
General maintenance ............. 379
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs .........382
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
........................................................383
Hood...............................................385
Positioning a floor jack............385
12-volt battery............................. 393
Tires ................................................395
Replacing the tire......................405
Tire inflation pressure..............408
Wheels............................................410
Air conditioning filter................. 411
Electronic key battery .............. 413
Checking and replacing fuses
......................................................... 414
Light bulbs..................................... 417

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Engine compartment...............387

370

6-1. Maintenance and care

6-1.Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle exterior

Perform cleaning in a manner
appropriate to each component
and its material.

Cleaning instructions
 Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body,
wheel wells and underside of the
vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
 Wash the vehicle body using a
sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
 For hard-to-remove marks, use car
wash soap and rinse thoroughly with
water.
 Wipe away any water.
 Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface,
apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
■ Self-restoring coat

The vehicle body has a self-restoring coating that is resistant to small surface
scratches caused in a car wash etc.
● The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years from
when the vehicle is delivered from the
plant.
● The restoration time differs depending on
the depth of the scratch and outside temperature.
The restoration time may become
shorter when the coating is warmed by
applying warm water.
● Deep scratches caused by keys, coins,
etc. cannot be restored.
● Do not use wax that contains abrasives.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ Automatic car washes
● Before washing the vehicle:

• Fold the mirrors
• Turn off the power trunk opener and
closer
Start washing from the front of the vehicle.
Extend the mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes
may scratch the vehicle surface and harm
your vehicle’s paint.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash

to come within close proximity of the windows and the air suspension unit (if
equipped).
● Before using the car wash, check that the
fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed
properly.
■ When using a car wash

If the door handle becomes wet while the
electronic key is within the effective range,
the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In
that case, follow the following correction
procedures to wash the vehicle:
● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or
more separate from the vehicle while the
vehicle is being washed. (Take care to
ensure that the key is not stolen.)
● Set the electronic key to battery-saving
mode to disable the smart access system
with push-button start. (→P.120)
■ Aluminum wheels
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a

neutral detergent.

● Wash detergent off with water immedi-

ately after use.

● To protect the paint from damage, make

sure to observe the following precautions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive
detergent
• Do not use hard brushes
• Do not use detergent on the wheels when
they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather

6-1. Maintenance and care
■ Brake caliper coating (F SPORT mod-

els)
● When using detergent, use neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners, as they will damage the
coating.
● Do not use detergent on the brake calipers when they are hot.
● Wash detergent off immediately after
use.
■ Bumpers and side moldings

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■ Front side windows water-repellent

■ Plated portions

If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as
follows:
● Use a soft cloth dampened with an
approximately 5% solution of neutral
detergent and water to clean the dirt off.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to
remove any remaining moisture.
● To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet
wipes or a similar product.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING
■ When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the
engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components, etc. to
catch fire.
■ When cleaning the windshield

Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands
being caught or other serious injuries
and cause damage to the wiper blades.

A Off
B AUTO
● When the upper part of the windshield

where the raindrop sensor is located is
touched by hand

● When a wet rag or similar is held close

to the raindrop sensor

● If something bumps against the wind-

shield

● If you directly touch the raindrop sen-

sor body or if something bumps into
the raindrop sensor

■ Precautions regarding the exhaust

pipes
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes
to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not
to touch the pipes until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipes
can cause burns.

Maintenance and care

coating (if equipped)
● The following precautions can extend the
effectiveness of the water-repellent coating.
• Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side
windows regularly.
• Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate
on the windows for a long period.
Clean the windows with a soft, damp
cloth as soon as possible.
• Do not use wax or glass cleaners that
contain abrasives when cleaning the windows.
• Do not use any metallic objects to
remove condensation build up.
● When the water-repellent performance
has become insufficient, the coating can
be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer.

371

372

6-1. Maintenance and care
WARNING

■ Precaution regarding the front

bumper (vehicles with Lexus Safety
System+A)
If the paint of the front bumper is chipped
or scratched, the Lexus Safety System+A
may not function correctly. If this occurs,
consult your Lexus dealer.

■ Precaution regarding the rear

bumper
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped
or scratched, the following systems may
not function correctly. If this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer.

● If the paint is chipped or scratched,

have it repaired immediately.

● To prevent the wheels from corroding,

remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the
wheels.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic

substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the
lights.

● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the

lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

● Lexus Safety System+A (if equipped)

■ When using an automatic car wash

● BSM

Set the wiper switch to the off position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades
may be damaged.

● RCTA
● PKSB

NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and

corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels, etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the
following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the
paint surface

■ When using a high pressure car wash
● When washing the vehicle, do not

spray the camera or its surrounding
area directly with a high pressure
washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not
operate normally.

● Do not bring the nozzle tip close to

boots (rubber or resin manufactured
cover), connectors or the following
parts. The parts may be damaged if
they come into contact with high-pressure water.
• Traction related parts

• If dead insects, insect droppings or
bird droppings are present on the
paint surface

• Steering parts

• After driving in an area contaminated
with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances

• Brake parts

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled
with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline
are spilled on the paint surface

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• Suspension parts
● Do not wash the underside of the vehi-

cle using a high pressure car washer.

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle interior
Perform cleaning in a manner
appropriate to each component
and its material.

Protecting the vehicle interior
 Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
 If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off
with a soft cloth dampened with
neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
Wring out any excess water from
the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and
water.

There are several commercial foaming-type
cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush
to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces
and let them dry. Excellent results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible.
■ Handling the seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water
using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying
or cuts.
■ When cleaning the carpeted portions of

the glove box, console box, etc.
If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a
possibility that the surface of the carpet
could be damaged.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehi-

cle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid
battery (traction battery) air vents, and
in the trunk. (→P.64)
Doing so may cause the hybrid battery,
electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

● Do not get any of the SRS components

or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(→P.29)
An electrical malfunction may cause
the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious
injury.

■ Cleaning the interior (especially

instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner.
The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver’s view
and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of

detergent, as they may discolor the
vehicle interior or cause streaks or
damage to painted surfaces:
• Areas other than the seats and steering wheel: Organic substances such as
benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic
solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats : Alkaline or acidic solutions,
such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
• Steering wheel: Organic substances,
such as thinner, and cleaner that contains alcohol

● Do not use polish wax or polish

cleaner. The instrument panel’s or
other interior part’s painted surface
may be damaged.

Maintenance and care

■ Shampooing the carpets

373

374

6-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE

■ Preventing damage to leather sur-

faces
Observe the following precautions to
avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather
surfaces immediately.

Cleaning the hybrid battery
(traction battery) air intake vents
To prevent the hybrid battery (traction
battery) air intake vents from becoming clogged, clean them periodically.
Clean the vents of the both sides.

● Do not expose the vehicle to direct

sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plas-

tic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather
surface if the vehicle interior heats up
significantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system
may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components such
as the audio system above or under the
floor of the vehicle. Water may also
cause the body to rust.

■ Cleaning the air intake vents

Remove any dust and clogs from the
air intake vents with a vacuum cleaner,
etc.
The filters are attached to the back side of
the air intake vent grilles.

■ When cleaning the inside of the wind-

shield
Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the
camera sensor lens. Also, do not touch
the lens. (→P.197, 204)

■ Cleaning the inside of the rear win-

dow

● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the

rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger
heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water to
gently wipe the window clean. Wipe
the window in strokes running parallel
to the heater wires or antenna.

● Be careful not to scratch or damage

the heater wires or antenna.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

If “Maintenance Required for Traction
Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s
Manual” is displayed on the multi-information display, the filters may be
clogged. Remove the air intake vent
grilles and clean the filters.

6-1. Maintenance and care
■ Cleaning the air intake vent filters

1 Remove the grille.

375

5 Start the hybrid system and check
that “Maintenance Required for
Traction Battery Cooling Parts See
Owner’s Manual” is no longer displayed on the multi-information display.
It may take approximately 20 minutes after
the hybrid system is started until the warning message disappears. If the warning
message does not disappear, have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

2 Remove the filter.

■ Air intake vents maintenance
● If the vehicle is driven with the air intake

vents clogged, the hybrid battery (traction battery) may not be cooled sufficiently, possibly causing in fuel
consumption.
● Depending on the conditions under
which the vehicle is used, the air intake
vents may need to be cleaned more regularly.

Make sure to also remove dust and clogs
from the inner side of the air intake vent
grille.
If the filter is damaged, have it replaced by
your Lexus dealer.

grilles and filters may result in damage to
them. If you have any concerns about
cleaning the filter, contact your Lexus
dealer.
● If the vehicle is driven with the air intake
vent filter clogged, the hybrid battery
(traction battery) may not be cooled sufficiently, possibly causing an increase in
the fuel consumption and damage to the
hybrid battery (traction battery).
● Depending on the conditions under
which the vehicle is used, the air intake
vent filters may need to be cleaned more
regularly.
■ If “Maintenance Required for Traction

4 Install the filter in its original position, and then install the grille.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s
Manual” is displayed on the multi-information display
● It is possible the air intake vents or filters
are clogged due to accumulated dust.
Clean the air intake vents and filters,
referring to the cleaning method.
● If the vehicle is driven continuously with

Maintenance and care

3 Remove any dust and clogs from
the filter using a vacuum cleaner,
etc.

■ Cleaning the air intake vent filters
● Improper handling of the air intake vent

376

6-1. Maintenance and care

this message displayed, the hybrid battery (traction battery) may not be cooled
sufficiently, which may lead to the driving
distance by the electric motor becoming
shorter and damage to the hybrid battery
(traction battery). Clean the air intake
vents periodically to prevent dust, etc.,
from collecting in the air intake vents and
filters.
● If the massage in the multi-information
display does not turn off, even if the air
intake vents are cleaned, have the vehicle
inspected at your Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ When cleaning the hybrid battery

(traction battery) air intake vents/filters
● Do not use water or other liquids to
clean the air intake vents/filters. If
water is applied to the hybrid battery
(traction battery) or other components, a malfunction or fire may occur.
● When the air intake vent grilles,
located near the rear seats are to be
removed, make sure to turn the power
switch off to stop the hybrid system.

Cleaning the areas with satin-finish metal accents
 Remove dirt using a water-dampened soft cloth or synthetic chamois.
 Wipe the surface with a dry, soft
cloth to remove any remaining
moisture.
■ Cleaning the areas with satin-finish

metal accents
The metal areas use a layer of real metal for
the surface. It is necessary to clean them
regularly. If dirty areas are left uncleaned for
long periods of time, they may be difficult to
clean.

Cleaning the leather areas
 Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
 Wipe off any excess dirt and dust
with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

 Wring out any excess water from
the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all
remaining traces of detergent.
 Wipe the surface with a dry, soft
cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in
a shaded and ventilated area.
■ Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of
the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain
the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

Cleaning the synthetic leather
areas
 Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
 Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted
to approximately 1%.
 Wring out any excess water from
the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and
water.

Cleaning fabric portions of the
instrument panel
 To remove dust from the fabric, use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

377

a vacuum cleaner or adhesive tape.
 Use a cloth dampened with water to
gently wipe the fabric clean.
Do not use detergents to clean the fabric.

Maintenance and care

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

378

6-2. Maintenance

6-2.Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance are essential. It is the
owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Lexus recommends
the maintenance below.

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehi-

cles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Avoid exposure and wash any affected
area immediately.

● 12-volt battery posts, terminals and

related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds which are known to
cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (→P.393)

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts
be used for repairs to ensure performance
of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used
in replacement or if a repair shop other than
a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm
the warranty coverage.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be per-

formed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information. They are well
informed about the operation of all systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves
that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any
problem should arise while your vehicle is
under warranty, your Lexus dealer will
promptly take care of it.
WARNING
■ If your vehicle is not properly main-

tained
Improper maintenance could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury.

■ Handling of the 12-volt battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and
other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be
done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.

Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be
performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and
schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.
■ Resetting the message indicating main-

tenance is required
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the message.
To reset the message, follow the procedure
described below:
1

Press

switch to select
2 Press

of the meter control
.
to select “Vehicle Set-

tings” and then press

6-2. Maintenance
3 Press

to select “Scheduled

Maintenance” and then press
4 Press
then press

379

General maintenance

to select “Yes” and
.

A message will be displayed on the
multi-information display when the reset
procedure has been completed.

Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance
procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself
maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer
to the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in
the “Warranty and Service Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to
the attention of your Lexus dealer
or qualified service shop for advice.
WARNING
■ If the hybrid system is operating

Turn the hybrid system off and ensure
that there is adequate ventilation before
performing maintenance checks.

Engine compartment
Items

Is the brake fluid at the
correct level?
(→P.391)

Is the engine/power
Engine/power
control unit coolant at
control unit coolthe correct level?
ant
(→P.390)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Engine oil

Is the engine oil at the
correct level?
(→P.388)

Exhaust system

There should not be
any fumes or strange
sounds.

Maintenance and care

Brake fluid

Check points

380

6-2. Maintenance
Items

Check points

Radiator/condenser

The radiator and condenser should be free
from foreign objects.
(→P.391)

Washer fluid

Is there sufficient
washer fluid?
(→P.392)

Items

Brakes

• The vehicle should
not pull to one side
when the brakes are
applied.
• The brakes should
work effectively.
• The brake pedal
should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal
should not get too
close to the floor
when the brakes are
applied.

Head restraints

• Do the head
restraints move
smoothly and lock
securely?

Indicators/buzzers

• Do the indicators
and buzzers function
properly?

Lights

• Do all the lights
come on?

Parking brake

• Does the parking
brake operate normally?
• When parked on a
slope and the parking brake is on, is the
vehicle securely
stopped?

Seat belts

• Do the seat belts
operate smoothly?
• The seat belts should
not be damaged.

Trunk
Items
12-volt battery

Check points
Check the connections. (→P.393)

Vehicle interior
Items
Accelerator
pedal

Check points
• The accelerator
pedal should move
smoothly (without
uneven pedal effort
or catching).

• When parked on a
Hybrid transmisslope and the shift
sion “Park” mech- position is in P, is the
anism
vehicle securely
stopped?

Brake pedal

• Does the brake
pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake
pedal have appropriate clearance
from the floor?
• Does the brake
pedal have the correct amount of free
play?

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Check points

6-2. Maintenance
Items

Check points

Seats

• Do the seat controls
operate properly?

Steering wheel

• Does the steering
wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering
wheel have the correct amount of free
play?
• There should not be
any strange sounds
coming from the
steering wheel.

Vehicle exterior
Items

Check points
• Do the doors/trunk
operate smoothly?

Engine hood

• Does the engine
hood lock system
work properly?

Fluid leaks

• There should not be
any signs of fluid
leakage after the
vehicle has been
parked.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Check points

Tires

• Is the tire inflation
pressure correct?
• The tires should not
be damaged or
excessively worn.
• Have the tires been
rotated according to
the maintenance
schedule?
• The wheel nuts
should not be loose.

Windshield wipers

• The wiper blades
should not show any
signs of cracking,
splitting, wear, contamination or deformation.
• The wiper blades
should clear the
windshield without
streaking or skipping.

Maintenance and care

Doors/trunk

Items

381

382

6-2. Maintenance

Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission
inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics)
checks. The OBD system monitors
the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on
The OBD system determines that a
problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may
not pass the I/M test and may need to
be repaired. Contact your Lexus
dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the
I/M test in the following situations:
 When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the
readiness codes may not be completely
set.

 When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on
indicating a temporary malfunction and
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When the malfunction indicator
lamp still remains on after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will
not be cleared unless the vehicle is
driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the
I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare
the vehicle for re-testing.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6-3.Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance by
yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these
sections.

Maintenance
Items

Parts and tools
• Grease
• Conventional
wrench (for terminal
clamp bolts)

Brake fluid level
(→P.391)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT
3 or SAE J1703
brake fluid
FMVSS No.116 DOT
4 or SAE J1704
brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for
adding brake fluid)

• “Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant” or a
similar high quality
ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and
non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology
Engine/power
For the U.S.A.:
control unit cool“Toyota Super Long
ant level
Life Coolant” is
(→P.390)
pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50%
deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant” is
pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45%
deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for
adding coolant)

Engine oil level
(→P.388)

• “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” or equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for
adding engine oil)

Fuses (→P.414)

• Fuse with same
amperage rating as
original

Radiator and condenser (→P.391)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Parts and tools

⎯

Maintenance and care

12-volt battery
condition
(→P.393)

Items

383

384

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items

Parts and tools

• Tire pressure gauge
Tire inflation pres• Compressed air
sure (→P.408)
source

Washer fluid
(→P.392)

• Water or washer
fluid containing antifreeze (for winter
use)
• Funnel (used only for
adding water or
washer fluid)

WARNING
The engine compartment contains many
mechanisms and fluids that may move
suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following
precautions.
■ When working on the engine com-

partment
● Make sure that the “ACCESSORY” or
“IGNITION ON” on the multi-information display and the “READY” indicator are both off.
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from the moving fan and engine drive
belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine,

power control unit, radiator, exhaust
manifold, etc. right after driving as they
may be hot. Oil and other fluids may
also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn

easily, such as paper and rags, in the
engine compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose

an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are
flammable.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ When working near the electric cool-

ing fan or radiator grille
Be sure the power switch is off.
With the power switch in ON mode, the
electric cooling fan may automatically
start to run if the air conditioning is on
and/or the coolant temperature is high.
(→P.391)

■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or
falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter
removed may cause excessive engine
wear due to dirt in the air.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

385

Hood

Positioning a floor jack

Opening the hood

When using a floor jack, follow the
instructions in the manual provided
with the jack and perform the operation safely.
When raising your vehicle with a
floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may
damage your vehicle or cause
injury.

1 Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.

Location of the jack point
2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and
lift the hood.

■ Front


2WD models

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and
locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may
open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in
death or serious injury.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

WARNING

386


6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

AWD models

■ Rear

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

387

Engine compartment
Components

A Engine oil level dipstick (→P.388)
C Engine coolant reservoir (→P.390)
D Engine oil filler cap (→P.389)
E Brake fluid reservoir (→P.391)
F Fuse boxes (→P.414)
G Washer fluid tank (→P.392)
H Engine coolant radiator (→P.391)
I Power control unit coolant radiator (→P.391)
J Electric cooling fan
K Condenser (→P.391)
■ 12-volt battery

→P.393

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

B Power control unit coolant reservoir (→P.390)

388

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment cover
■ Removing the engine compartment cover


Outside



Front

■ Installing the clips

NOTICE
■ Checking the engine compartment

cover after installation
Make sure that the cover is securely
installed in its original position.

Checking and adding the engine
oil
1 Push up center portion A
2 Insert
3 Press

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level
on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil

1 Park the vehicle on level ground.
After warming up the engine and
turning off the hybrid system, wait
more than 5 minutes for the oil to

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

drain back into the bottom of the
engine.
2 Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out.

389

prepare the items needed before adding oil.
 Engine oil selection
→P.462
 Oil quantity (Low → Full)
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
 Item
Clean funnel
■ Adding engine oil

3 Wipe the dipstick clean.

If the oil level is below or near the low
level mark, add engine oil of the same
type as that already in the engine.

4 Reinsert the dipstick fully.
5 Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out and check the oil
level.

2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the
dipstick.
A Low
B Normal
C Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may differ
depending on the type of vehicle or
engine.

6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it
fully.
■ Checking the oil type and prepar-

ing the item needed

Make sure to check the oil type and

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it
clockwise.
■ Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and
engine oil may need to be refilled in
between oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example
directly after purchasing the vehicle or
after replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate
viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or

Maintenance and care

1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning
it counterclockwise.

390

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

with a heavy load, or when driving while
accelerating or decelerating frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long
time, or when driving frequently through
heavy traffic
■ After changing the engine oil

The engine oil maintenance data should be
reset. Perform the following procedures:
1

Press

of the meter control

switch to select
2 Press

.
to select “Vehicle Set-

tings” and then press
3 Press

to select “Oil Mainte-

nance” and then press
4 Press
then press

NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the

vehicle components.

● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could

be damaged.

● Check the oil level on the dipstick

every time you refill the vehicle.

● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is prop-

erly tightened.

to select “Yes” and
.

A message will be displayed on the
multi-information display when the reset
procedure has been completed.
WARNING

Checking the coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is
between the “F” and “L” lines on the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
■ Engine coolant reservoir

■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially

harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be
taken to avoid prolonged and
repeated contact. To remove used
engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a

safe and acceptable manner. Do not
dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station
or auto parts store for information
concerning recycling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil within the

reach of children.

A Reservoir cap
B “F” line
C “L” line
If the level is on or below the “L” line, add
coolant up to the “F” line. (→P.453)
■ Power control unit coolant reser-

voir

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is
between the “F” and “L” lines on the
reservoir when the hybrid system is

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

cold.

391

WARNING
■ When the hybrid system is hot

Do not remove the engine/power control
unit coolant reservoir caps. (→P.456)
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap
is removed, causing serious injuries, such
as burns.
NOTICE
A Reservoir cap

■ When adding coolant

B “F” line

Coolant is neither plain water nor
straight antifreeze. The correct mixture
of water and antifreeze must be used to
provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read
the antifreeze or coolant label.

C “L” line
If the level is on or below the “L” line, add
coolant up to the “F” line. (→P.453)
■ Coolant selection

■ If the coolant level drops within a short

time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses,
engine/power control unit coolant reservoir
caps, drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus
dealer test the cap and check for leaks in
the cooling system.

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

Checking the radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and
clear away any foreign objects. If either
of the above parts is extremely dirty or
you are not sure of their condition,
have your vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ When the hybrid system is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser
as they may be hot and cause serious
injuries, such as burns.

Checking and adding the brake
fluid
■ Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or a similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite,
and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized
water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F
[-35°C])
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized
water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F
[-42°C])
For more details about coolant, contact
your Lexus dealer.

■ If you spill coolant

392

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines
on the tank.

NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear out
or when the fluid level in the accumulator
is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling,
there may be a serious problem.

Adding the washer fluid
■ Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and
prepare the necessary item.

If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the washer
tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

 Fluid type
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
brake fluid
FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704
brake fluid

 Item
Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from

the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause
a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
WARNING
■ When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your
hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes,
flush the affected area with clean water
immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a
doctor.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING
■ When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid
system is hot or operating as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if
spilled on the engine, etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than

washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the
vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as
damaging the pump leading to problems
of the washer fluid not spraying.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed
on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

393

12-volt battery
Location
The 12-volt battery is located in the
trunk under the luggage mat.

Removing the luggage mat: →P.348
■ Before recharging

■ After recharging/reconnecting the

12-volt battery
● Unlocking the doors using the smart
access system with push-button may not
be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use
the wireless remote control or the
mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the hybrid system with the power
switch in ACCESSORY mode. The
hybrid system may not start with the
power switch turned off. However, the
hybrid system will operate normally from
the second attempt.
● The power switch mode is recorded by
the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is recon-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging:
● If recharging with the 12-volt battery
installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt
battery.

394

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

nected, the vehicle will return the power
switch mode to the status it was in before
the 12-volt battery was disconnected.
Make sure to turn off the power before
disconnecting the 12-volt battery. Take
extra care when connecting the 12-volt
battery if the power switch mode prior to
discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple
attempts, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Emergency measures regarding

electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue
to apply water with a sponge or cloth
while traveling to the nearest medical
facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin

WARNING
■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
12-volt battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the

12-volt battery terminals with tools.

● Do not smoke or light a match near the

12-volt battery.

● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and

clothes.

● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If
you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your
skin. Immediately take off the clothing
and follow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk.
Get emergency medical attention
immediately.

■ When replacing the 12-volt battery

Use a 12-volt battery designed for this
vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas
(hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion.
For replacement of the 12-volt battery,
contact your Lexus dealer.

working near the 12-volt battery.

● Keep children away from the 12-volt

battery.

■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt

battery
Always charge the 12-volt battery in an
open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where
there is insufficient ventilation.

NOTICE
■ When recharging the 12-volt battery

Never recharge the 12-volt battery while
the hybrid system is operating. Also, be
sure all accessories are turned off.

Exterior
Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or
loose clamps.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

395

Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules
and treadwear.

Checking tires
A Terminals
B Hold-down clamp

Checking the 12-volt battery
condition

Check if the treadwear indicators are
showing on the tires. Also check the
tires for uneven wear, such as excessive
wear on one side of the tread.

Check the 12-volt battery condition by
indicator color.

B Red: Charging is necessary.

Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.

C Clear: Replacement is necessary.

Have the 12-volt battery checked
by your Lexus dealer.

A New tread
B Worn tread
C Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is

shown by a “TWI” or “
” mark, etc.,
molded into the sidewall of each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

A Blue: Good condition

396

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are showing on
a tire.
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits,
cracks deep enough to expose the fabric,
and bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be
properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus
dealer.
■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked
by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not
obvious.
■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the
replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of
either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the
load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the
tire. (→P.472)

roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be
sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide
better traction in snow and to be adequate
for driving in most winter conditions as well
as for use year-round. All season tires,
however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in
heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires
fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in
highway driving.
● Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy
roads, we recommend using snow tires. If
you need snow tires, select tires of the
same size, construction and load capacity
as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have
radial construction. Do not install studded
tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels.
(→P.309)
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down

below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is
lost.
WARNING

■ Tire types
● Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance
tires best suited to highway driving under
dry conditions. Since summer tires do not
have the same traction performance as
snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For
driving on snow-covered roads or icy

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to
prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to
parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may
lead to an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
● Do not mix tires of different makes,

models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably
different treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those

recommended by Lexus.

● Do not mix differently constructed

tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).

● Do not mix summer, all season and

snow tires.

● Do not use tires that have been used

on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know
how they were used previously.
NOTICE

■ Driving on rough roads

Tire rotation


Vehicles with front and rear tires of
the same size

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life,
Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure
warning system after tire rotation.


Vehicles with front and rear tires of
differing sizes

Tires cannot be rotated.

Run-flat tires
When run-flat tires are installed, the
vehicle can be driven for a maximum of
100 miles (160 km) at a speed below
50 mph (80 km/h) after any tire goes
flat. (However, the vehicle speed may
not increase to near 50 mph [80
km/h] depending on weather or driving conditions.)
A run-flat tire has a
the side wall.

mark on

Make sure to replace the flat tire before the
vehicle has been driven for near 100 miles
(160 km). Also, do not use a repaired tire.
■ Run-flat tires
● The run-flat tires are for only this vehicle.

Do not use the tires on other vehicles.
● Do not mix run-flat tires and normal tires.
● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used, it
may be impossible to sufficiently demonstrate the performance of run-flat tires.

Tire pressure warning system
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure warning system that uses tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Take particular care when driving on
roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire
inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving
on rough roads may cause damage to
the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

397

398

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

before serious problems arise.
 The tire pressure detected by the
tire pressure warning system can be
displayed on the multi-information
display. (→P.86)

 If the tire pressure drops below a
predetermined level, the driver is
warned by a screen display and a
warning light. (→P.431)

■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not
replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation
pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
■ Tire inflation pressure
● It may take a few minutes to display the

tire inflation pressure after the power
switch is turned to ON mode. It may also
take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has
been adjusted.
● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

be different from the values measured
using a tire pressure gauge.
■ Situations in which the tire pressure

warning system may not operate properly
● In the following cases, the tire pressure
warning system may not operate properly.
• If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
• If a tire has been replaced with a tire that
is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
• If a tire has been replaced with a tire that
is not of the specified size.
• If tire chains, etc. are installed.
• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is
equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the radio wave
signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is much higher
than the specified level.
• If wheels not equipped with tire pressure
warning valves and transmitter are used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning
computer.
● Performance may be affected in the following situations.
• When driving near a TV tower, electric
power plant, gas station, radio station,
large display, airport or other facility that
generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular
phone, cordless phone or other wireless
communication device
If tire position information is not correctly
displayed due to the radio wave conditions,
the display may be corrected by changing
the location of the vehicle as the radio wave
conditions may change.
● When the vehicle is stopped, the time
taken for the warning to start or turn off
may be longer.
● When the inflation pressure of a tire
drops rapidly, for example when a tire has
burst, the warning may not operate.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Warning performance of the tire pres-

sure warning system
The warning of the tire pressure warning
system will change in accordance with driving conditions. For this reason, the system

399

may give a warning even if the tire pressure
does not reach a low enough level, or if the
pressure is higher than the pressure that
was adjusted to when the system was initialized.

■ Tire pressure warning system certification
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

Maintenance and care

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

400

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

 For vehicles sold in Canada

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters
When replacing the tires or wheels, the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitters must be installed to the wheels
which will be installed to the vehicle.
When new tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters are installed,
new ID codes must be registered in the
tire pressure warning computer and
the tire pressure warning system must
be initialized. (→P.403)
■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID codes of the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitters are not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not
work properly. In this case, after driving for
about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning
light will blink for approximately 1 minute
and then illuminate to indicate a system
malfunction.

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels,

tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels,
tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your
Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be
damaged if not handled correctly.
● Make sure to install the tire valve caps.

If the tire valve caps are not installed,
water may enter the valves of the tire
pressure warning valve and transmitters and the valves may become stuck.

● When replacing tire valve caps, do not

use tire valve caps other than those
specified. The cap may become stuck.

Initializing the tire pressure
warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system

must be initialized in the following
circumstances:

 When the tire inflation pressure is
changed such as when changing
traveling speed or load weight.
 When the tire inflation pressure is
changed such as when the tire size
is changed.
 When rotating the tires.
 After performing the transmitter ID
code registration procedure.
(→P.403)
When the tire pressure warning system
is initialized, the current tire inflation
pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
warning system
1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and
turn the power switch off.
The initialization procedure cannot be
started while the vehicle is moving.

2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the specified cold tire inflation pressure level.
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the
specified cold tire inflation pressure level.
The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

3 Turn the power switch to ON
mode.
4 Press

of the meter con-

trol switch to select

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ How to initialize the tire pressure

Maintenance and care

NOTICE

401

402
5 Press

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

to select “Vehicle

Settings” and then press
6 Press

and then press
7 Press

to select “TPWS”
.
to select “Set

Pressure”. Then press and hold
until the tire pressure warning light
blinks 3 times.
Then a message will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
“--” will be displayed on the multiinformation display for the inflation pressure of
each tire while initialization is being performed.

performing the initialization procedure or
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
● If the power switch is turned off during
initialization, it is not necessary to restart
the initialization procedure from the
beginning as it will begin automatically
when the power switch is turned back to
ON mode.
● If initialization has accidentally been
started when it is not necessary, adjust
the tire inflation pressure to the specified
level when the tires are cold and then
perform the initialization procedure
again.
● While the position of each tire is being
determined and the inflation pressures
are not being displayed on the
multi-information display, if the inflation
pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure
warning light will come on.
■ If the tire pressure warning system is not

8 Drive straight (with occasional left
and right turns) at approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more for
approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
Initialization is complete when the position
of each tire is determined and the inflation
pressure of each tire is displayed on the
multi-information display.
Initialization may take longer than approximately 1 hour in certain situations, such as
when the vehicle is stopped for a long time
at traffic lights, etc. (→P.402)
■ Initialization procedure
● Make sure to perform the initialization

procedure after adjusting the tire inflation
pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

initialized properly
● In the following situations, initialization
may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. (Usually,
the vehicle will need to be driven for
approximately 10 to 30 minutes to complete initialization.) If initialization is not
complete after driving approximately 30
minutes, continue driving for a while.
• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved
road, it may take longer to complete initialization.
• If the vehicle is backed up while performing initialization, data collected during initialization will be cleared and it will take
longer than normal to complete.
• If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or
another situation where other vehicles
are driven close by, it may take time for
the system to recognize the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitters of your
vehicle over those of other vehicles.
If initialization is not complete after driving
for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in
a safe place for approximately 20 minutes
and then drive the vehicle again.
● In the following situations, initialization
will not be started or was not completed
properly and the system will not operate
properly. Perform the initialization proce-

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
dure again.
• If, when attempting to start initialization,
the tire pressure warning light does not
blink 3 times.
• If, when the vehicle has been driven for
about 20 minutes after performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for approximately 1 minute and
then illuminates.
● If initialization cannot be completed after
performing the above procedure, contact your Lexus dealer.
WARNING

403

4 Press
or
to select “Change
Wheel Set”. Then press and hold
until the tire pressure warning
light blinks slowly 3 times.
Then a message will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
When registration is being performed, the
tire pressure warning light will blink for
approximately 1 minute then illuminate and
“--” will be displayed for the inflation pressure of each tire on the multi-information
display.

■ When initializing the tire pressure

warning system
Do not initialize the tire pressure warning
system without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level.
Otherwise, the tire pressure warning
light may not come on even if the tire
inflation pressure is low, or it may come
on when the tire inflation pressure is
actually normal.

Registering ID codes

The ID codes can be registered on
of the multi-information display.
1 Press

of the meter con-

trol switch to select
2 Press

to select “Vehicle

Settings” and then press
3 Press

and then press

to select “TPWS”
.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Registration is complete when the tire
pressure warning light turns off and the
inflation pressure of each tire is displayed
on the multiinformation display.
Registration may take longer than approximately 1 hour in certain situations, such as
when the vehicle is stopped for a long time
at traffic lights, etc. (→P.404)
After registering the ID codes, make sure
to initialize the tire pressure warning system. (→P.401)
■ When registering ID codes
● Before performing ID code registration,

make sure that no wheels with tire pressure warning valve and transmitters
installed are near the vehicle.
● Make sure to initialize the tire pressure
warning system after registering the ID

Maintenance and care

Every tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter has a unique ID code.
When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary
to register the ID codes.

5 Drive straight (with occasional left
and right turns) at approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more for
approximately 10 to 30 minutes.

404

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

codes. If the system is initialized before
registering the ID codes, the initialized
values will be invalid.
● As the tires will be warm when registration is completed, make sure to allow the
tires to cool before performing initialization.
■ Canceling ID code registration
● To cancel ID code registration after it has

been started, turn the power switch off
before driving the vehicle.
If the vehicle is driven after ID code registration is started, to cancel registration,
perform the ID code registration start
procedure again and turn the power
switch off before driving.
● If ID code registration has been canceled,
the tire pressure warning light will blink
for approximately 1 minute when the
power switch is turned to ON mode and
then illuminate. The tire pressure warning
system will be operational when the tire
pressure warning light turns off.
● If the warning light does not turn off even
after several minutes have elapsed, ID
code registration may not have been cancelled correctly. To cancel registration,
perform the ID code registration start
procedure again and then turn the power
switch off before driving.
■ If ID codes are not registered properly
● In the following situations, ID code regis-

tration may take longer than usual to be
completed or may not be possible. (Usually, the vehicle will need to be driven for
approximately 10 to 30 minutes to complete ID code registration.)
If ID code registration is not complete
after driving for approximately 30 minutes, continue driving for a while.
• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved
road, it may take longer than normal to
complete registration.
• If the vehicle is backed up while performing registration, data collected during
registration will be cleared, and it will take
longer than normal to complete.
• If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or
another situation where other vehicles
are driven close by, it may take time for
the system to recognize the tire pressure

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

warning valve and transmitters of your
vehicle over those of other vehicles.
• If a wheel with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter installed is inside or
near the vehicle, registration of the ID
codes for the installed wheels may not be
possible.
If ID registration is not complete after driving for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20
minutes and then perform the ID code registration procedure again.
● In the following situations, ID code registration will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not
operate properly. Perform the ID code
registration procedure again.
• If, when attempting to start ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light
does not blink slowly 3 times.
• If, when the vehicle has been driven for
about 20 minutes after performing ID
code registration, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute
and then illuminates.
● If ID code registration cannot be completed after performing the above procedure, contact your Lexus dealer.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Replacing the tire
When raising your vehicle with a
jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage
your vehicle or cause injury.
If necessary tire replacement
seems difficult to perform, contact
your Lexus dealer.

Before jacking up the vehicle
 Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a
hard, flat surface.
 Set the parking brake.
 Shift the shift position to P.
 Disabling the height control. (if
equipped) (→P.301)
 Stop the hybrid system.
■ Jack and tools

WARNING
■ Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause
the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack,
leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
● Do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.
● Put the jack properly in its jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under
the vehicle while it is supported by the
jack.
● Do not start the hybrid system or drive
the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an
object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height
greater than that required to replace
the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get
under the vehicle.
● Make sure to disable all functions of
the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension
and then stopping the hybrid system.
(→P.301)
● When lowering the vehicle, make sure
that there is no-one near the vehicle. If
there are people nearby, warn them
vocally before lowering.
■ Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with

power trunk opener and closer
In cases such as when replacing tires,
make sure to turn off the trunk opener
main switch (→P.118). Failure to do so
may cause the trunk lid to operate unintentionally if the power trunk opener and
closer switch is accidentally touched,
resulting in hands and fingers being
caught and injured.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

As your vehicle is equipped with run-flat
tires, the following tools for replacing a tire
are not included with your vehicle. They can
be purchased at your Lexus dealer.
● Wheel nut wrench
● Jack
● Jack handle

405

406

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
point positions.

Removing a tire
1 Chock the tires.

4 Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Tire

Front

Rear

Wheel chock positions

Left-hand side

Behind the rear
right-hand side tire

Right-hand
side

Behind the rear
left-hand side tire

Left-hand side

In front of the front
right-hand side tire

Right-hand
side

In front of the front
left-hand side tire

2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).

3 Turn the tire jack portion A by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are located under
the rocker panel. They indicate the jack

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5 Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the ground, place
the tire so that the wheel design faces up to
avoid scratching the wheel surface.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
■ Replacing a tire

Do not touch the disc wheels or the area
around the brakes immediately after the
vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc
wheels and the area around the brakes
will be extremely hot. Touching these
areas with hands, feet or other body
parts while changing a tire, etc. may
result in burns.

407

A Disc wheel
B Washer

3 Lower the vehicle.

Installing the tire
1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact
surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while
the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to
come off.

4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two
or three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)

Turn the wheel nuts until the washers come
into contact with the disc wheel.

WARNING
■ When installing the tire

Failure to follow these precautions could
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel

bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel
nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In
addition, the oil or grease can cause
the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel
may fall off, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease from the
wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

2 Install the tire and loosely tighten
each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

408

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING

● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a

torque wrench to 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m,
14.3 kgf•m) as soon as possible after
changing wheels.

● Do not attach a heavily damaged

wheel ornament, as it may fly off the
wheel while the vehicle is moving.

● When installing a tire, only use wheel

nuts that have been specifically
designed for that wheel.

Tire inflation pressure
Checking the specified tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure and tire size are displayed on
the tire and loading information label.
(→P.466)

● If there are any cracks or deformations

in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt
holes of the wheel, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels,

tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps
→P.401

Inspection and adjustment procedure

A Tire valve
B Tire pressure gauge

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

1 Remove the tire valve cap.
2 Press the tip of the tire pressure
gauge onto the tire valve.
3 Read the pressure using the gauge
gradations.
4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at
the recommended level, adjust the
pressure.
If you add too much air, press the
center of the valve to deflate.
5 After completing the tire inflation
pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the
valve and check for leakage.
6 Put the tire valve cap back on.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

ing.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly
inflated based only on its appearance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure
to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity
weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should
be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
WARNING
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire

performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the
following conditions may occur which
could lead to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury:

You should check tire inflation pressure
every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.

● Excessive wear

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pres-

● Poor handling

■ Instructions for checking tire inflation

pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure,
observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at
least 3 hours or has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an
accurate cold tire inflation pressure read-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Uneven wear
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from

overheated tires

● Air leaking from between tire and

wheel

● Wheel deformation and/or tire dam-

age

● Greater possibility of tire damage

while driving (due to road hazards,
expansion joints, sharp edges on the
road, etc.)
NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire

inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an
air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

Maintenance and care

sure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure
may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it
checked by your Lexus dealer.

409

410

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily
corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate
from the wheel or cause a loss of
handling control.

Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should
be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset*.

WARNING
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking

wheel which is designed for a tubeless
tire.
Doing so may result in an accident,
causing death or serious injury.

■ Use of defective wheels prohibited

Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to leak air
during driving, possibly causing an accident.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning

Lexus does not recommend using the
following:

valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement
may affect the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, make sure to
have tires serviced by your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop.
In addition, make sure to purchase
your tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters at your Lexus dealer.

 Wheels of different sizes or types

● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels

Replacement wheels are available at
your Lexus dealer.
*

: Conventionally referred to as offset.

 Used wheels
 Bent wheels that have been straightened
■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped
with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning
system to provide advance warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters
must be installed. (→P.401)
WARNING
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different

size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a
loss of handling control.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with
non-genuine wheels.

Aluminum wheel precautions
 Use only Lexus wheel nuts and
wheel nut wrenches designed for
use with your aluminum wheels.
 When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel
nuts are still tight after driving 1000
miles (1600 km).
 Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
 Use only Lexus genuine balance
weights or equivalent and a plastic

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

or rubber hammer when balancing
your wheels.

411

Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be
changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.

Removing the air conditioning
filter
1 Turn the power switch off.
2 Open the glove box. Remove the
partition. (→P.345)
3 Remove the panel.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

4 Unlock the filter cover ( A ), pull the
filter cover out of the claws ( B ),
and remove the filter cover.

412

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

5 Remove the filter case.

filter.
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning sys-

tem
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without
a filter may cause damage to the system.

■ To prevent damage to the filter cover

6 Remove the air conditioning filter
from the filter case and replace it
with a new one.
The “
UP” marks shown on the filter
and the filter case should be pointing up.

■ Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule.
In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic
flow, early replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dra-

matically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter
and replace if necessary.

■ Air conditioning filter with deodorizing

function
When fragrances are placed in your vehicle, the deodorizing effect may become
significantly weakened in a short period.
When an air conditioning odor comes out
continuously, replace the air conditioning

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When moving the filter cover in the
direction of arrow to release the fitting,
pay attention not to apply excessive force
to the claws. Otherwise, the claws may
be damaged.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one
if it is depleted.
As the key may be damaged if the
following procedure is not performed properly, it is recommended that key battery
replacement be performed by your
Lexus dealer.

413

Replacing the battery
1 Take out the mechanical key.

■ If the electronic key battery is depleted

2 Remove the cover.

The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip
of the flathead screwdriver with a tape.

■ When the card key battery needs to be

replaced (if equipped)
The battery for the card key is available only
at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can
replace the battery for you.

 Flathead screwdriver
 Small flathead screwdriver
 Lithium battery CR2032
■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus

dealer, local electrical appliance shops or
camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent
type recommended by the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to
local laws.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3 Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal
facing up.

Maintenance and care

Items to prepare

414

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING

■ Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by
a child, they can cause choking. Keep
away from children. Failure to do so
could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When replacing the battery

Use a flathead screwdriver of appropriate size. Applying excessive force may
deform or damage the cover.
■ For normal operation after replacing

the battery
Observe the following precautions to
prevent accidents:

● Always work with dry hands.

Checking and replacing
fuses
If any of the electrical components
do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and
replace the fuses as necessary.

Checking and replacing fuses
1 Turn the power switch off.
2 Open the fuse box cover.


Engine compartment: type A fuse
box

Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

Moisture may cause the battery to
rust.

● Do not touch or move any other com-

ponent inside the remote control.

● Do not bend either of the battery ter-

minals.



Engine compartment: type B fuse
box

Remove the engine compartment cover
(→P.388) and push the tabs in and lift the
lid off.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance


415

Driver’s side instrument panel

Push the tab in and remove the lid.
Make sure to push the tab in during
removal or installation.



Passenger’s side instrument panel

Push the tab in and remove the lid.
Make sure to push the tab in during
removal or installation.

3 Remove the fuse with the pullout
tool.
Only type A fuse can be removed
using the pullout tool.



Trunk

Remove the luggage mat. (→P.348)

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of
an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.
Type C and D:
Contact your Lexus dealer.

Maintenance and care

4 Check if the fuse is blown.

416


6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Type A



Type D

A Normal fuse

B Blown fuse



Type B

■ After a fuse is replaced
● When installing the lid, make sure that the

tab is installed securely.
● If the lights do not turn on even after the
fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need
replacement.
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit

A Normal fuse
B Blown fuse


Type C

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting
the wiring harness from damage.
WARNING
■ To prevent system breakdowns and

vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to
the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage

rating than that indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or

A Normal fuse
B Blown fuse

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even
as a temporary fix.

● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload
determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.

417

Light bulbs
If any lights burn out, have it
replaced by your Lexus dealer.
■ LED Lights

The lights consist of a number of LEDs. If
any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle
to your Lexus dealer to have the light
replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of

the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the
inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Lexus
dealer for more information in the following
situations:
● Large drops of water have built up on the
inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.

Maintenance and care

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

418

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

419

When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information
.

Emergency flashers..................420
If your vehicle has to be stopped in
an emergency..........................420
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
........................................................ 422
If you think something is wrong
........................................................ 426
If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds ....... 427
If a warning message is displayed
........................................................ 437
If you have a flat tire.................. 442
If the hybrid system will not start
........................................................ 443
If you lose your keys................. 444
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened........................................ 445

If the 12-volt battery is discharged
........................................................ 447
If your vehicle overheats ........453
If the vehicle becomes stuck
........................................................ 457

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

If the electronic key does not
operate properly .................... 445

420

7-1. Essential information

7-1.Essential information

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to
warn other drivers when the vehicle
has to be stopped on the road due
to a breakdown, etc.

Operating instructions
Press the switch to flash all of the turn
signal lights.
To turn them off, press the switch once
again.

If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it
becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way, stop the
vehicle using the following procedure:

Stopping the vehicle
1 Steadily step on the brake pedal
with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly
as this will increase the effort required to
slow the vehicle.

2 Shift the shift position to N.
If the shift position is shifted to N
3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.


4 Stop the hybrid system.
■ Emergency flashers
● If the emergency flashers are used for a

long time while the hybrid system is not
operating (while the “READY” indicator
is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may
discharge.
● If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
or in the event of a strong rear impact, the
emergency flashers will turn on automatically.
The emergency flashers will turn off automatically after operating for approximately 20 minutes. To manually turn the
emergency flashers off, press the switch
twice.
(The emergency flashers may not turn on
automatically depending on the force of
the impact and conditions of the collision.)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

If the shift position cannot be shifted
to N
3 Keep depressing the brake pedal
with both feet to reduce vehicle
speed as much as possible.


4 To stop the hybrid system, press
and hold the power switch for 2
consecutive seconds or more, or

7-1. Essential information

421

press it briefly 3 times or more in
succession.

5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by
the road.
WARNING
■ If the hybrid system has to be turned

off while driving
Power assist for the steering wheel will
be lost, making the steering wheel
heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as
possible before turning off the hybrid system.

When trouble arises

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

422

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

7-2.Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be
towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Lexus dealer or commercial
towing service, using a wheel-lift
type truck or flatbed truck.

 AWD models

Be sure to transport the vehicle with all
four wheels raised off the ground. If the
vehicle is towed with the tires contacting
the ground, the drivetrain or related
parts may be damaged, the vehicle may
fly off the truck, or electricity generated
by the operation of the motor may cause
a fire to occur depending on the nature
of the damage or malfunction.

Use a safety chain system for all
towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
 2WD models

Be sure to transport the vehicle with all
four wheels raised off the ground. If the
vehicle is towed with the tires contacting
the ground, the drivetrain and related
parts may be damaged, an accident may
occur due to a change in direction of the
vehicle or electricity generated by the
operation of the motor may cause a fire
to occur depending on the nature of the
damage or malfunction.

■ While towing
● When towing using cables or chains,

avoid sudden starts, etc. which place
excessive stress on the towing eyelets,
cables or chains. The towing eyelets,
cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people,
and cause serious damage.

● Make sure to disable all functions of

the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may
change and part of your body may be
caught under the vehicle, possibly
causing injury. (→P.301)

● Do not turn the power switch off.

This may lead to an accident as the
rear wheels will be locked by the parking lock.
Also, there is a possibility that the
steering wheel is locked and cannot be
operated.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehi-

cle
Make sure that towing eyelets are
installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets
may come loose during towing.
NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle

when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear
when the power switch is off. The
steering lock mechanism is not strong
enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure ade-

quate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle.
Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being
towed.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle

when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either
from the front or rear.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle

Situations when it is not possible
to be towed by another vehicle
In the following situations, it is not possible to be towed by another vehicle
using cables or chains, as the rear
wheels may be locked due to the parking lock. Contact your Lexus dealer or
commercial towing service.
 There is a malfunction in the shift

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

control system. (→P.171, 437)
 There is a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (→P.66)
 There is a malfunction in the smart
access system with push-button
start. (→P.445)
 The 12-volt battery is discharged.
(→P.447)

Situations when it is necessary to
contact dealers before towing
The following may indicate a problem
with your transmission. Contact your
Lexus dealer or commercial towing
service before towing.
 The hybrid system warning message
is shown on the multi-information
display and the vehicle does not
move.
 The vehicle makes an abnormal
sound.

Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to
prevent body damage.

When trouble arises

during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the
suspension components.

423

424

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Towing with a wheel-lift type
truck


From the front

If you use chains or cables to tie down
your vehicle, the angles shaded in
black must be 45°.
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.


From the rear

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or
the vehicle may be damaged.
Make sure to disable all functions of
the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may
change and the vehicle may be damaged. (→P.301)

Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.

Using a flatbed truck
If your vehicle is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the
locations shown in the illustration.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using cables or chains
secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This should only be attempted on
hard surfaced roads for short distances
at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer
and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

wheels, drive train, axles, steering and
brakes must be in good condition.

425

3 Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.

Emergency towing procedure
To have your vehicle towed by another
vehicle, the towing eyelet must be
installed to your vehicle. Install the towing eyelet using the following procedure.
1 Take out the phillips-head screwdriver and towing eyelet.

4 Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a phillips-head
screwdriver or hard metal bar.

A Phillips-head screwdriver
B Towing eyelet

2 Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.

6 Enter the vehicle being towed and
start the hybrid system.
If the hybrid system does not start, turn the
power switch to ON mode.

7 Shift the shift position to N and
release the parking brake.
■ While towing

If the hybrid system is off, the power assist
for the brakes and steering will not function,
making steering and braking more difficult.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Take care not to damage the vehicle body.

When trouble arises

To protect the bodywork, place a rag
between the screwdriver and the vehicle
body as shown in the illustration.

5 Securely attach cables or chains to
the towing eyelet.

426

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you think something is
wrong
If you notice any of the following
symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.

Visible symptoms
 Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
 Flat-looking tires or uneven tire
wear
 Engine coolant temperature gauge
needle continually points higher
than normal.

Audible symptoms
 Changes in exhaust sound
 Excessive tire squeal when cornering
 Strange noises related to the suspension system
 Pinging or other noises related to
the hybrid system

Operational symptoms
 Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
 Appreciable loss of power
 Vehicle pulls heavily to one side
when braking

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

 Vehicle pulls heavily to one side
when driving on a level road
 Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy
feeling, pedal almost touches the
floor

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

427

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or
flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur,
have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers
■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)

Indicates that:
 The brake fluid level is low; or
 The brake system is malfunctioning
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

(red)
(Canada)

Indicates that the brake pads are worn out (only the right-side pads can
be detected)
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:
 The regenerative braking system;
 The electronically controlled brake system; or
 The parking brake system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ High coolant temperature warning light* (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (→P.453)

This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

(yellow)

Details/Actions

428

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Charging system warning light* (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

■ Low engine oil pressure warning light* (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

■ Malfunction indicator lamp (warning buzzer)

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
 The hybrid system;
 The electronic engine control system;
 The electronic throttle control system; or
 The electronic hybrid transmission control system
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.

■ SRS warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
 The SRS airbag system;
 The front passenger occupant classification system; or
 The seat belt pretensioner system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

429

■ Pop Up Hood warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions
Indicates that the Pop Up Hood system has operated
→ The Pop Up Hood system cannot be reused once it has operated.
Have it replaced by your Lexus dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in the Pop Up Hood system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ ABS warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:
 The ABS; or
 The brake assist system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(Canada)

■ Brake Override System warning light/Drive-Start Control warning light*

(warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions

When a buzzer does not sound:
Brake Override System is operating
→ Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.
*:

This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

When a buzzer sounds:
 Brake Override System is malfunctioning;
 Drive-Start Control is operating;
 Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning; or
 Parking Support Brake function (for static objects) is operating
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.

430

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light

(red)

Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(yellow)

■ Low fuel level warning light

Warning light

Details/Actions
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 3.4 gal. (13 L, 2.8 Imp.
gal.) or less
→ Refuel the vehicle.

■ Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*

Warning light

Details/Actions
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts
→ Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat
belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning
buzzer) turn off.

: Driver’s seat belt warning buzzer:

The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not
fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds.
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt
is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds. Then,
if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds.
Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his
or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12
mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound
intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in
a different tone for 90 more seconds.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

431

■ Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights*1 (warning buzzer)*2

Warning light

Details/Actions
Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts
→ Fasten the seat belt.

: This light illuminates on the center panel.

: Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:

The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear passengers that his
or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12
mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound
intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in
a different tone for 30 more seconds.
■ Tire pressure warning light

Warning light

Details/Actions
When the light comes on after blinking for approximately 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
→ Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
 Natural causes
 Flat tire
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (→P.435)

Warning light

(orange)

Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) or LKA
(Lane-Keeping Assist)
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
(→P.238, 246)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

■ LTA indicator/LKA indicator (warning buzzer)

432

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist function
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:

(flashes)

Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a
sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
(→P.268)

■ RCTA OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:

(flashes)

Indicates that the rear bumper around the radar sensor is covered with
dirt, etc. (→P.261)
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
(→P.274)

■ RCD OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:

(flashes)
(if equipped)

Indicates that the function temporarily cannot be used due to the camera being dirty, etc.
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
(→P.278, 437)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

433

■ PKSB OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:

(flashes)

Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a
sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
(→P.284, 437)

■ PCS warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or that the
system is temporarily unavailable due to the vehicle being extremely
hot/cold, or dirt around a front sensor, etc.
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
(→P.219, 226, 440)
(flashes or illuminates)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.
→ P.219, 226
■ Slip indicator

Warning light

Details/Actions

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

Indicates a malfunction in:
 The VSC system;
 The TRAC system;
 The hill-start assist control system;
 The VGRS system (if equipped); or
 The DRS system (if equipped)
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

434

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Parking brake indicator

Warning light

(flashes)
(U.S.A.)

Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(flashes)
(Canada)

■ Brake hold operated indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light

(flashes)

Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ Master warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light

Details/Actions
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate
that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.
→ P.437

■ Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard
due to being in a noisy location or audio
sound.
■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat

belt reminder and warning buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection
sensor may cause the warning light to
flash and the warning buzzer to sound
even if a passenger is not sitting in the
seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the air-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

bag sensor assembly, Pop Up Hood computer assembly, front impact sensors, side
impact sensors (front door), side impact
sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear),
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat
belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), rear seat belt buckle switches (if
equipped), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light,
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt
pretensioners, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (→P.29)
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes

on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

435

If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving
trips.
If the light does not go off even after several
trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.

■ Conditions that the tire pressure warn-

■ Electric power steering system warning

warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.
The vehicle will become extremely
unstable during braking, and the ABS
system may fail, which could cause an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.

light (warning buzzer)
When the 12-volt battery charge becomes
insufficient or the voltage temporarily
drops, the electric power steering system
warning light may come on and the warning
buzzer may sound.

■ When the tire pressure warning light

■ The tire pressure warning light may

come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come
on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks and tire inflation pressure changes
caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING
■ If both the ABS and the brake system

■ When the electric power steering

system warning light comes on
When the light comes on yellow, the
assist to the power steering is restricted.
When the light comes on red, the assist
to the power steering is lost and handling
operations of the steering wheel become
extremely heavy.
When steering wheel operations are
heavier than usual, grip the steering
wheel firmly and operate it using more
force than usual.

■ If the tire pressure warning light

comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so could cause a loss of
vehicle control and result in death or
serious injury.

● Decelerate to the lowest appropriate

speed as soon as possible. Do not
drive over 50 mph (80 km/h).

● Check and adjust the tire inflation

pressure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes

on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have
a flat tire. Have the flat tire replaced by
the nearest Lexus dealer.

When trouble arises

comes on
Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punctured.
If a tire is punctured: →P.442
If none of the tires are punctured:
Turn the power switch off then turn it to ON
mode. Check if the tire pressure warning
light comes on or blinks.
 If the tire pressure warning light blinks for
approximately 1 minute then stays on
There may be a malfunction in the tire
pressure warning system. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
 If the tire pressure warning light comes
on
1 After the temperature of the tires has
lowered sufficiently, check the inflation
pressure of each tire and adjust them to
the specified level.
2 If the warning light does not turn off
even after several minutes have
elapsed, check that the inflation pressure of each tire is at the specified level
and perform initialization. (→P.401)

ing system may not function properly
→P.398

436

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and brak-

ing.
If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering
wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage

should occur
The tire pressure warning system may
not activate immediately.

■ Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load
information label). (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load
information label], you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure
warning system) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
(tire pressure warning light) illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure
warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale
(tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
(tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire
pressure warning system) to continue to
function properly.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the tire pressure warning

system operates properly
Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure
warning system may not operate properly.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

437

If a warning message is displayed
The multi-information display
shows warnings of system malfunctions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that indicate a
need for maintenance. When a
message is shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate to
the message.
Except F SPORT models:

A Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on
or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
B Multi-information display
Follow the instructions of the message
on the multi-information display.
If any of the warning messages are
shown again after the appropriate
actions have been performed, contact
your Lexus dealer.

B Multi-information display
Follow the instructions of the message
on the multi-information display.
If any of the warning messages are
shown again after the appropriate
actions have been performed, contact
your Lexus dealer.

F SPORT models (main meter in
center position):

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

F SPORT models (main meter
moved to the right):
7

When trouble arises

A Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on
or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the
multi-information display.

438

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Messages and warnings
The master warning light and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on
the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a
dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning buzzer*

Warning

Comes on

Sounds

Indicates an important situation, such as when a system related to driving is malfunctioning or that danger may result if the correction procedure is not
performed

Flashes

Sounds

Indicates a situation, such as when damage to the
vehicle or danger may result

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning buzzer*

439

Warning

Comes on

Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of electriDoes not sound cal components, their condition, or indicates the
need for maintenance

Flashes

Indicates a situation, such as when an operation has
Does not sound been performed incorrectly, or indicates how to
perform an operation correctly

 In some situations, the master warning light and warning buzzer may not operate as specified. In this case, follow the instructions displayed in the warning
message.
 If a warning light comes on or flashes at the same time that a warning message is
displayed, take corrective action according to the warning light. (→P.427)
*

: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information display.

■ Warning messages

■ If “Hybrid System Overheated Reduced

The warning messages explained below
may differ from the actual messages
according to operation conditions and vehicle specifications.

Output Power” is displayed
This message may be displayed when driving under severe operating conditions. (For
example, when driving up a long steep hill.)
Handling method: →P.453

■ Warning buzzer

■ If “Warming Up Maximum Vehicle

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard
due to being in a noisy location or audio
sound.
■ If “Engine Oil Level Low Add or

■ If “Hybrid System Stopped Steering

Power Low” is displayed
This message is displayed if the hybrid system is stopped while driving.
When steering wheel operations are
heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel
firmly and operate it using more force than
usual.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ If “Stop the Vehicle in a Safe Place Shift

to P position” is displayed
There may be a malfunction in the hybrid
system or the shift position may be shifted to
N for a long time. Immediately stop the
vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer.

■ If “Traction Battery Needs to be Pro-

tected Refrain From the Use of N Position” is displayed
The remaining charge for the hybrid battery
(traction battery) is low.
As the hybrid battery (traction battery) cannot be charged when the shift position is in
N, when stopping the vehicle for a long
period of time, shift the shift position to P.

When trouble arises

Replace” is displayed
The engine oil level is low. Check the level
of the engine oil, and add if necessary.
This message may appear if the vehicle is
stopped on a slope. Move the vehicle to a
level surface and check to see if the message disappears.

Speed: 65 MPH” is displayed
The transmission is being warmed up and
the vehicle is unable to be driven over 65
mph (110 km/h). Wait until the transmission
warms up.

440

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ If “Traction Battery Needs to be Pro-

tected Shift into P to Restart” is displayed
The remaining charge for the hybrid battery
(traction battery) is low, because the shift
position has been shifted to N for a long
period of time.
When moving the vehicle, shift the shift
position to P and restart the hybrid system.

■ If “Shift Is in N Release Accelerator

Before Shifting” is displayed
The accelerator pedal has been depressed
when the shift position is in N.
Release the accelerator pedal and shift the
shift position to D or R.

■ If “Depress Brake When Vehicle Is

Stopped Hybrid System May Overheat”
is displayed
The message may be displayed when the
accelerator pedal is depressed to hold the
vehicle while the vehicle is stopped on an
incline, etc. The hybrid system may overheat. Release the accelerator pedal and
depress the brake pedal.

■ If “Auto Power Off to Conserve Battery”

is displayed
Power was turned off due to the automatic
power off function. Next time when starting
the hybrid system, operate the hybrid system for approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the 12-volt battery.

■ If “Headlight System Malfunction Visit

Your Dealer” is displayed
The following systems may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer immediately.
● The LED headlight system
● AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)
● The automatic headlight leveling system
● AHB (Automatic High Beam)
■ If “Front Camera Unavailable” or “Front

Camera Unavailable Remove Debris
On Windshield” is displayed
The following systems may be suspended
until the problem shown in the message is
resolved. (→P.219, 226, 433)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● PCS (Pre-Collision system)
● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped)
● LKA (Lane Keeping Assist) (if equipped)
● Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range
● RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)
● AHB (Automatic High Beam)

■ If “Maintenance Required Soon” is dis-

played
Indicates that all maintenance according to
the driven distance on the maintenance
schedule* should be performed soon.
Comes on approximately 4500 miles
(7200 km) after the message has been
reset. If necessary, perform maintenance.
Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. (→P.378)
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval
applicable to your vehicle.
■ If “Maintenance Required Visit Your

Dealer” is displayed
Indicates that all maintenance is required to
correspond to the driven distance on the
maintenance schedule*.
Comes on approximately 5000 miles
(8000 km) after the message has been
reset. (The indicator will not work properly
unless the message has been reset.) Perform the necessary maintenance. Please
reset the message after the maintenance is
performed. (→P.378)
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval
applicable to your vehicle.
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required Soon” is

displayed
Indicates that the engine oil should be
scheduled to be changed.
Check the engine oil and change it if necessary. After changing the engine oil, make
sure to reset the message. (→P.390)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required” is dis-

played
Indicates that the engine oil should be
changed.
Check and change the engine oil, and oil filter by your Lexus dealer. After changing the
engine oil, make sure to reset the message.
(→P.390)

■ If “Shift System Malfunction Driving

Unavailable” is displayed
There is a malfunction in the shift control
system. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer immediately.

■ If a message that indicates the need for

the shift lever operation is displayed
To prevent the shift lever from being operated incorrectly or the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly, a message that requires shifting the shift position may be displayed on
the multi-information display. In that case,
follow the instruction of the message and
shift the shift position.

■ If a message that indicates the need for

visiting your Lexus dealer is displayed
The system or part shown on the
multi-information display is malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.

■ If a message that indicates the need for

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• “Hybrid Battery System Malfunction”
• “Accelerator System Malfunction”
● If any of the following messages are
shown on the multi-information display, it
may indicate a malfunction. Immediately
stop the vehicle and contact your Lexus
dealer.
• “Braking Power Low”
• “Charging System Malfunction”
• “Oil Pressure Low”
● If “Maintenance Required for Traction
Battery Cooling Parts” is shown, the filters may be clogged, the air intake vents
may be blocked, or there may be a gap in
the duct. Therefore, perform the following correction procedure.
• If the air intake vents and filters of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) are dirty,
perform the procedure on P.374 to clean
them.
• If the warning message is shown when
the air intake vents and filters of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) are not
dirty, have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ If “High Power Consumption Partial

Limit On AC/Heater Operation” is
displayed frequently
There is a possible malfunction relating
to the charging system or the 12-volt battery may be deteriorating. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ If “Have Traction Battery Inspected”

is displayed
This message indicates that the hybrid
battery (traction battery) may require
inspection or replacement. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
Do not continue driving the vehicle, as
the hybrid system may become not able
to be started again.

When trouble arises

referring to Owner’s Manual is displayed
● If any of the following messages are
shown on the multi-information display,
follow the instructions.
• “Engine Coolant Temp High” (→P.453)
• “Battery Low” (→P.447)
• “Transmission Fluid Temp High” (→P.175)
● If any of the following messages are
shown on the multi-information display, it
may indicate a malfunction. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
• “Access System with Elec. Key Malfunction”
• “Shift System Malfunction”
• “P Switch Malfunction”
• “Shift System Unavailable”
• “Hybrid System Malfunction”
• “Check Engine”

441

442

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is not equipped with a
spare tire, but instead you can continue driving the vehicle with
run-flat tires even if any tire goes
flat.
In this case, slow down and drive
with extra caution.

Run-flat tires
Take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus
dealer or authorized tire dealer as
soon as possible if any tire goes flat.
The vehicle can be driven for a maximum
of 100 miles (160 km) at a speed below 50
mph (80 km/h) after the tire pressure
warning light comes on. (→P.431)
A run-flat tire has a
side wall.

mark on the

■ In some conditions (such as at high tem-

peratures)
You cannot continue driving for up to 160
miles (100 km).

■ For the detailed information on run-flat

tires
See the tire warranty booklet.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

NOTICE
■ When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels,
tires or the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter, contact your Lexus
dealer as the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter may be damaged if not
handled correctly.
■ When driving over bumps

If a vehicle has a flat tire, the vehicle
height will be lower than usual. Ensure
that nothing strikes the bottom of the
vehicle.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a
liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as
soon as possible. Make sure to replace
the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P.401)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the hybrid system will not
start
Reasons for the hybrid system not
starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:

443

[-30°C]). (→P.168)
*

: It may not be possible to shift the shift
position from P.

The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does
not sound or sounds at a low volume.

The hybrid system will not start
even though the correct starting
procedure is being followed.
(→P.168)

One of the following may be the cause
of the problem:

 The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
(→P.393)

 The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (→P.445)

 The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P.447)

The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn
does not sound.

 There may be a malfunction in the
immobilizer system. (→P.66)

One of the following may be the cause
of the problem:

 There may be a malfunction in the
shift control system.* (→P.171, 441)

 One or both of the 12-volt battery
terminals may be disconnected.
(→P.393)

 There may be a malfunction in the
steering lock system.
 The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem
such as electronic key battery
depletion or a blown fuse. However,
depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available
to start the hybrid system. (→P.443)
 There is a possibility that the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is extremely low
(approximately below -22°F

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

 The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P.447)
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem
cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures
are unknown.

Starting the hybrid system in an
emergency
When the hybrid system does not start,
the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the hybrid system if the power switch is functioning

When trouble arises

 There may not be sufficient fuel in
the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.

444

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

normally.
Do not use this starting procedure
except in cases of emergency.
1 Press the parking brake switch to
check that the parking brake is set.
(→P.181)
Parking brake indicator will come on.

2 Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode.
3 Press and hold the power switch for
about 15 seconds while depressing
the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the hybrid system can be
started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

If you lose your keys
New genuine mechanical keys can
be made by your Lexus dealer using
another mechanical key and the
key number stamped on your key
number plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such
as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ When an electronic key is lost

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk
of vehicle theft increases significantly.
Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with
all remaining electronic keys and the
card key (if equipped) that were provided with your vehicle.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

445

If the fuel filler door cannot
be opened

If the electronic key does not
operate properly

If the fuel filler door opener switch
cannot be operated, contact your
Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
In case where refueling is urgently
necessary, the following procedure
can be used to open the fuel filler
door.

If communication between the
electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (→P.120) or the electronic
key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart
access system with push-button
start and wireless remote control
cannot be used. In such cases, the
doors and trunk can be opened and
the hybrid system can be started by
following the procedure below.

Opening the fuel filler door
Remove the cover inside the trunk and
pull the lever.
Using the lever to open the fuel filler
door may not allow for an adequate
reduction in fuel tank pressure before
refueling. To prevent fuel from spilling
out, turn the cap slowly when removing
it. During refueling, fuel may spill out
from the filler opening due to air being
discharged from inside the fuel tank.
Therefore, fill the fuel tank carefully and
slowly.

■ When the electronic key does not work

properly
● Make sure that the smart access system
with push-button start has not been disabled at your Lexus dealer. If it has been
disabled, re-enable it.
● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is
set, cancel the function. (→P.120)
NOTICE

■ Unlocking the door

Use the mechanical key (→P.106) in
order to perform the following operations:

When trouble arises

push-button start malfunction or
other key-related problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic
keys provided with your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.

Locking and unlocking the
doors, unlocking the trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ In case of a smart access system with

446

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

1 Pull the driver’s door handle and
insert the mechanical key.

■ Key linked functions

2 Unlock the door.

3 Remove the key, return the handle,
and then pull the handle again.
■ Locking the door

1 With the door open, push down the
inside lock button.

1 Closes the windows and the moon
roof (turn and hold)
2 Opens the windows and the moon
roof (turn and hold)
These settings must be customized at your
Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ When using the mechanical key and

operating the power windows or
moon roof
Operate the power window or moon
roof after checking to make sure that
there is no possibility of any passenger
having any of their body parts caught in
the window or moon roof.
Also, do not allow children to operate the
mechanical key. It is possible for children
and other passengers to get caught in
the power window or moon roof.

2 Close the door.
■ Trunk

Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
open. (→P.68)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Starting the hybrid system
1 Depress the brake pedal.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

2 Touch the Lexus emblem side of the
electronic key to the power switch.
When the electronic key is detected, a
buzzer sounds and the power switch will
turn to ON mode.
When the smart access system with
push-button start is deactivated in customization setting, the power switch will turn to
ACCESSORY mode.

447

If the 12-volt battery is discharged
The following procedures may be
used to start the hybrid system if the
12-volt battery is discharged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer
or a qualified repair shop.

Restarting the hybrid system
If you have a set of jumper (or booster)
cables and a second vehicle with a
12-volt battery, you can jump start your
vehicle by following the steps below.

4 Press the power switch.

Method connecting jumper (or
booster) cables to the 12-volt battery
1 Confirm that the electronic key is
being carried.

In the event that the hybrid system still
cannot be started, contact your Lexus
dealer.

When connecting the jumper (or booster)
cables, depending on the situation, the
alarm may activate and doors locked.
(→P.69)

3 Firmly depress the brake pedal and
check that
is shown on the
multi-information display.



When trouble arises

■ Stopping the hybrid system

Set the parking brake, shift the shift position
to P and press the power switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system.
■ Electronic key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary
measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately
when the battery is depleted. (→P.413)
■ Changing power switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the
power switch in step 3 above. The hybrid
system does not start and modes will be
changed each time the switch is pressed.
(→P.170)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2 Open the trunk lid and remove the
luggage mat. (→P.348)
In the event that the trunk opener cannot
be used, use the mechanical key to open
the trunk. (→P.445)

448

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

3 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to A on your vehicle and connect the
clamp on the other end of the positive cable to B on the second vehicle. Then,
connect a negative cable clamp to C on the second vehicle and connect the
clamp at the other end of the negative cable to D .

A Positive (+) battery terminal (your vehicle)
B Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)
C Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)
D Negative (-) battery terminal (your vehicle)

4 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for
approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the 12-volt battery of your
vehicle.
5 Open and close any of the doors of
your vehicle with the power switch
off.
6 Maintain the engine speed of the
second vehicle and start the hybrid
system of your vehicle by turning
the power switch to ON mode.

in the exact reverse order from
which they were connected.
Method connecting jumper (or
booster) cables to the exclusive
jump starting terminal
1 Confirm that the electronic key is
being carried.


When connecting the jumper (or booster)
cables, depending on the situation, the
alarm may activate and doors locked.
(→P.69)

7 Make sure the “READY” indicator
comes on. If the indicator does not
come on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
8 Once the hybrid system has
started, remove the jumper cables

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2 Open the hood. Remove the driver
side engine compartment cover

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

and fuse box cover. (→P.385,
388)

449

3 Open the exclusive jump starting
terminal cover.

Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

4 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to A on your vehicle and connect the
clamp on the other end of the positive cable to B on the second vehicle. Then,
connect a negative cable clamp to C on the second vehicle and connect the
clamp at the other end of the negative cable to D .

B Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)
C Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)
D Solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting

terminal and any moving parts as shown in the illustration

5 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for
approximately 5 minutes to

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

recharge the 12-volt battery of your
vehicle.

When trouble arises

A Exclusive jump starting terminal (your vehicle)

450

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

6 Open and close any of the doors of
your vehicle with the power switch
off.
7 Maintain the engine speed of the
second vehicle and start the hybrid
system of your vehicle by turning
the power switch to ON mode.
8 Make sure the “READY” indicator
comes on. If the indicator does not
come on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
9 Once the hybrid system has
started, remove the jumper cables
in the exact reverse order from
which they were connected.
10 Close the exclusive jump starting
terminal cover and install the fuse
box cover and engine compartment cover.
Once the hybrid system starts, have
the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
■ Starting the hybrid system when the

12-volt battery is discharged
The hybrid system cannot be started by
push-starting.

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio sys-

tem while the hybrid system is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such
as in heavy traffic.
■ When the 12-volt battery is removed or

discharged

● Information stored in the ECU is cleared.

When the 12-volt battery is depleted,
have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer.
● Some systems may require initialization.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

(→P.495)
■ When removing the 12-volt battery ter-

minals
When the 12-volt battery terminals are
removed, the information stored in the
ECU is cleared. Before removing the
12-volt battery terminals, contact your
Lexus dealer.

■ Charging the 12-volt battery

The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery
will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain
electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for
a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be
unable to start. (The 12-volt battery
recharges automatically while the hybrid
system is operating.)
■ When recharging or replacing the

12-volt battery
● In some cases, it may not be possible to
unlock the doors using the smart access
system with push-button start when the
12-volt battery is discharged. Use the
wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
● The hybrid system may not start on the
first attempt after the 12-volt battery has
recharged but will start normally after the
second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
● The power switch mode is memorized by
the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is
reconnected, the system will return to the
mode it was in before the 12-volt battery
was discharged. Before disconnecting
the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch
off.
If you are unsure what mode the power
switch was in before the 12-volt battery
discharged, be especially careful when
reconnecting the 12-volt battery.
■ When replacing the 12-volt battery
● Use a Central Degassing type 12-volt

battery (European Regulations).
● Use a 12-volt battery with the same case
size as the previous 12-volt battery and an
epuivalent 20 hour rate capacity (20HR)
or greater.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
• If the sizes differ, the 12-volt battery cannot be properly secured.
• If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if
the time period where the vehicle is not
used is a short time, the 12-volt battery
may discharge and the hybrid system
may not be able to start.
● Use a 12-volt battery with a handle. If a
12-volt battery without a handle is used,
removal is more difficult.
● After replacing, firmly attach the following items to the exhaust hole of the
12-volt battery.
• Use the exhaust hose that was attached
to the 12-volt battery before replacing
and confirm that it is firmly connected to
the hole section of the vehicle.
• Use the exhaust hole plug included with
the 12-volt battery replaced or the one
installed on the 12-volt battery prior to
the replacement. (Depending on the
12-volt battery to be replaced, the
exhaust hole may be plugged.)

451

WARNING
■ When removing the 12-volt battery

terminals
Always remove the negative (-) terminal
first. If the positive (+) terminal contacts
any metal in the surrounding area when
the positive (+) terminal is removed, a
spark may occur, leading to a fire in addition to electrical shocks and death or
serious injury.

■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or

explosions
Observe the following precautions to
prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the
12-volt battery:

● Make sure each jumper cable is con-

nected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with
any other than the intended terminal.

● Do not allow the other end of the

jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any
other parts or metal surfaces in the
area, such as brackets or unpainted
metal.
jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.

● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette

When trouble arises

● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the

lighters or allow open flame near the
12-volt battery.

■ 12-volt battery precautions

A Exhaust hole plug
B Exhaust hole
C Exhaust hose

For details, consult your Lexus dealer.

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous
and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery:
● When working with the 12-volt battery,

always wear safety glasses and take
care not to allow any battery fluids
(acid) to come into contact with skin,
clothing or the vehicle body.

● Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

452

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING

● In the event that battery fluid comes

into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area
with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the
affected area until medical attention
can be received.

● Always wash your hands after handling

the 12-volt battery support, terminals,
and other battery-related parts.

● Do not allow children near the 12-volt

battery.

■ After recharging the 12-volt battery

Have the 12-volt battery inspected at
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery
to emit a malodorous gas, which may be
detrimental to the health of passengers.
■ When replacing the 12-volt battery
● When the vent plug and indicator are

close to the hold down clamp, the battery fluid (sulfuric acid) may leak.

● For information regarding 12-volt bat-

tery replacement, contact your Lexus
dealer.

● After replacing, securely attach the

exhaust hose and exhaust hole plug to
the exhaust hole of the replaced
12-volt battery. If not properly installed,
gases (hydrogen) may leak into the
vehicle interior, and there is the possible danger of the gas igniting and
exploding.
NOTICE

■ When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables,
ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fan or engine drive
belt.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■ To prevent damaging the vehicle

The exclusive jump starting terminal is to
be used when charging the 12-volt battery from another vehicle in an emergency. It cannot be used to jump start
another vehicle.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats

453

and radiator core (radiator) for any
leaks.

The following may indicate that
your vehicle is overheating.
 The engine coolant temperature
gauge (→P.77, 81) is in the red
zone or a loss of hybrid system
power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not
increase.)
 “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop
in a Safe Place See Owner’s
Manual” or “Hybrid System
Overheated Reduced Output
Power” is shown on the
multi-information display.
 Steam comes out from under the
hood.

A Radiators
B Cooling fan

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.

4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it
is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the reservoir.

Correction procedures
If the engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone or
“Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in
a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual”
is shown on the multi-information
display
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and
turn off the air conditioning system,
and then stop the hybrid system.


3 After the hybrid system has cooled
down sufficiently, inspect the hoses

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

A Reservoir
B “F” line
C “L” line
D Coolant inlet cap

5 Add coolant if necessary.
(→P.455)
Water can be used in an emergency if

When trouble arises

2 If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the
steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.

454

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

coolant is unavailable.

6 Start the hybrid system and turn the
air conditioning system on to check
that the radiator cooling fan operates and to check for coolant leaks
from the radiator or hoses.
The fan operates when the air conditioning
system is turned on immediately after a
cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating
by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it
is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.
(The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

3 After the hybrid system has cooled
down, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

A Radiator
B Cooling fan

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.

4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it
is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the reservoir.

7 If the fan is not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately
and contact your Lexus dealer.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest Lexus dealer.
If “Hybrid System Overheated
Reduced Output Power” is shown
on the multi-information display
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place.


2 Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood.

A Reservoir
B “F” line
C “L” line

5 Remove the engine compartment
cover and add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

455

coolant is unavailable.

2 Push the tab in and open the engine
compartment cover.

3 Remove the engine cover.

4 Remove the caps A and B .

However, if the message appears again frequently, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ When adding engine coolant

Add coolant in accordance with the following procedure.
1 Remove the engine compartment
cover.
5 Add coolant through the inlet of the cap
A up to the “F” line C , and then
replace the cap A .

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

6 After stopping the hybrid system
and waiting for 5 minutes or more,
start the hybrid system again and
check for the multi-information display.
If the message does not disappear:
Stop the hybrid system and contact
your Lexus dealer.
If the message is not displayed:
The hybrid system temperature has
dropped and the vehicle may be
driven normally.

456

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

6 Add coolant through the inlet of the cap
B until it is full, and then replace the
cap B .
WARNING
■ When inspecting under the hood of

your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious
injury such as burns.

● If steam is seen coming from under the

hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.

● After the hybrid system has been

turned off, check that the indicator on
the power switch and the “READY”
indicator are off.
When the hybrid system is operating,
the gasoline engine may automatically
start, or the cooling fan may suddenly
operate even if the gasoline engine
stops. Do not touch or approach rotating parts such as the fan, which may
lead to fingers or clothing (especially a
tie, a scarf or a muffler) getting caught,
resulting in serious injury.

● Do not loosen the coolant inlet cap or

the coolant reservoir cap while the
hybrid system and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant
could spray out.
NOTICE

■ When adding engine/power control

unit coolant
Add coolant slowly after the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently. Adding
cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too
quickly can cause damage to the hybrid
system.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the cooling sys-

tem
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with
foreign matter (such as sand or dust
etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additive.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

Recovering procedure
1 Stop the hybrid system. Set the
parking brake and shift the shift
position to P.
2 Remove the mud, snow or sand
from around the rear wheels.
3 Place wood, stones or some other
material under the rear wheels to
help provide traction.
4 Restart the hybrid system.
5 Shift the shift position to D or R and
release the parking brake. Then,
while exercising caution, depress
the accelerator pedal.
■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press the

457

WARNING
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehi-

cle
If you choose to push the vehicle back
and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking
other vehicles, objects or people. The
vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge
back suddenly as it becomes free. Use
extreme caution.

■ When shifting the shift position

Be careful not to shift the shift position
with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission

and other components

● Avoid spinning the rear wheels and

depressing the accelerator pedal
more than necessary.

● If the vehicle remains stuck even after

these procedures are performed, the
vehicle may require towing to be freed.

switch to turn off TRAC.

When trouble arises

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

458

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

459

Vehicle specifications

8-1. Specifications
.

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level,
etc.) ..............................................460
Fuel information.........................470
Tire information.......................... 472
8-2. Customization
Customizable features.............481
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ........................ 495

Vehicle specifications

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

460

8-1. Specifications

8-1.Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight

Overall length

206.1 in. (5235 mm)

Overall width

74.8 in. (1900 mm)
2WD models

57.5 in. (1460 mm)*2
57.1 in. (1450 mm)*3

AWD models

57.9 in. (1470 mm)*2
57.5 in. (1460 mm)*3

Overall height*1

Wheelbase

123.0 in. (3125 mm)
Front

Tread*1

2WD models

64.2 in. (1630 mm)

AWD models

64.2 in. (1630 mm)*2
64.4 in. (1635 mm)*3
64.4 in. (1635 mm)*4
63.6 in. (1615 mm)*5

Rear
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
*1:
*2

870 lb. (395 kg)

Unladen vehicles
: Without electronically modulated air suspension

: With electronically modulated air suspension

*4: Except F SPORT models
*5

: F SPORT models

Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in
registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

of the instrument panel.

8-1. Specifications

This number is also stamped under the
right-hand front seat.

461

■ Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown.

This number is also on the Certification
Label.

Engine
3.5 L 6-cylinder (8GR-FXS)

Type

6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke

3.70 × 3.27 in. (94.0 × 83.0 mm)

Displacement

210.9 cu. in. (3456 cm3)

Valve clearance

Automatic adjustment

Drive belt tension

Automatic adjustment

Fuel
Fuel type

Unleaded gasoline only

Octane Rating

91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher

Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)

22.2 gal. (84.0 L, 18.5 Imp. gal.)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Model

462

8-1. Specifications

Electric motor (traction motor)
Type

Permanent magnet synchronous motor

Maximum output

131.9 kW

Maximum torque

221.3 ft•lbf (300 N•m, 30.6 kgf•m)

Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Type

Lithium-ion battery

Voltage

3.7 V/cell

Capacity

3.6 Ah

Quantity

84 cells

Overall voltage

310.8 V

Lubrication system
■ Oil capacity (Drain and refill [Ref-

erence*])
 2WD models

With filter

6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)
 AWD models
7.1 qt. (6.7 L, 5.9 Imp. qt.)
 2WD models

Without fil- 5.8 qt. (5.5 L, 4.8 Imp. qt.)
 AWD models
ter
6.8 qt. (6.4 L, 5.6 Imp. qt.)
*

: The engine oil capacity is a reference
quantity to be used when changing the
engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn
off the hybrid system, wait more than 5
minutes, and check the oil level on the
dipstick.

■ Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”
or equivalent to satisfy the following
grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade
engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good starting
in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE
5W-20 oil may be used. However, it
must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at
the next oil change.
Recommended viscosity (SAE):

8-1. Specifications

463

with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if
the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:

A Outside temperature

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here
as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the
characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower
value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold
weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when
the oil is at high temperature. An oil

The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC)
Certification Mark is added to some oil
containers to help you select the oil you
should use.

Cooling system

Capacity

Gasoline
engine

11.6 qt. (11.0 L, 9.7 Imp. qt.)

Power control unit

2.6 qt. (2.5 L, 2.2 Imp. qt.)

Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system (spark plug)
Make

DENSO FK20HBR8

Gap

0.031 in. (0.8 mm)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Coolant type

Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology

464

8-1. Specifications
NOTICE

■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

Electrical system (12-volt battery)
Specific gravity reading at 68°F
(20°C):

12.0 V or higher
(Turn the power switch off and turn on the high
beam headlights for 30 seconds.)

Charging rates
Quick charge

15 A max.

Slow charge

5 A max.

Hybrid transmission
Fluid capacity*

7.2 qt. (6.8 L, 6.0 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE

■ Hybrid transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in
shift quality, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

Transfer (AWD models)
Oil capacity

0.74 qt. (0.70 L, 0.62 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity*

Toyota Genuine Transfer gear oil LL 80 or equivalent

Your Lexus vehicle is filled with Toyota genuine gear oil at the factory. Use Lexus
approved Toyota genuine gear oil or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the
above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

465

Front differential (AWD models)
Oil capacity

0.69 qt. (0.65 L, 0.57 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity*

Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85
GL-5 or equivalent

: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of
matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for
further details.

Rear differential


2WD models

Oil capacity

0.90 qt. (0.85 L, 0.75 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity*

Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85
GL-5 or equivalent



AWD models

Oil capacity

1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity*

Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85
GL-5 or equivalent

Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of
matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for
further details.

Pedal clearance*1

4.8 in. (122 mm) Min.

Pedal free play

0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1 ⎯ 6 mm)

Brake pad wear limit

0.04 in. (1 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit

0.04 in. (1 mm)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Brakes

466

8-1. Specifications
When pushing the parking brake switch for 1 to 2
seconds: comes on

Parking brake indicator*2

When pulling the parking brake switch for 1 to 2
seconds: turns off
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703

Fluid type
*1:

FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N, 51 kgf) while
the hybrid system is operating.
When performing the brake pedal inspection, also be sure to check that the brake system warning light is not illuminated when the hybrid system is operating. (If the brake
system warning light is illuminated, refer to P.427.)
: Make sure to confirm that the brake warning light (yellow) does not illuminate. (If the
brake warning light illuminates, refer to P.427.)

Steering
Free play

Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Tires and wheels


19-inch tires (type A)

Tire size

245/50RF19 101W
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 118 mph (190 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and
rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Wheel size

19 × 8J

Wheel nut torque

103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

8-1. Specifications


467

19-inch tires (type B)

Tire size

245/50RF19 101V
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and
rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Wheel size

19 × 8J

Wheel nut torque

103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)



20-inch tires (type A)

Tire size

245/45RF20 99Y
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 137 mph (220 km/h) (in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and
rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
20 × 8 1/2J

Wheel nut torque

103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Wheel size

468


8-1. Specifications

20-inch tires (type B)

Tire size

Front tires: 245/45RF20 99Y
Rear tires: 275/40RF20 102Y
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 137 mph (220 km/h) (in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and
rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Wheel size

Front wheels: 20 × 8 1/2J
Rear wheels: 20 × 9 1/2J

Wheel nut torque

103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)



20-inch tires (type C)

Tire size

245/45RF20 99V
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and
rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Wheel size

20 × 8 1/2J

Wheel nut torque

103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

8-1. Specifications


469

20-inch tires (type D)

Tire size

Front tires: 245/45RF20 99V
Rear tires: 275/40RF20 102V
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Front wheels: 20 × 8 1/2J
Rear wheels: 20 × 9 1/2J

Wheel nut torque

103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)

Vehicle specifications

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

470

8-1. Specifications

Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline.
Select premium unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or
higher required for optimum
engine performance and fuel economy.
If the octane rating is less than 91,
damage to the engine may occur
and may void the vehicle warranty.
At minimum, the gasoline you use
should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A.
■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may
be caused by the brand of gasoline you are
using. If driveability problems persist, try
changing the brand of gasoline. If this does
not correct the problem, consult your Lexus
dealer.

EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.
● Lexus strongly recommends the use of
Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more
information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to
the official website www.toptiergas.com.
■ Recommendation of the use of low

emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates such as
ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated
gasolines, are available in some cities.
These fuels are typically acceptable for use,
providing they meet other fuel requirements.
Lexus recommends these fuels, since the
formulations allow for reduced vehicle
emissions.

■ Non-recommendation of the use of

blended gasoline
● Use only gasoline containing up to 15%
ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled
E30 (30% ethanol [ A ]), E50 (50%
ethanol [ B ]), E85 (85% ethanol [ C ])
(which are only some examples of fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol).

■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A.,

Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called the
World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC),
which is expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
improves customer satisfaction through
better performance.

■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline

containing detergent additives

● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline

that contains detergent additives to avoid
the build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains
minimum detergent additives to clean
and/or keep clean intake systems, per

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure

that it has an octane rating no lower than
91.
● Lexus does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing methanol.

■ Non-recommendation of the use of gas-

oline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gas-

8-1. Specifications

471

oline that contains MMT. If fuel containing
MMT is used, your emission control system
may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the
instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knock-

ing for a short time while accelerating or
driving uphill. This is normal and there is
no need for concern.
NOTICE

■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper

fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.

● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to
your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control
system to malfunction.

● Do not use gasohol other than the type

previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems.

● Using unleaded gasoline with an

■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability is encountered after
using a different type of fuel (poor hot
starting, vaporization, engine knocking,
etc.), discontinue the use of that type of
fuel.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

octane number or rating lower than
the level previously stated may cause
persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this may lead to engine damage and will void the vehicle warranty.

472

8-1. Specifications

Tire information
Typical tire symbols

A Tire size (→P.473)
B Run-flat tire (RFT) or standard tire (→P.442)

This vehicle can be equipped with either run-flat tires (RFT) or standard tires. A
mark is molded on the sidewall of the run-flat tire.
C DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (→P.473)
D Location of treadwear indicators (→P.395)
E Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies
in a tire.
F Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
G TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a
tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
H Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P.396)
I Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P.466)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
J Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
K Summer tires or all season tires (→P.396)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

473

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.
B Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)


C Tire manufacturer’s identification

mark

Type A

D Manufacturer’s code
E Manufacturing week
F Manufacturing year
*

: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire
conforms to applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.

Tire size
A DOT symbol*

■ Typical tire size information

B Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The illustration indicates typical tire
size.

C Tire manufacturer’s identification

mark

D Tire size code
E Manufacturer’s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters)

F Manufacturing week
G Manufacturing year
*

: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire
conforms to applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.

Type B

Temporary use)

B Section width (millimeters)
C Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)

D Tire construction code (R = Radial,

D = Diagonal)

E Run-flat tire code
F Wheel diameter (inches)
A DOT symbol*

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

G Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
H Speed symbol (alphabet with one

Vehicle specifications



A Tire use (P = Passenger car, T =

474

8-1. Specifications

letter)
■ Tire dimensions

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in
accordance with regulations issued by
the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles
with information on uniform tire quality
grading.

A Section width
B Tire height
C Wheel diameter

Tire section names

Your Lexus dealer will help answer any
questions you may have as you read this
information.
■ DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades. Quality
grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
■ Treadwear

A Bead
B Sidewall
C Shoulder
D Tread
E Belt
F Inner liner
G Reinforcing rubber
H Carcass
I Rim lines
J Bead wires
K Chafer

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test
course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use.
Performance may differ significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

8-1. Specifications
■ Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they
represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on braking (straight
ahead) traction tests and does not include
cornering (turning) traction.
■ Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat

475

when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire
assume that it is properly inflated and not
overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.

Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term

Meaning
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of hybrid transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent
that these items are available as factory-installed
equipment (whether installed or not)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Cold tire inflation pressure

476

8-1. Specifications
Tire related term

Curb weight

Meaning
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil
and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning
and additional weight optional engine
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight

Normal occupant weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows

Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below

Production options weight

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of
the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory
weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers,
roof rack, heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special
trim

Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim
by style or code

Rim width

Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load
capacity)

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

8-1. Specifications
Tire related term

477

Meaning

Vehicle normal load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two

Weather side

The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire

Bead

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead

Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend
to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the
tread

Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord

The strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner
of the tire extending to cord material

Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire

Groove

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that
encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the
tire

478

8-1. Specifications
Tire related term

Innerliner separation

Intended outboard sidewall

Meaning
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in
the carcass
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall
of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible inflation pres- The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
sure
may be inflated
Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the
sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due
to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb.
or less.

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

8-1. Specifications
Tire related term

479

Meaning

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals,
fabric and steel or other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the
traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains
the load

Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend
to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire

Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the
sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136
Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow
traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00,
Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving
Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine
Symbol (

) on at least one sidewall

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may
be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with
the road

Tread rib

A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire

Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Test rim

480

8-1. Specifications
Tire related term

Meaning

Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees
of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing

: Table 1 -Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second seat

11 through 15

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in
third seat, 1 in fourth seat

16 through 20

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2
in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

8-2. Customization

the list of settings that can be changed for
details.

8-2.Customization

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of
electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. The
settings of these features can be
changed by using the meter control
switches, the Remote Touch, Rear
Multi Operation Panel or at your
Lexus dealer.

■ Changing by using the meter con-

trol switches

For details on the Remote Touch, refer
to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ Changing by using the Rear Multi

Operation Panel (if equipped)
1 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel and
then touch “Settings”.
2 Touch “Seat”.

Customizing vehicle features

1 Press

481

3 Select the desired setting.
■ When customizing using the Remote

to select

2 Operate the meter control
switches to select the desired item
to be customized.
3 According to the display, select the
desired setting and then press

To go back to the previous screen or exit
the customize mode, press

■ Changing by using the Remote

2 Select “Setup” on the menu screen
and select “Vehicle”.
3 Select “Vehicle Customization” or
“Drive Mode Customization”.
Various setting can be changed. Refer to

WARNING
■ During customization

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during customization, ensure that the
vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as
a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect
and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During customization

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge,
ensure that the hybrid system is operating while customizing features.

Customizable features
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being cus-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Touch
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

Touch
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the
parking brake, and shift the shift position to
P. Also, to prevent 12-volt battery discharge,
leave the hybrid system operating while
customizing the features.

482

8-2. Customization

tomized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
A Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch
B Settings that can be changed using the meter control switches
C Settings that can be changed using the Rear Multi Operation Panel (if

equipped)

D Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer

Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
■ Seat belts (→P.24)

Default setting

Customized setting

Easy Access Buckle*1

Off

—

Retraction of front seat belts
when vehicle speed reaches
approximately 12 mph (20
km/h)*2

Off

—

Function

: If equipped

: Vehicles with pre-collision seat belts with comfort function

■ Vehicle proximity notification system (→P.60)

Function
The volume of vehicle proximity notification system
sound

Default setting

Customized setting
Level2

Level1

Level3

■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display (→P.72, 77, 81, 86)

Function*1
Language

Default setting
English

Customized setting
French
Spanish

—

km (km/L)
Units*2

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

miles (MPG)

km (L/100 km)
miles (MPG
Imperial)

483

8-2. Customization
Function*1

Default setting

Customized setting

Customizable
items: →P.88

—

Current fuel consumption
Drive information 1

Average fuel
economy (after
reset)
Distance (driving
range)

Drive information 2

Average vehicle
speed (after
reset)

Clock

12-hour display

24-hour display

—

Off

—

Color 1

Color 2

—

Pop-up display
Accent color

Tachometer setting

Rev indicator*3

Change according to driving
mode

4000 r/min.

Always tachometer
Always Hybrid
System Indicator
2000 - 6600
r/min.
Off

Off

—

EV indicator

Off

—

On (when the
vehicle is
stopped)

—

Suggestion function

Off
*1

: For details about each function: →P.90

*2: The default setting varies according to country.
*3

: F SPORT models

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Rev peak*3

484

8-2. Customization

■ Head-up Display* (→P.92)

Customized setting

Function

Default setting

Gauge information

Hybrid System
Indicator

Tachometer

Route guidance to destination/street name*

Driving support system display

—

Off

—

Off

—

Compass*

Off

—

Audio system operation status

Off

—

Default setting

Customized setting

Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
step

All doors
unlocked in one
step

—

Off
Shift position
Driver’s door
linked door
O
linked door
unlocking operaunlocking operation
tion

—

No content

: If equipped

■ Door lock (→P.108, 112, 445)

Function

Unlocking using a mechanical key

Shift position
Automatic door locking funclinked door locktion
ing operation

Automatic door unlocking
function

Locking/unlocking of the
trunk when all doors are
locked/unlocked

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Off
Speed linked
door locking
operation

Off

—

485

8-2. Customization
■ Smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control

(→P.108, 119)

Function
Operating signal (Buzzers)
Operation signal (Emergency flashers)

Default setting

Customized setting
Off

1 to 7

Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being unlocked

60 seconds

Open door warning buzzer

Off

—

Off
30 seconds
120 seconds
Off

■ Smart access system with push-button start (→P.108, 119)

Function
Smart access system with
push-button start
Smart door unlocking

Default setting

Customized setting

Off

—

Driver’s door

All the doors

—

As many as
desired

—

Default setting

Customized setting

Off

—

Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
step

All doors
unlocked in one
step

—

Time elapsed before unlocking all the door when gripping
and holding the driver’s door
handle

Off
2 seconds

Number of consecutive door
lock operations

2 times

1.5 seconds
2.5 seconds

Function
Wireless remote control

Unlocking operation

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

■ Wireless remote control (→P.106, 108, 112)

486

8-2. Customization
Function

Default setting

Customized setting

—

One short press
Trunk unlocking operation

Press and hold
(short)

Push twice
Press and hold
(long)
Off

Theft deterrent panic mode

Off

—

Reservation lock

Off

—

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Hands Free Power Trunk Lid
(kick sensor)*

Off

—

Default setting

Customized setting

Off

—

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Automatic rear seat operation (door-linked rear seat
return function and
shift-linked rear seat reclining
function)

Off

—

■ Trunk (→P.112)

: If equipped

■ Front seats (→P.128)

Function
Driver’s seat position linked
head restraint height operation

■ Power rear seats* (→P.135)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

487

8-2. Customization
Customized setting

Door linked rear seat with
More upright
ottoman seatback position for than upright posi- Upright position
tion
exiting*

—

Shift-linked rear seat reclining
function

Off

—

Function

Default setting

If equipped

■ Driving position memory (→P.139)

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Selecting doors linked to the
memory recall function

Driver’s door

All doors

—

Driver’s seat slide movement
when exiting the vehicle

Full

—

Driver’s seat height movement when exiting the vehicle

Off

—

Front passenger’s seat movement when exiting the vehicle

—

Off
Partial
Full
Partial
Off
Off

Steering wheel movement

Tilt only

Telescopic only
Tilt and telescopic

■ Outside rear view mirrors (→P.149)

Off
Linked to the
Automatic mirror folding and
locking/ unlock- Linked to operaextending operation
ing of the doors tion of the power
switch

—

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Default setting

Vehicle specifications

Customized setting

Function

488

8-2. Customization

■ Power windows and moon roof (→P.151, 153)

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Mechanical key linked operation

Off

—

Wireless remote control
linked operation

Off

On (open only)

—

Wireless remote control
linked operation signal
(buzzer)

Off

—

Default setting

Customized setting

Standard

-2 to 2

—

■ Automatic light control system (→P.185)

Function
Light sensor sensitivity
Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off
after doors are closed
Windshield wiper linked
headlight illumination

Off
30 seconds

60 seconds
90 seconds

Off

—

Default setting

Customized setting

Daytime running lights

Off*1

—

Welcome lighting

Off

—

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System)*2

Off

—

■ Lights (→P.185)

Function

: Except for Canada

: If equipped

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

489

8-2. Customization

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) and FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)* (→P.209,

220, 227)

Default setting

Customized setting

Off

—

Off

—

Default setting

Customized setting

Lane centering function

Off

—

Steering assist function

Off

—

Steering wheel
vibration

Buzzer

—

Alert sensitivity

High

Standard

—

Vehicle sway warning function

Off

—

Vehicle sway warning sensitivity

Standard

—

Function
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
and FCTA function
Adjust alert timing
Pedestrian alert* and FCTA
function
*

Middle
On

Far
Near

: If equipped

■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)* (→P.230)

Function

Alert type

Low

: If equipped

■ LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)* (→P.240)

Default setting

Customized setting

Lane centering function

Off

—

Steering assist function

Off

—

Steering wheel
vibration

Buzzer

—

Standard

High

—

Function

Alert type
Alert sensitivity

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

High

490

8-2. Customization
Default setting

Customized setting

Vehicle sway warning function

Off

—

Vehicle sway warning sensitivity

Standard

—

Function

High
Low

: If equipped

■ RSA (Road Sign Assist)* (→P.247)

Function
RSA (Road Sign Assist)

Default setting

Customized setting

Off

—

No notification

Excess speed notification
method

Display only

Excess speed notification
level

1 mph (2 km/h)

Other notifications method
(No-entry notification)
*

Display and
buzzer
3 mph (5 km/h)
5 mph (10 km/h)
No notification

Display only

Display and
buzzer

: If equipped

■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (→P.260)

Function
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
Outside rear view mirror indicator brightness

Default setting

Customized setting

Off

—

Bright

Dim

—

Early
Alert timing for presence of
approaching vehicle (sensitivity)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Late
Intermediate

Only when vehicle detected in
blind spot

491

8-2. Customization
■ PKSA (Parking Support Alert) (→P.265)

Function
Buzzer volume

Default setting
Level2

Customized setting
Level1
Level3

—

■ Intuitive parking assist (→P.266)

Function
Intuitive parking assist

Default setting

Customized setting

Off

—

■ RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function (→P.273)

Function
RCTA (Rear cross traffic
alert) function

Default setting

Customized setting

Off

—

■ RCD (Rear camera detection) function* (→P.277)

Function
RCD (Rear camera detection) function
*:

Default setting

Customized setting

Off

—

If equipped

■ PKSB (Parking Support Brake) (→P.280)

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Off

—

Customized setting

—

■ Driving mode select switch (→P.298)

Function

Default setting

Powertrain control in custom
mode

Normal

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Power
Eco

Vehicle specifications

PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) function

492

8-2. Customization
Function

Default setting

Chassis control in custom
mode

Normal

Air conditioning operation in
custom mode

Normal

Customized setting
Sport
Comfort
Eco

—

■ Electronically modulated air suspension* (→P.299)

Default setting

Customized setting

Vehicle height control

Off

—

Ingress/egress height control
function

Off

—

Vehicle height when parked

Normal

High

—

Default setting

Customized setting

Off

—

Standard

-3 to 3

—

Default setting

Customized setting

Driver’s seat temperature
preference in automatic
mode

Standard

-2 (cooler) to 2
(warmer)

—

Passenger’s seat temperature preference in automatic
mode

Standard

-2 (cooler) to 2
(warmer)

—

Left-hand rear seat temperature preference in automatic
mode*

Standard

-2 (cooler) to 2
(warmer)

—

Function

If equipped

■ Automatic air conditioning system (→P.323)

Function
A/C auto switch operation
Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity

■ Seat heater/seat ventilators (→P.336)

Function

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

493

8-2. Customization
Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Right-hand rear seat temperature preference in automatic mode*

Standard

-2 (cooler) to 2
(warmer)

—

Power switch linked automatic activation of the
left-hand rear seat
heater/ventilator*

Off

—

Power switch linked automatic activation of the
right-hand rear seat
heater/ventilator*

Off

—

If equipped

■ Heated steering wheel* (→P.336)

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Steering wheel heating preference in automatic mode

Standard

-2 (low) to 2
(high)

—

Default setting

Customized setting

If equipped

■ Illumination (→P.340)

Function

Off
15 seconds

7.5 seconds

—

30 seconds
Operation after the power
switch is turned off

Off

—

Operation when the doors
are unlocked

Off

—

Operation when you
approach the vehicle with the
electronic key on your person

Off

—

Footwell lights

Off

—

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

Time elapsed before the interior lights turn off

494

8-2. Customization
Function

Default setting

Customized setting

Instrument panel ornament
light and door trim ornament
lights

Off

—

Off
Time elapsed before the outer
foot lights turn off

15 seconds

7.5 seconds
30 seconds

Operation of the outer foot
lights when you approach the
vehicle with the electronic
key on your person

Off

—

Operation of the outer foot
lights when the doors are
unlocked

Off

—

Operation of the outer foot
lights when a door is opened

Off

—

Fading out of the outer foot
lights when they turn off

Long

Short

—

■ Vehicle customization
● When the smart access system with

push-button start is off, the entry unlock
function cannot be customized.
● When the doors remain closed after
unlocking the doors and the timer activated automatic door lock function activates, signals will be generated in
accordance with the operation buzzer
volume and operational signal (Emergency flashers) function settings.
● Some settings can be changed using a
switch or the audio system screen. If a
setting is changed using a switch, the
changed setting will not be reflected on
the audio system screen until the power
switch is turned off and then to ON
mode.
■ Clock settings screen

If the clock adjustment screen is displayed
continuously when attempting to change
the clock settings, the system may be mal-

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

functioning. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.

8-3. Initialization

495

8-3.Initialization

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such
cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:

List of items to initialize
Item

When to initialize

Reference
P.284

Message indicating
maintenance is
required

• After maintenance is performed

P.378

Oil maintenance

• After maintenance is performed

P.390

Tire pressure warning
system

• When the tire inflation pressure is
changed, such as when changing traveling speed or load weight.
• When the tire inflation pressure is
changed, such as when the tire size is
changed.
• When rotating the tires.
• After performing the transmitter ID
code registration procedure.

P.401

Lexus parking assist
monitor*

• 12-volt battery has been reinstalled.
• The steering wheel has been moved
while the 12-volt battery was being
reinstalled.
• 12-volt battery power is low.

Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.

• 12-volt battery has been reinstalled.
Panoramic view moni- • The steering wheel has been moved
while the 12-volt battery was being
tor*
reinstalled.
• 12-volt battery power is low.

Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.

If equipped

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

PKSB (Parking Support • After reconnecting or changing the
Brake)
12-volt battery

496

8-3. Initialization

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

497

For owners

9-1. For owners
.

Reporting safety defects for U.S.
owners ........................................498
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French).......498
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French).......500

For owners

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

498

9-1. For owners

9-1.For owners

Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners

Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners (in French)

If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying the Lexus Division of
Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section
in this manual.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Lexus
Division of Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC
20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

See the seat belt section for more
detailed seat belt instructions in
English.

Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
 Déroulez la sangle diagonale de
telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur
l'épaule, sans pour autant être en
contact avec le cou ou glisser de
l'épaule.

 Placez la sangle abdominale le plus
bas possible sur les hanches.
 Réglez la position du dossier de
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos droit et
calez-vous bien dans le siège.
 Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

9-1. For owners

499

Traitement des ceintures de
sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une
éponge humidifiés avec de l'eau savonneuse tiède. Vérifiez régulièrement
que les ceintures ne sont pas usées,
effilochées ou entaillées excessivement.
ATTENTION
Inspectez le système de ceintures de
sécurité régulièrement. Contrôlez
l'absence de coupures, d'effilochages et
de pièces desserrées. N'utilisez pas une
ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant
qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture
de sécurité endommagée ne permet pas
de protéger un occupant de blessures
graves ou mortelles.

For owners

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

500

9-1. For owners

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted
from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

Système de coussins gonflables SRS
■ Emplacement des coussins gonflables SRS



Coussins gonflables frontaux SRS

A Coussin gonflable conducteur/coussin gonflable du passager avant SRS

Participe à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du passager
avant contre les chocs contre les éléments de l'habitacle

B Coussins gonflables de genoux SRS

Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant



Coussins gonflables latéraux et rideaux SRS

C Coussins gonflables latéraux avant SRS

Participent à la protection du torse des occupants de siège avant

D Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière SRS

Participent à la protection du torse des occupants des sièges latéraux arrière

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

9-1. For owners

501

E Coussins gonflables rideaux SRS
• Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants des sièges latéraux
• Peut contribuer à empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule en cas de tonneau
F Coussins gonflables de coussin de siège SRS (sur modèles équipés)

Contribue à retenir les occupants des sièges arrière électriques

■ Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS

A Système de classification de l'occupant du siège passager avant (ECU et cap-

teurs)

B Capteurs d'impact latéral (porte avant)
C Coussins gonflables de genoux
D Coussin gonflable passager avant
E Coussins gonflables rideaux
F Témoins indicateurs “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
G Coussins gonflables latéraux avant
H Capteurs d'impact latéral (avant)
J Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière
K Prétensionneurs de ceinture de sécurité
L Coussin gonflable conducteur
M Coussins gonflables de coussin de siège (sur modèles équipés)
N Contacts de boucle de ceinture de sécurité de siège arrière (sur modèles

équipés)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For owners

I Témoin d'avertissement SRS

502

9-1. For owners

O Capteurs d'impact latéral (arrière)
P Capteur de position du siège conducteur
Q Contact de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteur
R Ensemble de capteurs de coussins gonflables
S Capteurs d'impact avant
T Ensemble informatique du capot actif

Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLIGENTS
conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à
moteur (FMVSS208). L'ensemble de capteurs de coussins gonflables (ECU)
régule le déploiement des coussins gonflables sur la base des informations qu'il
reçoit des capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du système. Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du choc et l'occupation du véhicule par les passagers. Le déploiement rapide des coussins gonflables
est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques,
qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.
ATTENTION
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins

gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes
concernant les coussins gonflables SRS.
Le non-respect de ces précautions peut
occasionner des blessures graves, voire
mortelles.

● Le conducteur et tous les passagers du

véhicule doivent porter correctement
leur ceinture de sécurité.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des
dispositifs supplémentaires à utiliser
avec les ceintures de sécurité.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Le coussin gonflable conducteur SRS

se déploie avec une force considérable, pouvant occasionner des
blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le
conducteur se trouve très près du
coussin gonflable.
L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité
routière aux États-Unis (NHTSA) conseille: La zone à risque du coussin gonflable conducteur se situant dans les
premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de
déploiement, vous placer à 10 in. (250
mm) de votre coussin gonflable conducteur vous garantit une marge de sécurité
suffisante. Cette distance est à mesurer
entre le centre du volant et le sternum. Si
vous êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250
mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, de
manière à pouvoir encore atteindre
confortablement les pédales.

9-1. For owners
ATTENTION
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du
siège.
Bien que les véhicules aient une conception différente, un grand nombre
de conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à
une distance de 10 in. (250 mm),
même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en
inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si
vous avez des difficultés à voir la route
après avoir incliné le dossier de votre
siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et
antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou
remontez le siège si votre véhicule est
équipé de cette fonction.

503

● Si vous attachez une rallonge de cein-

ture de sécurité aux boucles de ceinture de sécurité avant, sans l'attacher
au pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les
coussins gonflables frontaux SRS
déterminent que le conducteur et le
passager avant ont attaché leur ceinture de sécurité, bien que la ceinture
de sécurité ne soit pas attachée. Dans
ce cas, les coussins gonflables frontaux
SRS peuvent ne pas se déployer correctement en cas de collision, pouvant
occasionner des blessures graves,
voire mortelles. Veillez à porter la
ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge
de ceinture de sécurité.

• Si votre volant est réglable, inclinez-le
vers le bas. Cela a pour effet d'orienter
le coussin gonflable en direction de
votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête
et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon les recommandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus, tout en
conservant le contrôle des pédales, du
volant et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord.

● Le coussin gonflable passager avant

SRS se déploie également avec une
force considérable, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le passager avant se trouve
très près du coussin gonflable. Le
siège du passager avant doit être éloigné le plus possible du coussin gonflable en réglant le dossier de siège de
façon à ce que le passager avant soit
assis bien droit dans le siège.
9

For owners

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

504

9-1. For owners
ATTENTION

● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne

sont pas correctement assis et/ou
attachés peuvent être grièvement
blessés ou tués par le déploiement
d'un coussin gonflable. Un nourrisson
ou un enfant trop petit pour utiliser une
ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement attaché au moyen d'un
siège de sécurité enfant. Lexus recommande vivement d'installer tous les
nourrissons et enfants sur les sièges
arrière du véhicule et de prévoir pour
eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés.
Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour
les nourrissons et les enfants que le
siège du passager avant.

● N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité

enfant type dos à la route sur le siège
passager avant, même si le témoin
indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé.
En cas d'accident, la force engendrée
par le déploiement rapide du coussin
gonflable du passager avant peut
blesser grièvement, voire tuer l'enfant
si le siège de sécurité enfant type dos à
la route est installé sur le siège du passager avant.

● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du

siège et ne vous appuyez pas contre la
planche de bord.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout

devant le coussin gonflable passager
avant SRS ou s'asseoir sur les genoux
du passager avant.

● Ne laissez pas les occupants des

sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur
les genoux.

● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte,

le rail latéral de toit ou les montants
avant, latéraux et arrière.

● Ne laissez personne s'agenouiller sur

les sièges passagers en appui contre la
porte ou sortir la tête ou les mains à
l'extérieur du véhicule.

9-1. For owners
ATTENTION
● Ne fixez rien et ne posez rien sur des

emplacements tels que la planche de
bord, la garniture du volant et la partie
inférieure du tableau de bord.
Ces éléments peuvent se transformer
en projectiles lorsque les coussins
gonflables conducteur, passager avant
et genoux SRS se déploient.

505

● N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège

recouvrant les zones de déploiement
des coussins gonflables latéraux SRS,
car il risque de gêner le déploiement
des coussins gonflables SRS. De tels
accessoires peuvent empêcher les
coussins gonflables latéraux de
fonctionner correctement, désactiver
le système ou entraîner le déploiement
accidentel des coussins gonflables
latéraux, occasionnant des blessures
graves, voire mortelles.

● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des

● Ne fixez rien aux portes, à la vitre du

pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux
montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral
de toit et à la poignée de maintien.

pressions excessives aux parties renfermant les composants de coussins
gonflables SRS ou aux portes avant.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.

● Ne touchez aucun composant

immédiatement après le déploiement
(gonflage) des coussins gonflables
SRS, car ils peuvent être chauds.

● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer

● Ne suspendez aucun cintre ou objet

dur aux crochets à vêtements. Tous
ces objets pourraient se transformer
en projectiles et causer des blessures
graves, voire mortelles en cas de
déploiement des coussins gonflables
rideaux SRS.
zone où le coussin gonflable de
genoux SRS se déploie, assurez-vous
de le retirer.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

● Si les parties renfermant les coussins

gonflables SRS, comme les garnitures
du volant et des montants avant et
arrière, sont endommagées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre
concessionnaire Lexus.

● Ne placez rien sur le siège du pas-

sager avant, comme un coussin par
exemple. Cela a pour conséquence de
répartir le poids du passager sur toute
la surface du siège, ce qui empêche le
capteur de détecter correctement le
poids du passager. En conséquence,
les coussins gonflables frontaux SRS
du passager avant risquent de ne pas
se déployer en cas de collision.

For owners

● Si un cache en vinyle est placé sur la

après le déploiement des coussins
gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou
une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais,
ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela
ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez
tout résidu dès que possible afin
d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la
peau.

506

9-1. For owners
ATTENTION

■ Modification et mise au rebut des

composants du système de coussins
gonflables SRS
Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et
ne procédez à aucune des modifications
suivantes sans consulter votre concessionnaire Lexus. Les coussins gonflables
SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement ou se déployer (se gonfler)
accidentellement, provoquant la mort ou
de graves blessures.

● Installation, dépose, démontage et

réparation des coussins gonflables
SRS

● Réparations, modifications, démon-

tage ou remplacement du volant, du
tableau de bord, de la planche de
bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage,
des montants avant, latéraux et arrière,
des rails latéraux de toit, des panneaux
de porte avant, des garnitures de
porte avant ou des haut-parleurs de
porte avant

● Modifications du panneau de porte

avant (par exemple, perçage d'un trou
dans le panneau)

● Réparations ou modifications des ailes

avant, du pare-chocs avant ou des
flancs de l'habitacle

● Installation d'un protège-calandre

(pare-buffle, pare-kangourou, etc.), de
chasse-neige, de treuils ou d'un
porte-bagages de toit

● Modifications du système de suspen-

sion du véhicule

● Installation d'appareils électroniques

tels que les émetteurs/récepteurs
radios mobiles et les lecteurs CD

● Modifications de votre véhicule pour

une personne atteinte d'un handicap
physique

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

507

Index

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
........................................................508
Alphabetical Index...................... 511

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

508

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
1-1.What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you have a problem, check the
following before contacting your
Lexus dealer.

The rear door cannot be opened

 Is the child-protector lock set?

The doors cannot be locked,
unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys

 If you lose your mechanical keys,
new genuine mechanical keys can
be made by your Lexus dealer.
(→P.444)
 If you lose your electronic keys, the
risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Lexus dealer
immediately. (→P.444)
The doors cannot be locked or
unlocked

 Is the electronic key battery weak or
depleted? (→P.413)
 Is the power switch in ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the power
switch off. (→P.170)

 Is the electronic key left inside the
vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that
you have the electronic key on your person.

 The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio
wave. (→P.120)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The rear door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is set.
Open the rear door from outside and then
unlock the child-protector lock. (→P.111)
The trunk lid is closed with the
electronic key left inside

 The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the
trunk will operate and you can open
the trunk as usual. Take the key out
from the trunk. (→P.116)

If you think something is wrong
The hybrid system does not start

 Did you press the power switch
while firmly depressing the brake
pedal? (→P.168)
 Is the electronic key anywhere
detectable inside the vehicle?
(→P.119)
 Is the steering wheel unlocked?
(→P.169)
 Is the electronic key battery weak or
depleted?
In this case, the hybrid system can be
started in a temporary way. (→P.446)

 Is the 12-volt battery discharged?

1-1. What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

(→P.447)
The steering wheel cannot be
turned after the hybrid system is
stopped

 It is locked automatically to prevent
theft of the vehicle. (→P.169)
The windows do not open or
close by operating the power
window switches

509

An alarm is activated and the
horn sounds

 Did anyone inside the vehicle open
a door during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds.
(→P.68)

Do one of the following to deactivate
or stop the alarms:

 Is the window lock switch pressed?

 Unlock the doors.

The power window except for the one at
the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the
window lock switch is pressed. (→P.153)

 Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or start the
hybrid system. (The alarm will be
deactivated or stopped after a few
seconds.)

The power switch is turned off
automatically

 The auto power off function will be
operated if the vehicle is left in
ACCESSORY mode for a period of
time. (→P.171)
A warning buzzer sounds during
driving

 The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the front passenger
wearing the seat belts? (→P.430)

 The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (→P.181)

Depending on the situation, other
types of warning buzzer may also
sound. (→P.427, 437)

A warning buzzer sounds when
leaving the vehicle

 Is the message displayed on the
multi-information display?
Check the message on the multi-information display. (→P.437)
A warning light turns on or a
warning message is displayed

 When a warning light turns on or a
warning message is displayed, refer
to P.427, 437.

When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire

 Slow down the vehicle, drive with

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

510

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

extra caution, and take your vehicle
to the nearest Lexus dealer or
authorized tire dealer as soon as
possible to have the tire replaced.
(→P.442)
The vehicle becomes stuck

 Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or
snow. (→P.457)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical
(Troubleshooting)
Index

511

Alphabetical Index
A

A/C
Air conditioning filter ...................................411
Front automatic air conditioning system
......................................................................... 323
Micro dust and pollen filter................... 329
Rear air conditioning system ...............333
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)..............302
Warning light............................................... 429
Adaptive Front-lighting System (AFS).187
Adaptive Variable Suspension System303
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System).187
Air conditioning filter.................................... 411
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter ...................................411
Front automatic air conditioning system
......................................................................... 323
Micro dust and pollen filter................... 329
Rear air conditioning system ...............333
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions.....................31
Airbag precautions for your child........ 34
Correct driving posture.............................23
Curtain shield airbag operating conditions....................................................................31
Curtain shield airbag precautions ....... 34
Front passenger occupant classification
system .............................................................40
General airbag precautions ................... 34
Locations of airbags.................................... 29
Modification and disposal of airbags ..37
Side airbag operating conditions...........31
Side airbag precautions ............................ 34
Side and curtain shield airbags operating
conditions........................................................31
Side and curtain shield airbags precautions.................................................................. 34
SRS airbags ..................................................... 29
SRS warning light ......................................428
Alarm
Alarm ..................................................................68

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Warning buzzer......................................... 427
Anchor brackets.....................................46, 55
Antennas (smart access system with
push-button start)........................................ 119
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..............302
Warning light ...............................................429
Approach warning...................................... 256
Armrest............................................................ 352
Assist grips ..................................................... 352
Audio system-linked display......................90
Automatic headlight leveling system ... 186
Automatic High Beam ............................... 188
Automatic light control system............... 185
Auxiliary boxes..................................347, 349
Average fuel economy.................................88
Average vehicle speed ................................88
B

Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Battery (12-volt battery)
Battery checking ........................................393
If the 12-volt battery is discharged ....447
Preparing and checking before winter
......................................................................... 309
Warning light ...............................................428
Battery (traction battery) ..............................61
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM).......................260
Brake
Brake hold...................................................... 183
Fluid.................................................................. 465
Parking brake .................................................181
Regenerative braking .................................59
Warning light ............................................... 427
Brake assist ....................................................302
Break-in tips.....................................................159
Brightness control
Instrument panel light control........79, 85
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).......................260

512

Alphabetical Index

Card key .......................................................... 104
Care
Aluminum wheels......................................370
Exterior ...........................................................370
Interior............................................................. 373
Seat belts........................................................ 373
Cargo capacity...............................................166
Cargo net .......................................................348
Center Display ...............................................316
Chains ............................................................... 310
Child restraint system
Fixed with a LATCH system .................. 53
Fixed with a seat belt................................... 49
Front passenger occupant classification
system .............................................................40
Points to remember .................................... 45
Riding with children..................................... 45
Types of child restraint system installation
method ........................................................... 46
Using an anchor bracket..........................55
Child safety
12-volt battery precautions........ 394, 451
Airbag precautions...................................... 34
Child restraint system................................. 46
Heated steering wheel and seat heater
precautions................................................ 337
How your child should wear the seat belt
............................................................................ 25
Moon roof precautions ............................154
Power window lock switch.....................153
Power window precautions...................152
Rear door child-protectors ....................... 111
Removed electronic key battery precautions.................................................................414
Seat belt extender precautions ............. 25
Seat belt precautions.................................. 45
Trunk precautions .........................................112
Child-protectors...............................................111
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels......................................370

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Exterior............................................................370
Interior .............................................................373
Radar sensor........................ 199, 200, 206
Seat belts........................................................373
Clock ................................................. 77, 81, 353
Clock light ......................................................340
Coat hooks..................................................... 352
Coin holder.................................................... 345
Condenser .......................................................391
Console box .................................................. 346
Cooling system.............................................390
Engine overheating...................................453
Hybrid system overheating ..................454
Cornering lights.............................................187
Cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range ..........................247, 250
Cup holders................................................... 345
Current fuel consumption ..........................88
Curtain shield airbags .................................. 29
Customizable features............................... 481
D

Daytime running light system.................. 185
Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors.....................324
Rear window ................................................324
Windshield....................................................324
Differential
Front differential oil................................... 465
Rear differential oil.................................... 465
Dimension ......................................................460
Dinghy towing.................................................167
Display
Center Display............................................. 316
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range ..................................... 250
Energy monitor..............................................96
Head-up display............................................ 92
Intuitive parking assist..............................266
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).................243
LTA (Lane-Tracing Assist) ...................234

1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical
(Troubleshooting)
Index

Multi-information display..........................86
Parking Support Brake function (rear
pedestrians) ..............................................295
RCD (Rear Camera Detection).........277
RCTA .............................................................. 273
Warning message..................................... 437
Distance until next engine oil change
.....................................................................79, 84
Do-it-yourself maintenance.................... 379
Door courtesy lights...................................340
Door lock
Doors................................................................108
Smart access system with push-button
start................................................................... 119
Wireless remote control......................... 106
Doors
Automatic door locking and unlocking
system ..............................................................112
Door closer ....................................................... 111
Door glasses................................................... 151
Door lock........................................................108
Open door warning buzzer .......... 109, 111
Outside rear view mirrors ......................149
Rear door child-protectors ....................... 111
Drive distance..................................................88
Drive info 1/Drive info 2 ..............................88
Driver’s seat position memory
Driving position memory.........................139
Memory recall function ............................142
Power easy access system.....................139
Drive-start control ........................................159
Driving
Break-in tips.................................................. 159
Correct driving posture.............................23
Driving mode select switch..................298
Hybrid vehicle driving tips ....................307
Procedures .................................................... 158
Winter drive tips.........................................309
Driving information display ........................ 87
Driving position memory............................139
Memory recall function ............................142
Power easy access system.....................139

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

513

Driving range ...................................................88
Driving support system information display
.............................................................................90
DRS (Dynamic Rear Steering) ..............303
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range.............................247, 250
Warning message.....................................259
Dynamic Rear Steering (DRS) ..............303
E

ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake System) ................................................................302
EDR (Event data recorder)............................7
Elapsed time .....................................................88
Electric motor (traction motor)................58
Electric Power Steering (EPS) ..............303
Warning light .............................................. 430
Electronic key ................................................ 104
Battery-saving function............................ 120
If the electronic key does not operate
properly.......................................................445
Replacing the battery.................................413
Electronically Controlled Brake System
(ECB) ............................................................302
Electronically modulated air suspension
.......................................................................... 299
Emergency flashers.................................... 420
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer sounds................... 427
If a warning light turns on....................... 427
If a warning message is displayed.....437
If the 12-volt battery is discharged ....447
If the electronic key does not operate
properly.......................................................445
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
..........................................................................445
If the hybrid system will not start ........443
If you have a flat tire ..................................442
If you lose your keys.................................444
If you think something is wrong..........426
If your vehicle becomes stuck.............457
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an

514

Alphabetical Index

emergency ................................................420
If your vehicle needs to be towed..... 422
If your vehicle overheats........................453
Energy monitor ....................................... 96, 97
Engine
ACCESSORY mode ...............................170
Compartment .............................................387
Engine compartment cover................ 388
Engine switch................................................ 168
Hood............................................................... 385
How to start the hybrid system ........... 168
Identification number.................................461
If the hybrid system will not start........ 443
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency ................................................420
Ignition switch (power switch)............. 168
Overheating.................................................453
Power switch ................................................ 168
Tachometer .............................................. 77, 81
Engine compartment cover....................388
Engine coolant
Capacity.........................................................463
Checking .......................................................390
Preparing and checking before winter
.........................................................................309
Engine coolant temperature gauge .77, 81
Engine oil
Capacity......................................................... 462
Checking ...................................................... 388
Preparing and checking before winter
.........................................................................309
Warning light...............................................428
Engine oil maintenance data ..................390
Engine switch (power switch) ................. 168
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency ................................................420
EPS (Electric Power Steering) ..............303
Warning light...............................................430
EV drive mode................................................172
EV indicator...................................................... 59
Event data recorder (EDR)............................7

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)..........227
First-aid kit storage belt ............................ 349
Flat tire
Tire pressure warning system .............397
Floor mats...........................................................22
Fluid
Brake............................................................... 465
Hybrid transmission..................................464
Washer ............................................................ 391
Footwell light .................................................340
Front air conditioning system................. 323
Front Cross Traffic Alert (FCTA)..........227
Front passenger occupant classification
system .............................................................. 40
Front seats
Adjustment..................................................... 128
Cleaning.........................................................373
Correct driving posture ............................ 23
Driving position memory........................ 139
Head restraints..............................................144
Memory recall function.............................142
Power easy access system .................... 139
Refresh system ............................................. 133
Seat heaters ..................................................336
Seat position memory .............................. 139
Seat ventilators............................................336
Front side marker light
Light switch ....................................................185
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Turn signal lever ..........................................180
Fuel
Capacity .......................................................... 461
Fuel gauge................................................. 77, 81
Information ....................................................470
Refueling.......................................................... 194
Type................................................................... 461
Warning light .............................................. 430

1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical
(Troubleshooting)
Index

Fuel consumption
Average fuel economy..............................88
Current fuel consumption........................88
Fuel filler door
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
.........................................................................445
Refueling ..........................................................194
Fuel gauge...................................................77, 81
Fuses ...................................................................414
G

Garage door opener .................................358
Gauges.........................................................77, 81
Gear Position...................................................89
G-force...............................................................89
Glove box....................................................... 344
Glove box light............................................. 345
H

Hands Free Power Trunk Lid .................... 115
Head restraints...............................................144
Headlights
Adaptive Front-lighting System (AFS)
...........................................................................187
Automatic High Beam system.............188
Light switch.................................................... 185
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Head-up display.............................................. 92
Driving information display area........... 92
Driving support system display area ..95
HUD (Head-up display) switch............ 94
Hybrid System Indicator...........................96
Navigation system-linked display ........ 92
Pop-up display...............................................95
Settings .............................................................. 94
Heated steering wheel.............................. 336
Heaters
Front air conditioning system.............. 323
Heated steering wheel............................336
Outside rear view mirrors .................... 324
Rear air conditioning system ...............333

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

515

Seat heaters ..................................................336
Height control
Electronically modulated air suspension
.........................................................................300
High-voltage components ...........................61
Hill-start assist control...............................303
Hood
Open............................................................... 385
Pop Up Hood.................................................38
Hooks
Coat hooks ...................................................352
Retaining hooks (floor mat)..................... 22
Horn....................................................................147
HUD (Head-up display) switch................ 94
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Location...............................................................61
Specification .................................................462
Warning message........................................64
Hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents
............................................................................. 64
Hybrid system..................................................58
Emergency shut off system......................64
Energy monitor/consumption screen96
EV drive mode..............................................172
High voltage components .........................61
Hybrid system precautions........................61
If the hybrid system will not start ........443
Overheating.................................................454
Power (ignition) switch............................168
Regenerative braking .................................59
Starting the hybrid system......................168
Vehicle proximity notification system.60
Hybrid System Indicator............. 78, 83, 96
Hybrid transmission......................................174
M mode ............................................................179
Paddle shift switches ....................... 178, 179
Snow mode.....................................................177
Hybrid vehicle driving tips....................... 307
I

I/M test ............................................................382

516

Alphabetical Index

Identification
Engine ...............................................................461
Vehicle............................................................460
Ignition switch (power switch) ................ 168
Auto power off function .............................171
Changing the power switch modes ..170
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency ................................................420
Immobilizer system........................................ 66
Indicators ............................................................74
Initialization
Items to initialize .........................................495
Maintenance ................................... 378, 390
Power windows............................................. 151
Tire pressure warning system.............. 401
Inside door handle lights ..........................340
Inside rear view mirror............................... 148
Instrument panel light control ...........79, 85
Interior lights..................................................340
Front interior light ......................................340
Rear interior light .......................................340
Intuitive parking assist.....................265, 266
Function..........................................................266
Warning message.....................................268
J

Jack
Positioning a floor jack........................... 385
Jam protection function
Moon roof .......................................................154
Power trunk opener and closer............ 116
Power windows............................................. 151
Rear door sunshade ................................355
K

Keyless entry
Smart access system with push-button
start................................................................... 119
Wireless remote control......................... 106
Keys
Battery-saving function ............................120

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Electronic key ............................................... 104
If the electronic key does not operate
properly.......................................................445
If you lose your keys.................................444
Key number plate ....................................... 104
Keyless entry ........................................108, 119
Mechanical key............................................ 104
Power switch.................................................168
Replacing the battery.................................413
Warning buzzer............................................ 119
Wireless remote control .........................106
Knee airbags .................................................... 29
L

Lane Tracing Assist (LTA)
Operation......................................................230
Warning messages...................................238
Lane-Keeping Assist (LKA)
Operation......................................................240
Warning messages...................................246
Language (multi-information display) ...90
LATCH anchors ............................................. 53
LDH (Lexus Dynamic Handling system)
..........................................................................303
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever ................................ 385
Hood lock release lever........................ 385
Internal trunk release lever....................... 117
Shift lever..........................................................174
Turn signal lever ..........................................180
Wiper lever....................................................190
Lexus climate concierge ............................321
Lexus Dynamic Handling system (LDH)
..........................................................................303
Lexus Enform Safety Connect............... 364
Lexus Safety System+
Automatic High Beam .............................188
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range ..........................247, 250
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).................240
PCS (Pre-Collision System)................220
RSA (Road Sign Assist).......................... 247

1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical
(Troubleshooting)
Index

Lexus Safety System+A..............................196
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range..........................247, 250
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) ......227
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....................230
PCS (Pre-Collision System)................209
RSA (Road Sign Assist) ......................... 247
License plate lights
Light switch.................................................... 185
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Light bulbs
Replacing.........................................................417
Lights
Automatic High Beam system.............188
Front interior lights......................................341
Front personal lights...................................341
Headlight switch ......................................... 185
Interior lights.................................................340
Interior lights list..........................................340
Rear interior lights .......................................341
Rear personal lights....................................341
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Trunk lid light................................................... 116
Trunk light......................................................... 116
Turn signal lever..........................................180
Vanity lights ..................................................354
Welcome light illumination control ... 186
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
Operation......................................................240
Warning messages .................................. 246
Lock steering column ..................................169
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
Operation......................................................230
Warning messages ..................................238
Luggage mats ...............................................348
M

Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance .................383
General maintenance ............................. 379
Maintenance data......................................460
Maintenance requirements ..................378

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

517

Malfunction indicator lamp .....................428
Master warning light .................................. 434
Menu icons........................................................ 86
Meter
Changing the main meter location......85
Clock............................................................ 77, 81
Hybrid System Indicator ..................78, 83
Indicators........................................................... 74
Instrument panel light control........79, 85
Meter control switches ..............................87
Meters.......................................................... 77, 81
Multi-information display ..........................86
Settings...............................................................90
Units.....................................................................89
Warning lights............................................. 427
Warning message.....................................437
Micro dust and pollen filter ..................... 329
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror............................. 148
Outside rear view mirror defoggers324
Outside rear view mirrors...................... 149
Vanity mirrors..............................................354
Moon roof
Door lock linked moon roof operation
........................................................................... 154
Jam protection function........................... 154
Operation....................................................... 153
Multi-information display ............................ 86
Audio system-linked display...................90
Drive information 1/Drive information 2
............................................................................ 88
Driving information display......................87
Driving support system information display....................................................................90
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range ..................................... 250
Energy monitor.............................................. 97
Gear Position .................................................89
G-force..............................................................89
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).................243
LTA (Lane-Tracing Assist) ...................234
Menu icons ......................................................86

518

Alphabetical Index

Meter control switches.............................. 87
Navigation system-linked display ........89
Pop-up display...............................................86
Settings ..............................................................90
Suggestion function.......................................91
Tire pressure................................................ 397
Units ....................................................................89
Vehicle sway warning................................89
Warning message..................................... 437
N

Navigation system-linked display....89, 92
Noise from under vehicle ...............................6
O

“ODO TRIP”switch ...............................79, 85
Odometer .................................................79, 84
Odometer and trip meter display
Display items.......................................... 79, 84
“ODO TRIP” switch........................... 79, 85
Pop-up display...................................... 79, 85
Oil
Engine oil ....................................................... 462
Front differential oil ...................................465
Rear differential oil ....................................465
Opener
Fuel filler door................................................194
Hood............................................................... 385
Trunk ....................................................................114
Outer foot lights
Location..........................................................340
Outside door handle lights......................340
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment......................................................149
BSM (Blind Sport Monitor) .................260
Folding ............................................................. 150
Linked mirror function when reversing
...........................................................................149
Mirror position memory...........................139
Outside rear view mirror defoggers324
RCTA function............................................ 273

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Outside temperature..............................77, 81
Overheating .................................................. 453
P

Paddle shift switches ..........................178, 179
Panic mode ..................................................... 106
Parking assist sensors (intuitive parking
assist) ............................................................. 266
Parking brake
Operation.........................................................181
Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
........................................................................... 182
Warning light ...............................................434
Warning message...................................... 182
Parking lights
Light switch ....................................................185
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Parking Support Brake function (for
rear-crossing vehicles) ............................291
Function ............................................................291
Parking Support Brake function (rear
pedestrians).................................... 280, 295
Function ..........................................................295
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles).........................280
Parking Support Brake function (static
objects)............................................. 280, 286
Function ......................................................... 286
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
Function ............................................. 209, 220
PCS OFF switch .............................. 212, 222
Warning light ...............................................433
Warning message...........................219, 226
Personal lights...............................................340
PKSA (Parking Support Alert).............. 265
PKSB (Parking Support Brake).............280
Warning message.....................................284
Pop Up Hood...................................................38
Power control unit............................................61
Power control unit coolant
Capacity .........................................................463
Checking ...................................................... 390

1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical
(Troubleshooting)
Index

Preparing and checking before winter
.........................................................................309
Power easy access system ........................139
Power outlets ................................................353
Power rear seat..............................................135
Power steering (Electric power steering
system)..........................................................303
Warning light...............................................430
Power switch .................................................. 168
Auto power off function .............................171
Changing the power switch modes ..170
Power switch (engine switch)
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency ................................................420
Power trunk opener and closer ............... 114
Power windows
Door lock linked window operation..152
Jam protection function............................. 151
Operation......................................................... 151
Window lock switch ..................................153
Pre-Collision System (PCS)
Function..............................................209, 220
PCS OFF switch...............................212, 222
Warning light...............................................433
Warning message...........................219, 226
R

Radar cruise control (dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range)..247, 250
Radiator.............................................................391
RCD (Rear camera detection).............. 265
Warning message..................................... 278
RCD (Rear Camera Detection)
Function...........................................................277
RCTA
Function.......................................................... 273
Warning message..................................... 274
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ......... 265
RCTA function ..............................................274
Rear air conditioning system ..................333
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ......... 273
Rear door sunshades.................................355

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

519

Rear Multi Operation Panel .................... 318
Rear seat position memory .......................143
Rear seats .........................................................135
Adjustment..................................................... 135
Head restraints..............................................144
Rear seat position memory.....................143
Relaxation system....................................... 138
Seat heaters ..................................................336
Seat ventilators............................................336
Rear side marker lights
Light switch ....................................................185
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Rear sunshades ............................................356
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Turn signal lever ..........................................180
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror............................. 148
Outside rear view mirrors...................... 149
Rear window defogger ............................. 324
Refueling
Capacity .......................................................... 461
Fuel types........................................................ 461
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
..........................................................................445
Opening the fuel tank cap ..................... 194
Regenerative braking................................... 59
Remote Touch ................................................314
Replacing
Electronic key battery................................413
Fuses...................................................................414
Light bulbs.......................................................417
Tires ................................................................. 405
Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required...................................... 378
Rev indicator ....................................................83
Rev peak.............................................................83
Road Sign Assist ...........................................247
RSA (Road Sign Assist) .............................247
Run-flat tires........................................397, 442

520

Alphabetical Index

Seat belt buckle lights................................340
Seat belt reminder light...................430, 431
Seat belts............................................................ 24
Automatic Locking Retractor ................ 26
Child restraint system installation......... 46
Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt
......................................................................... 373
Easy Access Buckle.................................... 26
Emergency Locking Retractor.............. 26
How to wear your seat belt..................... 25
How your child should wear the seat belt
............................................................................ 25
Pregnant women, proper seat belt use
.............................................................................24
Reminder light and buzzer........ 430, 431
Seat belt extender ........................................ 25
SRS warning light ......................................428
Seat heaters................................................... 336
Seat position memory........................139, 143
Seat ventilators............................................. 336
Seating capacity.............................................166
Seats
Adjustment...........................................128, 135
Adjustment precautions...........................128
Child seats/child restraint system installation .................................................................... 45
Cleaning......................................................... 373
Driving position memory.........................139
Front seat refresh system.........................133
Head restraints .............................................144
Power easy access system.....................139
Properly sitting in the seat.........................23
Rear seat relaxation system................... 138
Seat heaters..................................................336
Seat position memory .................... 139, 143
Seat ventilators............................................336
Secondary Collision Brake .....................302
Sensor
Automatic headlight system.................. 185
Automatic High Beam system.............188

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Inside rear view mirror............................. 148
Intuitive parking assist..............................266
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).................240
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....................230
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles)........................291
Parking Support Brake function (static
objects)........................................................287
Radar sensor...........................197, 204, 261
Rain-sensing windshield wipers............ 191
RCTA............................................................... 274
Service plug ........................................................61
Service reminder message ..................... 378
Shift lever
Hybrid transmission....................................174
Shift lever light ..............................................340
Shopping bag hooks ..................................348
Side airbags ...................................................... 29
Side marker lights
Light switch ....................................................185
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Side mirrors
Adjustment..................................................... 149
BSM (Blind Sport Monitor)................. 260
Folding..............................................................150
Linked mirror function when reversing
........................................................................... 149
Mirror position memory.......................... 139
RCTA function ............................................ 273
Side turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Turn signal lever ..........................................180
Side windows ...................................................151
Smart access system with push-button
start
Antenna location........................................... 119
Entry functions..............................................108
Starting the hybrid system......................168
Snow mode ...................................................... 177
Snow tires .......................................................309
Spark plug ...................................................... 463
Specifications................................................460

1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical
(Troubleshooting)
Index

Speedometer .............................................77, 81
Steering lock
Column lock release..................................169
Steering lock system warning message
...........................................................................169
Steering wheel
Adjustment......................................................147
Heated steering wheel............................336
Meter control switches.............................. 87
Power easy access system.....................139
Steering wheel position memory ........139
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Storage features .......................................... 343
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck................ 457
Suggestion function.........................................91
Sun visors........................................................ 354
Sunshade
Roof ....................................................................154
Switches
Activating the Automatic High Beam
..........................................................................188
Automatic High Beam system.............188
Brake Hold switch ..................................... 183
Door lock switches...................................... 110
Driving mode select switch..................298
Driving position memory switches.....139
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range switch.........................251
Emergency flashers switch...................420
EV drive mode switch .............................. 172
Garage door opener switches ......... 358
Heated steering wheel switch.............336
HUD (Head-up display) switch............ 94
Ignition switch............................................... 168
Instrument panel light control switches
................................................................... 79, 85
Intuitive parking assist switch............... 267
Light switches............................................... 185
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) switch.. 242
LTA (Lane-Tracing Assist) switch.... 234

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

521

Meter control switches ..............................87
Moon roof switches................................... 153
“ODO TRIP”switch ............................79, 85
Outside rear view mirror switches .... 149
Paddle shift switches ....................... 178, 179
Parking brake switch...................................181
PCS OFF switch .............................. 212, 222
PKSB (Parking Support Brake) switch
........................................................................... 281
Power door lock switch ............................110
Power switch.................................................168
Power window switches ...........................151
RCD (Rear camera detection) switch
.......................................................................... 277
RCTA switch................................................ 273
Rear door sunshade switch................. 355
Rear seat heater..........................................334
Rear seat position memory switches.143
Rear seat ventilator ...................................334
Rear sunshades switch........................... 356
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch ............................323
Seat heater switches.................................336
Seat ventilator switches ..........................336
Snow mode switch......................................177
“SOS” button................................................364
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch
............................................................................147
Tire pressure warning reset switch.... 401
Trunk closer switch......................................115
Trunk opener main switch........................118
Trunk opener switch ................................... 114
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.... 251
VSC OFF switch ...................................... 304
Window lock switch.................................. 153
Windshield wiper and washer switch190
Windshield wiper de-icer switch....... 327
T

Tachometer.................................................77, 81
Rev indicator ...................................................83
Rev peak............................................................83

522

Alphabetical Index

Tail lights
Light switch.................................................... 185
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Theft deterrent system
Alarm ..................................................................68
Immobilizer system......................................66
Tire inflation pressure
Maintenance data......................................466
Tire inflation pressure display function
......................................................................... 397
Warning light.................................................431
Tire information.............................................472
Glossary......................................................... 475
Size.................................................................... 473
Tire identification number ..................... 473
Uniform Tire Quality Grading............ 474
Tire pressure display.................................. 397
Tire pressure warning system
Function.......................................................... 397
Initializing ........................................................ 401
Installing tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters ....................................... 401
Registering ID codes...............................403
Warning light.................................................431
Tires
Chains .............................................................. 310
Checking .......................................................395
If you have a flat tire.................................. 442
Inflation pressure....................................... 408
Information.................................................... 472
Replacing.......................................................405
Rotating tires ................................................ 397
Run-flat tires ..................................... 397, 442
Size....................................................................466
Snow tires......................................................309
Tire inflation pressure display function
......................................................................... 397
Tire pressure warning system............. 397
Warning light.................................................431
Top tether strap............................................... 55
Total load capacity......................................460

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Towing
Dinghy towing ...............................................167
Emergency towing.................................... 422
Towing eyelet...............................................425
Trailer towing................................................ 166
TRAC (Traction Control) ........................303
Traction battery (hybrid battery)
Hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents
.............................................................................64
Location...............................................................61
Specification .................................................462
Warning message........................................64
Traction Control (TRAC) ........................303
Traction motor (electric motor) ...............58
Trailer towing ..................................................166
Transmission
Driving mode select switch ................. 298
Hybrid transmission....................................174
M mode ............................................................179
Paddle shift switches ....................... 178, 179
Snow mode.....................................................177
Trip meters ................................................79, 84
Trunk.................................................................... 112
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid.................115
Internal trunk release lever....................... 117
Power trunk opener and closer ............ 114
Smart access system with push-button
start ...................................................................115
Trunk closer switch......................................115
Trunk easy closer.......................................... 116
Trunk features............................................. 348
Trunk grip ......................................................... 116
Trunk lid light................................................... 116
Trunk light......................................................... 116
Trunk opener main switch........................118
Trunk opener switch ................................... 114
Wireless remote control ...........................115
Trunk lid light.................................................... 116
Trunk light.......................................................... 116
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs..................................417
Turn signal lever ..........................................180

1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical
(Troubleshooting)
Index

USB charging ports......................................351
V

Vanity lights.................................................... 354
Vanity mirrors ............................................... 354
Variable Gear Ratio Steering (VGRS)303
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)......................................................303
Vehicle data recordings ..................................7
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management (VDIM)..............................................303
Vehicle identification number................460
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) ...........302
Vehicle sway warning display ...................89
Ventilators (seat ventilators)................... 336
VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering)303
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) ...........302
W

Warning buzzers
ABS .................................................................. 429
Airbags ...........................................................428
Approach warning....................................256
Brake hold..................................................... 434
Brake Override System......................... 429
Brake system ............................................... 427
Charging system .......................................428
Downshifting..................................................179
Drive-Start Control .................................. 429
Electric power steering ..........................430
Engine .............................................................428
High coolant temperature .................... 427
Hybrid system .............................................428
Intuitive parking assist...................272, 432
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).......240, 431
Low engine oil pressure.........................428
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)......... 230, 431
Open door.............................................. 109, 111
Open window...............................................152

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

523

PKSA (Parking Support Alert) ...........266
PKSB (Parking Support Brake) .........433
Pop Up Hood..............................................429
Pre-collision braking..................... 209, 221
RCD (Rear Camera Detection) ........432
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ......432
Seat belt ...............................................430, 431
Warning label ....................................................61
Warning lights................................................427
ABS...................................................................429
Brake hold operated indicator ...........434
Brake Override System .........................429
Brake system................................................ 427
Charging system........................................428
Drive-Start Control...................................429
Electric power steering.......................... 430
High coolant temperature..................... 427
Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator432
LKA indicator.................................................431
Low engine oil pressure.........................428
Low fuel level .............................................. 430
LTA indicator .................................................431
Malfunction indicator lamp...................428
Master warning light.................................434
Parking brake indicator ..........................434
PKSB OFF indicator ................................433
Pop Up Hood..............................................429
Pre-collision system..................................433
RCD OFF indicator..................................432
RCTA OFF indicator...............................432
Seat belt reminder light................430, 431
Slip indicator.................................................433
SRS....................................................................428
Tire pressure ..................................................431
Warning messages..................................... 437
Warning reflector storage belt.............. 349
Washer
Checking ........................................................ 391
Preparing and checking before winter
......................................................................... 309
Switch................................................................190
Washing and waxing.................................. 370

524

Alphabetical Index

Weight
Cargo capacity.............................................166
Load limits .......................................................166
Weight ............................................................460
Wheels
Replacing wheels.......................................405
Size....................................................................466
Window lock switch .....................................153
Windows
Power windows............................................. 151
Rear window defogger .......................... 324
Washer ............................................................ 190
Windshield wiper de-icer ........................ 329
Windshield wipers
Position .............................................................192
Rain-sensing windshield wipers.......... 190
Winter driving tips.......................................309
Wireless remote control
Battery-Saving Function ..........................120
Locking/Unlocking ................................... 106
Replacing the battery.................................413

For information regarding the
equipment listed below, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
· Navigation system
· Audio/visual system
· Rear seat entertainment system
· Lexus parking assist monitor

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical
(Troubleshooting)
Index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

525

526

Alphabetical Index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-1. What to do if...Alphabetical
(Troubleshooting)
Index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

527

528
GAS STATION INFORMATION

A Auxiliary catch lever (→P.385)
B Trunk opener (→P.114)
C Fuel filler door opener (→P.195)
D Fuel filler door (→P.195)
E Hood lock release lever (→P.385)
F Tire inflation pressure (→P.466)

Fuel tank capacity (Ref22.2 gal. (84.0 L, 18.5 Imp. gal.)
erence)
Fuel type

Unleaded gasoline only

P.461
P.470

Cold tire inflation pressure

P.466

Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill ⎯ reference)

P.462

Engine oil type

P.462

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Has XFA                         : No
Language                        : en
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Modify Date                     : 2017:09:29 09:55:29-05:00
Create Date                     : 2017:09:29 09:55:29-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2017:09:29 09:55:29-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:e6544e6f-5a83-4faf-ab5d-6243bf8377de
Instance ID                     : uuid:acd6a33b-edb3-4ae4-847c-3dbf2d5d3ea9
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 528

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

OM50F42U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation